SW570-F0-MMO-A70

0640-LP-102-7699 Rev 00 TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR SURFACE MINE COUNTERMEASURES, AN/SLQ-37(V)3 AND AN/SLQ-38; MINESWEEPING SYSTEMS, MCM CLASS SHIPS; SYSTEM MANUAL; ORGANIZATIONAL LEVEL (COAXIAL CABLE SET)

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C: Distribution limited to U. S. Government Agencies and their contractors; administrative/operational use; 01 July 2004. Other requests for this document must be referred to Naval Sea Systems Command (SEA 043). WARNING: This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act (Title 22, U.S.C. Sec 2751, et seq) or the Export Administration Act of 1979, as amended (Title 50, U.S.C. App 2401 et seq). Violations of these export laws are subject to severe criminal penalties. Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DOD Directive 5230.25. DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.

PUBLISHED BY DIRECTION OF COMMANDER, NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS COMMAND

SW570-F0-MMO-A70

0640-LP-102-7699 Rev 00 TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR SURFACE MINE COUNTERMEASURES, AN/SLQ-37(V)3 AND AN/SLQ-38; MINESWEEPING SYSTEMS, MCM CLASS SHIPS; SYSTEM MANUAL; ORGANIZATIONAL LEVEL (COAXIAL CABLE SET)

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C: Distribution limited to U. S. Government Agencies and their contractors; administrative/operational use; 01 July 2004. Other requests for this document must be referred to Naval Sea Systems Command (SEA 043). WARNING: This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act (Title 22, U.S.C. Sec 2751, et seq) or the Export Administration Act of 1979, as amended (Title 50, U.S.C. App 2401 et seq). Violations of these export laws are subject to severe criminal penalties. Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DOD Directive 5230.25. DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.

PUBLISHED BY DIRECTION OF COMMANDER, NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS COMMAND

01 JULY 2004 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

Note: The portion of the text affected by the changes is indicated by a vertical line in the outer margins of the page. Changes to illustrations are indicated by miniature pointing hands. Changes to diagrams are indicated by shaded areas.

Date of issue for original pages are: Original 0 01 July 2004 TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 984 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:

Page No. *Change No. Page No. *Change No. Title/A ...... 0 4D-2A-4D-2Z...... 0 Change Record-1/(Change Record-2 blank) . 0 4D-3A-4D-3Z...... 0 Foreword-1/(Foreword-2 blank) ...... 0 4D-4A - 4D-4AA/(4D-4AB blank)...... 0 i - iii/(iv blank) ...... 0 4D-5A-4D-5AF...... 0 v - xix/(xx blank) ...... 0 4E-1A-4E-1AM...... 0 xxi - xxvi ...... 0 4E-2A-4E-2AM...... 0 1-1 - 1-99/(1-100 blank) ...... 0 4E-3A - 4E-3AL/(4E-3AM blank) ...... 0 2-1-2-14...... 0 4E-4A - 4E-4AL/(4E-4AM blank) ...... 0 3-1-3-4...... 0 4E-5A - 4E-5AL/(4E-5AM blank) ...... 0 4-1 - 4-37/(4-38 blank) ...... 0 4E-6A - 4E-6AL/(4E-6AM blank) ...... 0 4A-1A-4A-1AB...... 0 4E-7A - 4E-7AQ/(4E-7AR blank)...... 0 4A-2A - 4A-2L/(4A-2M blank) ...... 0 4E-8A-4E-8AP...... 0 4A-3A-4A-3H...... 0 4E-9A-4E-9AR...... 0 4A-4A - 4A-4AA/(4A-4AB blank) ...... 0 4E-10A - 4E-10AQ/(4E-10AR blank)...... 0 4A-5A-4A-5H...... 0 4F-1A-4F-1H...... 0 4A-6A-4A-6T...... 0 4F-2A - 4F-2L/(4F-2M blank) ...... 0 4B-1A - 4B-1U/(4B-1V blank) ...... 0 4F-3A-4F-3D...... 0 4B-2A-4B-2T...... 0 4F-4A-4F-4D...... 0 4B-3A-4B-3P...... 0 5-1 - 5-25/(5-26 blank) ...... 0 4B-4A-4B-4R...... 0 6-1 - 6-7/(6-8 blank) ...... 0 4C-1A-4C-1T...... 0 7-1-7-18...... 0 4C-2A-4C-2M...... 0 8-1/(8-2 blank) ...... 0 4C-3A-4C-3M...... 0 9-1-9-2...... 0 4D-1A-4D-1T...... 0 Glossary-1 - Glossary-9/(Glossary-10 blank) . 0

*Zero in this column indicates an original page.

A

SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CHANGE RECORD

CHANGE NO. CHANGE DATE ENTERED BY DATE

*List each advance change notice (ACN) and formal change as received. When an ACN is canceled by a formal change, cross out the ACN.

Change Record-1/(Change Record-2 blank)

SW570-F0-MMO-A70

FOREWORD

This manual describes the AN/SLQ-37(V)3 and AN/SLQ-38 Minesweeping Systems as used aboard Avenger Class (MCM-1) ships. This manual supersedes SW570-F0-MMO-030 and incorporates data from the rigging, streaming, and recovery portions of that manual. Chapters in this manual are arranged in the following order: Chapter 1 – General Information Chapter 2 – Safety Precautions Chapter 3 – Conditions of Readiness Chapter 4 – Operation Chapter 5 – Functional Description Chapter 6 – Scheduled Maintenance Chapter 7 – Fault Isolation Chapter 8 – Alignment Procedures Chapter 9 – Installation Glossary Reporting of errors, omissions, inconsistencies, and suggestions for improving this manual is encouraged, using NAVSEA/SPAWAR Technical Manual Deficiency/ Evaluation Report (TMDER), Form 4160/1 (Rev 7-2003). Submit TMDERs online at web site http://nsdsa.phdnswc.navy.mil or mail to: Commander, Code 310 TMDER Bldg 1388, NAVSURFWARCENDIV NSDSA, 4363 Missile Way, Port Hueneme, CA 93043-4307. All feedback comments will be thoroughly investigated and originators will be advised of resulting action. Distribution of this manual and subsequent changes are automatic to all authorized users. Additional copies are available from the Defense Distribution Depot Susquehanna Pennsylvania (DDSP), Building 05, 5450 Carlisle Pike, Mechanicsburg, PA 17055-7089, by MILSTRIP. Instructions for ordering by MILSTRIP are contained in NAVSUP Publication 2002. Ordering additional copies from DDSP will not change the number of copies users receive on automatic distribution. Address request for change in distribution to: Commanding Officer, Attn Code A94 Bldg 79, Naval Surface Warfare Center, Panama City, 110 Vernon Avenue, Panama City, FL 32407-7001.

Foreword-1/(Foreword-2 blank)

SW570-F0-MMO-A70

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chap/Job Sheet/Para Title Page

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION...... 1-1 1-1 INTRODUCTION...... 1-1 1-2 BACKGROUND ...... 1-1 1-3 THREAT DESCRIPTION...... 1-2 1-4 MISSION...... 1-8 1-5 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT ...... 1-9 1-6 CAPABILITIES ...... 1-15 1-7 FUNCTIONAL RELATIONSHIPS...... 1-16 1-8 PHYSICAL ARRANGEMENT...... 1-18 1-9 SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT ...... 1-18 1-10 AN/SLQ-37(V)3 MAGNETIC MINESWEEPING EQUIPMENT ...... 1-54 1-11 AN/SLQ-38 MECHANICAL MINESWEEPING EQUIPMENT ...... 1-65 1-12 EXPLOSIVE ORDNANCE HANDLERS CERTIFICATION RECORD ...... 1-86 1-13 SUPPORT EQUIPMENT ...... 1-88 1-14 NAVIGATIONAL AIDS ...... 1-88 1-15 REFERENCE DATA ...... 1-91 CHAPTER 2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...... 2-1 2-1 INTRODUCTION...... 2-1 2-2 SYSTEM SAFETY ISSUES ...... 2-2 2-3 CLEARING MINES FOULED IN GEAR ...... 2-7 2-4 OPERATIONAL BRIEF AND SAFETY SUMMARY ...... 2-9 2-5 MAINTENANCE SAFETY SUMMARY ...... 2-9 2-6 HAZARDOUS COMPONENTS ...... 2-13 CHAPTER 3 CONDITIONS OF READINESS ...... 3-1 3-1 INTRODUCTION...... 3-1 3-2 CONDITIONS ...... 3-1 CHAPTER 4 OPERATION ...... 4-1 4-1 INTRODUCTION...... 4-1 4-2 PREOPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND SET UP ...... 4-1 4-3 OPERATING MODES ...... 4-8 4-4 NORMAL OPERATION ...... 4-12 4-5 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ...... 4-12 4-6 STANDARD LOG FORMS ...... 4-26

i SW570-F0-MMO-A70

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Chap/Job Sheet/Para Title Page

JOB SHEET 4A-1 RIGGING MULTIPLANE KITES ...... 4A-1A JOB SHEET 4A-2 SWEEP AND DEPRESSOR WIRE PREPARATION AND MARKING.....4A-2A JOB SHEET 4A-3 FLOAT PREPARATION ...... 4A-3A JOB SHEET 4A-4 CUTTER ASSEMBLIES PREPARATION ...... 4A-4A JOB SHEET 4A-5 ACOUSTIC POWER CABLE PREPARATION AND RIGGING ...... 4A-5A JOB SHEET 4A-6 MAGNETIC CABLES PREPARATION AND RIGGING ...... 4A-6A JOB SHEET 4B-1 O-TYPE, SINGLE OR DOUBLE SWEEP ...... 4B-1A JOB SHEET 4B-2 SINGLE SHIP DEEP SWEEP ...... 4B-2A JOB SHEET 4B-3 TEAM DEEP SWEEP ...... 4B-3A JOB SHEET 4B-4 IMPROVED DEEP-MOORED SWEEP (IDMS) ...... 4B-4A JOB SHEET 4C-1 A MK 2(G) ACOUSTIC SWEEP ...... 4C-1A JOB SHEET 4C-2 ACOUSTIC DEVICE TB-26 SWEEP ...... 4C-2A JOB SHEET 4C-3 TB-27 ACOUSTIC SWEEP ...... 4C-3A JOB SHEET 4D-1 M MK 5(A) MAGNETIC SWEEP (STRAIGHT TAIL)...... 4D-1A JOB SHEET 4D-2 M MK 5(A) MAGNETIC SWEEP (CONFIGURATION C) ...... 4D-2A JOB SHEET 4D-3 M MK 6(A) MAGNETIC SWEEP (DIVERTED LOOP) ...... 4D-3A JOB SHEET 4D-4 M MK 6(H) MAGNETIC SWEEP (DIVERTED LOOP) ...... 4D-4A JOB SHEET 4D-5 M MK 7(B) MAGNETIC SWEEP (DOUBLE DIVERTED LOOP)...... 4D-5A JOB SHEET 4E-1 M MK 5(A) TB-26 (DIVERTED) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP ....4E-1A JOB SHEET 4E-2 M MK 5(A) TB-27 (DIVERTED) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP ....4E-2A JOB SHEET 4E-3 M MK 6(A) TB-26 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP .....4E-3A JOB SHEET 4E-4 M MK 6(A) TB-27 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP .....4E-4A JOB SHEET 4E-5 M MK 6(H) TB-26 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP .....4E-5A JOB SHEET 4E-6 M MK 6(H) TB-27 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP .....4E-6A JOB SHEET 4E-7 FA2 WITH TB-26 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP ...... 4E-7A JOB SHEET 4E-8 FA2 WITH TB-27 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP ...... 4E-8A JOB SHEET 4E-9 FA2A WITH TB-26 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP ...... 4E-9A JOB SHEET 4E-10 FA2A WITH TB-27 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP ...... 4E-10A JOB SHEET 4F-1 MK 12 MOD 0, TYPE-3, DAN BUOY (SINGLE AND DOUBLE) ...... 4F-1A JOB SHEET 4F-2 F MK 6 MOD 0, MASTER REFERENCE BUOY ...... 4F-2A JOB SHEET 4F-3 SONAR CONDITION SHAPE INERT MK 6 MOORED MINE CASE...... 4F-3A JOB SHEET 4F-4 SONAR CONDITION SHAPE INERT MK 36 BOTTOM MINE ...... 4F-4A CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ...... 5-1 ii SW570-F0-MMO-A70

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Chap/Job Sheet/Para Title Page

5-1 INTRODUCTION...... 5-1 5-2 SYSTEM FUNCTION DIRECTORY ...... 5-1 5-3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ...... 5-1 CHAPTER 6 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE...... 6-1 6-1 INTRODUCTION...... 6-1 6-2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ACTION INDEX ...... 6-1 6-3 SCHEDULED TEST PROCEDURES ...... 6-2 6-4 WIRE ROPE MAINTENANCE ...... 6-5 6-5 WEDGE STOP MAINTENANCE ...... 6-6 6-6 MAINTENANCE REPORTING ...... 6-7 CHAPTER 7 FAULT ISOLATION ...... 7-1 7-1 INTRODUCTION...... 7-1 7-2 OPERATION-BASED SYMPTOM FAULT DIRECTORY...... 7-1 7-3 FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURES...... 7-1 7-4 SYSTEM FAULT LOGIC DIAGRAMS ...... 7-6 7-5 FAULT LOGIC DIAGRAMS ...... 7-6 7-6 CONTROL FUNCTION DIAGRAMS ...... 7-6 7-7 CONTROL DIAGRAMS ...... 7-6 7-8 DATA FUNCTION DIAGRAMS...... 7-6 7-9 SIGNAL FLOW DIAGRAMS ...... 7-7 CHAPTER 8 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES ...... 8-1 8-1 INTRODUCTION...... 8-1 CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION ...... 9-1 9-1 UTILITIESLIST...... 9-1 9-2 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAMS ...... 9-1 9-3 SYSTEM CABLE INTERCONNECTION CHECK ...... 9-1 9-4 ACTIVE SYSTEM TESTS ...... 9-1

iii/(iv blank)

SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Title Page

1-1. Avenger ClassMCMShip,Typical...... 1-1 1-2. MCM Combat System, Major Subsystem ...... 1-3 1-3. Minesweeping Techniques, Typical (Sheet 1 of 2) ...... 1-5 1-3. Minesweeping Techniques, Typical (Sheet 2 of 2) ...... 1-6 1-4. Organization of Minesweeping System ...... 1-7 1-5. Organization of Influence Minesweeping System ...... 1-10 1-6. Ship’s Acoustic Noises ...... 1-11 1-7. XYZAxisofSteelHullShip...... 1-12 1-8. Distortion of Earth’s Magnetic Field ...... 1-13 1-9. Magnetic Minesweeping ...... 1-14 1-10. Organization of Mechanical Minesweeping System ...... 1-15 1-11. Operational Sequence of an Influence Mine, Typical...... 1-17 1-12. Minesweeping Equipment Locations ...... 1-20 1-13. Pilot House, Typical ...... 1-21 1-14. Combat Information Center, Typical ...... 1-22 1-15. Fantail of MCM Ship, Typical ...... 1-23 1-16. Single O-Type Moored Minesweep...... 1-25 1-17. Double O-Type Moored Minesweeping...... 1-26 1-18. Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS) ...... 1-27 1-19. Team Deep Sweep ...... 1-28 1-20. Improved Deep-Moored Sweep (IDMS) ...... 1-29 1-21. A Mk 2(g) Acoustic Sweep ...... 1-30 1-22. TB-26 Acoustic Sweep ...... 1-31 1-23. TB-27 Acoustic Sweep ...... 1-32 1-24. M Mk 5(a) Magnetic Sweep (Straight Tail) ...... 1-33 1-25. M Mk 5(a) Magnetic Sweep (Configuration C) ...... 1-34 1-26. M Mk 6(a) Magnetic Sweep (Diverted Loop) ...... 1-35 1-27. M Mk 6(h) Magnetic Sweep (Diverted Loop) ...... 1-36 1-28. M Mk 7(b) Magnetic Sweep (Double Diverted Loop) ...... 1-37 1-29. M Mk 5(a) TB-26 (Diverted) Combination Influence Sweep ...... 1-38 1-30. M Mk 5(a) TB-27 (Diverted) Combination Influence Sweep ...... 1-39

v SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

1-31. M Mk 6(a) TB-26 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep ...... 1-40 1-32. M Mk 6(a) TB-27 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep ...... 1-41 1-33. M Mk 6(h) TB-26 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep ...... 1-42 1-34. M Mk 6(h) TB-27 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep ...... 1-43 1-35. FA2 with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep...... 1-44 1-36. FA2 with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep...... 1-45 1-37. FA2A with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep ...... 1-46 1-38. FA2A with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep ...... 1-47 1-39. Automatic Control Unit (ACU) ...... 1-49 1-40. Power Converter Unit...... 1-50 1-41. Dynamic Braking Unit (DBU) ...... 1-50 1-42. Acoustic Power Cable (APC) ...... 1-51 1-43. APC Bulkhead Connector ...... 1-52 1-44. Acoustic Device TB-26 ...... 1-52 1-45. Acoustic Device TB-27 ...... 1-53 1-46. Acoustic Device, A Mk 2(g) (Rattle Bars)...... 1-55 1-47. MCM 1 – 8, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment...... 1-56 1-48. MCM 9 – 14, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment ...... 1-57 1-49. Magnetic Minesweeping Generator ...... 1-58 1-50. Magnetic Cable Terminal Box (Tailbox) ...... 1-59 1-51. Coax Heavy Section Connected to Tailbox...... 1-60 1-52. Coax Cable CA-1453 ...... 1-60 1-53. Cable Assembly CA-1454 (Typical) ...... 1-61 1-54. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, K-4 Electrode ...... 1-62 1-55. PigtailAssemblies...... 1-63 1-56. K-4BlankandClamp...... 1-63 1-57. Tow Jumper TJ, Typical ...... 1-64 1-58. Minesweeping Winch (MCM 1 – 8), Typical ...... 1-66 1-59. Minesweeping Winch (MCM 9 – 14), Typical...... 1-67 1-60. Line Tension Payout System, Main Display Unit, Typical Faceplate ...... 1-68 1-61. Magnetic Cable Reel (MCM 1 – 8), Typical ...... 1-69 1-62. Acoustic Cable Reel (MCM 1 – 8), Typical ...... 1-70 vi SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

1-63. Magnetic Cable Reel (MCM 9 – 14), Typical ...... 1-71 1-64. Acoustic Cable Reel (MCM 9 – 14), Typical ...... 1-72 1-65. Magnetic and Acoustic Reel Control Station (MCM 9 – 14) (Sheet 1 of 2) ...... 1-73 1-65. Magnetic and Acoustic Reel Control Station (MCM 9 – 14) (Sheet 2 of 2) ...... 1-74 1-66. Multiplane Kite Rigged as an Otter ...... 1-76 1-67. Depressor Bridle ...... 1-78 1-68. Float (Size 0) Rigged for Acoustic Minesweeping ...... 1-79 1-69. Mk 9 Cutter Assembly ...... 1-81 1-70. Mk 12 Cutter Assembly ...... 1-82 1-71. Mk 14 Cutter Assembly ...... 1-83 1-72. CutterMk15...... 1-85 1-73. KleinGrip...... 1-85 1-74. Wedge Stop ...... 1-86 1-75. Certification Record Form ...... 1-87 1-76. Master Reference Buoy ...... 1-92 1-77. SingleDanBuoy...... 1-93 1-78. Double Dan Buoy...... 1-94 1-79. Acoustic Test Set TS-4144/P ...... 1-95 2-1. Minesweeping Brief (Typical) (Sheet 1 of 3) ...... 2-10 2-1. Minesweeping Brief (Typical) (Sheet 2 of 3) ...... 2-11 2-1. Minesweeping Brief (Typical) (Sheet 3 of 3) ...... 2-12 3-1. Communication Paths for Condition 1M ...... 3-4 4-1. Pre-Operational Conditions ...... 4-2 4-2. Streaming Paddles/Wand Signals ...... 4-4 4-3. Recovery Paddles/Wand Signals ...... 4-5 4-4. Vectoring Hand Signals ...... 4-6 4-5. Visual Alignment Frame ...... 4-7 4-6. F Mk 11 Mod 0 Anchored and Buoyed...... 4-9 4-7. Magnetic Mode Prompts ...... 4-10 4-8. Acoustic Mode Prompts ...... 4-11 4-9. Dual Mode Prompts ...... 4-13 4-10. Minesweeping Log Turnbuckle Adjustments (Otter and Depressor Bridles) Form ....4-27 vii SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

4-11. Minesweeping Log - Minesweeping Record Form ...... 4-28 4-12. Minesweeping Log - Dan Buoy/Master Reference Buoys Form ...... 4-29 4-13. Minesweeping Log - Magnetic Minesweeping Record Form ...... 4-30 4-14. Minesweeping Log - Acoustic Devices TB-27 and TB-26 Form ...... 4-31 4-15. Minesweeping Log - Acoustic Power Cable Form ...... 4-32 4-16. Minesweeping Log - TS-4144/P Test Result Form ...... 4-33 4-17. Minesweeping Order Format (Sheet 1 of 3) ...... 4-35 4-17. Minesweeping Order Format (Sheet 2 of 3) ...... 4-36 4-17. Minesweeping Order Format (Sheet 3 of 3) ...... 4-37 4A-1A. Method of Measuring Depressor Bridle Chain Legs ...... 4A-1C 4A-1B. Positioning of Turnbuckle for Mid-Setting ...... 4A-1D 4A-1C. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single O, Port Configuration ...... 4A-1E 4A-1D. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single O, Starboard Configuration ...... 4A-1F 4A-1E. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Double O Configuration ...... 4A-1G 4A-1F. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS) (Outboard Depressor) ...... 4A-1J 4A-1G. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS) (Inboard Depressor) ...... 4A-1K 4A-1H. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Team Deep Sweep (Outboard Depressor) . 4A-1M 4A-1J. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Team Deep Sweep (Inboard Depressor) . . 4A-1N 4A-1K. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Improved Deep Moored Sweep (IDMS) (Outboard Depressor) ...... 4A-1P 4A-1L. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Improved Deep Moored Sweep (IDMS) (Inboard Depressor) ...... 4A-1R 4A-1M. Method of Measuring Otter Bridle Chain Legs ...... 4A-1T 4A-1N. Otter Bridle Assembly ...... 4A-1U 4A-1P. Multiplane Kite Rigged as a Starboard Otter ...... 4A-1V 4A-1Q. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Port Otter ...... 4A-1W 4A-1R. Position of Turnbuckle for Mid-Setting ...... 4A-1X 4A-1S. Sweep Spread for Various Effective Scopes of Sweep Wire ...... 4A-1AB 4A-2A. Standard Sweep Wire Markings for Port and Starboard Wire ...... 4A-2C 4A-2B. Port Sweep Wire Marking for FA2 and FA2A Sweep Configurations (Without Fairings)...... 4A-2E viii SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

4A-2C. Tool, Swaging, Nicropress Mod No. 635 ...... 4A-2H 4A-2D. Swaged Soft Eye ...... 4A-2H 4A-2E. Eye Splice ...... 4A-2K 4A-2F. Top Die and Center Sleeve ...... 4A-2L 4A-3A. Size0andSize1FloatRigged(Moored)...... 4A-3D 4A-3B. Size 1 Float Rigged for Streaming TB-27 (Acoustic) ...... 4A-3F 4A-3C. Size 0 Float Rigged for Streaming TB-26 (Acoustic) ...... 4A-3H 4A-4A. Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly (Rigged for Starboard) ...... 4A-4C 4A-4B. Cutter Assembly Mk 12 Mod 2 ...... 4A-4D 4A-4C. Cutter Mk 12 Cocking Tool ...... 4A-4F 4A-4D. Cutter Mk 12 Breech Removing Tool...... 4A-4M 4A-4E. Cutter Mk 14 Punch Positioning Tool...... 4A-4N 4A-4F. Cutter/ElevatingAssemblyMk14Mod0...... 4A-4P 4A-4G. Cutter Mk 14 Trip Pin Positioning...... 4A-4R 4A-4H. Cutter Mk 14 Cocking Tool ...... 4A-4R 4A-4J. Cutter Mk 14 Breech Removing Tool ...... 4A-4T 4A-4K. Safety Pin and Trip Pin Installation ...... 4A-4V 4A-4L. Cutter Assembly Mk 15 Mod 0 ...... 4A-4W 4A-4M. Wedge Stop Placement...... 4A-4X 4A-5A. Acoustic Power Tow Cable Preparation and Towing Stocking Attachment ...... 4A-5B 4A-5B. Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings ...... 4A-5D 4A-6A. Installing Towing Stockings at Estimated Locations ...... 4A-6D 4A-6B. Installing Magnetic Cable on Cable Drum ...... 4A-6F 4A-6C. Inboard Pigtail (Typical) ...... 4A-6G 4A-6D. Insulating Boot, Straight End ...... 4A-6J 4A-6E. Cable Assembly...... 4A-6L 4A-6F. CA-1453 to Pigtail or CA-1454 Connection (Typical) ...... 4A-6M 4A-6G. Outboard Pigtail to CA-1454 or CA-1454 to TJ Jumper ...... 4A-6P 4A-6H. Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable ...... 4A-6R 4A-6J. Marking K-4 Electrode for Float Positioning ...... 4A-6T 4B-1A. Depressor Wire Preparation ...... 4B-1D 4B-1B. Multiplane Kite Rigged as a Depressor with Span Pendant Attached ...... 4B-1E ix SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

4B-1C. Sweep Wire Preparation ...... 4B-1G 4B-1D. Connecting Sweep Wire and Cutter Mk 9 to Otter (Starboard Configuration) .....4B-1H 4B-1E. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4B-1J 4B-1F. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4B-1K 4B-1G. Moored Minesweeping Configuration (Single O-Type Gear Streamed to Starboard) ...... 4B-1M 4B-1H. Moored Minesweeping Configuration (Double O-Type Gear Streamed to Port and Starboard) ...... 4B-1P 4B-1J. Wedge Stop Placement ...... 4B-1R 4B-2A. Connecting Sweep Wire and Cutter Mk 9 to Otter (Starboard Configuration) .....4B-2C 4B-2B. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4B-2D 4B-2C. Depressor Wire Preparation ...... 4B-2F 4B-2D. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (Outboard Depressor) ...... 4B-2G 4B-2E. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (Inboard Depressor) ...... 4B-2H 4B-2F. Size 0 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4B-2K 4B-2G. Single Ship Deep Sweep Depressor Arrangement...... 4B-2M 4B-2H. Wedge Stop Placement...... 4B-2P 4B-2J. Single Ship Deep Sweep Configuration ...... 4B-2Q 4B-3A. Depressor Wire Preparation ...... 4B-3C 4B-3B. Rigging Outboard Depressor ...... 4B-3D 4B-3C. Depressor Arrangement for Deep Sweep...... 4B-3J 4B-3D. Wedge Stop Placement...... 4B-3K 4B-3E. Team Deep Sweep Configuration ...... 4B-3M 4B-4A. IDMS Sweep Wire Preparation ...... 4B-4C 4B-4B. Depressor Rigging for IDMS Sweep Wire ...... 4B-4E 4B-4C. Messenger Line with Small Stuff ...... 4B-4G 4B-4D. Improved Deep Moored Sweep (IDMS) Configuration ...... 4B-4J 4B-4E. Depressor and Sweep Arrangement ...... 4B-4L 4B-4F. Wedge Stop Placement ...... 4B-4N 4C-1A. Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) Rigged with an Auxiliary Depressor ...... 4C-1C 4C-1B. Size5FloatPreparation...... 4C-1D x SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

4C-1C. Connecting Sweep Wire and Cutter Mk 9 to Otter (Starboard Configuration) .....4C-1F 4C-1D. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4C-1G 4C-1E. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4C-1H 4C-1F. Attaching Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) Gear to Sweep Wire...... 4C-1K 4C-1G. Wedge Stop Placement ...... 4C-1M 4C-1H. A Mk 2(g) Acoustic Sweep Configuration ...... 4C-1N 4C-2A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing ...... 4C-2C 4C-2B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled ...... 4C-2D 4C-2C. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26...... 4C-2F 4C-2D. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (Acoustic Sweep, TB-26 Astern) ...... 4C-2G 4C-2E. Acoustic Sweep Configuration TB-26 Astern ...... 4C-2J 4C-3A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing ...... 4C-3C 4C-3B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled ...... 4C-3D 4C-3C. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27 ...... 4C-3E 4C-3D. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (Acoustic Sweep, TB-27 Astern) ...... 4C-3G 4C-3E. Acoustic Sweep Configuration TB-27 Astern ...... 4C-3J 4D-1A. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4D-1C 4D-1B. Rigging Position Buoy ...... 4D-1D 4D-1C. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode ...... 4D-1F 4D-1D. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode ...... 4D-1G 4D-1E. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection ...... 4D-1H 4D-1F. M Mk 5(a) Sweep Configuration ...... 4D-1N 4D-1G. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted ...... 4D-1S 4D-1H. S-Cable Booted ...... 4D-1T 4D-2A. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4D-2C 4D-2B. Rigging Position Buoy ...... 4D-2D 4D-2C. Outboard Pigtail to CA-1454 ...... 4D-2E 4D-2D. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode ...... 4D-2G 4D-2E. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode ...... 4D-2H 4D-2F. Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable ...... 4D-2J 4D-2G. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant...... 4D-2J 4D-2H. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection ...... 4D-2L xi SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

4D-2J. M Mk 5(a) Sweep (Configuration C) ...... 4D-2S 4D-2K. K-4BlankPigtailBooted...... 4D-2V 4D-2L. S- or CL-Cable Booted ...... 4D-2X 4D-3A. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) ...... 4D-3D 4D-3B. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4D-3E 4D-3C. Equalizing Towing Bridle ...... 4D-3F 4D-3D. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain . . . 4D-3G 4D-3E. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4D-3H 4D-3F. TyingFloattoK-4Electrode...... 4D-3K 4D-3G. AttachingFloatstoK-4Electrode...... 4D-3L 4D-3H. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection ...... 4D-3M 4D-3J. Wedge Stop Placement ...... 4D-3Q 4D-3K. M Mk 6(a) Sweep Configuration ...... 4D-3T 4D-3L. K-4BlankPigtailBooted...... 4D-3X 4D-3M. S-Cable Booted ...... 4D-3Z 4D-4A. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) ...... 4D-4C 4D-4B. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4D-4D 4D-4C. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4D-4E 4D-4D. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(h) Sweep Configuration.....4D-4F 4D-4E. Rubber Insulating Sleeve...... 4D-4G 4D-4F. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)...... 4D-4J 4D-4G. Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable...... 4D-4L 4D-4H. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant...... 4D-4L 4D-4J. Wedge Stop Placement ...... 4D-4Q 4D-4K. M Mk 6(h) Sweep Configuration ...... 4D-4T 4D-4L. K-4BlankPigtailBooted...... 4D-4X 4D-4M. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical) ...... 4D-4Y 4D-5A. Special Y Connector ...... 4D-5D 4D-5B. CA-1454 to Pigtail Connection ...... 4D-5F 4D-5C. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Chafing Chain ....4D-5G 4D-5D. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Starboard Configuration) ...... 4D-5J 4D-5E. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4D-5K xii SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

4D-5F. Equalizing Towing Bridle ...... 4D-5L 4D-5G. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4D-5N 4D-5H. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode ...... 4D-5Q 4D-5J. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode ...... 4D-5R 4D-5K. Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable...... 4D-5T 4D-5L. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant ...... 4D-5T 4D-5M. Outboard Long Leg Breakout to Outboard Pigtail Connection ...... 4D-5U 4D-5N. Wedge Stop Placement ...... 4D-5X 4D-5P. M Mk 7(b) Sweep (Double Diverted Loop) ...... 4D-5AA 4D-5Q. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted ...... 4D-5AD 4E-1A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing ...... 4E-1D 4E-1B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled ...... 4E-1E 4E-1C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Starboard Configuration) ...... 4E-1F 4E-1D. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4E-1G 4E-1E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4E-1H 4E-1F. Rigging Position Buoy...... 4E-1J 4E-1G. Special Pendant Assembly and Chain for Diversion Rigging ...... 4E-1L 4E-1H. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26 ...... 4E-1M 4E-1J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4E-1P 4E-1K. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode ...... 4E-1R 4E-1L. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode...... 4E-1S 4E-1M. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection ...... 4E-1T 4E-1N. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 5 (a) with TB-26) ...... 4E-1W 4E-1P. Wedge Stop Placement...... 4E-1Y 4E-1Q. Sweep Configuration M Mk 5 (a) with Acoustic Device TB-26 Diverted to Starboard ...... 4E-1AC 4E-1R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted...... 4E-1AJ 4E-1S. S-Cable Booted ...... 4E-1AL 4E-2A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing ...... 4E-2D 4E-2B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled ...... 4E-2E 4E-2C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Starboard Configuration) ...... 4E-2F 4E-2D. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4E-2G

xiii SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

4E-2E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4E-2H 4E-2F. Rigging Position Buoy...... 4E-2J 4E-2G. Special Pendant Assembly and Chain for Diversion Rigging ...... 4E-2L 4E-2H. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27 ...... 4E-2M 4E-2J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4E-2P 4E-2K. TyingFloattoK-4Electrode...... 4E-2Q 4E-2L. AttachingFloatstoK-4Electrode...... 4E-2S 4E-2M. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection ...... 4E-2T 4E-2N. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(a) with TB-27)...... 4E-2W 4E-2P. Wedge Stop Placement...... 4E-2Y 4E-2Q. Sweep Configuration M Mk 5(a) with Acoustic Device TB-27 Diverted to Starboard ...... 4E-2AC 4E-2R. K-4BlankPigtailBooted...... 4E-2AJ 4E-2S. S-Cable Booted ...... 4E-2AL 4E-3A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing ...... 4E-3D 4E-3B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled ...... 4E-3E 4E-3C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) ...... 4E-3F 4E-3D. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4E-3G 4E-3E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4E-3H 4E-3F. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain ....4E-3K 4E-3G. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26 ...... 4E-3L 4E-3H. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4E-3N 4E-3J. TyingFloattoK-4Electrode...... 4E-3P 4E-3K. AttachingFloatstoK-4Electrode...... 4E-3Q 4E-3L. Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(a) Sweep Configuration ...... 4E-3R 4E-3M. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection ...... 4E-3T 4E-3N. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(a) with TB-26)...... 4E-3W 4E-3P. Wedge Stop Placement...... 4E-3X 4E-3Q. Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(a) with Acoustic Device TB-26 Astern ...... 4E-3AB 4E-3R. K-4BlankPigtailBooted...... 4E-3AH 4E-3S. S-Cable Booted ...... 4E-3AK 4E-4A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing ...... 4E-4D xiv SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

4E-4B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled ...... 4E-4E 4E-4C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) ...... 4E-4F 4E-4D. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4E-4G 4E-4E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4E-4H 4E-4F. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain ....4E-4K 4E-4G. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27 ...... 4E-4L 4E-4H. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4E-4M 4E-4J. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode ...... 4E-4P 4E-4K. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode ...... 4E-4Q 4E-4L. Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(a) Sweep Configuration ...... 4E-4R 4E-4M. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection ...... 4E-4S 4E-4N. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(a) with TB-27) ...... 4E-4V 4E-4P. Wedge Stop Placement...... 4E-4X 4E-4Q. Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(a) with Acoustic Device TB-27 Astern ...... 4E-4AB 4E-4R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted ...... 4E-4AH 4E-4S. S-Cable Booted ...... 4E-4AK 4E-5A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing ...... 4E-5D 4E-5B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled ...... 4E-5E 4E-5C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) ...... 4E-5F 4E-5D. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4E-5G 4E-5E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4E-5H 4E-5F. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(h) Sweep Configuration .....4E-5J 4E-5G. Rubber Insulating Sleeve ...... 4E-5K 4E-5H. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26 ...... 4E-5M 4E-5J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4E-5N 4E-5K. Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable ...... 4E-5Q 4E-5L. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant ...... 4E-5R 4E-5M. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(h) with TB-26) ...... 4E-5U 4E-5N. Wedge Stop Placement ...... 4E-5W 4E-5P. Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(h) with Acoustic Device TB-26 Astern ...... 4E-5AA 4E-5Q. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted ...... 4E-5AG 4E-5R. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical) ...... 4E-5AK xv SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

4E-6A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing ...... 4E-6D 4E-6B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled ...... 4E-6E 4E-6C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) ...... 4E-6F 4E-6D. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4E-6G 4E-6E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4E-6H 4E-6F. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(h) (Sweep Configuration) ....4E-6J 4E-6G. Rubber Insulating Sleeve ...... 4E-6K 4E-6H. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27 ...... 4E-6M 4E-6J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4E-6N 4E-6K. Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable ...... 4E-6Q 4E-6L. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant ...... 4E-6R 4E-6M. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(h) with TB-27) ...... 4E-6U 4E-6N. Wedge Stop Placement ...... 4E-6W 4E-6P. Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(h) with Acoustic Device TB-27 Astern ...... 4E-6AA 4E-6Q. K-4BlankPigtailBooted...... 4E-6AG 4E-6R. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical) ...... 4E-6AK 4E-7A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing ...... 4E-7D 4E-7B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled ...... 4E-7E 4E-7C. Attachment of Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly (Port Configuration) ...... 4E-7F 4E-7D. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4E-7G 4E-7E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4E-7H 4E-7F. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain ....4E-7K 4E-7G. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-26 ...... 4E-7L 4E-7H. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4E-7N 4E-7J. TyingFloattoK-4Electrode...... 4E-7P 4E-7K. AttachingFloatstoK-4Electrode...... 4E-7Q 4E-7L. Wedge Stop Placement...... 4E-7S 4E-7M. Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings...... 4E-7T 4E-7N. Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment ...... 4E-7U 4E-7P. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2 Sweep) ...... 4E-7Z 4E-7Q. FA2 with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration ...... 4E-7AE 4E-7R. K-4BlankPigtailBooted...... 4E-7AL xvi SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

4E-7S. S-Cable Booted ...... 4E-7AP 4E-8A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing ...... 4E-8D 4E-8B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled ...... 4E-8E 4E-8C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) ...... 4E-8F 4E-8D. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4E-8G 4E-8E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4E-8H 4E-8F. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain ....4E-8K 4E-8G. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB 27 ...... 4E-8L 4E-8H. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4E-8M 4E-8J. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode ...... 4E-8P 4E-8K. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode ...... 4E-8Q 4E-8L. Wedge Stop Placement ...... 4E-8R 4E-8M. Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings ...... 4E-8S 4E-8N. Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment ...... 4E-8T 4E-8P. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2 Sweep) ...... 4E-8Y 4E-8Q. FA2 with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration ...... 4E-8AD 4E-8R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted ...... 4E-8AK 4E-8S. S-Cable Booted ...... 4E-8AN 4E-9A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing ...... 4E-9D 4E-9B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled ...... 4E-9E 4E-9C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) ...... 4E-9F 4E-9D. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4E-9G 4E-9E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4E-9H 4E-9F. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for FA2A Sweep Configuration ...... 4E-9J 4E-9G. Rubber Insulating Sleeve ...... 4E-9L 4E-9H. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26 ...... 4E-9M 4E-9J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4E-9P 4E-9K. Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable ...... 4E-9R 4E-9L. Cable Drum Preventer Pendant ...... 4E-9R 4E-9M. Wedge Stop Placement...... 4E-9S 4E-9N. Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings...... 4E-9T 4E-9P. Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment ...... 4E-9U xvii SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

4E-9Q. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2A Sweep) ...... 4E-9X 4E-9R. FA2A with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration...... 4E-9AE 4E-9S. K-4BlankPigtailBooted...... 4E-9AL 4E-9T. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical) ...... 4E-9AQ 4E-10A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing ...... 4E-10D 4E-10B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled ...... 4E-10E 4E-10C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration) ...... 4E-10F 4E-10D. Otter in Ready Release Position ...... 4E-10G 4E-10E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly ...... 4E-10H 4E-10F. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for FA2A Sweep Configuration ...... 4E-10J 4E-10G. Rubber Insulating Sleeve ...... 4E-10K 4E-10H. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27 ...... 4E-10M 4E-10J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored) ...... 4E-10P 4E-10K. Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable ...... 4E-10R 4E-10L. Cable Drum Preventer Pendant ...... 4E-10R 4E-10M. Wedge Stop Placement ...... 4E-10S 4E-10N. Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings ...... 4E-10T 4E-10P. Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment...... 4E-10U 4E-10Q. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2A Sweep) ...... 4E-10X 4E-10R. FA2A with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration ...... 4E-10AD 4E-10S. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted ...... 4E-10AK 4E-10T. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical)...... 4E-10AP 4F-1A. Rigging Single Dan Buoy, Type 3 ...... 4F-1C 4F-1B. Rigging Double Dan Buoy ...... 4F-1H 4F-2A. MasterReferenceBuoyFMk6Mod0...... 4F-2C 4F-2B. Lower Tube and Counterweight Assembly ...... 4F-2D 4F-2C. Crossarm and Radar Reflector Assembly ...... 4F-2F 4F-2D. Upper and Lower Tube Assembly ...... 4F-2G 4F-2E. Anchor and Lead Clump Assembly Rigging and Mooring ...... 4F-2H 4F-2F. Launching Master Reference Buoy from Starboard Quarter Rail ...... 4F-2K 4F-3A. Mk 6 Moored Mine Case Rigging ...... 4F-3C 4F-4A. Mk36BottomMineRigging...... 4F-4C xviii SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

5-1. AN/SLQ-37(V) Systems Block Diagram ...... 5-3 5-2. Acoustic Control Unit SG-122A/SLQ-37(V) ...... 5-4 5-3. Power Converter CV-3846 (PCU) ...... 5-6 5-4. Dynamic Braking Unit MX-10746 (DBU) ...... 5-7 5-5. APC Cable Bulkhead Connector (Shown with Cover Removed) ...... 5-8 5-6. Tow Cable CX-13260 (APC Cable) ...... 5-9 5-7. Towed Body TB-26 ...... 5-10 5-8. Acoustic Test Set TS-4144/P ...... 5-11 5-9. Towed Body TB-27 ...... 5-12 5-10. Gas Turbine Generator Set...... 5-13 5-11. Magnetic Minesweeping Gas Turbine Generator (MMGTG) ...... 5-14 5-12. MCM 1 – 8, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment...... 5-15 5-13. MCM 9 – 14, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment ...... 5-16 5-14. Main Control Console (MCC) ...... 5-17 5-15. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable Terminal Box (Tailbox) ...... 5-19 5-16. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, General Configuration ...... 5-20 5-17. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, S or CL ...... 5-21 5-18. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, TJ Jumper ...... 5-22 5-19. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, K-4 Electrode ...... 5-23 5-20. Fantail of MCM Ship, Typical ...... 5-24 5-21. Magnetic Minesweeping ...... 5-25 7-1. ACU Acoustic Mode Prompts ...... 7-8 7-2. ACU Magnetic Mode Prompts ...... 7-9 7-3. ACU Dual Mode Prompts...... 7-10 7-4. Control Circuits ...... 7-11 7-5. Influence Minesweeping Equipment ...... 7-12 7-6. Ship’s Magnetic Minesweeping Generator Equipment ...... 7-13 9-1. Influence Minesweeping Equipment ...... 9-2

xix/(xx blank)

SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF TABLES

Table Title Page

1-1. Mine Countermeasures Techniques ...... 1-4 1-2. Mine Threat Countermeasures ...... 1-8 1-3. MCM Countermeasures Capability ...... 1-16 1-4. Major Minesweeping Equipment ...... 1-19 1-5. TypesofMinesweeps...... 1-24 1-6. Acoustic Minesweeping Equipment ...... 1-48 1-7. Magnetic Minesweeping Cables ...... 1-59 1-8. Mechanical Minesweeping Equipment ...... 1-75 1-9. Cartridge Types...... 1-84 1-10. Levels of Certification for Explosives Handlers ...... 1-86 1-11. Boatswain Mate Tool Kit ...... 1-88 1-12. Electricians Tool Kit ...... 1-89 1-13. Part of Electricians Tool Kit Stowed Separately ...... 1-90 1-14. Minesweeping Support Equipment ...... 1-90 1-15. Capabilities ...... 1-96 1-16. Reference Publications ...... 1-97 1-17. Safe Working Loads ...... 1-99 1-18. Weight of SMCM Equipment ...... 1-99 2-1. Rigid Hull Inflatable Boat Equipment for SMCM Operations...... 2-8 2-2. Documents Utilized for Installation of Minesweeping Equipment...... 2-13 3-1. Fantail Manning Requirements for Minesweeping Conditions ...... 3-2 3-2. CIC Manning Requirements for Minesweeping Conditions ...... 3-3 3-3. Pilot House Manning Requirements for Minesweeping Conditions ...... 3-3 4-1. Pre-Operational Conditions/Systems Readiness Check-Off List, Typical ...... 4-3 4-2. Fantail Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions ...... 4-14 4-3. CIC Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions ...... 4-15 4-4. Pilot House Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions ...... 4-16 4-5. Magnetic Minesweeping Procedures ...... 4-19 4-6. Automatic Acoustic Control Minesweeping Procedures ...... 4-19 4-7. Automatic Acoustic Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedures ...... 4-20 4-8. Manual Acoustic Control Minesweeping Procedures...... 4-21

xxi SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF TABLES (Continued)

Table Title Page

4-9. Manual Acoustic Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedure ...... 4-22 4-10. Combination Influence Minesweeping ...... 4-22 4-11. Combination Influence Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedure ...... 4-23 4A-1A. O-Type Float Angles ...... 4A-1Z 4A-1B. Wire and Float Pendant Length ...... 4A-1AA 4A-2A. Sweep Wire Painted Band Locations...... 4A-2D 4A-2B. Depressor Wire Painted Bands Locations ...... 4A-2F 4A-2C. Nicropress Copper Oval Sleeves and Tool Dies ...... 4A-2J 4A-2D. Nicropress Stainless Steel Oval Sleeves and Tool Dies ...... 4A-2J 4A-3A. Depressor Wire and Float Pendant Length...... 4A-3C 4A-3B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation ...... 4A-3E 4A-3C. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure ...... 4A-3G 4A-4A. Cutter Spacing - 100 Fathom Sweep Wire ...... 4A-4G 4A-4B. Cutter Spacing - 150 Fathom Sweep Wire ...... 4A-4H 4A-4C. Cutter Spacing - 200 Fathom Sweep Wire ...... 4A-4J 4A-4D. Cutter Spacing - 250 Fathom Sweep Wire ...... 4A-4K 4A-4E. Cutter Spacing - 300 Fathom Sweep Wire ...... 4A-4L 4A-4F. Cutter Mk 15 Cartridge ...... 4A-4Y 4B-1A. Wire and Float Pendant Length ...... 4B-1C 4B-1B. Sag or Lift of Sweep Wire and Tensions of Sweep and Depressor Wires ...... 4B-1N 4B-2A. Depressor Wire and Float Pendant Lengths for Single Ship Deep Sweep ...... 4B-2D 4B-2B. Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 Spacing for Single Ship Deep Sweep ...... 4B-2J 4B-3A. Team Deep Sweep Cutter Mk 12 Spacing ...... 4B-3E 4B-4A. IDMS Modified Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 Spacing ...... 4B-4D 4C-2A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure ...... 4C-2C 4C-3A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation ...... 4C-3C 4D-3A. Sweep Wire Tensions ...... 4D-3U 4D-4A. Sweep Wire Tensions ...... 4D-4S 4D-5A. Sweep Wire Tensions ...... 4D-5Z 4E-1A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure ...... 4E-1D 4E-2A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation ...... 4E-2D 4E-3A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure ...... 4E-3D xxii SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF TABLES (Continued)

Table Title Page

4E-3B. Sweep Wire Tensions ...... 4E-3AA 4E-4A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation ...... 4E-4D 4E-4B. Sweep Wire Tensions ...... 4E-4AA 4E-5A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure ...... 4E-5D 4E-5B. Sweep Wire Tensions...... 4E-5Z 4E-6A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation ...... 4E-6D 4E-6B. Sweep Wire Tensions...... 4E-6Z 4E-7A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure ...... 4E-7D 4E-7B. Sweep Wire Tensions...... 4E-7AD 4E-8A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation ...... 4E-8D 4E-8B. Sweep Wire Tensions...... 4E-8AC 4E-9A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure ...... 4E-9D 4E-9B. Sweep Wire Tensions...... 4E-9AD 4E-10A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation ...... 4E-10D 4E-10B. Sweep Wire Tensions ...... 4E-10AC 4F-1A. Type 3 Dan Buoy - Length of Mooring and Approximate Offset for Various Depths and Currents ...... 4F-1D 5-1. AN/SLQ-37(V) System Function Directory...... 5-2 6-1. Periodicity Codes ...... 6-2 6-2. Example of Shipboard MIPs and MRCs, Typical ...... 6-3 6-3. AN/SLQ-37(V)3 Components ...... 6-3 6-4. Dual Use AN/SLQ-38 Components ...... 6-4 6-5. Ancillary Equipment ...... 6-4 6-6. Groove Diameter Tolerance ...... 6-6 7-1. Magnetic Minesweeping Fault Isolation ...... 7-2 7-2. Acoustic Minesweeping Fault Isolation ...... 7-3 7-3. Combination Influence Minesweeping Fault Isolation ...... 7-4 7-4. TB-26 Troubleshooting...... 7-5 7-5. TB-27 Troubleshooting...... 7-7 7-6. Cable Run Sheet, Cable W6 ...... 7-14 7-7. Cable Run Sheet, Cable W5 ...... 7-15 7-8. Cable Run Sheet, Cable W1 ...... 7-16

xxiii SW570-F0-MMO-A70

LIST OF TABLES (Continued)

Table Title Page

7-9. Cable Run Sheet, Cable W2 ...... 7-17 9-1. Documents Utilized for Installation of Minesweeping Equipment ...... 9-1

xxiv SW570-F0-MMO-A70

SAFETY SUMMARY

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This manual describes physical and chemical processes which may cause injury or death to personnel, or damage to equipment if not properly followed. This safety summary includes general safety precautions and instructions that must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance to ensure personnel safety and protection of equipment. Prior to performing any task, the WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTEs included in that task shall be reviewed and understood. WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES WARNINGs and CAUTIONs are used in this manual to highlight operating or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions, or statements which are considered essential to protection of personnel (WARNING) or equipment (CAUTION). WARNINGs and CAUTIONs immediately precede the step and procedure to which they apply. WARNINGs and CAUTIONs consist of four parts: heading (WARNING or CAUTION), a statement of the hazard, minimum precautions, and possible result if disregarded. NOTEs are used in this manual to highlight operating or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions, or statements which are not essential to protection of personnel or equipment. NOTEs may precede or follow the step or procedure, depending upon the information to be highlighted. The headings used and their definitions are as follows:

Highlights an essential operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condition, statement, etc., which if not strictly observed, could result in long term health hazards, injury, or death to personnel.

Highlights an essential operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condition, statement, etc., which if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of, equipment or loss of mission effectiveness. NOTE Highlights an essential operating or maintenance procedure, condition, or statement. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The following safety precautions shall be observed while performing procedures in this manual.

Dangerous voltages are present at system connectors. Ensure power is OFF prior to connecting or disconnecting cables. Do not wear rings, watches, or other metal jewelry while working on electronic equipment. Some cleaning materials specified herein are flammable and/or toxic. Keep away from open flame or other ignition sources. Provide adequate ventilation and avoid skin/eye exposure. Cleaning with compressed air can create airborne particles that may enter eyes or penetrate skin. Wear goggles. Do not direct compressed air against skin.

xxv SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Under no circumstances should any person service or adjust electrical equipment without the presence of another person in the immediate vicinity who is capable of securing live circuits and rendering first aid. Procedures herein often require the handling of hazardous materials. Personnel shall become familiar with hazards and comply with guidance listed in applicable Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Personnel shall become familiar with Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) requirements listed in individual job sheets and shall correctly utilize PPE during completion of those job sheets. Corrosion of plated metal surfaces produces metallic salts that can irritate the skin and can be toxic if inhaled or ingested. Ensure the work area is well ventilated. Dispose of contaminated cleaning materials in accordance with local regulations. Procedures herein require handling of pyrotechnic and explosive loaded devices. Forces ashore shall handle these devices in accordance with NAVSEA OP 5. Forces afloat shall handle these devices in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

xxvi SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

1-1 INTRODUCTION.

1-1.1 This chapter introduces the AN/SLQ-37(V)3 (Influence) and the AN/SLQ-38 (Mechanical) Minesweeping Systems used aboard U.S. Navy Avenger class Mine Countermeasures (MCM) ships (Figure 1-1). It discusses general, physical, and functional terms, defines the system and it's relationship with other minesweeping systems, and illustrates its importance on board MCM ships. To better illustrate the purpose and use of these Minesweeping Systems, this chapter also addresses underwater mines, their actuation systems, and their use as a threat.

1-2 BACKGROUND.

1-2.1 MCM is a specialized warfare area designed to ensure that naval and merchant shipping is not denied access to, or transit of, oceans and waterways throughout the world by mines. MCM comprises all means used to prevent or reduce the threat of mines to surface ships and submarines. Mines can be countered by a number of tactical methods including: a. Plotting and avoiding by mine watching and ship maneuvers b. Detecting and avoiding by minehunting and ship maneuvers c. Detecting and destroying by minehunting and neutralization

Figure 1-1. Avenger Class MCM Ship, Typical

1-1 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. Removal from the Operational Area (OA) by minesweeping and neutralization e. Ship self-protection by reducing ships’ magnetic and acoustic signatures.

1-2.2 Mine Warfare Commanders are responsible for determining the response to a mine threat. Commanders assess the threat, available MCM assets, and plan the MCM operation. In order to assess the mine threat, data is gathered from all available sources. This is accomplished by exploratory operations, minehunting and mine watching reports, intelligence estimates, and all other means available. Exploratory operations may begin in accordance with contingency plans while the threat estimate is still in progress. Risk to the MCM platform is considered along with tactical considerations. Once the threat is evaluated and a response is formulated, required MCM assets are deployed in the operational environment to counter the threat. A block diagram depicting the organization of MCM combat systems is illustrated in Figure 1-2. Techniques employed to counter a mine threat are identified in Table 1-1.

1-2.3 One of the response options available to the MCM Commanders for clearing a minefield is to conduct minesweeping operations using surface mine countermeasures that are designed to neutralize or destroy underwater mines. MCM currently utilizes two methods of surface minesweeping: mechanical and influence. Mechanical minesweeping utilizes the AN/SLQ-38(V) system and provides a mechanical means of clearing moored mines by severing the mooring cable and allowing the mines to float to the surface where they can be neutralized by gun fire. Influence minesweeping utilizes the AN/SLQ-37(V) and provides a sweep system capable of clearing influence mines that are activated magnetically or acoustically. Minesweeping techniques used by MCM ships are depicted in Figure 1-3. By varying the towing setup, the MCM ship can operate the influence sweep systems individually or simultaneously. A block diagram depicting the organization of minesweeping systems is illustrated in Figure 1-4.

1-3 THREAT DESCRIPTION.

1-3.1 Mines are classified in three ways; by position in the water (bottom, moored, or drifting); by method of delivery (air, surface, or submarine), and by method of actuation (contact or influenced). Influence actuated mines can be magnetic, acoustic, pressure, or any combination of the three. The mine threat, primary target, and primary countermeasures are addressed in Table 1-2. In accordance with the Geneva Convention and the Laws of the Sea, the life span of an armed underwater mine should not exceed 365 days. At the end of it's life, the mine should either sterilize or self-destruct.

1-3.2 When classified by position, mines fall into three categories: a. Bottom Mines: Most effective in relatively shallow water (40 to 150 feet of sea water (FSW)). Negative buoyancy causes the mine to sink to the bottom where it remains until actuated by a passing ship. All bottom mines are influence actuated and are planted in waters where ships will be damaged by the explosion. b. Moored Influence Mines: May be used in deeper-waters and are effective against both surface ships and submarines. The explosive charge and the firing mechanism in the moored mine are housed in a positive-buoyancy case. A cable (or chain) is attached to an anchor on the ocean floor and holds the case at a predetermined depth below the surface. c. Drifting Mines: Float freely at or near the surface. They have no anchoring devices, and their buoyancy is neutral. Although the Hague Convention of 1907 limits the use of drifting mines, any mine can become a drifting mine when the mooring cable breaks.

1-2 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-2. MCM Combat System, Major Subsystem

1-3 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 1-1. Mine Countermeasures Techniques

TYPE SWEEP TYPE MINE EQUIPMENT USED EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Mechanical Moored Wire rope, towed/diverted aft of Mine mooring cable is severed MCM ship, with cutters attached with cutters. Mines float to surface where they are neutralized by small arms fire or by EOD divers. Magnetic Magnetic Influence Towed magnetic cables Cables pulses electromagnetic fields, causing magnetic influence mines to detonate. Acoustic Acoustic Influence Towed acoustic device Acoustic device produces noises that emulate acoustic signature of passing ship, causing acoustic influence mines to detonate. Combination Acoustic and Magnetic Towed magnetic cables and Simultaneously, acoustic device Influence acoustic device produces noises while magnetic cable pulses electromagnetic fields, causing combination acoustic-magnetic influence mines to detonate. Navigation Minefield Avoidance 1. Navigation 1. Conning Officer/Tactical Action Officer avoids suspected minefield.

2. Markers and buoys 2. Buoys and markers are deployed with strobe lights and radar reflectors to aid navigation through swept channels or around a minefield. Minehunting 1. Visual/Mine 1. Ship’s personnel 1. Watch personnel are watch stationed on bow of ship to visually spot mines.

2. Minehunting sonar 2. Sonar (AN/SQQ-32) 2. Ship’s sonar used to detect and classify mine-like objects.

3. Swimmer 3. EOD personnel and hand 3. Swimmer used to locate held sonar and/or triangulate (exploit) mines.

4. Minehunting Vehicle 4. Mine Neutralization System 4. Vehicle used to locate (AN/SLQ-48) and/or neutralize mines.

1-4 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-3. Minesweeping Techniques, Typical (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-5 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-3. Minesweeping Techniques, Typical (Sheet 2 of 2)

1-6 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-4. Organization of Minesweeping System

1-7 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 1-2. Mine Threat Countermeasures

MINE CLASS TRIGGER MECHANISMS COUNTERMEASURES PRIMARY TARGET

Bottom Influence Minehunting Surface Ships Command Minesweeping Navigation avoidance Moored Contact Minesweeping Surface Ships Influence Minehunting Submarines Command Mine Watching Navigation avoidance Drifting Contact Navigation avoidance Surface Ships Mine Watching

1-3.3 When classified by methods of actuation, mines fall into three categories: a. Influence Mines: Detect a ship or a submarine by signatures - magnetic, acoustic, pressure, or any combination of the three - that are used to actuate the mine's firing mechanism(s) after receiving electrical signals from its detector(s). A detector, as used with a firing mechanism, may be a magnetic search coil, a magnetometer, a hydrophone, or a pressure sensor. Upon receipt of an electrical signal from the detector, the firing mechanism analyzes the signal to determine whether or not it was generated by a valid target. If the analysis shows the target to be within the danger zone, as present into the mine's instrumentation, the firing mechanism initiates an actuation. This actuation may be a ship count or a detonation. The purpose of the ship count is twofold: random target selection and counter-countermeasures. b. Contact Mines: The oldest and most common type mines. This type mine requires physical contact between a ship and the mine's contact switch horn. When enough pressure is applied to operate the switch horn, the mine will detonate. Contact mines first designed in 1908 were used extensively during WW I and WW II and may still be found in use today. Newer generation contact mines have also been used during conflict in recent years. c. Command Actuated Mines: Traditionally used in defensive minefields and receive firing signals through hard-wired control cables from land-based control centers. Neutralization of the control center results in loss of the ability to effectively utilize the minefield.

1-4 MISSION.

1-4.1 Mine countermeasures reduce the risk of damage from sea mines to surface ships and submarines. Mechanical and Influence Minesweeping Systems contribute to this mission by providing mine clearance capability.

1-4.2 AN/SLQ-37(V)3 Influence Minesweeping System. The influence minesweeping system is used to clear influence actuated mines from an operating environment. During and after mine clearance operations, buoys and reference markers may be deployed as navigational aids. The system has no minehunting or classifying capability. It is specifically used to reduce the mine threat probability and for neutralization by detonating the mines in place.

1-4.3 AN/SLQ-38 Mechanical Minesweeping System. Contact and influence actuated mines can be moored using a chain or a cable. Mechanical minesweeping provides a means for clearing moored mines by severing the mine's mooring cable or capturing the cable and dragging the mine to a safe area for

1-8 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 disposal. Mines that surface can be neutralized by small arms fire. The mission of the AN/SLQ-38 system is to clear the operating area of threat from moored mines.

1-5 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT.

1-5.1 Influence Minesweeping System Equipment. Influence minesweeping systems operate on the principle of inducing mines to fire in response to influences signals that simulate the signatures of a ship. The AN/SLQ-37(V)3 System is used to counter mines equipped with magnetic or acoustic sensors. A system block diagram of the organization of influence minesweep systems is illustrated in Figure 1-5.

1-5.2 Ships underway produce varying amounts of sound in various frequency ranges. A power-driven ship normally projects large amounts of acoustic energy in the frequency range of one Hertz to several thousand Hertz. The greatest portion of this energy output is in the low frequency band, which is produced by propulsion machinery, hull vibrations, and propeller rotation (Figure 1-6). Acoustic mines are designed to respond to the selected sound frequencies caused by a ship passing in the proximity of the mine. The principle of passive acoustic minesweeping is to simulate a ship by projecting a band of noise to suitable frequencies to actuate acoustic mines. Acoustic Minesweeping equipment is designed to simulate the acoustic signature of a ship and detonate the mine a safe distance aft of the MCM ship.

1-5.3 Ships also possess the basic properties of a magnet and, because of the methods used during their construction, they emit horizontal and vertical magnetic lines of force (Figure 1-7). Magnetic mines are designed to detect steel hull ships as they cause distortions in the earth's ambient magnetic fields (Figure 1-8) and to actuate when a ship is in close proximity. The principle of passive magnetic minesweeping is to simulate a ship's magnetic characteristics by placing a large magnetic field in the water that causes the firing mechanism of a magnetic mine to actuate. Magnetic minesweeping equipment is designed to create a magnetic field by transmitting a large electrical current into cables towed behind the vessel and initiate mine detonation a safe distance astern of the minesweeper (Figure 1-9).

1-5.4 The AN/SLQ-37(V)3 system installed aboard Avenger class MCM ships includes devices to emulate both the acoustic and magnetic signatures of a ship. The system can be configured in several ways to counter specific threats or for various operating conditions. The minesweeping objective, once deployed, is to tow the system through the operational area, detonate influence mines and neutralize the mine threat. There are three devices used to generate the acoustic signal and five cable assemblies used to generate a magnetic field. This manual will address each of the system acoustic and magnetic components and identify each of the sweep configurations used for minesweeping. The system also utilizes common minesweeping and support gear from the AN/SLQ-38(V) system, such as floats, pendants, depressors and otters to stream the gear and common field markers to designate areas that have been swept. This manual will identify each item used during the minesweeping process, how it is used, and a reference to the applicable technical manual.

1-5.5 AN/SLQ-38 Mechanical Minesweeping System Equipment. AN/SLQ-38 mechanical minesweeping equipment is specifically designed to sever moored mine cables. When the mooring cable is severed, the mine then floats to the surface where it is neutralized by small arms fire or can be dragged to a safe area for disposal. A block diagram of the mechanical minesweeping system is provided in Figure 1-10.

1-9 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-5. Organization of Influence Minesweeping System

1-10 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-6. Ship’s Acoustic Noises

1-11 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-7. XYZ Axis of Steel Hull Ship

1-12 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-8. Distortion of Earth’s Magnetic Field

1-13 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-9. Magnetic Minesweeping

1-14 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-10. Organization of Mechanical Minesweeping System

1-5.6 The AN/SLQ-38 system is installed aboard Avenger class MCM ships and can be streamed in several configurations that are tactically designed to counter specific mine threat. Each of these methods utilize sweep wire, towed aft of the ship, with minesweeping cutters attached at intervals along the sweep cable that sever the mines mooring cable. To provide an acceptably wide sweep path, the sweep wire is diverted from the ship's path using an otter. The standard moored sweep, Oropesa (named after the British trawler that first used it), is referred to as O-gear and is streamed in a variety of configurations. This manual will address each configuration of mechanical sweeps and the components used to rig and stream each one.

1-6 CAPABILITIES.

1-6.1 Other than command and control and precise navigation hardware, the MCM ship is equipped with four minehunting or minesweeping systems. These capabilities are depicted in Table 1-3.

1-6.2 Each of these systems provides a capability for the MCM ship to accomplish its objective. This manual specifically addresses the mine neutralization capability provided by the AN/SLQ-37(V)3 Influence and AN/SLQ-38 Mechanical Minesweeping Systems. This equipment is designed specifically for reducing the probability of influence and contact actuated mines in an operating area by causing the mine to detonate. Neither of these systems offers clandestine or covert capability. Because the MCM ship is a highly visible target particularly during sweeping operations, shallow water minesweeping generally cannot be attempted until the after a tactical OA has been secured.

1-15 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 1-3. MCM Countermeasures Capability

MINE COUNTERMEASURES COMBAT MINESWEEPING MINEHUNTING NEUTRALIZATION SYSTEM

AN/SLQ-37(V) Influence Minesweeping System X X AN/SLQ-38 Moored Minesweeping System X AN/SLQ-48(V) Mine Neutralization System X X AN/SQQ-32(V) Minehunting Sonar X

1-7 FUNCTIONAL RELATIONSHIPS.

1-7.1 Acoustic Minesweeping. Acoustic minesweeping (Figure 1-5) is accomplished when the minesweeping system causes the actuation of an influence mine by emulating the acoustic signal of a passing ship. The clearance objective is accomplished when the mine is detonated a safe distance behind the MCM vessel thereby neutralizing the threat. The simulated acoustic signature, called a waveform, is manually entered into an Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM) chip in the Automatic Control Unit (ACU). The ACU generates the signal and transmits it to the Power Converter Unit (PCU). The PCU converts the signal into a control voltage that is sent to the towed acoustic device via the Acoustic Power Cable (APC), which also serves as the towing cable. The towed body houses a motor and causes the generation of an acoustic signal that is transmitted into the seawater surrounding the towed body. The influence mine detects the acoustic signal and the mines firing mechanism analyzes the signal. It the signal meets the preprogrammed requirements of the mine, it initiates a actuation sequence. The clearance objective is met when all of the influence mines in the OA have been destroyed. The typical operational sequence of an underwater mine is depicted as a functional block diagram in Figure 1-11.

1-7.2 Magnetic Minesweeping. Magnetic minesweeping (Figure 1-5) is accomplished when the minesweeping system actuates an influence mine by simulating the magnetic field of a passing ship. The clearance objective is accomplished in the same manner as acoustic minesweeping, when the mine is detonated a safe distance behind the MCM vessel thereby neutralizing the threat. The waveforms, described in the previous paragraph, stored in the ACU are used to generate a voltage that is transmitted to the shipboard minesweeping generator. The minesweeping generator converts the signals into a high-voltage electrical current that is transmitted into the Magnetic Cable Assembly. The Magnetic Cable Assembly is towed behind the MCM vessel and uses the electrical current to generate a powerful magnetic field. The influence mine detects the magnetic field and initiates an actuation sequence. The clearance objective is met when all of the influence mines in the OA have been destroyed.

1-7.3 All minesweeping system operations are conducted from the fantail of the MCM ship. Functionally, the operations may be divided into three areas: system direction, manual operation, and machine operation. a. System Direction: Primarily a command function and is exercised by the Commanding Officer (CO)/Officer of the Deck (OOD) in the Pilot House, and the Tactical Action Officer (TAO) in Combat Information Center (CIC) interacting with the Mine Countermeasures/Safety Officer (MCMO) and the Petty Officer In Charge (POIC) on the fantail.

1-16 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-11. Operational Sequence of an Influence Mine, Typical

1-17 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

b. Manual Operations: Performed by minesweeping personnel in breaking out the gear, performing on-deck preparations and readying individual pieces of equipment for streaming, and providing manual assistance for machine operations. c. Machine Operators: Cranes, winches, and cable reels located on the fantail of the ship and are used to handle components such as floats and kites, winches handle sweep wires and cable reels handle acoustic and magnetic cables.

1-7.4 Mechanical Minesweeping. Mechanical minesweeping (Figure 1-10) is accomplished with the sweep wire streamed aft of the MCM ship where it's mechanical and/or explosive cable cutters sever mine mooring cables. To provide a wide sweep path, the sweep wire is veered away from the track of the ship. An otter, supported by a float, diverts the outboard end of the sweep wire. The MCM ship can stream up to two sweep wires at the same time. The otter governs the span and depth of the outboard end of the sweep, while a depressor governs the span and depth of the inboard end of the sweep. Sweep wire depth is determined in accordance with NWP 3-15. The clearance objective is met when all moored mines in the OA have been swept from their moorings and destroyed.

1-8 PHYSICAL ARRANGEMENT.

1-8.1 Table 1-4 lists the major minesweeping equipment and their location throughout the MCM ship. A cross-section profile of a MCM ship, showing compartments where minesweeping equipment is located, is illustrated in Figure 1-12. The ship’s Pilot House is illustrated in Figure 1-13. The ship Combat Information Center is illustrated in Figure 1-14. Minesweeping equipment installed on the Fantail is illustrated in Figure 1-15. Table 1-5 lists types of magnetic, acoustic, and combination minesweeps as illustrated in Figures 1-16 through 1-38.

1-9 SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT.

1-9.1 AN/SLQ-37(V)3 Acoustic Minesweeping Equipment. Acoustic minesweeping equipment is designed to simulate acoustic signatures of ships. These signatures are electrically generated by the ACU, converted to pulsed, direct current by the Power Converter Unit (PCU), and transmitted via an APC tow cable to a towed acoustic device where the signal is converted into an audible sound. The sound energy generated by the towed body is projected into the water to simulate the passage of a vessel. The acoustic sensor in a mine detects the sound, performs an analysis of the incoming signal, and if this signal meets the preset requirements of the mine, it can cause the mine to detonate.

1-9.2 The waveforms used to generate the acoustic signal at the ACU are classified; however, none of the system components or their operation is classified. Specific mine types countered with the AN/SLQ-37(V) and the effectiveness of the system are also classified.

1-9.3 Shipboard components of the AN/SLQ-37(V) include the Power Converter Unit (PCU) CV-3846/SLQ-37, the Automatic Control Unit (ACU) SG-1224A/SLQ-37, and the Dynamic Braking Unit (DBU). Acoustic devices TB-26/SLQ-37 and TB-27/SLQ-37, and the Towed Device A Mk 2(g) are towed behind the ship. All use the CX-13260/SLQ-37 Acoustic Power/Tow Cable except the A Mk 2(g), which is attached to the ship’s sweep wire during deployment. These components are identified in Table 1-6 and discussed further in the following paragraphs.

1-9.4 Automatic Control Unit, SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V). The ACU, SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V) (Figure 1-39), is located in the CIC where it generates waveforms that are used for magnetic and acoustic mine countermeasures. The ACU is completely enclosed to provide protection from EMI. A hinged front cover lowers to allow operator access to controls and indicators on the front panel. The front panel and chassis slide out on two locking slide-rails for easy access to the subassemblies. Controls and indicators for the ACU are explained in SW570-F0-MMO-020. 1-18 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 1-4. Major Minesweeping Equipment

EQUIPMENT LOCATION

Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) (Rattle Bars) Carried only when situation requires Acoustic Device Towed Body TB-26 Fantail Acoustic Device Towed Body TB-27 Fantail Acoustic Power Cable (APC) Fantail, APC cable reel APC Bulkhead Connector Fantail, forward bulkhead, starboard Automatic Control Unit (ACU) Combat Information Center DC Contactor Panel Auxiliary Machinery Room Dynamic Braking Unit (DBU) Auxiliary Machinery Room Floats, Kites (Depressors/Otters) Fantail Magnetic Cable Connector Receptacle (Tailbox) Fantail, forward bulkhead, port Magnetic Minesweeping Cables (CA-1453 (COAX), CA-1454 (S Fantail/Magnetic cable reels and CL), K-4, and Pigtails) Magnetic Minesweeping Control Switchboard Auxiliary Machinery Room Magnetic Minesweeping Gas Turbine Generator (MMGTG) Auxiliary Machinery Room Mechanical Equipment (shackles, chains, bridles, pennants, etc.) Sweep Gear Storeroom Power Converter Unit (PCU) General Workshop Solid State Pulse Generator (SSPG) Auxiliary Machinery Room

1-9.5 Magnetic voltage waveforms provided by the ACU are cable connected to the ship's magnetic mine sweeping equipment. Acoustic voltage waveforms provided by the ACU are converted to direct current by the PCU and applied to a motor in the towed acoustic device TB-26 or TB-27. The ACU requires 115 Vac, 60 Hz, single phase input power and an input from the shipboard digital clock.

1-9.6 Of the components required for acoustic influence minesweeping, only the ACU serves a dual function. For acoustic minesweeping, the voltage waveforms generated by the ACU are sent to the PCU where they are converted to motor control voltage for the towed body. For magnetic minesweeping, the voltage waveforms are converted to high-amperage currents by the minesweep generator equipment and applied to the sweep cables.

1-9.7 Power Converter Unit, Acoustic, CV-3846/SLQ-37(V). The Power Converter Unit (PCU), CV-3846/SLQ-37(V) (Figure 1-40), is located in the General Workshop where it provides the electrical power to operate motors inside of the acoustic devices (TB-26 or TB-27). An operator can control the operation of the PCU from its control panel or remotely from the ACU. The ACU provides control voltages to the PCU to operate the acoustic devices. The PCU operates on 440 Vac, 3-phase, 60 Hz power and is designed to operate unattended. Controls and indicators for the PCU are explained in SW565-AB-MMM-040.

1-19 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 1-12. Minesweeping Equipment Locations

1-20 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 1-13. Pilot House, Typical

1-21 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 1-14. Combat Information Center, Typical

1-22 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 1-15. Fantail of MCM Ship, Typical

1-23 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 1-5. Types of Minesweeps

TYPE SWEEP FIGURE ENVIRONMENT

Single O-Type Moored Minesweep 1-16 Salt or Fresh Water Double O-Type Moored Minesweep 1-17 Salt or Fresh Water Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS) 1-18 Salt or Fresh Water Team Deep Sweep 1-19 Salt or Fresh Water Improved Deep-Moored Sweep (IDMS) 1-20 Salt or Fresh Water A Mk 2(g) Acoustic Sweep 1-21 Salt or Fresh Water TB-26 Acoustic Sweep 1-22 Salt or Fresh Water TB-27 Acoustic Sweep 1-23 Salt or Fresh Water M Mk 5(a) Magnetic Sweep (Straight Tail) 1-24 Salt Water Only M Mk 5(a) Magnetic Sweep (Configuration C) 1-25 Salt Water Only M Mk 6(a) Magnetic Sweep (Diverted Loop) 1-26 Salt Water Only M Mk 6(h) Magnetic Sweep (Diverted Loop) 1-27 Salt or Fresh Water M Mk 7(b) Magnetic Sweep (Double Diverted Loop) 1-28 Salt or Fresh Water M Mk 5(a) TB-26 (Diverted) Combination Influence Sweep 1-29 Salt Water Only M Mk 5(a) TB-27 (Diverted) Combination Influence Sweep 1-30 Salt Water Only M Mk 6(a) TB-26 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep 1-31 Salt Water Only M Mk 6(a) TB-27 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep 1-32 Salt Water Only M Mk 6(h) TB-26 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep 1-33 Salt or Fresh Water M Mk 6(h) TB-27 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep 1-34 Salt or Fresh Water FA2 with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep 1-35 Salt Water Only FA2 with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep 1-36 Salt Water Only FA2A with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep 1-37 Salt or Fresh Water FA2A with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep 1-38 Salt or Fresh Water

1-24 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-16. Single O-Type Moored Minesweep

1-25 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-17. Double O-Type Moored Minesweeping

1-26 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 1-18. Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS)

1-27 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 1-19. Team Deep Sweep

1-28 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 1-20. Improved Deep-Moored Sweep (IDMS)

1-29 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-21. A Mk 2(g) Acoustic Sweep

1-30 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-22. TB-26 Acoustic Sweep

1-31 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-23. TB-27 Acoustic Sweep

1-32 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-24. M Mk 5(a) Magnetic Sweep (Straight Tail)

1-33 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-25. M Mk 5(a) Magnetic Sweep (Configuration C)

1-34 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-26. M Mk 6(a) Magnetic Sweep (Diverted Loop)

1-35 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-27. M Mk 6(h) Magnetic Sweep (Diverted Loop)

1-36 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-28. M Mk 7(b) Magnetic Sweep (Double Diverted Loop)

1-37 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-29. M Mk 5(a) TB-26 (Diverted) Combination Influence Sweep

1-38 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-30. M Mk 5(a) TB-27 (Diverted) Combination Influence Sweep

1-39 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-31. M Mk 6(a) TB-26 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep

1-40 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-32. M Mk 6(a) TB-27 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep

1-41 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-33. M Mk 6(h) TB-26 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep

1-42 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-34. M Mk 6(h) TB-27 (Astern) Combination Influence Sweep

1-43 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-35. FA2 with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep

1-44 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-36. FA2 with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep

1-45 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-37. FA2A with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep

1-46 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-38. FA2A with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep

1-47 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Table 1-6. Acoustic Minesweeping Equipment

NOMENCLATURE DESIGNATION PART NSN COMMON NUMBER NAME

Acoustic Device, A Mk 2(g) A Mk 2 (g) 10798 & 1075-00-224-8945 Rattle Bars 11744 Automatic Control Unit SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V) 6155460 1650-01-361-1116 ACU Cable Assembly, Acoustic Power CX-13260/SLQ-37(V) 5781273 1075-00-782-9881 APC Dynamic Braking Unit MX-10746/SLQ-37(V) 61554185 6110-01-360-2720 DBU Power Converter Unit (Acoustic) CV-3846/SLQ-37(V) 6155300 1350-01-375-7054 PCU Towed Body (Acoustic) TB-26 TB-26/SLQ-37(V) 6375386 1075-01-368-2482 TB-26 Towed Body (Acoustic) TB-27 TB-27/SLQ-37(V) 6375400 1075-01-368-2483 TB-27

1-9.8 Dynamic Braking Unit, MX-10746/SLQ-37(V). The Dynamic Braking Unit (DBU), MX-10746/SLQ-37(V) (Figure 1-41) slows the motor of the TB-26 Towed Body. The DBU is a rigidly mounted static device, located in the Auxiliary Machine Room (AMR), and functions when the TB-26 motor slows. As the PCU motor operating voltage is being removed, the towed body motor begins to act like a generator. Power generated by the motor is shunted by the Dynamic Braking Module in the PCU to the DBU where it is absorbed by large wattage resistors. By absorbing motor-generated power, the DBU effectively produces a braking effect on the motor. This braking effect enables the towed body motor to respond quickly to commands from the PCU during operation. The DBU operates only when the motor speed is decreasing and is used only with the TB-26.

1-9.9 Cable Assembly, Acoustic Power, CX-13260/SLQ-37(V). The Acoustic Power Cable (APC) CX-13260/SLQ-37(V) (Figure 1-42) is designed to tow and supply power to the TB-26 and TB-27 acoustic devices. The APC provides the means to conduct electrical power to operate the acoustic devices at an extended distance from the ship, contributing to the ship's safety during minesweeping operations. The APC is capable of taking all of the towing strain of the TB-26 or TB-27, in addition to carrying the electrical current required to operate either device. The APC contains four conductors and is 1,650 feet long. The APC has two non-buoyant sections and a buoyant section. Buoyancy is provided by Polyethylene foam molded around the APC cable.

1-9.10 TB motor control voltages are provided by the PCU and are applied to the APC bulkhead connector (Figure 1-43). After the TB has been properly deployed, the inboard end of the APC cable is plugged into APC bulkhead connector. This connection then provides operating voltage from the PCU to the TB and feedback from the TB to the PCU.

1-9.11 Towed Body, Acoustic, TB-26/SLQ-37(V) . Acoustic Device TB-26 (Figure 1-44) is an electric, motor-driven, mechanical oscillator providing a controlled source of low frequency acoustic signals for use in sweeping acoustic mines. TB-26 is designed to operate underwater. During minesweeping operations, it is towed by a sweep vessel with its weight supported by a size 0 float. The device is connected and controlled electrically through the APC by the ACU and the PCU on the MCM ship. Two opposed diaphragms inside the TB oscillate to generate acoustic signals. The signal frequency is determined by the speed of the motor and the eccentrics on the mechanism crankshaft. The Mk 2 Mod 2 eccentric mechanism is installed in the device. TB-26 consists of a watertight housing that contains the electrical components, eccentric mechanism, diaphragms, and pedestal assembly. The entire device weighs approximately 2800 pounds and operates with a 7.5 HP 30A, 220V motor.

1-48 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-39. Automatic Control Unit (ACU)

1-49 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-40. Power Converter Unit

Figure 1-41. Dynamic Braking Unit (DBU)

1-50 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 1-42. Acoustic Power Cable (APC)

1-51 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-43. APC Bulkhead Connector

Figure 1-44. Acoustic Device TB-26

1-52 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

1-9.12 Towed Body, Acoustic, TB-27/SLQ-37(V). Acoustic Device TB-27 (Figure 1-45) is an electric, motor-driven, mechanical device that produces a controlled sound output for sweeping acoustic mines. The APC tows the TB-27 behind the ship through the minefield. The PCU on board the ship transmits a DC voltage through the APC to operate the motor within the watertight acoustic device. The motor drives a hammer into a steel diaphragm causing it to vibrate. By varying the motor speed, the operator can select a sound intensity and frequency appropriate for sweeping mines. The functioning components of the acoustic device are the diaphragm, the striker assembly, the eccentric shaft assembly, and the motor. Within the striker assembly, an eccentric controls the movement of a spring-driven hammer. The striker operates as a piston and strikes the diaphragm at a frequency governed by motor speed. The eccentric shaft assembly is a bearing-mounted shaft connected through an eccentric and ball and socket arrangement to the striker assembly. The eccentric shaft is rotated by a v-belt driven by the motor. The motor is 1.5 horsepower, 240 Vdc, shunt-wound unit. It receives its controlling voltage from the PCU on board the ship. The Acoustic Device, TB-27 consists of a tail assembly, shell assembly, sound box assembly, and dome assembly.

Figure 1-45. Acoustic Device TB-27

1-53 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

1-9.13 Acoustic Device, A Mk 2(g), 10798 & 11744. Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) (Figure 1-46) is a mechanical device that produces acoustic sounds used to counter acoustic influence mines. The sound is produced by turbulent waterflow between and around bars and does not require electrical power. The device is towed vertically through the water and is actuated by the flow of water between its parallel pipes, creating a venturi effect. This waterflow causes the pipes or bars to hit each other with great force. The output increases with speed. The A Mk 2(g) has a relatively short life because of the mechanical stress placed on its parts. This stress increases in proportion to the speed of tow. The device is subject to fouling by weeds and debris. During turns, it has a tendency to stop producing sound unless its speed through the water is maintained. An auxiliary depressor is used to prevent excessive hogging of the sweep wire during high speed sweeping operations.

1-9.14 The A Mk 2(g) consists of three 3/4-inch parallel pipes held in a frame at each end. Two 30-inch parallel pipes or bars are mounted at each end on swing arms that are free to oscillate in the center of the frame. The swing arms are also mounted on two end plates that are used to attach the towing bridle. The device is manufactured from Corrosive Resistant Extruded Steel (CRES) and weighs approximately 135 pounds. The auxiliary depressor is manufactured of stainless steel and weighs 15 pounds.

1-10 AN/SLQ-37(V)3 MAGNETIC MINESWEEPING EQUIPMENT.

1-10.1 Magnetic minesweeping equipment is designed to simulate magnetic signatures of steel-hulled ships. These signatures are electromagnetically produced by pulsing current through magnetic minesweeping cables.

1-10.2 Magnetic voltage waveforms, generated by the ACU, are sent to the ships' magnetic minesweeping generator equipment (Figures 1-47 and 1-48), where they are reduced to operating voltages used by the ships' Magnetic Minesweeping Gas Turbine Generator (MMGTG) (Figure 1-49). Output from the MMGTG is eventually applied to magnetic minesweeping cables via the magnetic minesweeping cable receptacle (tailbox) (Figure 1-50).

1-10.3 Magnetic minesweeping cables are listed in Table 1-7 and are discussed in the following paragraphs. Controls and indicators for the ships' magnetic minesweeping generator equipment are explained in S6265-AP-MMA-010/66076 (MCM 1 – 8) and S9314-CS-MMA-010 (MCM 9 – 14).

1-10.4 During magnetic minesweeping operations, the inboard pigtail connectors of the coax cable (Figure 1-51) are plugged into the tailbox. When the tailbox SAFE/RUN switch (Figure 1-50) is placed in the RUN position, pulsed voltages are applied through the tailbox to the magnetic cables. As the polarity of the applied voltage oscillates between positive and negative potential, magnetic fields build and collapse around certain portions of the cables and emulate the magnetic signature of a passing ship (Figure 1-9).

1-10.5 Data stored in the ACU and used to generate magnetic waveforms is classified, however, none of the system components or their operation is classified. Specific mine types countered and the effectiveness of this system are also classified.

1-10.6 Coaxial Magnetic Cable CA-1453 Assembly (Coax Cable). The Coax cable assembly (Figure 1-52) consists of a heavy section (air cooled) and buoyant section (water cooled) spliced together to form a single finished 801-foot long cable assembly. This heavy-buoyant splice must be awash at all times during towing. With a cable diameter of 6.14 inches, power winch termination diameter 9.75 inches and a heavy-buoyant splice diameter of 9.45 inches, cable CA-1453 is coaxial construction so that there is no magnetic field close to the ship.

1-54 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-46. Acoustic Device, A Mk 2(g) (Rattle Bars)

1-55 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-47. MCM 1 – 8, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment

1-56 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-48. MCM 9 – 14, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment

1-57 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-49. Magnetic Minesweeping Generator

1-58 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-50. Magnetic Cable Terminal Box (Tailbox)

Table 1-7. Magnetic Minesweeping Cables

NOMENCLATURE DESIGNATION PART NUMBER COMMON NAME

Magnetic Cable Assembly, CA-1453 7498406 Coax Cable Coax Magnetic Cable Assembly, S CA-1454 7498423 S-Cable Magnetic Cable Assembly, CX-13263/SLQ-37(V) 1449611 K-4 or Electrode Electrode K-4 Magnetic Cable Assembly, CL CA-1454 7498423 CL-Cable Magnetic Cable Assembly, CX-13266/SLQ-37(V) 5990514 TJ or Tow Jumper Tow Jumper TJ Pigtails, Inboard — — — 7498419-1 Short Leg Inboard Electrode 7498419-2 Long Leg Inboard Electrode Pigtails, Outboard — — — 7498420 Outboard Pigtail

1-59 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-51. Coax Heavy Section Connected to Tailbox

Figure 1-52. Coax Cable CA-1453

1-60 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

1-10.7 Magnetic Cable Assembly CA-1454. The CA-1454 cable (Figure 1-53) may be used as a S-Cable section (S-Cable) or as a Connecting Link (CL-Cable). The CA-1454 cable assembly is 450 foot long with a diameter 3.67 inches. It connects to the outboard long leg breakout (two lengths make up a 900-foot S section) using 11-foot 6-inch outboard pigtails. A single length of CA-1454 is used as a connecting link for closed loop minesweeping.

1-10.8 Magnetic Cable Assembly, Electrode K-4, CX-13264/SLQ-37(V). The K-4 Electrode (Figure 1-54) is a concentric stranded copper conductor cable covered with cotton tape and seine twine braid. The cable section is 150 feet long and is terminated with flat lugs at both ends. K-4 Electrodes are attached to coax and S-Cables, as required for specific magnetic minesweeping configurations.

1-10.9 Pigtail Assembly. Pigtail assemblies are used to aid in making connections and interfaces between cable configurations. Pigtails (Figure 1-55) are further identified as inboard and outboard pigtails.

1-10.10 Four inboard pigtails are used. Two inboard pigtails are 12 feet 1-1/2 inches long, fitted with a crimp-on lug connector on one end and a barrel terminal (2-inch diameter) on the other end. These pigtails connect to the outer conductor (short leg) winch termination and tailbox. The coax section inboard end is terminated with an inner conductor (long leg) and an outer conductor (short leg). These conductors are connected to the tailbox via pigtails that are terminated with contact plugs that are plugged into the tailbox during magnetic minesweeping operations.

1-10.11 The other two inboard pigtails are 11 feet 5-3/4 inches long, fitted with a crimp-on lug connector on one end and a barrel terminal (1-1/2-inch diameter) on the other end. These pigtails connect to the inner conductor (long leg) winch termination and tailbox.

1-10.12 Outboard pigtails are 11 feet 6 inches long, both ends are fitted with crimp-on lug connectors and are used to connect Coax cable to CA-1454 cable, CA-1454 cables together, and are used as the cable in the TJ Jumper.

1-10.13 K-4 Blank with Clamps (Figure 1-56) has holes for 5/8-inch cap screws, is 5.25 inches long by 2.28 inches wide, and is made from 3/4-inch-thick aluminum alloy shaped to interface the connection between the K-4 breakout and K-4 electrode or pigtail, as the configuration requires.

Figure 1-53. Cable Assembly CA-1454 (Typical)

1-61 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 1-54. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, K-4 Electrode

1-62 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-55. Pigtail Assemblies

Figure 1-56. K-4 Blank and Clamp

1-63 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

1-10.14 Cable Assembly, Magnetic Sweep, Tow Jumper (TJ). The Tow Jumper (TJ) (Figure 1-57) is used to electrically connect the S-Cable and the CL-Cable. Once joined, an electrical loop is formed and the jumper provides a towing point. The TJ consists of an outboard pigtail. A bronze towing tab is attached to the section between the connectors and a neoprene sleeve cushions and protects the cable under the towing eye.

1-10.15 Associated System Equipment. Influence minesweeping requires the use of equipment common to both the An/SLQ-37(V)3 and the AN/SLQ-38 systems. This equipment was previously identified in Table 1-4 and is further described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 1-57. Tow Jumper TJ, Typical

1-64 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

1-11 AN/SLQ-38 MECHANICAL MINESWEEPING EQUIPMENT.

1-11.1 Mechanical minesweeping requires the use of equipment common to both the AN/SLQ-38 and the AN/SLQ-37 systems. Permanent type equipment (cable reels, minesweep winch, etc.) are mounted on the fantail (Figure 1-15). Portable heavy equipment (kites, floats, etc.) are also located on the fantail. Smaller and lighter-weight equipment are stored in the minesweeping gear storeroom, where it is readily accessible via an access hatch located on the port side of the fantail.

1-11.2 Controls for the Minesweeping Winch (Figures 1-58 and 1-59) are located on the forward side of the winch. During minesweeping operations tension applied to sweep wires is indicated on both the Line Tension Monitors located above the winch controls and on the Line Tension Main Display Unit (Figure 1-60) located on the 01 level (port, aft). During minesweeping conditions, the ships' Hospital Corpsman (HM) normally mans a position that allows him to monitor both the main display unit and the safety of personnel working on the fantail.

1-11.3 Aboard MCM 1 – 8, the magnetic cable reel (Figure 1-61) is operated by controls located on the port side of the reel and the acoustic cable reel (Figure 1-62) is operated by controls located on starboard side of the reel. Aboard MCM 9 – 14 the magnetic cable reel (Figure 1-63) and acoustic cable reel (Figure 1-64) are operated by the Magnetic and Acoustic Reel Control Station (Figure 1-65) located on the 01 level (starboard, aft). In the event that one of the Hydraulic Power Units (HPU) should fail, the Mechanical Winch Control Valve is used to effect emergency cross over of hydraulic pressure from one HPU to another. Additional common use equipment is listed in Table 1-8 and is discussed in the following paragraphs.

1-11.4 5/8-Inch Sweep Wire, MX-10597/SLQ-38. Two 5/8-inch sweep wires are installed as shipboard equipment on MCM Class ships. Each consists of 4000 feet of 7 x 7 wire rope constructed of CRES and faired 700 feet at both ends. The fairing provides a decrease in harmonics and improves handling characteristics. Left-hand lay wire is used for a port sweep and right-hand lay wire is used for a starboard sweep to eliminate hog and sag while minesweeping. For influence sweeps, the sweep wire is generally used to divert the sweep or, as part of certain combination sweeps, to prevent fouling. Sweep wires shall be end for ended after 300 hours of total towing time.

1-11.5 5/8-Inch Depressor Wire, MX-10601/SLQ-38. The depressor wire is 7 x 7, 5/8-inch right-hand lay wire rope made of CRES 1800-feet long with a hardeye swaged on the outboard end. The depressor wire is used to take the inboard end of the sweep wire to the proper towing depth.

1-11.6 Depressor Bridle, MX-10602/SLQ-38 (3-Legged Bridle Chain). When a multiplane kite is rigged as a depressor, it is fitted with a 3-legged chain. The 3-legged bridle chain provides a means of attaching the depressor wire and span pendants, while allowing the depressor to assume the proper altitude when towed through the water. When towed, force of water on the kite vanes forces the depressor down to a depth determined by a combination of towing speed and length of depressor wire. As the depressor is forced down, it carries the inboard end of the sweep wire to the proper depth. The 3-legged bridle chain weighs 130 pounds.

1-65 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-58. Minesweeping Winch (MCM 1 – 8), Typical

1-66 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-59. Minesweeping Winch (MCM 9 – 14), Typical

1-67 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-60. Line Tension Payout System, Main Display Unit, Typical Faceplate

1-68 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-61. Magnetic Cable Reel (MCM 1 – 8), Typical

1-69 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-62. Acoustic Cable Reel (MCM 1 – 8), Typical

1-70 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-63. Magnetic Cable Reel (MCM 9 – 14), Typical

1-71 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-64. Acoustic Cable Reel (MCM 9 – 14), Typical

1-72 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-65. Magnetic and Acoustic Reel Control Station (MCM 9 – 14) (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-73 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-65. Magnetic and Acoustic Reel Control Station (MCM 9 – 14) (Sheet 2 of 2)

1-74 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 1-8. Mechanical Minesweeping Equipment

NOMENCLATURE DESIGNATION PART NSN COMMON NAME NUMBER

Cutter Mk 12 MX-10609/SLQ-38 3297847 1075-00-340-6803 Cutter Mk 12 Cutter Mk 14 MX-10610/SLQ-38 3286189 1075-00-507-1201 Cutter Mk 14 Cutter Mk 15 MX-10611/SLQ-38 3300189 1075-00-332-5834 Cutter Mk 15 Cutter Mk 9 MX-10608/SLQ-38 1207908 1075-00-265-0677 Cutter Mk 9 CutterMk12with — — — 3297847 1075-00-340-6803 CutterMk12 Elevating Fin Assembly 6375432 1075-01-339-3693 Elevating Fin Assembly CutterMk14with — — — 3286189 1075-00-507-1201 CutterMk14 Elevating Fin Assembly 6375431 1075-01-337-4662 Elevating Fin Assembly Depressor Bridle, 3-legged MX-10602/SLQ-38 3271874 1075-00-294-2291 3-legged Bridle chain Depressor Wire, 5/8-in. MX-10601 6375334 4010-01-296-5861 Depressor Wire Float, Minesweeping, Size 0 MX-10614/SLQ-38 6169054 1075-01-357-9948 Size 0 Float Float, Minesweeping, Size 1 MX-10606/SLQ-38 6169065 1075-LL-H32-5740 Size 1 Float Grip, Cable, Klein, 1/2-inch MX-10612/SLQ-38 RR-G-691 5120-00-224-2661 Klein Grip to 3/4-inch Grip, Cable, Klein, 3/16-inch MX-10612/SLQ-38 MIL-G-3210 5120-00-238-4436 Klein Grip to 1/2-inch Multipurpose Kite, Size 1 — — — 1464351 1075-00-391-9280 Otter or Depressor Otter Bridle, 4-legged chain MX-10604/SLQ-38 3271875 1075-00-294-2292 4-legged Bridle Sheave, Instrumented — — — Sheave Sweep Wire, 5/8-inch, RH MX-10597/SLQ-38 RH 6376336 4010-01-302-9008 Sweep Wire Sweep Wire, 5/8-inch, LH MX-10597/SLQ-38 LH 6376335 4010-01-291-1611 Sweep Wire Swivel Assembly Mk 9 — — — 25480-1 4030-01-371-1927 Mk 9 Swivel Wedge Stop — — — 6375299 1075-LL-H32-5741 Wedge Stop

1-11.7 Multiplane Kite, Otter, Depressor, Size 1, 1464351. The multiplane kite, size 1 is designed for use as either an otter or depressor. The rigging determines whether the multiplane kite is a depressor or an otter based on the type of bridle selected. The basic purpose of the multiplane kite is to give depth to the sweep cable and the depressor wires during minesweeping operations. The design allows the multiplane kite to perform various functions in a minesweeping configuration. When used as an otter (Figure 1-66), it provides span and depth to the outboard end of the attached sweep wire. Bridle chains are used to connect the multiplane kites to the sweep/depressor wires and to govern kite function in the minesweeping configuration. Some sweeps employ both the depressor and otter setups. The multiplane kite is constructed of nonmagnetic CRES and weighs approximately 500 pounds.

1-75 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 1-66. Multiplane Kite Rigged as an Otter

1-76 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

1-11.8 Otter Bridle, MX-10604/SLQ-38 (4-Legged Bridle Chain) (Figure 1-66). When a multiplane kite size 1 is rigged as an otter, it is fitted with a 4-legged bridle chain assembly called an Otter Bridle. The bridle chain assembly provides a means of attaching the sweep wire and float pendant to the otter, allowing the otter to assume the proper attitude when towed through the water giving span and depth to the outboard end of the sweep wire. The Otter Bridle weighs 170 pounds.

1-11.9 Depressor Bridle (3-Legged Bridle Chain) (Figure 1-67). When a multiplane kite size 1 is rigged as a depressor, it is fitted with a 3-legged bridle chain assembly called a Depressor Bridle. The bridle chain assembly provides a means of attaching the sweep wire/s via the span pendant/s to the depressor, allowing the sweep wires to assume the proper depth when towed through the water, giving depth and span to the inboard end of the sweep. A depressor used on port "O" gear will have a starboard sheer and a depressor used on Starboard "O" gear will have a port sheer. The Depressor Bridles weighs 130 pounds.

1-11.10 Float, Type 0 Size 1, MX-10606/SLQ-38. Minesweeping floats are to provide buoyancy for minesweeping otters or acoustic devices during both mechanical or influence minesweeping operations. The size 1 float, made of stainless steel, will support either an otter or the acoustic device TB-27. The float serves as a marker for the approximate outboard end of the sweep, allowing the sweep width to be checked by observation from the ship. Otter performance may also be visually checked by observing the depth at which the float rides.

1-11.11 Floats are constructed of nonmagnetic CRES. The floats are issued complete with the body, stabilizing fin, float bail, lifting bail, fair lead tube, nose connection and the flagstaff socket as one unit. The flag with black and red horizontal stripes (black on top for starboard sweep and red on top for port sweep), the flagstaff, and the Xenon flasher are issued separately.

1-11.12 Float, Type 0 Size 0, MX-10614/SLQ-38. The size 0 float (Figure 1-68) is similar to the size 1 float, as previously described, except that it is made of fiberglass and is used with acoustic device TB-26. The float serves as a marker for the approximate outboard end of the sweep, allowing the sweep width to be checked by observation from the ship.

1-11.13 Minesweeping Cutters. Various types of minesweeping cutters, both mechanical and explosive, are commonly used. Mechanical cutters are designed to sever the mine mooring cable (wire), when it is jammed into the jaws of the cutter. Explosive cutters sever the mooring chain by means of an explosive-driven cutting punch. Current minesweeping cutter equipment listings contain only one mechanical cutter (Cutter Mk 9) and several types of explosive cutters, most common of which are Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0, and Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0. Mechanical cutters have the advantages of being safe and simple and require a speed of 6 knots to cut mine moorings. They may, however snag the mooring without cutting it, thereby damaging or affecting the performance of the gear and presenting a hazard to the minesweeper on recovery. Minesweeping cutters are further designated as end cutters or intermediate cutters. The end cutter protects the otter from a mine mooring wire. The intermediate cutters are located inboard of the end cutter along the sweep wire. In addition, the Mk 15 cutters are secured on sweep and depressor wires on the MCM fantail. During sweeping operations, these cutters are designed to cut the towing bridle, sweep wire, or depressor wire in an emergency.

1-11.14 Cutters Mk 12 and Mk 14 assemblies are used as intermediate cutters. The Cutter Mk 14 assembly has a quadruple cutting capability. If chain moorings are anticipated. Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 with stud link chain cutting capability would be required vice the Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0.

1-77 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-67. Depressor Bridle

1-78 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-68. Float (Size 0) Rigged for Acoustic Minesweeping

1-79 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

1-11.15 Safety precautions for explosive cutters are contained in Chapter 2. Cutter spacings for various scopes of sweep wire are contained in tables in Job Sheets. Maintenance procedures for explosive cutters are contained in SW570-F0-MMO-040.

1-11.16 Cutter Assembly Mk 9, MX-10608/SLQ-38. Cutter Mk 9 (Figure 1-69), with ball bearing swivel attached, is a mechanical end cutter that weighs approximately 58 pounds. The cutter is made from a nonmagnetic material, with the exception of the cutting blade which is tungsten tool steel. The Cutter Mk 9 is interchangeable for port and starboard sweep wires. The elevating fin, guide, shackle pins, and cutting blades must be changed with the left-hand blade being inserted first.

1-11.17 The Cutter Mk 9 can be rigged as either a port or starboard cutter, by reversing the elevating fin and cutting blades. By laying the cutter on the deck with the jaw facing forward, the elevating fin side down, and the cutting blades on top, the large shackle will point to the side of the ship for which the cutter is rigged.

1-11.18 The Cutter Mk 9 connects the sweep wire to the otter and provides protection to the otter. For operation and maintenance of the Cutter Mk 9, refer to SW570-F0-MMO-040. Cutting capacity is listed in NWP 3-15.

1-11.19 Cutter Assembly, Mk 12 Mod 2, MX-10609/SLQ-38. Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 (Figure 1-70) is an intermediate explosive cutter. When mounted on the elevating fin, the total weight is approximately 25.5 pounds. This cutter assembly is interchangeable from starboard to port sweeps without modification. The cutter assembly is made from non-magnetic material.

1-11.20 The expendable parts are the cutting punch, anvil, punch shear pin, anvil screws, trip pin, and Cartridge Mk 192.

1-11.21 The safety features are the hydraulic safety mechanism, plunger safety pin, breech safety pin, and a 100-pound pressure requirement on the trip pin.

1-11.22 The Cutter Mk 12 is used against mooring wire and mooring chain. For operation and maintenance of the Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, refer to SW570-F0-MMO-040. Cutting capacity is listed in NWP 3-15.

1-11.23 Cutter Assembly, Mk 14 Mod 0, MX-10610/SLQ-38. Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0 (Figure 1-71) is an intermediate explosive cutter. With four cutter bodies mounted on the elevating fin, it becomes a quadruple cutter assembly weighing approximately 32.5 pounds. This cutter assembly is interchangeable from starboard to port sweeps without modification. The cutter assembly is made from non-magnetic material.

1-11.24 The expendable parts are the anvil, anvil screw, trip pin, cutting punch, punch shear pin, and Cartridge Mk 152.

1-11.25 Safety features include hydraulic safety mechanism and a breech safety pin.

1-11.26 The Cutter Mk 14 is used against mooring wires only. For operation and maintenance of the Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0, refer to SW570-F0-MMO-040. Cutting capacity is listed in NWP 3-15.

1-80 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-69. Mk 9 Cutter Assembly

1-81 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-70. Mk 12 Cutter Assembly

1-82 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-71. Mk 14 Cutter Assembly

1-83 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

1-11.27 Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, MS-10611/SLQ-38. Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0 (Figure 1-72) is a cartridge-operated device designed to cut wire rope. It can be used to cut sweep and depressor wires and towing bridle in emergencies. The cutter weighs approximately 15 pounds and is designed with a captive cutting punch, so there is no free-flying projectile when it is fired with arresting disc above water. Care, however, should be taken to keep all personnel clear of the wire when it is cut, as it may whip if cut under tension.

For underwater use, the arresting disk is removed and personnel should not be within 25 feet of the cutter.

1-11.28 The cutter must be secured on the wire rope by tightening the barrel against the die. The barrel retaining unit thumbscrew must be tightened to prevent the cutter assembly from loosening because of vibration of the wire.

1-11.29 The expendable parts are the punch, punch shear pin, cartridge, and arresting disc. The safety feature is the safety pin on the firing pin trip. Two types of cartridges are used (Table 1-9), dependent on wire sizes and environment. For operation and maintenance of the Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, refer to SW570-F0-MMO-040. Cutting capacity is listed in NWP 3-15.

Table 1-9. Cartridge Types

CARTRIDGE WIRE ROPE SIZE INCLUSIVE

LOAD HEAD COLOR SIZE USE

Mk 154-Heavy (Type H) Red 1/4- to 51/64-inch Above Water Use Mk 155-Underwater Heavy (Type U) Blue 1/4- to 51/64-inch Underwater Use

1-11.30 Klein Cable Grip, MX-10612/SLQ-38. The Klein grip (Figure 1-73) is used on MCM class ships to stop-off wire ropes and comes in two sizes, 3/16 to 1/2 inch and 1/2 to 3/4 inch. The Klein grip is made of stainless steel and weighs approximately 6 to 8 pounds. The grips are used on the fantail to stop-off or secure wire ropes, thereby preventing them from paying out.

1-11.31 Wedge Stop, 6375299. The wedge stop assembly (Figure 1-74) is a device designed specifically to hold cutters, shackles, and blocks in place on a sweep wire. The wedge stop comprises two wedge shaped inserts and a sleeve that are installed on the sweep wire at the point where the gear is to be affixed. Two wedge inserts are placed over the sweep wire and a wedge stop installation tool is used to hammer the sleeve over the top of the insert, securing it to the sweep wire.

1-84 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-72. Cutter Mk 15

Figure 1-73. Klein Grip

1-85 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-74. Wedge Stop

1-12 EXPLOSIVE ORDNANCE HANDLERS CERTIFICATION RECORD.

1-12.1 Table 1-10 shows the Levels of Certification and the personnel who are required to be certified to handle the explosive cutters. Figure 1-75 illustrates the Record of Certification form to be used.

1-12.2 The Record of Certification shall be maintained in accordance with applicable instructions as listed on the form.

Table 1-10. Levels of Certification for Explosives Handlers

CERTIFICATION LEVELS PERSONNEL REQUIRING TRAINING

In training (IT) All Fantail personnel Team Member (TM) Handlers, Rig Captain, Riggers, Safety Observer Individual (I) Handlers, Rig Captain, Riggers, Safety Observer Team Leader (TL) Rig Captain, Petty Officer in Charge, Safety Observer Quality Assurance (QA) Petty Officer in Charge, Safety Observer Safety Observer (SO) Gunners Mater, 1st Lieutenant, Chief Petty Officer in Charge

1-86 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-75. Certification Record Form

1-87 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

1-13 SUPPORT EQUIPMENT.

1-13.1 Components of the Boatswains Mate Tool Kit are listed in Table 1-11. Components of the Electricians Mate Tool Kit are listed in Table 1-12 and Table 1-13 for the connections.

1-14 NAVIGATIONAL AIDS.

1-14.1 A list of navigational equipment used during sweep operations and test equipment used for the AN/SLQ-37(V)3 system is contained in Table 1-14.

1-14.2 Master Reference Buoy (MRB) F Mk 6 Mod 0. The Master Reference Buoy (Figure 1-76) is a temporary reference marker. It is used as the master reference marker during minesweeping and other countermeasures operations to guide craft making successive tracks across an area. The marker is a spar-type buoy with a long, cylindrical buoyant section of small diameter. The assembled buoy weighs approximately 175 pounds and is approximately 47 feet long. It is usually configured with a radar reflector, flags, and a flashing light attached to the upper tube for purposes of location and identification.

1-14.3 Dan Buoy Type 3 Mk 12 Mod 0. The Dan Buoy is utilized to provide a temporary navigational reference. It is used principally for minesweepers making successive laps across an area, marking swept channels, marking boundaries of areas to be swept, and marking positions of discovered mines. Dan Buoys can be configured as Single Dan (Figure 1-77) or Double Dan (Figure 1-78). All Dan Buoys are composed of three main functional assembly groups: marker assembly, float assembly, and mooring assembly. Addition of the Xenon flasher and spherical radar reflector improves reliability and detectability.

Table 1-11. Boatswain Mate Tool Kit

QUANTITY NOMENCLATURE NSN 1 Hammer, 2 lb 5120-00-187-1034 1 Kit, Tool, Mk 12 1075-00-340-6805 1 Kit, Tool, Mk 14 1075-00-024-0220 A/R Marline 4020-00-240-2185 2 Marlinespike, 8-inch 5120-00-221-2731 2 Marlinespike, 16-inch 5120-00-288-7769 2 Pliers, linesman with cutters 5120-00-239-8251 2 Pliers, slip joint, 8-inch 5120-00-240-6217 1 Tape, electrical, roll 5970-00-061-6715 A/R Wire, seizing, 1/16 4010-00-641-6185 2 Wrench, adjustable, 12-inch 5120-00-264-3794

1-88 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 1-12. Electricians Tool Kit

QUANTITY NOMENCLATURE NSN/PN SPARE QUANTITY (STOWED SEPARATELY)

1 CN Antiseize * Open Purchase — — — 4 EA Boot (P/B) 5970-01-519-3342 1 EA 3 EA Boot (S/B) 5970-01-519-3356 1 EA 12 EA Brush, acid swabbing 7920-00-514-2417 — — — 2 EA Clamp, hose 1-9/16 to 2-1/2-inch 4730-00-204-3481 — — — 2 EA Clamp, hose 2-5/16 to 3-1/4-inch 4730-01-273-3672 — — — 12 EA Clamp, hose 2-1/2 to 5-1/2-inch 4730-01-143-9460 — — — 6 EA Clamp, hose 3-1/16 to 4-inch 4730-00-277-7132 — — — 2 EA Clamp, hose 5-5/8 to 8-1/2-inch 4730-01-444-7836 — — — 2 EA Grease, silicone * 9150-01-080-9652 — — — 1 EA Heat gun 4940-00-561-1002 — — — 4 EA Heat Shrink CRLS-5-24 — — — 4 EA Heat Shrink CRLS-6-24 — — — AR Heat Shrink 48-inch x 3-1/2-inch-1.18 inch 0099-LL-H61-6311 — — — 1 EA Knife 5110-00-240-5943 — — — — — — Lacing, stocking 0099-LL-H61-6314 2 EA 1 PT Lacquer, clear, spray * 8010-00-515-2487 — — — 1 PT Liquid, insulation, spray * Open Purchase — — — 1 TU Loctite * Open Purchase — — — 1 EA Lug, Lamitex 1075-00-372-6221 1 EA 1 EA Marlinespike, 16-inch 5120-00-288-7769 — — — 26 EA Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC 0099-LL-H61-6313 — — — 1 TU Petrox * Open Purchase — — — 2 EA Rasp, hand/bastard file, 10-inch 5110-00-233-9721 — — — 1 PG Sandpaper, fine 5350-00-721-8116 5 PG 4 EA Screw, cap, hex hd, aluminum, M16-2.0 x 30mm 0099-LL-H61-6312 2 EA 2 EA Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch 5305-00-226-9204 — — — 2 EA Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-inch 5305-00-226-9205 — — — 6 EA Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch 5305-00-226-9206 6 EA 2 EA Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch 5305-00-226-9208 — — — See footnote at end of table.

1-89 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 1-12. Electricians Tool Kit (Continued)

QUANTITY NOMENCLATURE NSN/PN SPARE QUANTITY (STOWED SEPARATELY)

2 EA Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 7-1/2-inch 0099-LL-H61-6310 2 EA 2 EA Screwdriver, flat tip 5120-00-293-3309 — — — 1 EA Sleeve (CK/P) 5970-01-519-3184 1 EA 1 EA Sleeve (CS/P) 5970-01-519-3170 1 EA 6 EA Sleeve (S/P) 5970-01-519-3176 2 EA 1 SE Socket set, 1/2-inch drive 5120-00-081-2307 — — — 6 RO Tape, black plastic 5970-00-150-2009 6 RO 6 RO Tape, self-vulcanizing 5970-00-061-7136 6 RO 6 RO Tape, insulation 5970-00-061-6715 6 RO 8 Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch 5310-00-614-3505 — — — 1 EA Wrench, adjustable, 8-inch 5120-00-240-5328 — — — 1 EA Wrench, adjustable 15-inch 5120-00-293-0008 — — — 1 SE Wrench, Allen, set (SM) 5120-00-935-4641 — — — * Hazardous Material.

Table 1-13. Part of Electricians Tool Kit Stowed Separately

QUANTITY NOMENCLATURE NSN/PN SPARE QUANTITY STOWED SEPARATELY

AR Tape, bitumized (Armor Bedding) BT 2 1 RO 1 EA Tester, spark gap Model 725 — — — 4 EA Pigtail, outboard 6150-01-519-0147 1 EA 1 EA Connector, Special Y 5935-01-286-4849 — — —

Table 1-14. Minesweeping Support Equipment

DESIGNATION PART NUMBER NSN NOMENCLATURE COMMON NAME

Mk 6 Mod 0 5781238 2050-00-951-6400 Master Reference MRB Buoy Type 3 Mk 12 Mod 0 6169242 2050-01-216-9251 Dan Buoy Dan Buoy TS-4144/P 6224282 4926-01-291-1662 Acoustic Test Set Acoustic Test Set Tester, Spark Gap

1-90 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

1-14.4 Acoustic Test Set TS-4144/P. The Acoustic Test Set (Figure 1-79) is used during PMS to measure the acoustic output of the Acoustic Devices TB-27 and TB-26 employed for influence minesweeping. Periodically, the acoustic output of each device is measured to ensure proper operation. Procedures for its maintenance and use are contained in SW570-F0-MMO-040.

1-15 REFERENCE DATA.

1-15.1 AN/SLQ-37(V) Influence Minesweeping System Capabilities. The capabilities of the AN/SLQ-37(V)3 and AN/SLQ-38 systems are summarized in Table 1-15.

1-15.2 Reference Publications. Reference publications are summarized in Table 1-16.

1-15.3 Tools and Test Equipment. Special tools are required to support influence minesweeping. Three pieces of test equipment, Acoustic Test Set TS-4144/P, Special Wrench, T-Handle Wrench 5100-01-406-6940 PN 5971746 are utilized during Acoustic PMS and the Spark Gap Tester Model 725 during Magnetic PMS.

1-15.4 Safe Working Loads. Safe working loads for influence minesweeping equipment are listed in Table 1-17.

1-15.5 Weight of SMCM Equipment. Weights of SMCM equipment are listed in Table 1-18.

1-91 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-76. Master Reference Buoy

1-92 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-77. Single Dan Buoy

1-93 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-78. Double Dan Buoy

1-94 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 1-79. Acoustic Test Set TS-4144/P

1-95 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 1-15. Capabilities

ITEM CAPABILITY

Minesweeping Neutralize Influence mines Neutralize Moored mines Minehunting None Clearance probability Exploratory/Expeditionary - minimal to none Clandestine/covert - none Assault lane clearance - deep water clearance AOA clearance - high probability of clearance Post-aggression - high probability of clearance Ordnance carried Minesweep Cutters Mk 9, 12, 13, 14, and 15 (as required) Minesweeping speed Mechanical - 11.5 kt max 1 Acoustic TB-26-8ktmax TB-27 - 10 kt max Magnetic MMk5(a)-10ktmax MMk6(a)-8ktmax MMk6(h)-7.5ktmax MMk7(b)-6.5ktmax Combination-8ktmax Minesweeping Regions Deep Water - greater than 200 ft Shallow Water - 40 to 200 ft 1 Gear can be towed at 11.5 kt, but can be unstable around 10.5 kt.

1-96 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Table 1-16. Reference Publications

PUBLICATION NUMBER TITLE

SW570-F0-MMO-040 MCM Operation and Maintenance Manual SW570-F0-MMM-020 Operation and Maintenance SG-1224A, Acoustic Control Unit (ACU) SW565-AB-MMM-030 (C) Waveforms, Specifications, Magnetic and Acoustic Influences SG-1224A Acoustic Control Unit (ACU) SW565-AB-MMM-040 Operation and Maintenance CV-3846 Power Converter Unit (PCU). S6265-AP-MMA-010/66076 Operational and Maintenance Magnetic Minesweep DC Generator S9086-KC-STM-010 Naval Ship's Technical Manual - Chapter 300 S9086-T4-STM-010 Naval Ship's Technical Manual - Chapter 589 S9086-UU-STM-010 Naval Ship's Technical Manual - Chapter 613 S9086-AA-STM-010 Naval Ship's Technical Manual - Chapter 001 S9314-CS-MMA-010 Non-Magnetic AC Generator (Pulse Fog Charger) NWP 12-5 Tactical Action Officer Handbook NWP 14 Underway Replenishment Hardware and Equipment Manual NWP 15-3 Explosive Ordnance Disposal NWP 3-15 (Series) Mine Countermeasures Operations NWP 3-15 (Series) MCM Planning and Procedures (General Instructions) NWP 3-15 (Series) MCM Planning and Procedures - Data Appendices NWP 3-15 (Series) MCM Planning and Procedures - Data Supplement NWP 3-15 (Series) Mine Countermeasures Operations NWP 3-15 (Series) Mining Operations NWP 3-15 (Series) Underwater Mine Countermeasures Operations NWP 65-10 MCM-1 Class Tactical Manual NWP 68-1 Passive Mine Countermeasures Systems and Tactics AHP 1 Allied Navigational Information in Time of War - Q System AHP 1 Supp 1 NATO Supplement to Allied Q Message System US SUPP TO AHP 7 VOL 3 Dormant Q Message Publication APP 4 Allied Maritime Messages AMP 14 Protection of Vessels from Electromagnetic Mines (or Electromagnetic Silencing) ATP 1 Vol. 1 Allied Maritime Tactical Insts and Procedures ATP 1 Vol. 2 Allied Maritime Tactical Signal and Maneuver Book ATP 6 Vol. 1 Allied Doctrine of Mine Warfare - Policy and Principles

1-97 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 1-16. Reference Publications (Continued)

PUBLICATION NUMBER TITLE

ATP 6 Vol. 2 Allied Doctrine of Mine Warfare - Planning and Evaluation of Mine Warfare Principles ATP 6 (B) Vol II Mine Countermeasures Operations Planning and Evaluation ATP 24 Tactical Instructions and Procedures or Conduct of Mine Countermeasures Operations ATP 24 (B) Vol I Mine Countermeasures Tactics and Execution AXP 5 MW Supp Mine Warfare Supplement to NATO Experimental Tactics and Amplifying Tactical Instructions CINCLANTFLT OPORD 2000-91 Commander In Chief, US Atlantic Fleet OPORD 2000-91 COMINEWARCOM OPORD 2000-92 Commander, Mine Warfare Command OPORD 2000-92 COMINEWARCOM TACMEMO Q-Route Survey MZ6010-1-90 OF 31 MAY 1990 COMUSMARDEZPAC OPLAN Deployed Ships Only 5000-86 COMNAVSURFLANTINST 5100.4 Electrical Safety and Tool Issue Programs for Forces Afloat (Series) FXP 5 Amphibious Warfare (AMW), Mine Warfare (MIW), and Naval Special Warfare (NSW), Exercises (U) ONI 2660H-002-yr Naval Mine Recognition Guide OPNAVINST 8950.2 Magnetic Silencing MCM-1 Combat Systems Doctrine MINEWARFARE PILOTS Q-Route Survey Data (SP1000 series) TA #15-yr MCM Threat Assessment N/A UNITED STATES COAST PILOTS N/A TIDE AND CURRENTS N/A FLEET GUIDES N/A NCSC notebook of Mine Countermeasures Experimental Tactics and NCSC notebook Supplement (U) (distributed by COMINEWARCOM ltr ser N4A/S001 of 2 Jan 1985) N/A MINE WARFARE PLANNING CHARTS MCMCH81000 (series) applicable areas Q Route Survey Data NAVSEA OP 4 Ammunition and Explosives Afloat

1-98 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 1-17. Safe Working Loads

COMPONENT SAFE WORKING LOAD (LBS)

Stern Cranes (port and stbd) Articulated 6000 5/8 inch Sweep Wire (7 x 7) 16,000 (Breaking strength 32,000) 5/8 inch Depressor Wire (7 x 7) 16,000 (Breaking strength 32,000) 1/2 inch Wire (6 x 19) 8,400 (21,000 Breaking strength) 5/16 inch Wire (6 x 19) 4,350 (8,700 Breaking strength)

Table 1-18. Weight of SMCM Equipment

COMPONENT IN AIR WEIGHT (LB) IN WATER WEIGHT (LB)

TB-27 Tow Body 1,300 500 flooded weight 1,850 TB-26 Tow Body 2,850 900 flooded weight 4,200 Size 0 Float 950 Reserve buoyancy 3,300 Size 1 Float 900 Reserve buoyancy 1,500 Multiplane Kite 500 N/A rigged as Otter 670 N/A rigged as Depressor 630 N/A Type 3 Dan Buoy 106 Net buoyancy 30 rigged 100 N/A Danforth Anchor 30 20 counterweight 48 28 MRB F Mk 6 Mod 0 175 N/A Anchor clump 300 N/A Danforth anchor 30 N/A counterweight 85 60 to 65 CA-1453 Coax Cable 10,800 N/A N/A CA-1454 S-Cable 1,940 N/A N/A K-4 Electrode 450 N/A Acoustic Power Tow Cable 5,600 N/A

1-99/(1-100 blank)

SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CHAPTER 2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2-1 INTRODUCTION.

2-1.1 Purpose. This chapter provides information relating to the safe use and operation in the AN/SLQ-37(V)3 Influence Minesweeping System and AN/SLQ-38 Mechanical Minesweeping System. In addition to safety issues discussed in this manual, forces afloat should comply with Navy Safety Precautions for Forces Afloat, OPNAVINST 5100.19 (series) Navy Occupational Safety and Health Program Manual, OPNAVINST 5100.23 (series), and Ammunition Afloat NAVSEA OP 4.

2-1.2 Scope. Mine countermeasures demand the employment of a wide variety of specialized equipment. This variety is dictated by the various types of mines that mine countermeasures forces are called upon to sweep. Minesweeping equipment may be subdivided into two basic types: mechanical gear, which depends upon physical contact between the sweep and the mine or its attachments; and influence gear, which is designed to actuate influence mines by simulating the influence signature of a ship’s magnetic, acoustic, pressure, or a combination of influences. Familiarity with the various types and configurations of minesweeping equipment, together with the relevant safety precautions, is essential for the successful completion of the mine countermeasures task.

2-1.3 Basic Safety Concepts. GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES The following general safety notices supplement the specific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in this manual. They are precautions that must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of the equipment covered herein. Refer to OPNAVINST 5100.19, Navy Safety Precautions for Forces Afloat for any situations that are not covered in the general or specific safety precautions. DO NOT REPAIR OR ADJUST ALONE Under no circumstances should repair or adjustment of energized equipment be attempted alone. The immediate presence of someone capable of rendering aid is required. Before making adjustments, be sure to protect against grounding. Adjustments should be made with the other hand free and clear of equipment. Even when power has been removed from equipment circuits, dangerous potentials may exist due to retention of charges by capacitors. Circuits must be grounded and all capacitors discharged before attempting repairs. TEST EQUIPMENT Ensure test equipment is within calibration, if applicable, and is in good condition. If a test meter must be held, ground the case of the meter before starting measurement. Do not touch live equipment or personnel working on live equipment when holding a test meter. Some types of measuring devices should not be grounded and should not be held when taking measurements. ELECTRICAL TAG-OUT INSTRUCTIONS Maintenance and operating personnel shall be familiar with electrical tag-out procedures. Colored tags (red for DANGER and yellow for CAUTION) shall be posted on circuit breaker power panels and equipment to alert personnel that an electrical power shutdown or equipment related problem exists. The red tag warns personnel that to operate the equipment could result in personnel injury or death. The yellow tag cautions personnel that to operate the equipment could result in damage to the equipment. A tag-out log and tagging procedures are maintained in the Engineering Control Station.

2-1 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 RESUSCITATION Personnel working with or near high voltages should be familiar with modern methods of resuscitation. Such information may be obtained from the Bureau of Medicine and Surgery. ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE This equipment contains circuit card assemblies sensitive to damage by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Use ESD precautionary procedures contained in DOD-STD-1686 and DOD-HDBK-263 when touching, removing, or inserting circuit card assemblies containing sensitive parts.

2-2 SYSTEM SAFETY ISSUES.

2-2.1 General Safety Precautions. a. Within one hour of any minesweeping operation, all personnel concerned shall be briefed on the particular operation and given a thorough safety review. b. Ensure proper functioning of ship’s degaussing system during all minesweeping operations in accordance with ship’s instruction. c. The following general safety precautions are pertinent to all minesweeping operations: (1) Station a responsible safety observer on the fantail during all streaming and recovery operations. (2) Station a hospital corpsman capable of rendering first aid on the 01 level during all streaming and recovery operations. (3) During all minesweeping operations, the petty officer in charge of the minesweeping operation shall position himself to ensure he holds positive or relay communications with all winch and crane operators. (4) All personnel working on the fantail while the gear is moving shall wear Mk 1 vest type life preservers, with the exception of winch operators and personnel working on the 01 level and above. (5) Personnel shall avoid the wearing of loose clothing that may catch in the gear. Long sleeve shirts or coveralls shall be buttoned and pants shall be tucked into socks. (6) Personnel assigned to the sweep detail working on the fantail shall wear approved safety shoes (ANSI Z41.1). (7) Remove all jewelry, wrist watches, and keys. Authorized personnel may carry an appropriate knife and small marlinespike for routine work and for use in the event of an emergency. (8) Personnel assigned to the sweep detail shall wear construction-type safety helmets with quick-acting break away chin straps fastened and worn under the chin. Phone talkers shall wear standard phone talker helmets. Helmets shall be color-coded as follows: (a) White - Officers/CPOs and supervisors. (b) Yellow - Rig captains. (c) Green - Signalmen/Phone talkers. (d) Brown - Winch operators. (e) Red - Line-throwing Gunner’s Mates (or bolo heavers). (f) White with red cross - Corpsmen.

2-2 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(g) Blue - Deck riggers and line handlers. (h) Grey - All others (electrician, etc.). (9) Line-throwing Gunner’s Mates shall wear red jerseys or vests. Signalmen shall wear green jerseys or vests. Jerseys should be worn under life jackets, and vests over life jackets. (10) Phone talkers on the intership phone shall not fasten their neck straps. (11) Stay inboard of all gear that is being prepared or handled for streaming or recovery. (12) Keep out of the bights of lines and wires. (13) Never stand on, step over, or straddle a line or wire that is, or is subject to be, under tension. (14) Never permit a wire or a line to run through a man’s hands. Personnel handling messenger lines or inhaul lines shall handle the lines hand-over-hand and may wear gloves. (15) When personnel are required to work over, through, or outboard of lifelines, they shall wear the standard approved safety harness with an attached working line fixed to a solid object. In addition, the dyna brake shall be attached to the safety harness and tended by a man at all times. (16) Keep all gear not in actual use stowed and well-secured in the proper place to avoid missile hazard and magnetic compromise. (17) Keep all nonessential personnel clear of the fantail. After gear is streamed and stopped off, clear the fantail of all other personnel. (18) Close all fantail hatches to ensure that maximum watertight integrity is maintained during all sweeping operations. (19) Know the capabilities and limitations of all equipment. (20) All hands shall be instructed in man overboard procedures. (21) Rig rigid hull inflatable boat (RHIB) ready for man overboard. (22) All hands shall be instructed in the procedures and hazards of emergency break away. (23) Observe all the precautions associated with the practice of good seamanship. (24) Some procedures involve the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the specific manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. (25) When using grapnel hook, ensure at least two prongs of the hook engage lifting bail.

2-2.2 Minesweeping Communications. a. For safety and efficiency, it is essential that positive communication be maintained between the bridge and fantail at all times during minesweeping operations. b. Whenever the minesweeping detail is set, the phone circuit should be manned by a talker extremely knowledgeable in minesweeping terminology and phone procedures. At all times, the bridge must be kept informed of the situation on the fantail.

2-2.3 Moored Minesweeping Safety Precautions. The following safety precautions are applicable to moored minesweeping: a. Station two hosemen and one phone talker as mine lookouts on the bow to spot floating or shallow moored mines. They should have a fire hose charged and ready for use. Ensure that

2-3 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 they are properly briefed on their duties to report a mine sighting immediately and to state the relative bearing and approximate distance. If a mine is sighted, proceed as follows: (1) If the mine is floating, utilize the fire hose. Direct the water stream into the water next to the mine in a manner to force the mine away from the ship. Never direct water stream at the mine directly and attempt to wash it away. (2) If the mine is shallow-moored, the ship must effect evasive maneuvering. b. Never permit personnel to stand or work under a suspended load. c. Never permit personnel to stand between a suspended swinging load and the taffrail or any solid object. d. Keep all gear working while streaming. Never allow way to come off gear, particularly in shallow water. Danger of gear becoming dead in the water is most likely during turns. Close observation of the float is the best safeguard. (1) Keep the float abaft the beam. (2) Prevent the float from crossing the ship’s wake. (3) Keep tension on the sweep wire above 500 pounds. e. Never bring cutters, otters, or depressors close aboard without examining them for mines fouled in the gear. f. Never permit personnel to lean over, reach over, or handle sweep or depressor wires while wires are under tension or are subject to tension. g. Leather gloves are permitted at the discretion of the supervisor. h. When using a grapnel hook to recover floats, otters or depressors, two or more prongs must be engaged in the lifting bail.

2-2.4 Explosive Cutter Safety Precautions. Precautions applicable to the safe use and proper handling of explosive cutters are as follows: a. Always treat cutters as a loaded gun. Always point cutters in a safe direction, away from personnel. b. When stowing cutters on deck in preparation for use, face anvil outboard. Safety pins shall be in place. c. Disarm cutters when it is determined that they will not be needed. Ensure all cutters are not cocked prior to storage. d. Always fit a safety pin in a cocked, armed cutter and ensure that the pin cannot fall out. Do not remove the safety pin until the cutter is positioned on the sweep wire. Upon recovery, replace the safety pin before removing the cutter or any debris from the wire. Ensure the safety pin is installed in the Cutter Mk 15 before removing the cutter from the sweep wire. e. The Cutter Mk 15 shall use an arresting disc in all above-water operations to absorb any excess energy of the cutting punch. In underwater operations, the arresting disc must not be used; the water absorbs the excess energy. In an underwater operation, an area within a 25-foot radius of the activity shall be clear of personnel. f. If a cutter shows evidence of having fired, and the cutting punch is still intact while the cutter is still on the sweep wire, immediately cock the firing plunger, remove the breech block, extract the cartridge carefully, and jettison the cartridge immediately. g. Keep hands and body clear of the anvil.

2-4 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

h. Ensure the correct explosive cartridge is used. i. Handle the stock cartridges in accordance with appropriate safety precautions. j. When the cutter is released after placement on the sweep wire, veer the sweep wire as soon as practical and continue placement of needed cutters (except Mk 15). Expedite recovery until cutters are close aboard and safety pins can be inserted. k. Do not modify or alter a cutter in any way; this may result in casualties to personnel and damage to the cutter. l. To prevent accidental firing of the Cutter Mk 15, ensure the firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. m. Safety lanyards (tag lines) shall be used on all cutters when placed on sweep wires and removed after cutter attachment. n. Cutter handlers must ensure cutters are staged and handled in a manner which provides visual accessibility to the safety pins at all times. o. Cutter staging area will be roped off during arming/disarming and stowage of loaded cutters. p. To avoid injury to personnel, divers should not be within 25 feet of a cutter.

2-2.5 Influence Minesweeping Safety Precautions. The following safety precautions are applicable to influence minesweeping: a. Obtain permission from CO/OOD prior to entering drum area. b. Check for loose gear in the drum area. c. Stay clear of the drum when it is in motion. d. Ensure operator does not turn the drum until he has ascertained that: (1) All personnel are clear. (2) All running parts of the drum are clear.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns. e. Prior to servicing the magnetic minesweeping terminal box or APC receptacle, or connecting, or disconnecting minesweeping cable or APC cable, the following precautions shall be observed: (1) After installation of Cutters Mk 15, drum area crew will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

2-5 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(2) Secure power to the terminal box. (3) Wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000) type electrical rubber gloves. (4) Ensure another person is present who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock. (5) Ensure SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position. (6) Check multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation. (7) Check to ensure there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range). (8) Check multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation. (9) Using an approved-type grounding rod, discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweeping cable. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report. (10) Sand the male and female contact plugs prior to terminal box connection. f. Keep all personnel clear of the fantail and acoustic or magnetic power cables when pulsing the gear. g. Inspect all power cables upon recovery following each normal streaming, and after known or suspected grounding or collision. Correct defects prior to further use. h. Wrap all cable towing stockings with two or more layers of No. 4 canvas secured with marline or tape when stowing the cable on the drum. Remove all shackles from the bridle and position the preventer pendants as flat as possible against the cables.

2-2.6 Cold Weather Precautions. The following safety precautions are applicable to cold weather minesweeping: a. Avoid excessive handling of the cable. Cold weather tends to stiffen the cable and care must be taken to prevent the insulation from cracking or splitting. The temperature of the cable should be at least 5 °F before it is streamed. Use portable electric heaters to warm the cable. During recovery, apply heat to prevent icing and assist drying. Any ice which forms during recovery should be carefully removed, and the cable dried as much as possible as it is reeled in to prevent it from sticking together on the drum. b. Cover deck machinery with canvas covers to prevent the accumulation of ice and snow. Operate machinery periodically. Prior to use, inspect for blocks of ice which may jam moving parts. Where practicable, hand turn or jack equipment and comply with cold weather lubrication charts, ensuring that the lubricants are water-free. c. Prior to streaming and recovery, clear the stern roller chocks of ice and snow and ensure that they turn freely. d. Before operating the acoustic devices at temperatures below 20 °F, apply heat to the devices internally. Two electrically energized 500-watt strip heaters placed in the hammer boxes for at least 20 minutes before the devices are operated will prevent freezing.

2-2.7 Man Overboard. The following procedures are applicable in the event that a man falls overboard during minesweeping operations: a. Man overboard instructions will be included in the MCM Commander’s operation order. b. The ship losing the man and all minecraft within 4,000 yards shall de-energize all influence gear. This action will considerably reduce the possibility of a mine explosion. c. Personnel shall be instructed to swim toward the sweep gear, which provides, in effect, a ready-made life raft. They shall be warned, however, to approach gear with caution. 2-6 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. The following measures are to be taken immediately by the ship losing the man: (1) Drop a life buoy. (2) Sound six short blasts on the ship’s whistle. (3) Report as rapidly as possible to the OTC and to ships in formation. (4) By day, hoist flag Oscar where it can best be seen. (5) By night, display two pulsating red lights arranged vertically, and fire one white flare. e. The short length of the ship and its great inertia against a turn while sweeping, render rudder and engine maneuvering useless for the man and dangerous for the ship. Such action should normally not be considered. f. A service/utility craft, mine destruction/recovery ship, or a minesweeper without gear streamed (if available), should proceed immediately to the man’s assistance. If none of the foregoing is available, the best-placed minesweeper should be directed to effect the rescue and to take the necessary sweep-handling action to render the ship manageable enough to lower a boat in the vicinity of the man. g. Ships shall have a fully equipped rigid hull inflatable boat (RHIB) rigged and ready for lowering during all minesweeping operations. The minimum inventory for RHIB equipment used during SMCM operations is listed in Table 2-1.

2-3 CLEARING MINES FOULED IN GEAR.

2-3.1 General Information. a. A mine fouled in gear may occur when a moored mine cable is cut and jams in the cutter, otter, or depressor, or when an uncut assembly is dragging in the gear. b. The procedures are primarily designed to protect the minesweeper involved from the danger of the mine exploding close aboard, and to eliminate the hazard which floating mines present to other vessels. When a fouled mine is located, the sweep wire should always be veered to a safe scope. If the situation permits, the minesweeper should proceed to a suitable dumping area before attempting to clear the mine. The presence of a mine in the gear can often be ascertained by noting the irregular behavior of the float.

2-3.2 Single Ship Sweep. a. Perform the following actions in sequence until the mine clears the gear: (1) Clear the formation to safe water and increase to maximum speed. Make several 90-degree turns away from and toward the gear. (2) At maximum speed, veer the sweep wire as rapidly as possible, and then apply the brake hard. This procedure, repeated several times, often shakes a mine clear of the gear. (3) If the mine cannot be cleared by steps a and b, tow the fouled mine into shallow water, heave in as much sweep wire as is safe, and cut the sweep or depressor wire as necessary. The mine may separate from the gear, allowing recovery of mine and sweep gear by trained mine disposal personnel. (4) If the mine does not float, mark the location for additional sweeping.

2-7 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 2-1. Rigid Hull Inflatable Boat Equipment for SMCM Operations

EQUIPMENT 1 QUANTITY

Operating Instructions/Safety Precautions 1 Each Boat Hook, 8-Foot 1 Each Oars 2 Each Gas Can (Non-magnetic) 2 Each Air Horn 1 Each Pump 1 Each Repair/Patch Kit 1 Each Semaphore Set 1 Set First Aid Kit 1Kit Battle Lanterns 2 Each Blankets (Casualty Control) 2 Each Swimmer Survival Tending Line 1 Each Kapok Heaving Line 2 Each Fire Extinguisher 1 Each EN Tool Kit 1Kit Spark Plugs 2 Each Spark Plug Wrench 1 Each Magnetic Compass 1 Each Flares, Signal as required Radio or Walkie Talkie (2-Way) 1 Each 1 When possible, equipment should be non-magnetic.

2-3.3 Improved Deep-Moored Sweep (IDMS) and Team Deep Sweep. a. When a mine is fouled in the gear during a twin ship sweep, the following procedures are recommended: (1) Maneuver with alternate changes of course and speed by each vessel and, at the same time, rapidly heave in and veer sweep wire. (2) Slip the sweep. If the mine is fouled at the shear coupling, attempt to part the sweep at the shear coupling. All hands should stand clear of the sweep wire during this operation. (3) Reverse course with both vessels turning 180 degrees away from each other in as short a space as possible. (4) If the above methods are not successful, recover as much of the sweep gear as circumstances permit and cut the remainder free. If the mine case does not rise to the surface, buoy the location for resweeping. 2-8 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

2-4 OPERATIONAL BRIEF AND SAFETY SUMMARY.

2-4.1 Prior to commencement of minesweeping operations an Operational Brief and Safety Summary is conducted in CIC. Afterward a safety brief is conducted for all personnel assigned to sweep detail.

2-4.2 Operational Brief. Figure 2-1 is a facsimile of the brief given in CIC. Actual briefings may vary depending upon operation being conducted. This brief is not intended to replace other briefings.

2-4.3 Operational Safety Summary Emergency Procedures. a. Man Overboard. All shipboard influence sweeping systems shall be secured as well as those on all surrounding ships within 4,000 yards. The bridge manual plot will plot the man and PINS will immediately mark the ship’s position. Unless otherwise directed, the ship will recover the man with the RHIB. b. Steering or Propulsion Casualty. The OOD will order the starting of any off-line propulsion engines or steering units and will attempt to maintain ship’s course and speed. CIC will navigate the ship into safe waters. If it is not possible to maintain adequate tension on wires and the possibility of fouling the sweep gear in the screws exists, the Commanding Officer may consider ordering the sweep gear scuttled. c. General Quarters. If General Quarters is sounded, all hands shall man their Battle Stations with the exception of the fantail POIC, a Rig Captain, and the winch operator and Minesweep Electrician. These personnel will stop off the gear in a safe condition, attach Cutters Mk 15 to the gear, and man the pull cords should the Commanding Officer order the sweep gear scuttled. d. PINS Casualty. The TAO will immediately inform the OOD and the conn and navigation will be shifted to the bridge. The OOD will navigate the ship clear of the mined area using bridge manual plot. e. GPS Casualty. If GPS FOM is greater than or equal to 4, or if GPS fails, the ship will navigate using PINS via programmed hierarchy. The TAO or MCM Evaluator, if applicable, may recommend suspension of minesweeping if remaining system inputs do not allow for accurate navigation. NOTE: If GPS FOM returns to FOM 2 after it has been removed from the PINS filter, it shall not be reentered until the ship is clear of the Mined Area. f. Loss of Ship’s Power. The conn and navigation will be shifted to the bridge. All CIC equipment will be secured. When power has been restored and CCS reports that the plant is stable, the MCM Evaluator will begin directing which equipment is to be brought up. g. Fire in CIC. All personnel will evaluate the space except for two designated personnel who will remain to fight the fire. All other personnel shall muster on the 02 level port side. The OOD will call away the Flying Squad to respond to the casualty and may sound General Quarters. h. Degaussing Casualty. The degaussing electrician shall take control of degaussing from the bridge and make manual adjustments as necessary, based on ship’s course, until the ship is clear of the Mined Area.

2-5 MAINTENANCE SAFETY SUMMARY.

2-5.1 Maintenance safety summaries are included in technical manuals as prescribed for individual pieces of equipment and are not repeated herein. A list of equipment/systems and their associated operation and maintenance manual is contained in Table 2-2.

2-9 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

MINESWEEPING BRIEF

Date: ______

A. Overview.

1. This minesweeping evolution will be conducted in accordance with the following references:

a. NWP 3-15 (Series)

b. SW570-F0-MMO-A70

c. FXP-1

2. All personnel involved are responsible for familiarizing themselves with theses procedures.

3. The ship is tasked to conduct magnetic/acoustic/combination influence minesweeping operations in Mined Area ______in the ______OPAREA.

4. Threat:

a. Type: Moored/bottom sea mines.

b. Actuation method: Pressure acoustic magnetic ______.

5. Objective: ______.

6. Watchbill Assignments. Personnel assignments will be per the IM/IIM watchbills.

7. The sweep order for this evolution will be reviewed by the First Lieutenant later in this brief.

B. Environment Weather.

Wind: ______Knots from ______Degrees True

Seas: ______to ______Feet

Set/Drift: ______Degrees at ______Knots

Visibility: ______Miles

Water Depth: ______Feet at ______(Datum)

Figure 2-1. Minesweeping Brief (Typical) (Sheet 1 of 3)

2-10 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Bottom Type: Sand/Shell Mud Rock Smooth Moderate Rough

NOTE: True wind, set, and drift shall be computed every 30 minutes while inside the Mined Area.

C. Preparations.

1. The following actions shall be completed prior to entering the mined area:

a. The ship will set restricted maneuvering.

b. Material Condition Zebra will be set (main deck and below, with the exception of ventilation, which will be maintained in the normal configuration.)

c. The MCM Evaluation will assume the Conn in CIC once the ship is manned and ready for Condition IIM, sweep gear is deployed and stopped off, the ship’s position is on the vertical plot, and two fixes have been taken and compared between CIC and the bridge. If fix comparisons do not correlate, the errors must be consistent.

NOTE: The OOD and MCM Evaluator must ensure that the ship remains well clear of the mined area while the above actions are being completed.

D. Navigation.

1. Primary navigation will be by the PINS TAC DISPLAY/vertical plot. Secondary navigation will be by the PINS vertical plot/CIC manual plot. Tertiary navigation will be by the bridge manual plot. The PINS navigation will be by GPS through FOM 3: if the GPS FOM is greater than or equal to 4, GPS will be removed from the filter. The ship may consider suspension of minesweeping if remaining system inputs fail to allow for accurate navigation.

2. Fix intervals for the bridge will be as follows:

a. Every 3 minutes while in or within 600 yards of the mined area.

b. Every 30 seconds if navigation shifts to the bridge while inside or within 600 yards of the mined area.

3. Track data:

a. Number of tracks to be run is ______.

b. Number of runs per track is ______.

c. Track spacing is ______yards.

d. Sweeper offset will be ______yards.

e. Track sequence will be skip track/progressive, with first track to be determined based on environmental effects (wind, set/drift.)

Figure 2-1. Minesweeping Brief (Typical) (Sheet 2 of 3)

2-11 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

f. Plot scales: Variable (TAC DISPLAYS)

______(Vertical plot)

______(Bridge manual plot)

4. Maneuvering Restrictions:

a. Required speeds:

(1) Stream speed: ______knots.

(2) Sweep speed: ______knots.

(3) Recovery speed: ______knots.

(4) Kite/float: ______knots.

(5) Acoustic device: ______knots.

(6) Mag Tail: ______knots.

NOTE: Speeds may be adjusted as necessary to provide for proper, safe riding of the sweep gear.

b. Turns are to be made with extreme care using moderate rudder angles, usually not greater than 12 degrees, taking care to maintain proper sweep wire tension.

c. During turns, sweep gear should be continuously monitored visually to ensure that gear rides correctly (mag cable does not chafe on sweep wire, mag cable and APC do not become fouled, etc.)

d. Turns should be made in the direction toward the sweep gear.

F. Equipment Limitations and Errors.

Master Gyrocompass: ______E/W by ______.

Stbd Repeater: ______E/W.

Port Repeater: ______E/W.

Radar: ______Yds. long/short.

G. Degraded/OOC Equipment:

Figure 2-1. Minesweeping Brief (Typical) (Sheet 3 of 3)

2-12 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 2-2. Documents Utilized for Installation of Minesweeping Equipment

EQUIPMENT DOCUMENT

Power Converter Unit SW565-AB-MMM-040 Automatic Control Unit SW565-AB-MMM-020 DC Contactor Panel; DC Ship’s Service Switchboard; Minesweeping S9324-B5-MMO-010 Control Switchboard Dynamic Braking Unit SW565-AB-MMM-040 Surface MCM Portable Fantail Equipment SW570-F0-MMO-040

2-6 HAZARDOUS COMPONENTS.

2-6.1 The following paragraphs identify and briefly describe the hazardous components used with the minesweeping system, and summarize the general handling precautions for such components.

2-6.2 Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g). No specific safety precautions need to be observed when handling the device by hand. If device is to be machine hoisted, observe safety precautions for deck safety and weight handling equipment.

2-6.3 Acoustic Device, TB-27/SLQ-37(V). This equipment employs voltages which are dangerous and may be fatal if contacted by operating personnel. Extreme caution should be exercised when working on the equipment. Although every practical safety precaution has been incorporated in this equipment, all rules must be strictly observed.

2-6.3.1 Keep away from live circuits. Operating personnel must at all times observe safety regulations. Do not make adjustments inside equipment with power supply on. To avoid casualties, always cut off power and ground circuits prior to touching them. Verify that the system is de-energized using an appropriate electrical instrument (Simpson 260 or equivalent).

2-6.3.2 Do not service or adjust alone. Under no circumstances should any person reach within the enclosure for purpose of servicing or adjusting the equipment without the immediate presence of assistance of another person capable of rendering aid.

2-6.4 Acoustic Device, TB-26/SLQ-37(V). Do not, under any circumstances, attempt to remove covers, connector, or drain plug from the unit while internal pressure exceeds atmospheric pressure.

2-6.4.1 This equipment employs voltages which are dangerous and may be fatal if contacted by operating personnel. Extreme caution should be exercised when working on the equipment. Although every practical safety precaution has been incorporated in this equipment, all rules must be strictly observed.

2-6.4.2 Keep away from live circuits. Operating personnel must at all times observe safety regulations. Do not make adjustments inside equipment with power supply on. To avoid casualties, always cut off power and ground circuits prior to touching them. Verify that the system is de-energized using an appropriate electrical instrument (Simpson 260 or equivalent).

2-13 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

2-6.4.3 Do not service or adjust alone. Under no circumstances should any person reach within the enclosure for purpose of servicing or adjusting the equipment without the immediate presence of assistance of another person capable of rendering aid.

2-6.5 Cable, Acoustic Power (Buoyant), CX-13260/SLQ-37(V). This equipment employs voltages which are dangerous and may be fatal if contacted by operating personnel. Extreme caution should be exercised when working on the equipment. Although every practical safety precaution has been incorporated in this equipment, all rules must be strictly observed.

2-6.5.1 Keep away from live circuits. Operating personnel must at all times observe safety regulations. Do not make adjustments inside equipment with power supply on. To avoid casualties, always cut off power and ground circuits prior to touching them. Verify that the system is de-energized using an appropriate electrical instrument (Simpson 260 or equivalent).

2-6.5.2 Do not service or adjust alone. Under no circumstances should any person reach within the enclosure for purpose of servicing or adjusting the equipment without the immediate presence of assistance of another person capable of rendering aid.

2-6.5.3 Two qualified personnel should be present when connecting inboard connector to power receptacle.

2-6.6 Kites, Multiplane (Otter/Depressor), and Bridles. The multiplane kite should be suspended from its bridle assembly and carefully inspected (visually) to ensure shackles are not cocked, and chains are not twisted. This visual check should be accomplished prior to use and include a dimensional and wear check.

2-6.7 Minefield Marker Dan Buoy, Type 3 Mk 12 Mod 0. Buoy laying is an extremely hazardous operation. Any line used in the buoy laying must be free-running. All personnel must stay clear of the bights of line that will be pulled overboard.

2-6.7.1 No specific safety precautions need be observed when handling the Dan Buoy by hand. If the Dan Buoy is to be machine hoisted, observe safety precautions for deck safety.

2-6.8 Minefield Marker Master Reference Buoy F Mk 6 Mod 0. The configuration of MRB makes it difficult to handle aboard ship. Extreme caution must be observed when working with MRB to prevent injury to personnel.

2-14 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CHAPTER 3 CONDITIONS OF READINESS

3-1 INTRODUCTION.

3-1.1 This chapter describes personnel and communication requirements of the AN/SLQ-37(V) Influence Minesweeping System during watch, general quarters and emergency conditions. On board MCM type ships, the general quarter’s condition for minesweeping operations is referred to as condition 1M. Other general quarters conditions that do not involve the AN/SLQ-37(V) are not described here.

3-2 CONDITIONS. NOTE Illustrations and tables are offered as typical examples and do not supercede actual requirements of individual ships.

3-2.1 Watch Condition. General fantail manning requirements for Minesweeping Conditions are discussed in Table 3-1, CIC requirements are discussed in Table 3-2, and Pilot House requirements are discussed in Table 3-3. Minesweeping systems are not manned during normal watch condition and are secured except for maintenance activities. Refer to shipboard watch, quarters, and station bill for personnel requirements.

3-2.2 General Quarters. If General Quarters is sounded, all hands shall man their Battle Stations with the exception of the fantail POIC, Rig Captain, Winch Operator, and Minesweep Electrician. These personnel will stop off sweep gear in a safe condition, will ensure Cutters Mk 15 are properly attached to the sweep/depressor wires and equalizing pendant, and will man the pull cords should the Commanding Officer give the order to scuttle the sweep gear. Communication paths for minesweeping conditions are shown in Figure 3-1. Interior communications correspond to signal paths and are provided by sound powered phones. Equipment control and operating procedure is contained in Chapter 4.

3-2.3 Emergency Conditions. Emergency condition is established when minesweeping equipment is fouled by a mine, when emergency break away procedures are deemed necessary, or when emergencies arise that require actions that could preclude the safe operation of influence minesweeping equipment. Procedures for clearing a fouled mine or break away of minesweeping equipment are contained in Chapter 4.

3-2.3.1 Man Overboard. CO or OOD will order all shipboard influence sweeping systems to be secured. All surrounding ships will be notified. QMOW will plot the man and PINS will immediately mark the ship’s position. Unless otherwise directed, the ship will recover the man with the RHIB.

3-2.3.2 Steering or Propulsion Casualty. The OOD will order the starting of any off-line propulsion engines or steering units and will attempt to maintain ship’s course and speed. CIC will navigate the ship into safe waters. If it is not possible to maintain adequate tension on wires and the possibility of fouling the sweep gear in the screws exists, the Commanding Officer may consider ordering the sweep gear scuttled.

3-2.3.3 PINS Casualty. TAO or CIC Supervisor will immediately inform the OOD and the conn and navigation will be shifted to the bridge. The OOD will navigate the ship clear of the mined area using bridge manual plot.

3-1 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 3-1. Fantail Manning Requirements for Minesweeping Conditions

POSITION TITLE STATION

Mine Fantail deck operations area advantageously, so as to be able to observe all Countermeasures/Safety activity in connection with streaming, operating, and recovering minesweeping Officer (MCMO) gear. Chief Petty Officer in Fantail deck operations area advantageously, so as to be able to observe and Charge (CPOIC) supervise all activity in connection with streaming, operating, and recovering minesweeping gear. Recorder/Talker In proximity to the MCMO. Electrician/Winch Operator As required in the performance of his duties. (MS ELEC) Winch Operator (WNCH MCM1–8:Immediately aft of the winch. OP) MCM 9 – 14: 02 level aft, starboard side, overlooking the fantail. Crane Operator (Stbd) Fantail, starboard side, at the crane. Crane Operator (Port) Fantail, port side, at the crane. MCM Gear Petty Officers Fantail, moving about as required to perform their duties. (Rig Captains) (Port/Stbd) Armorers/Riggers Fantail, moving about as required in the performance of their duties. Equipment Handler Fantail, moving about as required in the performance of his duties. Equipment Handlers Fantail, moving about as required to perform their duties. Hospital Corpsman 01 Level, port side, monitors/fantail personnel and the Line Tension Payout System, Monitor Display Unit, as required.

3-2.3.4 GPS Casualty. If GPS FOM is greater than or equal to 4, or if GPS fails, the ship will navigate using PINS via programmed hierarchy. OOD or TAO may recommend suspension of minesweeping if remaining system inputs do not allow for accurate navigation. NOTE: If GPS FOM returns to FOM 2 after it has been removed from the PINS filter, it shall not be reentered until the ship is clear of the Mined Area.

3-2.3.5 Loss of Ship’s Power. The conn and navigation will be shifted to the bridge. All CIC equipment will be secured. When power has been restored and CCS reports that the plant is stable, the TAO will begin directing which equipment is to be brought up.

3-2.3.6 Fire in CIC. All personnel will evacuate the space except for two designated personnel who will remain to fight the fire. All other personnel shall muster on the 02 level port side. The OOD will call away the Flying Squad to respond to the casualty and may sound General Quarters.

3-2.3.7 Degaussing Casualty. The degaussing electrician shall take control of degaussing from the bridge and make manual adjustments as necessary, based on ship’s course, until the ship is clear of the Mined Area.

3-2 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 3-2. CIC Manning Requirements for Minesweeping Conditions

POSITION TITLE STATION

Tactical Action Officer (TAO) Free to move about in CIC to monitor various operations and actions. CIC Supervisor In the vicinity of the TAO. Free to move about CIC to monitor various operations and functions. Surface Detector/Tracker Surface search/navigation radar azimuth-range indicator in CIC. DRT Plotter/PINS Operator DRT and the PINS console in CIC. Vertical Plotter/Status Board Surface summary plot/status boards on the starboard side of CIC. Keeper PINS Console Operator CIC, directly behind the DRT and SPA-25 Repeater. Logkeeper/Radio Telephone Log Desk in CIC. (RT) Monitor

Table 3-3. Pilot House Manning Requirements for Minesweeping Conditions

POSITION TITLE STATION

Commanding Officer (CO) Port side of the Pilot House. Officer of the Deck (OOD) Conning station inboard of the CO’s chair. The OOD is free also to move (UNDERWAY) from Bridge Wing to Bridge Wing as his duties require. He may not leave his post until properly relieved. Assistant Navigator Pilot House or Chart Room. The Leading Quartermaster normally performs this function. BM/QM of the Watch Pilot House chart table, also maintains a watch station on the Bridge Wings and 03 level Signal Area when required. Ship Control Console Operator SCC in the Pilot House. (SCCO) Relief Ship Control Console Bow Thruster Console in the Pilot House. Operator (SCCO) (Bow Thruster Operator) Sound-Powered (SP) Phone As stipulated by the Ship’s Organization and Regulations Manual. Talker (1JS/JL) Bearing Taker (Port/Starboard) Pelorus stand on his respective Bridge Wing. Status Board Plotter Pilot House, at the status board. Signalman Bridge Wing or at the Flag Bag, located in the 03 level. Lookout 03 level above the Pilot House.

3-3 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 3-1. Communication Paths for Condition 1M

3-4 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION

4-1 INTRODUCTION.

4-1.1 This chapter describes AN/SLQ-37(V) and AN/SLQ-38(V) operating situations, modes, and procedures. Descriptions are detailed to the level required for understanding operational interfaces of the system equipment and associated systems. Illustrations are included when necessary for clarity. Various operating modes are described to acquaint the operator with equipment combinations employed for different modes of operation.

4-2 PREOPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND SET UP.

4-2.1 Specific pre-operational conditions are presumed to be in effect prior to system operation. A block diagram of the sequence of events that takes place during pre-operational conditions for minesweeping is illustrated in Figure 4-1. An example of a system readiness check off list of significant switch positions is listed in Table 4-1. MCM ships may tailor their own list, as required.

4-2.2 All required PMS checks are completed prior to and after minesweep operations.

4-2.3 Job Sheets pertaining to pre-operational conditions and set up for minesweeping equipment and for all type sweeps are contained at the end of this chapter.

4-2.4 Hand Signals. Hand signals should be in accordance with NWP 14 series.

4-2.5 Intership Paddle/Wand Signals. Minesweeping operations involving two ship connections require the use of fantail to fantail visual communications. Paddles/wands, red and green, are displayed from the fantail of the two minesweepers. The fantail signalmen shall be outfitted in a green jersey or vest and be located in a position easily seen by the other ship. The red paddle/wand shall be held in the right hand and the green paddle/wand held in the left hand as the signalman faces outboard. The colored wands are utilized during night operations. Current mechanical minesweeping configurations using these signals are the Team Deep Sweep and Improved Deep-Moored Sweep. Streaming signals are shown in Figure 4-2. Recovery signals are shown in Figure 4-3.

4-2.6 Rigid Hull Inflatable Boat (RHIB) Vectoring. Establish communications as follows: a. Vectoring the RHIB to the immediate vicinity of the sonar contact is performed by directions given to the RHIB from the ship. Radio or hand signals (Figure 4-4) can be used to vector the RHIB in conjunction with the Visual Alignment Frame (Figure 4-5). However, good radio communications are required, and for simplicity they may be the only intended communication link. b. At least one alternate system, such as the hand signals (Figure 4-4), flags or lights, should be known by the crew in the event of a radio failure. c. Signals are made with rolled semaphore flags for daylight hours and wand flashlights for night hours. The signalman is to be stationed forward of the 03 level and above the bridge windscreen.

4-1 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4-1. Pre-Operational Conditions

4-2 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Table 4-1. Pre-Operational Conditions/Systems Readiness Check-Off List, Typical

EQUIPMENT CONTROL POSITION/SETTING

ACU POWER ON/OFF switch OFF ACU ACOUSTIC MODE OUTPUT ON/OFF switch OFF ACU MAGNETIC MODE OUTPUT ON/OFF switch OFF ACU ACOUSTIC MODE MOTOR SPEED CONTROL 100 PCU MAIN POWER circuit breaker OFF PCU LOGIC POWER circuit breaker OFF (Tagged Out) PCU PCU CONTROL/ACU CONTROL switch PCU CONTROL PCU MANUAL CONTROL MANUAL SPEED CONTROL Rotated CCW to minimum rheostat (0%) PCU STATUS DVM switch LINE VOLTAGE (Phase) AB PCU A2A1TB1 strap TB-27: 1 to 1 TB-26 Mk 2: 1 to 3 TB-26 VLF: 1 to 4 Minesweep SWBD EXCITER REGULATOR CONTROL switch SHUT DOWN Minesweep SWBD SWITCHBOARD CONTROL switch LOCAL Minesweep SWBD STBD SLOW SPEED PROPULSION MOTOR TRIP BREAKER switch Minesweep SWBD BOW THRUSTOR BREAKER switch TRIP Minesweep SWBD DC M/S CONTACTOR CONTROL switch OPEN Minesweep SWBD PORT SLOW SPEED PROPULSION MOTOR TRIP BREAKER switch Minesweep SWBD GENERATOR BREAKER switch TRIP (Tagged Out) Minesweep SWBD GENERATOR HEATER CONTROL switch ON Minesweep SWBD EXCITER REGULATOR PWR circuit breaker OFF Minesweep SWBD MINESWEEPING CONTROL potentiometer DECR 0.0V DC Contactor Panel CONTACTOR SAFETY INTERLOCK switch CLOSED DC Contactor Panel SAFE/RUN switch CLOSED DC Contactor Panel UNDER SPEED SHUTDOWN switch CLOSED Towed Body TB-26 Select correct float pendant length Per SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Towed Body TB-26 TB pressure test and pressure set for op-depth Per SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Towed Body TB-27 Select correct float pendant length Per SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Minesweeping gear Identified and staged Per SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4-3 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4-2. Streaming Paddles/Wand Signals

4-4 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4-3. Recovery Paddles/Wand Signals

4-5 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4-4. Vectoring Hand Signals

4-6 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4-5. Visual Alignment Frame

4-7 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4-2.7 F Mark 11 Sonar Reflector Preparation. NOTE All material must be nonmagnetic. a. Attach a 3/8-inch shackle to thimble on each end of a 1-1/2-inch x 18-inch nylon line. Refer to Figure 4-6 for mooring details. b. Attach shackle on one end of nylon line to anchor and shackle on other end to a 3/8-inch shackle on one of the pad eyes of sonar reflector. c. Using another 3/8-inch shackle, attach remaining pad eye on sonar reflector to a 3/8-inch shackle on end of a 1-1/2-inch x 100-foot nylon line (or as required). The line should be sufficient length to allow the attachment to float and subsequent recovery of the sonar reflector and anchor.

4-3 OPERATING MODES.

4-3.1 Because mechanical minesweeping doesn't require operating modes, the following information applies to influence minesweeping only. After initial turn-on procedures for the influence minesweeping equipment is completed, the next step is to select the mode of operation on the ACU. There are three modes of operation; magnetic, acoustic (manual or automatic) and dual (both magnetic and acoustic).

4-3.2 Magnetic Mode. Selection of the magnetic mode of operation will direct the operator through a sequence of actions that will provide a preprogrammed automatic waveform to the MMGTG. The operator selects the waveform, the current, the waveform amplitude, and the choice of manual or timed start of the pulse. A flow diagram of the sequence of actions and displays is illustrated in Figure 4-7. It should be noted that the ACU does not provide a manual mode of control in the magnetic mode.

4-3.3 Acoustic Mode.

4-3.3.1 Automatic Acoustic Control. The Central Processor Unit (CPU) in the ACU automatically controls the speed (RPM) of the motors in the towed bodies (TB-26 or TB-27). In this mode, the PCU must be powered ON and PCU/ACU control switch must be set to ACU control. After the ACOUSTIC MODE STATUS PCU READY lamp on the front panel of the ACU illuminates, the operator then selects acoustic waveform build-up time, on time, decay time, and off-time inputs through the system keyboard. A flow diagram of the sequence of actions and displays is illustrated in Figure 4-8.

4-3.3.2 TB-26/TB-27 Operation. The ACU provides the PCU with an acoustic waveform. The PCU provides the power and control functions necessary to regulate the speed of the motor in the TB in accordance with the requirements of the acoustic waveform selected.

4-3.3.3 TB-27 Pulsed Operation. The acoustic waveform output is automatically varied between an inaudible minimum and an operator selected maximum RPM.

4-3.3.4 TB-27 Modulated Operation. The acoustic waveform output is automatically varied between an audible minimum and an operator selected maximum RPM.

4-3.3.5 Manual Acoustic Control. The RPM of the motor in the towed body is controlled by operator inputs to the MOTOR CONTROL, SPEED CONTROL on the ACU. In this mode, the PCU must be powered ON and PCU/ACU control switch must be set to ACU control. This will be indicated on the front panel of the ACU by the ACOUSTIC MODE STATUS PCU READY lamp being illuminated.

4-8 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4-6. F Mk 11 Mod 0 Anchored and Buoyed

4-9 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4-7. Magnetic Mode Prompts

4-10 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4-8. Acoustic Mode Prompts

4-11 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4-3.4 Dual (Automatic Acoustic and Magnetic) Mode. The ACU provides simultaneous waveforms to the ships' magnetic minesweeping generator and the PCU. The operator may select timed or manual, synchronous or asynchronous operation. A flow diagram of the sequence of actions and displays is illustrated in Figure 4-9.

4-3.4.1 Timed Start. When the operator inputs a two-digit character in response to ime, this establishes the minutes after the hour the waveform generation will begin.

4-3.4.2 Manual Start. When the operator inputs a anual input, the waveform generations starts when any key is pressed.

4-3.4.3 Synchronization. The acoustic waveform will be synchronized with the magnetic waveform during dual operation by selecting agnetic when the ACOUSTIC SYNCH prompt is given.

4-3.4.4 Asynchronization. The acoustic waveform will be unsynchronized with the magnetic waveform during dual operation by selecting sync when the ACOUSTIC SYNCH prompt is given.

4-4 NORMAL OPERATION.

4-4.1 The duties and responsibilities of system operators are described in general terms of responsibility in Tables 4-2 through 4-4. General procedures for influence minesweeping are contained in Tables 4-5 through 4-11. Specific step by step procedures for the operation of the AN/SLQ-37(V) system in all primary modes is contained in individual equipment manuals as referenced in Chapter 1 of this manual.

4-5 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES.

4-5.1 Clearing Mines Fouled in Gear.

4-5.1.1 General Information. a. A mine fouled in gear may occur when a moored mine cable jams in the cutter, otter, or depressor, or when a mine is dragging in the gear. b. The procedures are primarily designed to protect the minesweeper involved from the danger of the mine exploding close aboard, and to eliminate the hazard which floating mines present to other vessels. When a fouled mine is located, the sweep wire should always be veered to a safe scope. If the situation permits, the minesweeper should proceed to a suitable dumping area before attempting to clear the mine. The presence of a mine in the gear can often be ascertained by noting the irregular behavior of the float.

4-5.1.2 Single Ship Sweep. a. Perform the following actions in sequence until the mine clears the gear: (1) Clear the formation to safe water and increase to maximum speed. Make several 90-degree turns away from and toward the gear. (2) At maximum speed, veer the sweep wire as rapidly as possible, and then apply the brake hard. This procedure, repeated several times, often shakes a mine clear of the gear.

4-12 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4-9. Dual Mode Prompts

4-13 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4-2. Fantail Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions

POSITION TITLE DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Mine a. Responsible to the CO for the safe operation of the minesweeping system. Countermeasures/Safety Officer (MCMO) b. Supervises the fantail, as required, to ensure safe, efficient, and expeditious handling of the minesweeping system. Chief Petty Officer in a. Responsible to the MCMO for the safe, efficient and expeditious handling of Charge (CPOIC) the minesweeping system components.

b. Supervises the fantail deck operations personnel in all phases of rigging, streaming, operating, and recovering minesweeping system components. Recorder/Talker Record significant events in the operation of the minesweeping gear. Electrician (MS ELEC) a. Responsible to the CPOIC for the safe, reliable operation of electrical components of the minesweeping system.

b. Performs as a WINCH OPERATOR when so assigned, and as his MS ELEC duties permit. Winch Operator (WNCH Responsible to the CPOIC for safe winch operation. OP) Crane Operator (STBD) Responsible to the CPOIC for safe, efficient and expeditious operation of the starboard crane in handling minesweeping system components. Crane Operator (Port) Responsible to the CPOIC for safe, efficient, and expeditious operation of the port crane in handling minesweeping system components. MCM Gear Petty Officers Responsible to the CPOIC for close supervision and direction of the Equipment (Rig Captains) (Port/Stbd) Handlers in handling the minesweeping system gear. Armorers/Riggers a. Responsible to the CPOIC for the safe, efficient, and expeditious handling, installation and removal of the minesweeping system explosive devices.

b. Obtains the minesweeping system explosive devices; coordinates his actions with Equipment Handlers for installation, arming, disarming and removal; and returns the devices to proper stowage. Equipment Handlers Responsible to the CPOIC for the proper performance of their duties. Hospital Corpsmen (HM) Responsible to the CO for the safety of minesweeping personnel.

4-14 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4-3. CIC Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions

POSITION TITLE DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Tactical Action Officer a. Principal command decision-maker in CIC. He makes use of the visual (TAO) displays that provide tactical information as a basis for deciding courses of actions in the use of the ship’s combat systems.

b. Responsible for the interaction of men with sensors, communications, and minehunting and neutralization systems. The TAO has the final authority for priority of contact detection, classification and neutralization, and for direction of tactical operations. CIC Supervisor Primary assistant to the TAO. Surface Detector/Tracker a. Ensures optimum performance of the radar equipment.

b. Responsible for the detection and tracking of surface targets within the operational limits of the radar systems. Reports to the CIC Supervisor. DRT Plotter/PINS Operator a. Responsible for the accurate plotting of surface contacts and the operation of PINS.

b. Responsible for providing navigational assistance utilizing charts; plotting own- and other ship’s position, speed and distance traveled; operating the plotter for special evolutions such as mine warfare and man overboard; and providing course, speed, and Closest Point of Approach (CPA) for designated targets. Vertical Plotter/Status Board a. Maintains a display of the positions of surface targets, geographic points Keeper on the vertical plot and amplifying data required for understanding the surface picture on the status board.

b. Coordinates with the Surface Detector/Tracker and DRT Plotter to update information, and with the Lookouts to visually acquire and identify contacts. PINS Console Operator b. Responsible to the CIC Supervisor in the performance of his duties. Perform the following, as required: (1) Ensure proper function of the PINS processor and all output media (2) Ensure that X-Y plotter and line printer have adequate paper (3) Ensure magnetic tape unit is loaded when required (4) Ensure proper data format is displayed in CIC (5) Initiate and enable proper navigation functions (6) Perform diagnostic checkout of system (7) Be prepared to shift operating modes, or enter new data parameters as the TAO directs. Logkeeper/Radio Telephone Monitors the RT circuit(s) assigned and report and record verbatim all traffic (RT) Monitor addressed this ship.

4-15 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4-4. Pilot House Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions

POSITION TITLE DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Commanding Officer (CO) a. Primary duties and responsibilities of the CO are enumerated in Navy Regulations. Responsible at all times for the readiness, safety, and performance of his ship.

b. Gives permission to conduct evaluations and operations after considering alternatives and/or incident to discussion with the OOD or TAO. Continuously monitors all MCM operations. Officer of the Deck (OOD) a. Primary duties and responsibilities of the OOD are contained in the Watch (UNDERWAY) Officer’s Guide, Standard Organization and Regulations, Ship’s Organization Manual, and the Captain’s Standing Orders.

b. Directly responsible to the CO for the safe and effective operation of the ship. He is therefore responsible for maneuvering the ship clear of all obstacles, hazards and threatening situations unless ordered to do otherwise by the CO.

c. Is normally the Conning Officer. This function may be assumed by the CO, or it may be delegated to an officer under instruction or to a pilot. As Conning Officer his duties are: (1) Control ship’s heading and speed by orders to the SCCO. (2) Monitor performance of the SCCO. (3) Order emergency steering and speed control procedures. (4) Order steering and speed control casualty recovery procedures. (5) Keep the CO informed of changes to the ship’s heading and speed. Assistant Navigator a. Maintains and uses selected publications relating to his duties.

b. Assist the Navigator and OOD, as required, in implementing the required casualty operational modes. BM/QM of the Watch/ a. Directly responsible to the OOD for the efficient functioning of the Bridge Signalman (BMOW/QMOW) watch. Maintains the Quartermaster’s Notebook, ensuring that all orders to the helm and all orders to the engines are logged as they occur, and making additional log entries as he deems appropriate and/or as ordered by the OOD. Monitors the performance of the SCCO.

b. Maintains a dead-reckoning track by using the latest navigational fix as a point of departure and applying set and drift when so ordered. BM/QM of the Watch/ c. Ensures that morning calls, as entered in the Call Book, are made on time, Signalman (BMOW/QMOW) and makes general announcements over the IMC as directed.

d. Makes meteorological observations and enters them into the appropriate section of the Ship’s Deck Log.

4-16 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4-4. Pilot House Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions (Continued)

POSITION TITLE DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ship Control Console a. Responsible for receipt, acknowledgment, and execution of steering and Operator (SCCO) speed (RPM) orders for the ship, uses the throttle lever to control ship speed directly, or alternatively to transmit the ordered ship speed (RPM) to the Enclosed Operating Station (EOS). Must be alert for failure of rudder control and of the gyrocompass, and notifies the OOD/CO of any unusual indications registered by the SCC. Initiates general and collision alarms as directed by the OOD or CO.

b. Responsible for observing and reporting to the OOD or CO the activation of any alarm signals as indicated on the SCC: Relief Ship Control Console a. Perform duties as an SP Phone Talker on the 1JV circuit. Operator (SCCO) (Bow Thruster Operator) b. Relieves and assists the SCCO as directed.

c. Operates Bow Thruster Console as directed by OOD. Sound-Powered (SP) Phone a. Monitors the SP circuit assigned, and report all information addressed to Talker (1JS/JL) the station.

b. Repeats transmitted/received messages, clearly and word-for-word, to or from the controlling personnel or addressee.

c. Maintains and uses the circuit in a businesslike manner by not permitting personal conversations, or extraneous or frivolous comments. As the control station Talker (if so assigned), enforce discipline and give circuit control orders and instructions as necessary. Bearing Taker Receives instruction from the Pilot House (via the SP Phone Talker) (Port/Starboard) concerning objects from which visual bearings will be taken. Takes bearings, as directed, and reports them to the Pilot House, via the SP Phone Talker. Status Board Plotter a. Enters information as received on the status board.

b. Makes corrections to status board when necessary.

c. Reports information to CO/OOD as appropriate.

d. Updates status board when information changes. Status Board Plotter a. Enters information as received on the status board.

b. Makes corrections to status board when necessary.

c. Reports information to CO/OOD as appropriate.

d. Updates status board when information changes.

4-17 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4-4. Pilot House Duties and Responsibilities During Minesweeping Conditions (Continued)

POSITION TITLE DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Signalman a. Alerts to respond to a flashing light or semaphore call.

b. Responds to flag hoists.

c. Keeps Signal Halyards adjusted. Ensures that bunting is kept dry and covered during foul weather.

d. Receives and transmits visual messages, and should be alert to signal evolutions. Lookout a. Except for man overboard: (1) Report all visual and aural observations to the OOD with amplifying information as it occurs. (2) Report all targets and events to CIC via the 1JS/JL SP phone circuit. (3) Provide contact update information to CIC as directed by the CIC Supervisor.

b. Man overboard is a special category of visual sighting and must be reported to the Pilot House and Plotters in CIC. The Lookout will keep the man overboard in sight continuously and, using relative bearing, make frequent reports on the man’s position until he is recovered. The Lookout is frequently the first to observe a man overboard, and should be prepared to throw him a life ring and a smoke float to mark his position. Mine Lookout Sole responsibility is to detect mines in the ship's path by being positioned to have the best available view forward of the ship and provided with the following equipment: (1) Polarized lens sunglasses to reduce the glare and improve the ability to detect mines that may be just below the surface. (2) Binoculars, preferably stabilized 10 by 40 mm. (3) A night observation device (NOD), preferably the Mk 37 Mod 3 for night time watch. (4) Battle gear: helmet, flak jacket, gas mask, etc., as appropriate for a topside watchstation. (5) Sound-powered phone communications with the bridge. (6) Appropriate clothing for the weather: in environments such as the Persian Gulf, a canopy for protection from the sun may be appropriate. (7) Sun screen: the ship should provide protective sun screen lotion, particularly if there is no canopy. (8) Water bottle or canteen: in hot, dry climates, dehydration will reduce the watchstander's effectiveness, so a ready water source should be maintained.

4-18 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Table 4-5. Magnetic Minesweeping Procedures

STEP PROCEDURE TM REFERENCE NORMAL INDICATION

1 Rig and stream magnetic SW570-F0-MMO-A70, Magnetic minesweeping gear minesweeping gear Chapter 4 streaming correctly behind ship 2 Switch generator power to DC S9324-B5-MMO-010, Minesweeping Mode Status Minesweeping Mode control Chapter 2. Indicator illuminated, Minesweeping Input Signal Voltmeter indicates 0 - ±7.5V, and Generator Voltmeter indicates £250V 3 Energize ACU and start SW565-AB-MMO-020, ACU Panel Power - ON, waveform Chapter 2 Magnetic Mode Status - Run, Acoustic Mode Status - ACU Ready, Magnetic Mode Output indicators illuminated 4 Conduct minesweeping NWP 3-15 (Series) 5 Secure ACU SW565-AB-MMO-020, ACU Panel Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Output - OFF, Magnetic Mode Output - OFF, Acoustic Mode Motor Speed Control - 90 6 Return generator power to DC S9324-B5-MMO-010, DC Ships Service Mode Indicator Ships Service Mode Chapter 2 illuminated, Meters indicate proper voltages/amperages, Red flags displayed on breakers 7 Recover magnetic minesweeping SW570-F0-MMO-A70, All magnetic minesweeping gear gear Chapter 4 cleaned and properly stowed

Table 4-6. Automatic Acoustic Control Minesweeping Procedures

STEP PROCEDURE TM REFERENCE NORMAL INDICATION

1 Check Towed Body for proper SW570-F0-MMO-A70, Towed Body generates operation Chapter 7 appropriate acoustic signal 2 Stream Acoustic minesweeping SW570-F0-MMO-A70, Acoustic minesweeping gear gear Chapter 4 streaming correctly behind ship 3 Energize PCU SW565-AB-MMO-040, Remote Ready For ACU Control Chapter 2 Indicator illuminated 4 Energize ACU and start Towed SW565-AB-MMO-020, Power - ON, Body Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Status - PCU, Ready/ACU Ready (TB-26 or TB-27), Acoustic Unit (TB-26 or TB-27) illuminated, Magnetic Mode Status - Ready, Acoustic Mode Output indicators illuminated, ACU and PCU Motor Control RPM 100X meters correspond

4-19 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4-6. Automatic Acoustic Control Minesweeping Procedures (Continued)

STEP PROCEDURE TM REFERENCE NORMAL INDICATION

5 Conduct minesweeping. NWP 3-15 (Series) 6 Secure PCU. SW565-AB-MMO-040, Main Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Logic Power - OFF, PCU/ACU Control - PCU, Manual Speed Control - CCW 7 Secure ACU. SW565-AB-MMO-020, ACU Panel Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Output - OFF, Magnetic Mode Output - OFF, Acoustic Mode Motor Speed Control - 90 8 Recover acoustic minesweeping SW570-F0-MMO-A70, All acoustic minesweeping gear gear. Chapter 4 cleaned and properly stowed

Table 4-7. Automatic Acoustic Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedures

STEP PROCEDURE TM REFERENCE NORMAL INDICATION

1 Check Towed Body for proper SW570-F0-MMO-040, Towed Body creates appropriate operation Chapter 4 acoustic signal. 2 Stream Acoustic minesweeping SW570-F0-MMO-A70, Acoustic minesweeping gear gear Chapter 4 streaming correctly behind ship. 3 Energize PCU, start Towed Body, SW565-AB-MMO-040, Remote Ready For ACU Control and transfer control of Towed Chapter 2 Indicator illuminated. Body to ACU 4 Energize ACU and take control of SW565-AB-MMO-020, Power - ON, Towed Body Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Status - PCU Ready, Acoustic Mode Status - ACU Ready (TB-26 or TB-27), Acoustic Unit - TB-26 or TB-27, Magnetic Mode Status - Ready, Acoustic Mode Output indicators illuminated, ACU and PCU RPM 100X meters correspond. 5 Conduct minesweeping NWP 3-15 (Series) 6 Secure PCU SW565-AB-MMO-040, Main Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Logic Power - OFF, PCU/ACU Control - PCU, Manual Speed Control - CCW

4-20 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4-7. Automatic Acoustic Minesweeping - PCU start/ACU Control Procedures (Continued)

STEP PROCEDURE TM REFERENCE NORMAL INDICATION

7 Secure ACU SW565-AB-MMO-020, ACU Panel Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Output - OFF, Magnetic Mode Output - OFF, Acoustic Mode Motor Speed Control - 90 8 Recover acoustic minesweeping SW570-F0-MMO-A70, All acoustic minesweeping gear gear Chapter 4 cleaned and properly stowed.

Table 4-8. Manual Acoustic Control Minesweeping Procedures

STEP PROCEDURE TM REFERENCE NORMAL INDICATION

1 Check Towed Body for proper SW570-F0-MMO-040, Towed Body creates appropriate operation Chapter 4 acoustic signal 2 Stream Acoustic minesweeping SW570-F0-MMO-A70, Acoustic minesweeping gear gear Chapter 4 streaming correctly behind ship 3 Energize PCU SW565-AB-MMO-040, Remote Ready For ACU Control Chapter 2 Indicator illuminated 4 Energize ACU and start Towed SW565-AB-MMO-020, Power - ON, Body Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Status - PCU Ready, Acoustic Mode Status - ACU Ready (TB-26 or TB-27), Acoustic Unit (TB-26 or TB-27), Magnetic Mode Status - Ready, Acoustic Mode Output indicators illuminated, ACU and PCU RPM 100X meters correspond 5 Conduct minesweeping NWP 3-15 (Series) 6 Secure PCU SW565-AB-MMO-040, Main Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Logic Power - OFF, PCU/ACU Control - PCU, Manual Speed Control - CCW 7 Secure ACU SW565-AB-MMO-020, ACU Panel Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Output - OFF, Magnetic Mode Output - OFF, Acoustic Mode Motor Speed Control - 90 8 Recover acoustic minesweeping SW570-F0-MMO-A70, All acoustic minesweeping gear gear Chapter 4 cleaned and properly stowed

4-21 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Table 4-9. Manual Acoustic Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedure

STEP PROCEDURE TM REFERENCE NORMAL INDICATION

1 Check Towed Body for proper SW570-F0-MMO-040, Towed Body creates appropriate operation Chapter 4 acoustic signal 2 Stream Acoustic minesweeping SW570-F0-MMO-A70, Acoustic minesweeping gear gear Chapter 4 streaming correctly behind ship 3 Energize PCU, start Towed Body, SW565-AB-MMO-040, Remote Ready For ACU Control and transfer control of Towed Chapter 2 Indicator illuminated Body to ACU 4 Energize ACU and take control of SW565-AB-MMO-020, Power - ON, Towed Body Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Status - PCU Ready, Acoustic Mode Status - ACU Ready (TB-26 or TB-27), Acoustic Unit (TB-26 or TB-27), Magnetic Mode Status - Ready, Acoustic Mode Output indicators illuminated, ACU and PCU RPM 100X meters correspond 5 Conduct minesweeping. NWP 3-15 (Series) 6 Secure PCU SW565-AB-MMO-040, Main Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Logic Power - OFF, PCU/ACU Control - PCU, Manual Speed Control - CCW 7 Secure ACU SW565-AB-MMO-020, ACU Panel Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Output - OFF, Magnetic Mode Output - OFF, Acoustic Mode Motor Speed Control - 90 8 Recover acoustic minesweeping SW570-F0-MMO-A70, All acoustic minesweeping gear gear. Chapter 4 cleaned and properly stowed

Table 4-10. Combination Influence Minesweeping

STEP PROCEDURE TM REFERENCE NORMAL INDICATION

1 Check Towed Body for proper SW570-F0-MMO-040, Towed Body creates appropriate operation Chapter 4 acoustic signal 2 Stream acoustic and magnetic SW570-F0-MMO-A70, Acoustic and magnetic minesweeping gear Chapter 4 minesweeping gear streaming correctly behind ship 3 Switch generator power to DC S9324-B5-MMO-010, Minesweeping Mode Status Minesweeping Mode control Chapter 2 Indicator illuminated, Minesweeping Input Signal Voltmeter indicates 0 - ±7.5V, and Generator Voltmeter indicates £250V

4-22 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4-10. Combination Influence Minesweeping (Continued)

STEP PROCEDURE TM REFERENCE NORMAL INDICATION

4 Energize PCU SW565-AB-MMO-040, Remote Ready For ACU Control Chapter 2 Indicator illuminated 5 Energize ACU and start SW565-AB-MMO-020, Power - ON, waveform and Towed Body Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Status - PCU Ready, Acoustic Mode Status - ACU Ready (TB-26 or TB-27), Acoustic Unit (TB-26 or TB-27), Magnetic Mode Status - Run, Magnetic Mode Output and Acoustic Mode Output indicators illuminated 6 Conduct minesweeping NWP 3-15 (Series) 7 Secure PCU SW565-AB-MMO-040, Main Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Logic Power - OFF, PCU/ACU Control - PCU, Manual Speed Control - CCW 8 Secure ACU SW565-AB-MMO-020, ACU Panel Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Output - OFF, Magnetic Mode Output - OFF, Acoustic Mode Motor Speed Control - 90 9 Return generator power to DC S9324-B5-MMO-010, DC Ships Service Mode Indicator Ships Service Mode control Chapter 2 illuminated, meters indicate proper voltages/ amperages, and red flags displayed on breakers 10 Recover acoustic and magnetic SW570-F0-MMO-A70, All magnetic minesweeping gear minesweeping gear Chapter 4 cleaned and properly stowed

Table 4-11. Combination Influence Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedure

STEP PROCEDURE TM REFERENCE NORMAL INDICATION

1 Check Towed Body for proper SW570-F0-MMO-040, Towed Body creates appropriate operation Chapter 2 acoustic signal 2 Stream Acoustic and Magnetic SW570-F0-MMO-A70, Acoustic and magnetic minesweeping gear Chapter 4 minesweeping gear streaming correctly behind ship 3 Switch generator power to DC S9324-B5-MMO-010, Minesweeping Mode Status Minesweeping Mode control Chapter 2 Indicator illuminated, Minesweeping Input Signal Voltmeter indicates 0 - ±7.5V, and Generator Voltmeter indicates £250V

4-23 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4-11. Combination Influence Minesweeping - PCU Start/ACU Control Procedure (Continued)

STEP PROCEDURE TM REFERENCE NORMAL INDICATION

4 Energize PCU, start Towed Body, SW565-AB-MMO-040, Remote Ready For ACU Control and transfer control of Towed Chapter 2 Indicator illuminated Body to ACU 5 Energize ACU, take control of SW565-AB-MMO-020, Power - ON, Towed Body, and start waveform Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Status - PCU Ready, Acoustic Mode Status - ACU Ready (TB-26 or TB-27), Acoustic Unit (TB-26 or TB-27), Magnetic Mode Status - Run, Magnetic Mode Output and Acoustic Mode Output indicators illuminated 6 Conduct minesweeping NWP 3-15 (Series) 7 Secure PCU SW565-AB-MMO-040, Main Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Logic Power - OFF, PCU/ACU Control - PCU, Manual Speed Control - CCW 8 Secure ACU SW565-AB-MMO-020, ACU Panel Power - OFF, Chapter 2 Acoustic Mode Output - OFF, Magnetic Mode Output - OFF, Acoustic Mode Motor Speed Control - 90 9 Return generator power to DC S9324-B5-MMO-010, DC Ships Service Mode Indicator Ships Service Mode control Chapter 2 illuminated, Meters indicate proper voltages/ amperages, Red flags displayed on breakers 10 Recover acoustic and magnetic SW570-F0-MMO-A70, All magnetic minesweeping gear minesweeping gear Chapter 4 cleaned and properly stowed

(3) If the mine cannot be cleared by steps 1 and 2, tow the fouled mine into shallow water, heave in as much sweep wire as is safe, and cut the sweep or depressor wire as necessary. The mine may separate from the gear, allowing recovery of mine and sweep gear by trained mine disposal personnel. (4) If the mine does not float, mark the location for additional sweeping. If the mine floats, destroy it in accordance with Mine Destruction Procedures.

4-5.2 Mine Destruction Procedures. The following instructions apply to the disposal of floating mines. a. Station mine lookouts on the bow. Report floating mines to the ships following astern and to the mine destruction ship with the formation. b. In order of effectiveness, the armament suitable for the destruction of floating mines is as follows: (1) 50-caliber machine gun. (2) M-60 machine gun. (3) M-14 rifle.

4-24 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

NOTE The choice of armament will be dependent on availability, and will be specified in the MCM Commander’s operation order. c. The following procedures, in order of effectiveness, are recommended while closing to not less than 200 yards: (1) Fire short bursts with a 50-caliber machine gun using AP ammunition. Several hits may be required. (2) Fire short bursts with an M-60 machine gun. (3) Fire on the mine with several M-14 rifles. d. A minimum range of 200 yards is desired; however, the maximum range affording a high percentage of hits should be used to reduce the danger from fragments. During mine destruction, only the necessary personnel should be exposed. Other men must position themselves on the opposite side of the upper deck. All hands must wear helmets and Kapok life jackets. e. Riflemen assigned to Minesweeping Detail will wear life jackets, battle helmets, flack jacket, flash gear, goggles, and hearing protection.

4-5.3 Emergency Break Away Procedures. There are two types of break away procedures: General and Emergency. All means should be tried to safely recover equipment before the break away is executed. The following information is for mines fouled in the gear. If the break away is to assist the ship in maneuvering or clearing the decks for other reasons, such as damage control considerations (emergency break away), the following procedures are offered as a guide line. If fouling of gear is the result of anything other than live ordnance, the ship should attempt recovery/salvage or unfouling of the rig (general break away). Each ship has the responsibility to tailor their break away procedures and orders to execute them to their minesweeping order or bills.

4-5.4 O-Type Sweeps.

4-5.4.1 Single or Double (General). a. Depressor fouled: Use Cutters Mk 15 on depressor and sweep wires. Cut the sweep wires first to ensure mine is not detonated if depressor runs into sweep wire. b. Sweep wire fouled: Recover all unaffected gear that can be safely recovered. Use Cutter(s) Mk 15 on remaining wire(s).

4-5.4.2 Single or Double (Emergency). Break away for maneuvering or damage control considerations: Use Cutter(s) Mk 15 on depressor and sweep wire(s). No order of sequence is preferred, all cutters should be tripped as rapidly as possible.

4-5.5 Magnetic Sweeps.

4-5.5.1 Straight Tail Sweep Fouled (General). Secure pulsing. Recover unaffected sections if possible (i.e., if outboard K-4 is fouled, cut K-4 using a fireman’s ax; if S section is fouled, recover the inboard K-4 (if possible) and continue recovery of S section to pigtail connecting the two CA-1454s; then cut the remaining S section using a fireman’s ax.) If no recovery is possible, cut magnetic cable between the inboard preventer and the 8-inch snatch block used in the equalizing towing assembly. Ensure fantail is clear of all personnel. Use Cutter Mk 15 on equalizing towing pendant.

4-25 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4-5.5.2 Straight Tail Sweep Fouled (Emergency). Break away for maneuvering or damage control considerations: Secure pulsing. Using fireman’s ax cut magnetic cable between the inboard preventer and the 8-inch snatch block used in the equalizing towing assembly. Ensure fantail is clear of all personnel. Use Cutter Mk 15 on equalizing towing pendant.

4-5.5.3 M Mk 6(a), M Mk 6(h), and M Mk 7(b) Sweeps Fouled (General). Secure pulsing. Recover unaffected sections of magnetic and/or moored sweep gear if possible. If no recovery of sections is possible, using fireman’s ax, cut magnetic cable between the inboard preventer and the 8-inch snatch block used in the equalizing towing assembly. Ensure fantail is clear of all personnel. Sever the sweep wire and equalizing towing pendant using Cutter Mk 15.

4-5.5.4 Acoustic Sweeps. Secured pulsing: Cut acoustic cable inboard of the 125-ft towing stocking and close to the stocking. This prevents excess cable from whipping around. Using a boat hook, stand off to the side and trip out the pelican hook.

4-5.6 Combinations Sweeps. a. Break away of fouled gear will be dependent upon the configuration used. The FA sweeps which share a common tow point (sweep wire) will most likely be unable to salvage any parts of the sweep. In a combination sweep such as the M Mk 6(a) with a TB 26, recover the parts of the sweep which are not fouled. Example: If the acoustic side is fouled, recover the magnetic side. If the moored side of the magnetic sweep is fouled with an object in the otter or float pendant, attempt to recover the magnetic and the acoustic gear and salvage as much sweep wire as possible. b. For maneuvering or damage control considerations, secure pulsing to the magnetic and acoustic gear. Cut the magnetic and acoustic cables leaving the acoustic cable attached to its tow point and the magnetic cable riding on the equalizing towing pendant. Clear all unnecessary personnel from the fantail. Standing clear of the cable, trip out the acoustic cable using a boat hook. Clear the fantail. Use Cutter Mk 15 on equalizing towing pendant first, followed by cutting the sweep wire with a Cutter Mk 15.

4-6 STANDARD LOG FORMS.

4-6.1 Minesweeping Log. To standardize the preparation and maintenance of minesweeping records, a compact minesweeping log shall be established as follows: a. Procure a green record book (7530-00-222-3524), and divide it into seven sections using index tabs. This book will be designated as the minesweeping log. b. The formats for the seven sections illustrated in Figures 4-10 through 4-16 have been used in the past and are now being evaluated and reviewed for compatibility with Planned Maintenance System (PMS) maintenance requirement cards (MRCs). Each format record sheet was assigned to one section of the log in corresponding numerical sequence; i.e., Figure 4-10 was assigned to Section 1 of the log; Figure 4-11 was assigned to Section 2 of the log. A format of the appropriately assigned record sheet was on the first page (right-hand side) of each section. c. Entries made in the minesweeping log shall be classified Confidential and handled accordingly. d. The Commanding Officer shall designate, in writing, the ship’s minesweeping Boatswain’s Mate and Electrician’s Mate to maintain the appropriate sections of the log under the custody of the MCM Officer.

4-26 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 SWEEPS USED FOR DEEP O-TYPE CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In) USED FOR BOTH SIDES ensure proper float positions. Record all turnbuckle settings (thread O-TYPE USED FOR PORT O-TYPE USED FOR STARBOARD OTTER PORT STARBOARD Figure 4-10. Minesweeping Log Turnbuckle Adjustments (Otter and Depressor Bridles) Form MINESWEEPING LOG TURNBUCKLE ADJUSTMENTS (OTTER AND DEPRESSOR BRIDLES) Length of depressor wire Length of sweep wiredepressor to Length of float pendant Threads inside turnbuckle sleeve Adjustment of depressor turnbucklechain. is for If span. the port The depressor depressor is will used, always enter veer turnbuckle toward thread the settings side as which done has for the starboard. shortest forward leg in the bridle Length of float pendant Threads inside turnbuckle sleeve Length of sweep wire in fathoms Otter turnbuckle settings may be different for sweeps at various depths to inside sleeve) as adjustments are made for various float pendant lengths. CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In) Page ______

4-27 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 ETC. REMARKS: COMMENTS, LOST GEAR, CASUALTIES, STBD. RESS. TIME ON WIRE (CONFIDENTIAL - When Filled in) STREAMING RECOVERY TOTAL TOWING PER SIDE CUTTERS NO. & MARK FLOAT LENGTH PENDANT WIRE SCOPE Figure 4-11. Minesweeping Log - Minesweeping Record Form MINESWEEPING LOG - MINESWEEPING RECORD DEPRESSOR SCOPE OF SWEEP WIRE PORT STBD. START FINISH START FINISH PORT DEP- SWEEP DATE TYPE OF CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In) Page ______

4-28 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 REMARKS CASUALTIES & RADAR REFLECTORS (CONFIDENTIAL - When Filled in) BEACON PLANTING RECOVERY FLASHING START FINISH START FINISH OF LENGTH MOORING OF DEPTH WATER Figure 4-12. Minesweeping Log - Dan Buoy/Master Reference Buoys Form MINESWEEPING LOG - DAN BUOY/MASTER REFERENCE BUOYS FORM OF PLANTS DATE TYPE AND NUMBER CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In) Page ______

4-29 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 JUMPER MAGNETIC ACTIONS TO AND TOWING CABLE/CL-CABLE AND CORRECTIVE DAMAGE, CAUSES REMARKS RECORD (CLOSED SWEEPS) OF CABLE INSULATION RESISTANCE (CONFIDENTIAL - When Filled in) AND MAX PULSED VOLTAGE CURRENT CABLE WAS TIME MODE OF PULSE AND CABLE S OF MAGNETIC INSPECTION/REPAIR WAS STREAMED TIME CABLE Figure 4-13. Minesweeping Log - Magnetic Minesweeping Record Form TODAY TOTAL MAN. AUTO. MINESWEEPING LOG - MAGNETIC MINESWEEPING RECORD CONFIGURATION CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In) Page ______DATE SWEEP

4-30 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 REMARKS ARE NOTE AFTER DEVICES BEFORE, ACOUSTIC OPERATING DURING AND EXCEPTIONS PMS CHECKS ACCOMPLISHED ON TB-27 - TB-26 RPM HI/LO (CONFIDENTIAL - When Filled in) ECC MOD 2 TOTAL HOURS ECC MOD 1 TOTAL HOURS SW. POSIT. AMPS CYCLE TIME CYCLE PULSE INFORMATION ENSURE ALL OFF TIME LOW/ TIME DECAY TIME HIGH UP TIME Figure 4-14. Minesweeping Log - Acoustic Devices TB-27 and TB-26 Form MINESWEEPING LOG - ACOUSTIC DEVICES TB-27 AND TB-26 PROPER OPERATION CHECK FOR OPERATED TODAY TOTAL MAN. AUTO BUILD CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In) Page ______DATE TIME

4-31 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 CAUSES AND DAMAGE, LOW REMARKS RECORD INSULATION READING, CORRECTIVE ACTIONS WHEN (CONFIDENTIAL - When Filled in) LENGTH CHANGES TO RECEIVED AND CABLE LENGTH CONNECTORS INSPECTION/REPAIRS OF ELECTRICAL PLUG HARDEYES PREVENTERS, TOWING GRIPS AND INSPECTION/REPAIRS OF CHAFING GEAR ON Figure 4-15. Minesweeping Log - Acoustic Power Cable Form MINESWEEPING LOG - ACOUSTIC POWER CABLE W/DEVICE OF CABLE INSULATION RESISTANCE CONFIGURATION CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In) Page ______DATE SWEEP

4-32 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 HI/LO TB-26 RPM DEVICE SAT/UNSAT (CONFIDENTIAL - When Filled in) METER READING ATTEN. SETTING NOTE FILTER SETTING 1 TS-4144/P SAT/UNSAT Figure 4-16. Minesweeping Log - TS-4144/P Test Result Form MINESWEEPING LOG - TS-4144/P TEST RESULT INSTALLED ECCENTRIC Record all routine and operationallog TS-4144/P in test the results format in shown the below. Minesweeping Test in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040. DEVICE ACOUSTIC Record results of TS-4144/P equipment check conducted prior to test of an acoustic device. TEST DATE CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)1 Page ______

4-33 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4-6.2 Minesweeping Order Format. Figure 4-17 illustrates a Minesweeping Order Format. The use of this minesweeping order is required. It is a serviceable tool to improve cooperation and understanding. Suggested internal distribution of the format is as follows: Original: MCM Officer/file Copy 1: Commanding Officer/bridge Copy 2: Engineering Officer Copy 3: CPOIC/POIC of the Fantail Copy 4: Minesweep Electrician.

4-34 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In) MINESWEEPING ORDER FORMAT NO. Subj: Minesweeping Exercise Ref: (a) OPORD 1. TIME: 2. TYPE GEAR: 3. O-TYPE GEAR: a. Length of Sweep Wire b. Length of Float Pendant c. Type of Cutters d. Number of Cutters e. Cutter Pattern f. Depth of Sweep g. Length of Depressor Wire h. Sweep Speed 4. MAGNETIC SWEEP: a. Configuration MMK b. Pulse Schedule c. Times: Off Time On Time d. Current e. Waveform 5. ACOUSTIC SWEEP: a. TB-26 ECCENTRIC: MK 2 MOD 2 TB-27 PULSED MODULATED b. Other c. Depth of Device d. Cycle e. Times: Build Up High Decay Low/Off 6. Ensure degaussing system is lined-up and operating IAW ship instructions. CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)

Figure 4-17. Minesweeping Order Format (Sheet 1 of 3)

4-35 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In) 7. BRIEFING: Prior to streaming gear, minesweeping personnel will be mustered for a briefing which will include a description of the exercise and particular emphasis on the safety precautions to be observed. 8. SAFETY OBSERVER: Safety observer for the exercise will be . The observer will: a. Station himself on the fantail in such a position as to most effectively observe all personnel involved in the streaming of the gear as well as the gear itself. b. Ensure all safety precautions are specifically observed by personnel in the detail. c. Take immediate and positive action during the early stages of a dangerous condition to prevent its culmination and casualties to personnel and material. 9. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS: Safety precautions will be observed as follows: a. All personnel on the fantail in the minesweeping detail shall wear Mk 1 vest-type life preservers, construction-type safety helmets with quick-acting break away chin straps (fastened and worn under the chin), and approved safety shoes (ANSI Z41.1). b. Personnel not in the minesweeping detail shall stay clear of the fantail. c. During all minesweeping operations, the Rig Captain(s) in Charge of the minesweeping operation shall position himself/themselves to ensure positive or relay communications with all winch and crane operators. d. All personnel shall stay inboard of all gear when it is being handled. e. All personnel shall stay out of the bights of lines and wires. f. All hands shall stay clear of the fantail after the gear is stopped off. g. All applicable safety measures which are normally associated with good seamanship shall be observed. h. Personnel shall not enter the drum area if the drum is in motion. i. Obtain permission from CO/OOD prior to entering drum area. j. Ensure that the operator does not turn the drum until he has ascertained that: (1) All personnel are clear. (2) All running parts of the drum are clear.

CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In) Figure 4-17. Minesweeping Order Format (Sheet 2 of 3)

4-36 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In) k. Prior to servicing the magnetic minesweeping terminal box, connecting, or disconnecting minesweeping cable, the following precautions shall be observed:

Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. (1) Secure power to the terminal box. (2) Wear electrical Class-O (Red Label - 1000) type rubber gloves per PMS instruction. (3) Ensure another person is present who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock. (4) Ensure the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers and PCU is DANGER tagged OPEN before entering drum area. (5) Check analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc) to a known DC source to ensure proper operation. (6) Check to ensure there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range). (7) Check multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation prior to making NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report. (8) Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweeping cable. (9) Sand terminals with fine sandpaper.

SUBMITTED APPROVED

MINE COUNTERMEASURES OFFICER COMMANDING OFFICER

CONFIDENTIAL (When Filled In)

Figure 4-17. Minesweeping Order Format (Sheet 3 of 3)

4-37/(4-38 blank)

PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4A-1 RIGGING MULTIPLANE KITES

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in injury or death to personnel. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS

Bridle, chain, M/S depressor, 3-legs, size 1 (includes: Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (as required) 3/4-inch x 6-foot depressor span pendants (3), (1075-00-391-9280) 1-inch eye and jaw swivels (2), Shackle, long, clevis-type, NM (5340-01-270-8709) 7/8-inch shackles (8), 4-way connector, and (2) 7/8- x 12-inch turnbuckle (2)) (1075-00-294-2291) Bridle, chain, M/S otter, 4-legs, size 1 (includes: tow beam. 3/4-inch shackle (5), 7/8-inch and 1-inch shackles, and 7/8- x 6-inch turnbuckle (2)) (1075-00-294-2292) SUPPORT ITEMS Block, type L, NM (3940-00-809-7167) (2) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 60-foot, single leg, NM, Boatswain Mate Tool Kit wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Chain, safety, NM (4010-00-599-6737) (3) Pliers, wide, flat nose (5120-00-222-2232) Cutter, End, Mechanical, Mk 9, NM (per Job Sheet Screwdriver, 3/16 x 3L (5120-00-236-2127) 4A-4) (1075-00-265-0677) (2) Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, Depressor Wire, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 1800-foot, NM, single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) outboard end, inboard end whipped) Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, (4010-01-296-5861) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard Float, type O, size 1 (per Job Sheet 4A-3) end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008) (1075-01-371-0568) (2) Swivel, ball bearing, Mk 9 Assembly Pendant, depressor, 5/8-inch x 50-foot, single leg, (4030-01-371-1927) (2) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4A-1-1 MULTIPLANE KITE RIGGED AS A DEPRESSOR. NOTE Otters and depressors may be secured at the stern rail, in ready release position, if restreaming of the sweep is anticipated; otherwise, they will be secured in their stowage racks on the fantail.

4A-1A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

4A-1-1.1 Preparation.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE Refer to SW570-F0-MMO-040 for sheer, depth and emergency adjustments. Ensure all turnbuckle adjustments (settings) are entered in the minesweeping log book. Turnbuckle is always in the shortest of the long leg closest to the sweep (Single O). a. To maintain stability and keep depressor towing directly astern at maximum depth for a given scope of depressor wire, lengths of bridle legs must be correct (Figure 4A-1A). (1) The After (short) leg should measure between 45-7/8 inches to 46-3/8 inches. Measurement is taken from the inside of the 7/8-inch shackle pin to the inside of pear link as shown in Figure 4A-1A. (2) The Forward (long) legs should measure between 66-1/2 inches and 67-inches. Measurement is taken on the leg without the turnbuckle from the inside of long link to inside of 7/8-inch shackle pin. The leg with the turnbuckle is measured from inside long link to inside eye of turnbuckle as shown in Figure 4A-1A (TURNBUCKLE TO BE AS CLOSE TO MID SETTING AS POSSIBLE WITH NO KINKS OR TWIST IN CHAIN) (Figure 4A-1B). b. If differences in length of bridle legs are necessary for proper stability, shackles are used to compensate for differences. All legs are secured to multiplane kite using 7/8-inch shackles of same configuration.

4A-1-1.2 Rigging. NOTE The purpose of depressor is to give depth and control span to the inboard end of the sweep. For single side O-type sweeping the depressor must veer away from the sweep. Therefore it is strongly recommended to have two rigged depressors, one to give a port sheer when used with starboard side O gear, and one to give a starboard sheer when used with port side O gear. For double O gear, the span pendant limits the sheer making it travel astern of the ship. Paragraph 4A-1-2 contains details of Depressor Sheer Adjustments. a. Multiplane kite rigged as a depressor for Single O, Port configuration (Figure 4A-1C). (1) Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using 7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle. Ensure that the leg with turnbuckle is nearest to the sweep. (2) Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle. (3) Using the jaw end of a 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw), attach it to the towing ring of bridle chain. (4) Attach the eye end of swivel to the 4-way connector using a 1-inch shackle.

4A-1B PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-1A. Method of Measuring Depressor Bridle Chain Legs

4A-1C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-1B. Positioning of Turnbuckle for Mid-Setting

(5) Using a 1-inch shackle, attach the eye end of another 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw) to the other end of 4-way connector. The jaw end of this swivel is for the depressor wire connection. (6) Connect the 6-foot span pendant to the side of the 4-way connector using a 7/8-inch shackle. (7) Adjust the turnbuckle as required. (8) Proceed to paragraph 4A-1-2. b. Multiplane kite rigged as a depressor for Single O, Starboard configuration (Figure 4A-1D). (1) Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using 7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle. Ensure that the leg with turnbuckle is nearest to the sweep. (2) Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle. (3) Using the jaw end of a 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw), attach it to the towing ring of bridle chain. (4) Attach the eye end of swivel to the 4-way connector using a 1-inch shackle. (5) Using a 1-inch shackle, attach the eye end of another 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw) to the other end of 4-way connector. The jaw end of this swivel is for the depressor wire connection. (6) Connect the 6-foot span pendant to the side of the 4-way connector using a 7/8-inch shackle. (7) Adjust turnbuckle as required. (8) Proceed to paragraph 4A-1-2. c. Multiplane kite rigged as a depressor for Double O configuration (Figure 4A-1E). (1) Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using 7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle. The turnbuckle can be in either leg. (2) Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle.

4A-1D PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-1C. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single O, Port Configuration

4A-1E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-1D. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single O, Starboard Configuration

4A-1F PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-1E. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Double O Configuration

4A-1G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

(3) Using the jaw end of a 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw), attach it to the towing ring of bridle chain. (4) Attach the eye end of swivel to the 4-way connector using a 1-inch shackle. (5) Using a 1-inch shackle, attach the eye end of another 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw) to the other end of 4-way connector. The jaw end of this swivel is for the depressor wire connection. (6) Connect the 6-foot span pendants to the sides of the 4-way connector using 7/8-inch shackles. (7) Adjust the turnbuckle to mid setting (Figure 4A-1B) for the depressor to tow dead astern. (8) Proceed to paragraph 4A-1-2. d. Multiplane kite rigged as a depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep. NOTE Depressors must be adjusted to have the same amount of sheer away from the sweep. (1) Outboard depressor (Figure 4A-1F). (a) Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using 7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle (turnbuckle can be in either leg). (b) Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle. (c) Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach a depressor span pendant (part of bridle chain assembly) to the towing ring of bridle chain. On the other end of the depressor span pendant, attach an 11-inch type L block using a 7/8-inch shackle. (d) Attach a 1-inch swivel (link-to-link) to the towing ring using a 7/8-inch shackle. This is for the outboard end of the 50-foot depressor pendant. (e) Adjust the turnbuckle for the depressor to tow dead astern. Ensure that there are no kinks or twisting of chains. (2) Inboard depressor (Figure 4A-1G). (a) Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using 7/8-inch shackles furnishes with bridle (turnbuckle can be in either leg). (b) Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle. (c) Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach a depressor span pendant (part of bridle chain assembly) to the towing ring of bridle chain. On the other end of the depressor span pendant, attach a 3-inch ring using a 7/8-inch shackle. (d) Attach a 1-inch swivel (link-to-link) to the 3-inch ring using a 7/8-inch shackle on both sides of span pendant connection. This is for the inboard end of the 50-foot depressor pendant and for the depressor wire connection. (e) Opposite the span pendant, use a 7/8-inch shackle to connect another span pendant to the 3-inch ring. On the free end of span pendant, attach an 11-inch type L block using a 7/8-inch shackle. (f) Adjust the turnbuckle for the depressor to tow dead astern. Ensure that there are no kinks or twisting of chains. (g) Proceed to paragraph 4A-1-2. e. Multiplane Kite rigged as a depressor for Team Deep Sweep.

4A-1H PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-1F. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS) (Outboard Depressor)

4A-1J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-1G. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS) (Inboard Depressor)

4A-1K PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

NOTE Depressors must be adjusted to have the same amount of sheer away from the sweep. (1) Outboard depressor (Figure 4A-1H) (a) Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using 7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle (turnbuckle can be in either leg). (b) Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle. (c) Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach a depressor span pendant (part of bridle chain assembly) to the towing ring of bridle chain. On the other end of the depressor span pendant, attach a 11-inch type L block using a 7/8-inch shackle. (d) Attach a 1-inch swivel (link-to-link) to the towing ring using a 7/8-inch shackle. This is for the outboard end of the 50-foot depressor pendant. (e) Adjust the turnbuckle for the depressor to tow dead astern. Ensure that there are no kinks or twisting of chains. (2) Inboard Depressor (Figure 4A-1J) (a) Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using 7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle (turnbuckle can be in either leg). (b) Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using 7/8-inch shackle. (c) Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach a depressor span pendant (part of bridle chain assembly) to the towing ring of bridle chain. On the other end of the depressor span pendant attach a 3-inch ring using a 7/8-inch shackle. (d) Attach a 1-inch swivel (link-to-link) to the 3-inch ring using a 7/8-inch shackle on both sides of span pendant connection. This is for the inboard end of the 50-foot depressor pendant and for the depressor wire connection. (e) Opposite the span pendant, use a 7/8-inch shackle to connect another span pendant to the 3-inch ring. On the free end of span pendant, attach a 11-inch type L block using a 7/8-inch shackle. (f) Adjust the turnbuckle for the depressor to tow dead astern. Ensure that there are no kinks or twisting of chains. (g) Proceed to paragraph 4A-1-2. f. Multiplane Kite rigged as a depressor for Improved Deep Moored Sweep. NOTE Depressors must be adjusted to have the same amount of sheer away from the sweep. (1) Outboard Depressor (Figure 4A-1K) (a) Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using 7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle. The turnbuckle can be in either leg. (b) Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using a 7/8-inch shackle. (c) Connect a depressor span pendant to the bridle tow ring using a 7/8-inch shackle.

4A-1L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-1H. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Team Deep Sweep (Outboard Depressor)

4A-1M PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-1J. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Team Deep Sweep (Inboard Depressor)

4A-1N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-1K. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Improved Deep Moored Sweep (IDMS) (Outboard Depressor)

4A-1P PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(d) On the other end of the depressor span pendant connect the jaw end of a 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw). Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect the eye end of swivel to the outboard 3-inch ID ring. (e) Adjust the turnbuckle for the depressor to tow dead astern. Ensure that there are no kinks or twisting of chains. (2) Inboard Depressor (Figure 4A-1L) (a) Secure forward legs of depressor bridle to towing plate links at forward vane, using 7/8-inch shackles furnished with bridle. The turnbuckle can be in either leg. (b) Secure after leg to back (center) bar on after vane using a 7/8-inch shackle. (c) Connect a depressor span pendant to the bridle tow ring using a 7/8-inch shackle. (d) On the other end of the depressor span pendant connect the jaw end of a 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw). Using a 7/8-inch shackle connect the eye end of swivel to the inboard 3-inch ID ring. (e) Adjust the turnbuckle for the depressor to tow dead astern. Ensure that there are no kinks or twisting of chains.

4A-1-2 DEPRESSOR SHEER ADJUSTMENT. NOTE The depressor will always travel in the direction of shortest forward leg. A depressor that is adjusted to tow directly astern with port gear may sheer when used with starboard gear. Correct riding position is directly astern of its tow point. Sheer and depth adjustments requires test streaming of the depressor. a. Shackle depressor wire to the 1-inch swivel (eye to jaw). Veer about 9-fathoms of depressor wire, and gradually increase speed to 8-knots. b. If depressor tows nearly astern, increase headway to maximum speed. c. Adjustments for sheer: (1) If depressor sheers away from the sweep, shorten turnbuckle in the forward leg a minimum of four (4) turns per adjustment. Ensure lock nuts are tightened and secured with 1/16-inch seizing wire. (2) If depressor sheers toward the sweep, lengthen the turnbuckle in the forward leg a minimum of four (4) turns per adjustment. Ensure lock nuts are tightened and secured with 1/16-inch seizing wire. d. If the depressor does not have proper depth, check the difference in the length between the long legs and the short leg. It should measure in the range of 20-1/8 and 21-1/8 inch. e. Depressor depth emergency adjustments: (1) Do not perform unless absolutely necessary. (2) Add shackles to short leg first. If depth does not increase, remove the shackles from the short leg and add to the forward legs.

4A-1Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-1L. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Improved Deep Moored Sweep (IDMS) (Inboard Depressor)

4A-1R PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(3) Proper adjustment is achieved when depressor has an angle between 37 and 40 degrees from horizontal at a ship speed of eight (8) knots. f. After proper adjustment, count the number of threads inside the turnbuckle and log it in the Minesweep Log.

4A-1-3 MULTIPLANE KITE RIGGED AS AN OTTER.

4A-1-3.1 Preparation. a. To maintain proper attitude for sweeping, lengths of bridle legs must be correct (Figure 4A-1M). b. Difference in length between forward and after bridle legs should be approximately 18 inches. All legs are secured to multiplane kite using 3/4-inch shackles of the same configuration (Figure 4A-1N). c. Ensure turnbuckle is secured with 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4A-1-3.2 Rigging a Multiplane Kite As An Otter (Starboard Configuration). a. Using 3/4-inch shackles, secure forward and after legs of otter bridle to towing plate links at forward and after vanes, respectively (Figure 4A-1P). Ensure all shackle pins are inserted from otter out (inboard to outboard).

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE Multiplane kite rigged as an otter (Port configuration, Figure 4A-1Q) is adjusted the same as a starboard otter. b. Assemble bridle for starboard operation. Ensure turnbuckle leg is on the bottom (Figure 4A-1P) and that the turnbuckle is adjusted for the mid setting (Figure 4A-1R). A bridle adjusted for a starboard operating otter should remain with kite for which it is adjusted.

4A-1-3.3 Otter Adjustments. NOTE The otter is correctly adjusted when the float and about one-half of the flagstaff are submerged at a maximum sweeping speed. This results in a maximum otter depth for a given float pendant length. Lengthening or shortening turnbuckle leg decreases or increases, respectively, the downward pull of otter. Turnbuckle adjustments will normally bring float to its proper depth. a. There are three types of adjustments for the otter: (1) Initial Adjustment is performed when the gear is first received or when prior adjustments are unknown. (a) Place turnbuckle in mid position. (b) Test stream the gear by launching the otter and using a 60-foot float pendant and a size 1 float.

4A-1S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-1M. Method of Measuring Otter Bridle Chain Legs

4A-1T PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-1N. Otter Bridle Assembly

4A-1U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL Figure 4A-1P. Multiplane Kite Rigged as a Starboard Otter

4A-1V PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4A-1Q. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Port Otter

4A-1W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-1R. Position of Turnbuckle for Mid-Setting

(c) Payout the sweep wire to 200-fathoms. (d) Increase ship’s speed to 7-8 knots. (e) The angle of the float flagstaff off the ship's head should be between 22 and 32 degrees. (2) Operational Adjustment are performed when: (a) Mine explodes near the gear. (b) Gear striking the bottom. (c) Normal wear on the chain legs. (d) A change in float pendant length of more than 30 feet from initial adjustment. (3) For Operational Adjustment: (a) To increase depth of float, shorten turnbuckle leg four turns at a time. This increases the downward pull by laying otter over more. Secure turnbuckle with 1/8-inch seizing wire. (b) To make float ride at a more shallow depth, lengthen turnbuckle leg 2 to 4 turns at a time. This decreases downward pull by laying otter over less. Secure turnbuckle with 1/16-inch seizing wire. (4) Emergency Adjustments provide sheer. NOTE When otter is adjusted to tow deeper, the float angle may decrease as sweep depth increases. This is due to the progressive increase in sweep wire scope required to maintain a given number of fathoms outboard, and to longer float pendants required for deeper sweeping. This cannot be completely compensated for by sheer adjustment. (a) The four legs connected to the corners of otter are proportioned for proper sheer; however, if otter will not sheer sufficiently, proceed to step (b). 4A-1X PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(b) To adjust otter sheer, add a 3/4-inch shackle to each of the forward long legs leading to forward corners of otter. If the float angle does not increase, remove them and add them to the short legs. If the angle still does not increase, refer to SW570-F0-MMO-040. (c) Float angle with 200-fathoms of sweep wire outboard of a depressor snatch block, a sweep depth of 5 fathoms, and a speed of 8-knots is shown in Table 4A-1A. (d) Depressor wire and float pendant lengths for speeds of 6, 8, and 10 knots are listed in Table 4A-1B. (e) Sweep spread for various scopes of sweep wires are illustrated in Figure 4A-1S.

4A-1-3.4 Final Checks - Depressor and Otter. a. After depressor and otter have been adjusted independently, stream 200-fathoms of sweep wire using a 60-foot float pendant and 16-fathoms scope of depressor wire. b. Gradually increase to maximum speed for sweeping. Check performance of gear, make adjustments as required and log all adjustments in the minesweeping log book. c. At maximum sweep speed the float flagstaff should be half awash and at an angle of 22 to 32 degrees. NOTE A depressor subjected to correct initial adjustment will generally maintain depth satisfactorily. d. On a single-rigged, O-type sweep being towed at 6-knots, the 16-fathom depressor wire should stream astern at an angle between 37 and 40 degrees from horizontal when used with a sweep wire attached to an otter suspended from a 60-foot float pendant. e. If the angle of depressor wire is less than 30 degrees from horizontal, add a shackle to each of the forward legs of bridle, as necessary, to obtain proper angle. If the angle of depressor wire is greater than 40 degrees from horizontal, add a shackle to after leg of depressor bridle, as necessary, to obtain proper angle.

4A-1-4 DEPRESSOR WIRE AND FLOAT PENDANT. a. Table 4A-1B lists required scope of depressor wire and length of float pendant for a given depth of sweep at speeds of 6, 8, and 10 knots for 100 to 300 fathoms of sweep wire veered and half the flagstaff submerged. Since values given are critical with respect to speed and adjustment of gear, accurate speed curves should be obtained with appropriate gear streamed. Depressor and otter should be adjusted as described in this chapter. EXAMPLE: A sweep is to be conducted at a depth of 14 fathoms and a speed of 8 knots. b. Look in the column headed DEPTH OF SWEEP. Opposite 14 fathoms depth of sweep and under column headed 8 KNOTS, it will be found the required LENGTH OF FLOAT PENDANT is 100 feet, and the required scope of depressor wire is 29 fathoms for one side streamed. When both sides are streamed, required scope of depressor wire is 42 fathoms.

4A-1-5 LOG MEASUREMENT. a. Measure and record all measurements in the ship's minesweeping log.

4A-1Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Table 4A-1A. O-Type Float Angles

SPEED - 8 KNOTS

DEPTH OF SWEEP SINGLE SIDE ANGLE FROM BOTH SIDES SEXTANT ANGLE IN FATHOMS BRIDGE PELORUS (DEGREES) AT STERN (DEGREES)

52557 62556 7 24-1/2 54-1/2 8 24-1/2 53 92453 10 24 52 12 23 50-1/2 14 22-1/2 48-1/2 16 22 47 18 21 45 20 21 43-1/2 25 20 40 30 19 37 35 18 34 40 17 31

4A-1Z PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4A-1B. Wire and Float Pendant Length

SPEED THROUGH WATER

DEPTH 6 KNOTS 8 KNOTS 10 KNOTS OF SWEEP SCOPE OF SCOPE OF SCOPE OF DEPRESSOR LENGTH OF DEPRESSOR LENGTH OF DEPRESSOR LENGTH OF WIRE FLOAT WIRE FLOAT WIRE FLOAT PENDANT PENDANT PENDANT FATHOMS FATHOMS FATHOMS

Single Double Otter Single Double Otter Single Double Otter Fathoms Sweep Sweep Feet Depth Sweep Sweep Feet Depth Sweep Sweep Feet Depth

5 7 13 20 27 7 15 20 28 8 16 20 28 6 8 1630339 18303510193035 7 101940391121404312224043 8 122145451424505115265051 9 142450511627605817296058 10 16 27 60 58 19 30 65 66 20 33 65 66 12 20 33 70 72 24 36 80 83 25 39 80 85 14 25 38 85 86 29 42 100 100 31 46 105 105 16 30 44 100 100 33 49 120 119 36 53 130 127 18 35 50 115 115 38 55 140 138 41 60 150 149 20 39 56 130 130 43 62 150 158 47 68 170 172 25 51 72 165 168 55 80 210 210 60 87 230 232 30 62 89 205 208 68 98 265 265 74 106 300 300 35 74 105 250 248 80 116 330 328 87 126 370 372 40 85 122 290 290 93 134 400 400 101 146 465 486 4597—340338———————— 50109—390390————————

4A-1AA SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-1S. Sweep Spread for Various Effective Scopes of Sweep Wire

4A-1AB PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4A-2 SWEEP AND DEPRESSOR WIRE PREPARATION AND MARKING

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS

Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, (with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard Depressor Wire, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 1800-foot, NM, end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, outboard end, inboard end whipped) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard (4010-01-296-5861) end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) SUPPORT ITEMS

Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Paint, enamel, yellow (TT-E-516) * Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) * Swaging Tool Kit (3446-00-196-3905) Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Tape, steel measuring, 100-foot (5210-00-554-7092) Paint, enamel, white (TT-E-516) * Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) * Hazardous Material.

4A-2A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

4A-2-1 RIGGING THE SWEEP WIRE.

4A-2-1.1 Sweep Wire Preparation.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE Use right-hand lay wire on starboard side and left-hand lay wire on port side to overcome wire sag during towing operations. Safe working load is one-half the breaking strength. Non-magnetic 5/8-inch (7 x 7), 4,000-foot faired wire rope with a breaking strength of 32,000 pounds is used as a sweep wire for general minesweeping operations. Non-magnetic 5/8-inch (7 x 7), 1,800-foot (RHL) wire rope with a breaking strength of 32,000 pounds is used as a depressor wire for general minesweeping operations. a. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach, 5/8-inch x 6-foot diversion chain to outboard end of port sweep wire.

Maintain a minimum of 500 lbs of tension on the wire. NOTE All sweep wire measurements are from the hardeye end of sweep wire (except for diverted magnetic sweeps). Sweep wire markings may be applied before or during initial wire installation on winch drum. Space multiple bands 1 inch apart. Use a steel tape to accurately measure location of bands. The full scope of sweep wire is measured from sweep wire roller chock to otter. b. Pay out sweep wire from sweep wire drum to 300-foot (50 FMS) scope as measured from hardeye end of sweep wire. c. Using PPE per MSDS, paint one 2-inch wide red band on sweep wire at 300-foot (50 FMS) location (Figure 4A-2A). d. Pay out sweep wire to 600-foot (100 FMS) scope. e. Using PPE per MSDS, paint one 2-inch wide white band on sweep wire at 600-foot (100 FMS) location. f. Using PPE per MSDS, continue paying out and painting bands on sweep wire in the locations, quantities, and colors indicated in Table 4A-2A. Continue as required. g. Reel sweep wire back on sweep wire drum and secure to drum. Using PPE per MSDS, mark both sweep wires with 2-inch bands, one red, one white and one blue at 1,110 feet for the M Mk 7(b) (temporary mark).

4A-2B PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-2A. Standard Sweep Wire Markings for Port and Starboard Wire

4A-2C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Table 4A-2A. Sweep Wire Painted Band Locations

DISTANCE FROM OUTBOARD ENDS (FMS) NUMBER OF 2-INCH BANDS COLOR OF PAINT

50 1 Red 100 1 White 150 2 Red 200 2 White 250 3 Red 300 3 White

4A-2-1.2 FA2 and FA2A Port Sweep Wire Preparation. NOTE Use a steel tape to accurately measure location of marking bands. All diverted magnetic sweeps are measured from the center of long link in the 6-foot chain. All other sweep wire measurements are from the hardeye end of sweep wire. a. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach 6-foot chain to outboard end of sweep wire. b. Pay out sweep wire to first red or blue mark (360 feet) as measured from long link in center of chain. c. Using PPE per MSDS, paint one red and one blue 2-inch wide band 1 inch apart on sweep wire (Figure 4A-2B). d. Pay out sweep wire to second blue and red mark (390 feet). e. Using PPE per MSDS, paint two red and two blue 2-inch wide bands 1 inch apart on sweep wire. f. Continue paying out and using PPE per MSDS, paint bands on sweep wire in locations, quantities, and colors as indicated in Figure 4A-2B. g. Reel port sweep wire onto port sweep wire drum. Unshackle 6-foot chain from sweep wire. h. Secure sweep wire to sweep wire drum.

4A-2D PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-2B. Port Sweep Wire Marking for FA2 and FA2A Sweep Configurations (Without Fairings)

4A-2E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

4A-2-2 DEPRESSOR WIRE RIGGING.

4A-2-2.1 Depressor Wire Preparation. NOTE 5/8-inch (7 x 7), 1,800-foot wire rope is used for size 1 depressor streaming operations. Depressor wire markings may be applied before or during initial wire installation on the winch drum. Space multiple bands 1 inch apart. Use a steel tape to accurately measure locations of bands. The scope of depressor wire is measured from water’s edge to the depressor. a. Pay out depressor wire. Using PPE per MSDS, paint a single 2-inch wide red intermediate band every fathom from 1 to 60 fathoms, except at distances listed in Table 4A-2B. b. In addition to above fathom markings, using PPE per MSDS, paint 2-inch wide bands in locations, quantities, and colors indicated in Table 4A-2B. Space all multiple bands 1 inch apart. c. Continue painting bands on wire, repeating color and number coding as required (Table 4A-2B). Continue to 150 FMS (or longer as required). d. Reel depressor wire on depressor wire drum. Secure depressor wire to drum.

Table 4A-2B. Depressor Wire Painted Bands Locations

DISTANCE FROM OUTBOARD ENDS (FMS) NUMBER OF 2-INCH BANDS COLOR OF PAINT

5 1 White 10 2 White 15 3 White 20 4 White 25 1 Yellow 30 2 Yellow 35 3 Yellow 40 4 Yellow 45 1 White 50 2 White 55 3 White 60 4 White 65 1 Yellow

4A-2F PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4A-2-3 NICROPRESS MODEL NO. 635, HYDRAULIC SWAGING TOOL.

High pressure hydraulic equipment can be dangerous if not properly used. It is important that only persons fully familiar with the proper use and care of the No. 635 tool should operate the equipment. During use persons should wear eye goggles, safety shoes, and safety helmet. Never operate the tool without the thrust pin all the way in. The thrust pin handle is designed to prevent operation of the pump of the No. 635 tool except when the thrust pin is all the way in. All pendants made in port will be tested in accordance with NAVSEA S9086-UU-STM-010 (NSTM - Chapter 613). Emergency pendants made without the required testing shall require authorization from the Commanding Officer and supporting entry made in deck log before use. (Upon return to port, pendant shall be correctly tested or discarded.)

Before operating this tool or making a splice, ensure the correct die for the particular size of sleeve to be pressed has been correctly installed in the tool. NOTE These instructions are intended for use with Nicropress oval sleeves and cable manufactured to military specifications. If required, manufacturers instructions for the Nicropress No. 635 can be obtained from National Telephone Supply Company, 5100 Superior Avenue, Cleveland, OH, 44103.

4A-2-3.1 Purpose and Functional Description. a. The swaging tool is a hand operated, high pressure hydraulic tool capable of providing 35 tons of swaging pressure (Figure 4A-2C). It is designed for making eye splices by shipboard personnel using the process of swaging a metal sleeve around wire rope with a hydraulic press approved as an alternate to manual splicing. Only use swages on wire ropes with steel core. The use of swages on wire ropes whose construction consists of fiber cores is unauthorized due to the inherent weakness and extreme flexibility of this type of rope. b. Whenever the hand pump supplied with the swaging tool is torn down for maintenance, the output pressure must be checked and reset as required. A 10,000 psi hydraulic pressure gauge should be connected to the pump output port. Operate the pump until pressure builds up and the overload valve unloads. Proper setting for the pump is 8,800 psi to 9,200 psi. Adjust the overload valve as required to reach this setting.

4A-2-3.2 Swaging Flexible Steel Cable, and Wire Rope with Nicropress Oval Sleeves. a. Figure 4A-2D illustrates a swaged softeye and the method of measuring the eye, all wire rope softeyes used on MCM-Class ships are 12 inches. Tables 4A-2C and 4A-2D provide sleeve and die sizes as required.

4A-2G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-2C. Tool, Swaging, Nicropress Mod No. 635

Figure 4A-2D. Swaged Soft Eye

4A-2H PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Table 4A-2C. Nicropress Copper Oval Sleeves and Tool Dies

NICROPRESS COPPER OVAL SLEEVES

NICROPRESS NO. 635 HYDRAULIC NICROPRESS OVAL SLEEVES TOOL DIES

ZINC PLAIN PLATED TIN PLATED NUMBER CABLE COPPER COPPER COPPER DIE OF GAUGE SIZE SLEEVE SLEEVE NO. SLEEVE NO. STOCK NO. PRESSES DESIGNATION

3/64-inch 18-11-B4 28-11-B4 428-1.5-VB4 OVAL B4 1 635-OVAL-B4-VB4 1/16-inch 18-1-C 28-1-C 428-2-VC OVAL C 1 635-OVAL-C-VC 3/32-inch 18-2-G 28-2-G 428-3-VG OVAL G 1 635-OVAL-G-VG 1/8-inch 18-3-M 28-3-M 428-4-VM OVAL M 1 635-OVAL-M-VM 5/32-inch 18-4-P 28-4-P 428-5-VP OVAL P 1 635-OVAL-P-VP 3/16-inch 18-6-X 28-6-X 428-6-VX OVAL X 1 635-OVAL-X-VX 7/32-inch 18-8-F2 28-8-F2 428-7-VF2 OVAL F2 1 635-OVAL-F2-VF2 1/4-inch 18-10-F6 28-10-F6 428-8-VF6 OVAL F6 1 635-OVAL-F6-VF6 5/16-inch 18-13-G9 28-13-G9 428-10-VG9 OVAL G9 1 635-OVAL-G9-VG9 3/8-inch 18-23-H5 28-23-H5 428-12-VH5 OVAL H5 1 635-OVAL-H5-VH5 7/16-inch 18-24-J8 28-24-J8 428-14-VJ8 OVAL J8 2 635-OVAL-J8-VJ8 1/2-inch 18-25-K8 28-25-K8 428-16-VK8 OVAL K8 2 635-OVAL-K8-VK8 9/16-inch 18-27-M1 28-27-M1 428-18-VM1 OVAL M1 3 635-OVAL-M1-VM1 5/8-inch 18-28-N5 28-28-N5 428-20-VN5 OVAL N5 3 635-OVAL-N5-VN5

Table 4A-2D. Nicropress Stainless Steel Oval Sleeves and Tool Dies

NICROPRESS STAINLESS STEEL NICROPRESS NO. 635 HYDRAULIC OVAL SLEEVES TOOL DIES

NICROPRESS STAINLESS STEEL OVAL SLEEVE DIE NUMBER OF GAUGE CABLE SIZE STOCK NUMBER STOCK NO. PRESSES DESIGNATION

3/64-inch 168-1.5-VB4 OVAL B4 1 635-OVAL-B4-VB4 1/16-inch 168-2-VB4 OVAL B4 1 635-OVAL-B4-VB4 3/32-inch 168-3-VC OVAL C 1 635-OVAL-C-VC 1/8-inch 168-4-VG OVAL G 1 635-OVAL-G-VG 5/32-inch 168-5-VM OVAL M 1 635-OVAL-M-VM 7/32-inch 168-7-VX OVAL X 1 635-OVAL-X-VX 1/4-inch 168-8-VF2 OVAL F2 1 635-OVAL-F2-VF2

4A-2J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

b. When making an eye or loop splice, first insert the cable into the sleeve (Figure 4A-2E). c. Bend cable back on itself, making a large loop, and push cable-end back into sleeve (Figure 4A-2E). d. Add hardeye thimble, if making a hardeye splice. NOTE Always have cable-end projected approximately 1/2-inch beyond the sleeve to ensure cable in sleeve is round and undistorted and also to care for the elongation of the sleeve which occurs when pressing it. This also permits cable to project beyond sleeve approximately 1/8-inch to 1/4-inch maximum after it is compressed. e. Place sleeve in groove of bottom die. Insert top die and center sleeve in die grooves as shown in Figure 4A-2F. f. Push thrust-pin all the way in. If it does not go all the way in; open control valve and allow ram-plunger to retract sufficiently so thrust-pin will go all the way in. Close control valve tightly (handtight) but do not hammer it shut. Operate pump to close dies and make compression. g. When complete, check compression of the sleeve using the correct gauge listed in Tables 4A-2C and 4A-2D.

Figure 4A-2E. Eye Splice

4A-2K PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-2F. Top Die and Center Sleeve

4A-2L/(4A-2M blank)

PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4A-3 FLOAT PREPARATION

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in injury or death to personnel. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS

Flag, O-type, red and black, 33- x 33-inch Pendant, float (acoustic) 1/2-inch x length as required, (8345-00-233-4112) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each Flagstaff, 2-inch x 9-foot stainless steel end) 1 (8345-00-558-0073) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 5-foot, single leg, NM, wire Flasher, Xenon (9905-01-216-9250) rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Float, type O, size 0, NM (1075-01-357-9948) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, Float, type O, size 1, NM (1075-01-371-0568) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 20-foot, single leg, NM, 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Line, nose, float, 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot, single leg, Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 30-foot, single leg, NM, nylon (hardeye splice one end, other end wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 whipped) 1 Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 60-foot, single leg, NM, Line, nose, float (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 100-foot, single leg, NM, Line, tail, float, 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot, single leg, nylon wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 (hardeye splice one end, other end whipped) 1 Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, Pendant, bail (size-0 float) 2-1/2-inch x 9-foot, single NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one end, leg, nylon (hardeye splice one end, other end other end 12-inch softeye) 1 with 4-inch softeye splice) 1 Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 3/4-inch (size 0 float) Pendant, bail (size-1 float) 2-1/2-inch x 7-foot, single (4030-00-270-5484) (3) leg, nylon (hardeye spliced one end, other end Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch with 4-inch softeye splice) 1 (4030-00-270-5483) Pendant, emergency recovery, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, Moored size 1 float (6) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one Acoustic size 1 float (7) end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 Acoustic size 0 float (4) Pendant, emergency recovery, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/4-inch (4030-00-269-9769) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 5/8-inch (4030-00-269-9768) end, other end 12-inch soft swage) 1 SUPPORT ITEMS

Battery, D, Carbon (6130-01-120-1020) Tape, electrical (5970-00-061-6715) Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Marline (4020-00-240-2185) Wire, trip, 10-inch with cotter pin 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4A-3A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

4A-3-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4A-3-1.1 Size 0 (Single Ship Deep Sweep) and Size 1 (Moored) Float Preparation. a. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, connect appropriate float pendant (Table 4A-3A) to a 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel (Figure 4A-3A). b. Attach a 5/8-inch shackle to other end of 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel. c. Run long arm of a 5/8-inch pelican hook through 5/8-inch shackle and close pelican hook. d. Secure pelican hook with a 3/16-inch x 3-inch stainless steel cotter pin on a 10-inch trip wire. Attach pelican hook to bail of float using a 5/8-inch shackle. e. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot nylon nose line to eye on nose of float. f. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach thimble end of 5/16-inch x 10-foot emergency recovery pendant to 5/8-inch shackle between link-to-link swivel and pelican hook. g. Attach other end of emergency recovery pendant (softeye splice) to float flagstaff socket with electrical tape (two turns). h. Secure minesweeping flag to float flagstaff in either port or starboard orientation (Figure 4A-3A); top stripe red for port sweep, top stripe black for starboard sweep. i. Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. j. Attach Xenon flasher to side of float flagstaff above the flag (Figure 4A-3A). k. Insert flagstaff, with flag attached, in flagstaff socket. l. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot nylon hardeye of tail line to tail of float.

4A-3-1.2 Depressor Wire and Float Pendant Length. a. The depressor and otter should be adjusted in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. b. Table 4A-3A gives the necessary scope of depressor wire and length of float pendant for a given depth of sweep at speeds of 6, 8, and 10 knots for 100 to 300 fathoms of sweep wire veered and half the flagstaff of the float submerged. Since the values given are critical with respect to speed and adjustment of gear, accurate speed curves should be obtained with appropriate gear streamed.

4A-3-1.3 Size 1 Float Preparation for Acoustic Sweep. a. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, connect 1/2-inch float pendant (Table 4A-3B) to 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel (Figure 4A-3B). b. Attach a 5/8-inch shackle to other end of 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel. c. Run long arm of a 5/8-inch pelican hook through 5/8-inch shackle and close pelican hook.

4A-3B PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4A-3A. Depressor Wire and Float Pendant Length

SPEED THROUGH WATER

DEPTH 6 KNOTS 8 KNOTS 10 KNOTS OF SWEEP SCOPE OF SCOPE OF SCOPE OF DEPRESSOR LENGTH OF DEPRESSOR LENGTH OF DEPRESSOR LENGTH OF WIRE FLOAT WIRE FLOAT WIRE FLOAT PENDANT PENDANT PENDANT FATHOMS FATHOMS FATHOMS

Single Double Otter Single Double Otter Single Double Otter Fathoms Sweep Sweep Feet Depth Sweep Sweep Feet Depth Sweep Sweep Feet Depth

5 7 13 20 27 7 15 20 28 8 16 20 28 6 8 16 30 33 9 18 30 35 10 19 30 35 7 101940391121404312224043 8 122145451424505115265051 9 142450511627605817296058 10 16 27 60 58 19 30 65 66 20 33 65 66 12 20 33 70 72 24 36 80 83 25 39 80 85 14 25 38 85 86 29 42 100 100 31 46 105 105 16 30 44 100 100 33 49 120 119 36 53 130 127 18 35 50 115 115 38 55 140 138 41 60 150 149 20 39 56 130 130 43 62 160 158 47 68 170 172 25 51 72 165 168 55 80 210 210 60 87 230 232 30 62 89 205 208 68 98 265 265 74 106 300 300 35 74 105 250 248 80 116 330 328 87 126 370 372 40 85 122 290 290 93 134 400 400 101 146 465 486 45 97 340 338 50 109 390 390

4A-3C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-3A. Size 0 and Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4A-3D PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4A-3B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation

DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH (FEET) (FEET)

20 13 22 15 24 17 25 18 26 19 27 20 28 21 29 22 30 23

d. Secure pelican hook with cotter pin on 10-inch trip wire. Attach pelican hook to bail of float using a 5/8-inch shackle. e. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach the hardeye of 2-1/2-inch x 7-foot bail pendant to 5/8-inch shackle connecting the pelican hook to the bail. f. Pass the softeye of 7-foot bail pendant through eye on nose of float. g. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot nose line to softeye of 7-foot bail pendant. h. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach thimble end of 1/2-inch x 10-foot emergency recovery pendant to 5/8-inch shackle between link-to-link swivel and pelican hook. i. Attach other end of emergency recovery pendant (softeye) to float flagstaff socket with electrical tape (two turns) (Figure 4A-3B). j. Secure minesweeping flag to float flagstaff in either port or starboard orientation (Figure 4A-3B); e.g., top stripe red for port sweep, top stripe black for starboard sweep. k. Attach Xenon flasher to float flagstaff above the flag (Figure 4A-3B). l. Insert flagstaff in flagstaff socket. m. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach hardeye of 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot tail line to tail of float.

4A-3-1.4 Size 0 Float Preparation for Acoustic Sweep. a. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, connect appropriate float pendant (Table 4A-3C) to a 3/4-inch link-to-link swivel (Figure 4A-3C). b. Attach a 3/4-inch shackle to other end of 3/4-inch link-to-link swivel. c. Run long arm of a 5/8-inch pelican hook through 3/4-inch shackle and close pelican hook. d. Secure pelican hook with cotter pin on 10-inch trip wire. Attach pelican hook to bail of float using a 5/8-inch shackle.

4A-3E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-3B. Size 1 Float Rigged for Streaming TB-27 (Acoustic)

4A-3F PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4A-3C. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure

DEPTH TO CENTER OF PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0 AIR DIAPHRAGM (FEET) FLOAT (FEET) PRESSURES (PSI)

20 13 8.0 22 15 8.5 24 17 9.3 25 18 10.1 26 19 10.5 27 20 10.8 28 21 11.2 29 22 11.5 30 23 11.8

e. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach the hardeye of bail pendant to the 5/8-inch shackle connecting the pelican hook to the bail. f. Pass the softeye of the 9-foot bail pendant through eye on the nose of float. g. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach a 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot nose line to softeye of 9-foot bail pendant. h. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach thimble end of 2-1/2-inch x 10-foot emergency recovery pendant to 3/4-inch shackle between link-to-link swivel and pelican hook. i. Attach other end of emergency recovery pendant (softeye) to float flagstaff socket with electrical tape (two turns) (Figure 4A-3C). j. Secure minesweeping flag to float flagstaff in either port or starboard orientation (Figure 4A-3C) (top stripe red for port sweep, top stripe black for starboard sweep). k. Attach Xenon flasher to flagstaff above the flag (Figure 4A-3C). l. Insert flagstaff in flagstaff socket. m. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach hardeye of 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot tail line to tail of float.

4A-3G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-3C. Size 0 Float Rigged for Streaming TB-26 (Acoustic)

4A-3H PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4A-4 CUTTER ASSEMBLIES PREPARATION

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4. All personnel handling explosives/explosive devices shall be qualified and certified in accordance with Explosive Handling Personnel Qualification and Certification (QUAL/CERT) Program.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS

Cartridge, Mk 152 Mod 0 (1377-00-302-8489) Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, Body, NM (1075-00-340-6803) Cartridge, Mk 154 Mod 0 (Red) (1377-00-302-8494) Cutter Mk 14, Elevating Fin Assembly Cartridge, Mk 155 Mod 0 (Blue) (1377-00-302-8504) (1075-01-337-4662) Cartridge, Mk 192 Mod 0 (1377-01-012-2961) Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0, Body, NM (1075-00-507-1201) Cutter, End, Mechanical, Mk 9 (1075-00-265-0677) Cutter Mk 15 (1075-00-332-5834) Cutter Mk 12, Elevating Fin Assembly Swivel Assembly Mk 9 (4030-01-371-1927) (1075-01-339-3693) SUPPORT ITEMS Brush, bristle (7920-00-238-1907) (2) File, hand, half round, 6-inch (5110-00-241-9153) (2) Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, NM: Grease (MIL-G-24139) * Kit, expendable, parts (1075-00-691-8341) Hammer, copper, 1-lb (5120-00-224-4121) (2) Kit, maintenance, parts (1075-00-340-6804) Line, tag, 21-thread x 3-foot (4) 1 Kit, special tools, Mk 12 (1075-00-340-6805) Loctite 222 (7050-00-451-4442) * Tool, cocking, Mk 12 (1075-00-347-0757) Pliers, 5-inch with cutter (5120-00-222-2232) (2) Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0, NM: Screwdriver, 3/8-inch x 10 L (5120-00-293-3309) (2) Kit, expendable, parts (1075-00-507-1210) Screwdriver,3/16-inchx3L(5120-00-905-6728) (2) Kit, maintenance, parts (1075-00-507-1211) Silicon Compound (MIL-S-8660) * Kit, special tools, Mk 14 (1075-00-024-0220) Tape, antiseize (MIL-T-27730, size 1) Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM: Tool Punch (5140-00-329-4306) (2) Kit, expendable, parts (1075-00-332-5835) Wrench, adjustable, 8-inch (5120-00-264-3794) (2) Kit, maintenance, parts (1075-00-332-5836) Wrench, allen, 1/2-inch hex (5120-00-198-5391) Kit, special tools, Mk 15 (1075-01-245-8516) Wrench, allen, 5/16-inch hex (5120-00-240-5274) (2) See footnotes at end of table.

4A-4A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

SUPPORT ITEMS (Continued) Wrench, combo, 5/8- x 1-1/16-inch offset (5120-00-224-3141) (2) * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4A-4-1 CUTTER MK 9, END ASSEMBLY.

Cutter blades are very sharp and can cause injury to personnel. Do not place hand or finger on cutting blades or in cable cutting jaws.

4A-4-1.1 Elevating Fin Attachment. a. Hold cutter by the large shackle with the jaw of the frame pointing forward (Figure 4A-4A). b. For a starboard cutter, the elevating fin will go on the right side of the frame; on the left side for a port cutter. c. Fasten cutter body frame to elevating fin with three fin assembly screws. The screws are attached through the blade and into the frame.

4A-4-1.2 Port or Starboard Cutter Check. a. Lay cutter on deck with jaw facing forward, elevating fin side down, and cutting blades on top. b. The large shackle will point to the side of the ship for which the cutter is rigged.

4A-4-1.3 Blade Attachment. a. With cutter laying on deck and jaw facing forward, attach left-hand, L-shaped sawtooth blade with blade retaining bolts; then attach right-hand blade.

4A-4-1.4 Attachment of Swivel Assembly Mk 9 to the Cutter Mk 9. a. Remove cotter pin, guide pin, and guide for stowage. b. On the nonrotating end of the swivel, remove two cap head screws; then remove the pin. c. Position the swivel on Cutter Mk 9 and align holes of Cutter Mk 9 and swivel. d. Using PPE per MSDS, apply antiseize (Loctite) on cap head screw threads, then reinsert the pin into the swivel and screw cap head screws into swivel.

4A-4-1.5 Sweep Wire Attachment. a. Remove hex head cap head screws from rotating end of the swivel, then remove the pin. b. Position the swivel on the end of the sweep wire and align the hole of the hardeye and swivel. c. Using PPE per MSDS, apply antiseize (Loctite) on cap head screw threads, then reinsert the pin into the swivel and screw cap head screws into swivel. d. The large shackle on the cutter attaches to otter bridle.

4A-4B PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-4A. Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly (Rigged for Starboard)

4A-4-2 CUTTER/ELEVATING FIN ASSEMBLY MK 12 MOD 0.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. Never stow cutter assemblies with the breech block mounted to the cutter bodies or with the firing pin assembly in the cocked position.

4A-4-2.1 Cutter Punch Installation. a. Insert cutting punch and position it to line up with holes in the main frame for insertion of punch shear pin (Figure 4A-4B). This shear pin has a preformed shank and must be driven home with a drift pin and hammer until the head bottoms on the frame, so that the punch will be firmly held in place.

4A-4-2.2 Elevating Fin Assembly. a. Using the alignment pins, position the cutter body assembly on the elevating fin assembly. Fasten cutter body assembly to elevating fin using three fin assembly screws. Ensure screws are tightened after the body is correctly positioned (Figure 4A-4B).

4A-4C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-4B. Cutter Assembly Mk 12 Mod 2

4A-4D PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

b. Cock firing plunger with cocking tool (Figure 4A-4C). Thread a trip pin through the hole in the top of anvil and through the hole in the firing plunger (Figure 4A-4B). Insert firing safety pin. Uncock firing plunger and remove cocking tool. Visually inspect the cutters as follows: (1) Ensure cutting punch is in position and shear pin is properly peaned. (2) Ensure trip pin is properly seated in anvil and firing plunger. (3) Ensure anvil is in proper position and anvil screw is tight. (4) Ensure the assembly screws securing the body to the elevating fin are tight.

Keep hands and body well clear of the anvil. Ensure that the correct explosive cartridge is fitted. Always fit a safety pin in a cocked, armed cutter, and ensure there is enough tension so the pin cannot fall out. Do not remove the safety pin until the cutter is positioned on the sweep wire, and replace it, upon recovery, before removing the cutter or any debris from the wire. Always point explosive cutters in a safe direction; stow on deck facing outboard. Always treat a loaded cutter with the same respect as a loaded gun. NOTE The 1st LT is required to ensure proper cartridges are used and that all pertinent data concerning the cartridges is documented such as lot, date, Mk and Mod, quantity, etc. c. Insert explosive cartridge. Place breech safety pin in breech assembly. d. Assemble breech in cutter body. Insert breech assembly screw and tighten with a wrench. e. Attach a 3-foot tagline to the elevating fin assembly. The elevating fin assembly is now ready for positioning in the sweep wire.

4A-4-2.3 Sweep Wire Attachment. NOTE Cut off fairings at designated wedge stop and elevating fin assembly placement. a. Assemble a wedge stop on sweep wire at desired location. b. Pay out the faired section of sweep wire until wedge stop is just aft of stern roller chock. On the non-faired section, return to the standard procedure. c. Hold the elevating fin assembly so that the anvil opening of the cutter faces the ship. d. Ensure cutter tender holds the tagline securely to prevent loss of cutter during installation. Attach the elevating fin assembly to the sweep wire just outboard of stern roller chock by placing elevating fin insert over the wire. Depressing the handle opens the spring loaded arms, allowing wire to fit into the inserts. Releasing the handle closes the arms, securing the wire in the insert. e. Remove the tagline, remove the safety pin assembly, release elevating fin assembly and pay out sweep wire. f. Cutter spacing for various scopes of sweep wire is contained in Tables 4A-4A through 4A-4E.

4A-4E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-4C. Cutter Mk 12 Cocking Tool

g. Remove the tagline, remove the safety pin assembly, release elevating fin assembly and pay out sweep wire. h. Cutter spacing for various scopes of sweep wire is contained in Tables 4A-4A through 4A-4E.

4A-4-2.4 Cutter Recovery. a. As soon as the elevating fin assembly is within reach, perform the following: b. Install safety pin assembly in the breech and cutter body. c. Connect tagline. d. Remove elevating fins from sweep wire and place in pre-designated safe area. e. Disarm each cutter by performing the following: (1) Remove breech assembly screw. (2) Lift out breech assembly using a breech removal tool (Figure 4A-4D), if necessary, and place in fresh water. (3) Using a cartridge extractor tool (screwdriver), carefully remove, clean, and stow cartridges. (4) Using cocking tool, cock firing plunger and remove trip pin. Uncock firing plunger and remove cocking tool. f. Remove cutter body from elevating fin. g. Remove expendable parts (anvil, cutting punch, trip pin, and shear pin).

4A-4F PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4A-4A. Cutter Spacing - 100 Fathom Sweep Wire

INTERMEDIATE NUMBER OF INTERMEDIATE CUTTERS ON SWEEP WIRE CUTTER NO. 123456789101112131415

1 38241713119876655544 2 57393024201715131211109 9 8 3 66493932272421191717161413 4 725646393430262422201917 5 7662524439353228262422 6 79665649434035323028 7 826960534843393633 8 8472635751464239 9 85756759534945 10 87 77 68 61 57 52 11 88 78 70 64 59 12 89 79 73 66 13 89 81 74 14 91 82 15 91

Instructions 1. From the numbers at the top of the table, select the number of intermediate cutters to be used. 2. Location of each cutter in FATHOMS, measured from the OUTBOARD end of the sweep wire, is found in the vertical column directly below this number. Example - In an 8-cutter sweep, intermediate cutter No. 1 is located 7 fathoms from the outboard end of the sweep wire, cutter No. 2, 15 fathoms, and so on.

4A-4G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Table 4A-4B. Cutter Spacing - 150 Fathom Sweep Wire

INTERMEDIATE NUMBER OF INTERMEDIATE CUTTERS ON SWEEP WIRE CUTTER NO. 123456789101112131415

1 5432231815121198776665 2 8052413327232018151513121111 3 93695444373229242321191817 4 105 80 64 54 46 41 35 32 29 27 25 23 5 112 88 73 62 54 47 42 38 35 32 30 6 117 95 80 69 60 54 48 44 40 37 7 121 101 86 74 66 59 54 49 45 8 124 105 90 80 71 64 59 54 9 127 108 95 84 76 69 63 10 128 112 98 88 80 72 11 130 114 102 92 83 12 131 116 105 94 13 132 119 106 14 134 120 15 134

Instructions 1. From the numbers at the top of the table, select the number of intermediate cutters to be used. 2. Location of each cutter in FATHOMS, measured from the OUTBOARD end of the sweep wire, is found in the vertical column directly below this number. Example - In an 8-cutter sweep, intermediate cutter No. 1 is located 9 fathoms from the outboard end of the sweep wire, cutter No. 2, 20 fathoms, and so on.

4A-4H PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4A-4C. Cutter Spacing - 200 Fathom Sweep Wire

INTERMEDIATE NUMBER OF INTERMEDIATE CUTTERS ON SWEEP WIRE CUTTER NO. 123456789101112131415

1 674028211815131110987776 2 102 67 49 40 33 28 24 22 19 17 15 15 14 12 3 122 86 68 55 46 39 35 31 27 24 23 21 19 4 135 103 81 67 57 50 44 39 35 33 30 27 5 147 113 92 78 67 59 52 47 43 39 35 6 153 132 102 87 76 66 60 54 49 44 7 158 130 110 95 82 74 67 60 54 8 163 136 117 100 90 81 72 65 9 166 141 120 108 96 86 76 10 169 144 128 113 100 89 11 170 150 132 116 103 12 175 152 134 118 13 175 153 136 14 175 155 15 176

Instructions 1. From the numbers at the top of the table, select the number of intermediate cutters to be used. 2. Location of each cutter in FATHOMS, measured from the OUTBOARD end of the sweep wire, is found in the vertical column directly below this number. Example - In an 8-cutter sweep, intermediate cutter No. 1 is located 11 fathoms from the outboard end of the sweep wire, cutter No. 2, 24 fathoms, and so on.

4A-4J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Table 4A-4D. Cutter Spacing - 250 Fathom Sweep Wire

INTERMEDIATE NUMBER OF INTERMEDIATE CUTTERS ON SWEEP WIRE CUTTER NO. 123456789101112131415

1 7945322520171413111099877 2 121 79 58 46 38 31 28 24 22 20 19 17 15 15 3 148 103 79 64 52 46 39 35 32 30 27 24 23 4 165 122 96 78 67 57 50 46 42 38 34 32 5 178 137 109 92 78 68 61 56 50 46 42 6 188 147 122 103 89 79 72 64 58 53 7 193 158 132 113 99 90 79 71 65 8 200 165 140 122 110 96 87 78 9 204 171 148 132 115 103 93 10 208 178 157 136 122 109 11 212 185 160 143 127 12 217 187 165 147 13 217 191 169 14 219 193 15 220

Instructions 1. From the numbers at the top of the table, select the number of intermediate cutters to be used. 2. Location of each cutter in FATHOMS, measured from the OUTBOARD end of the sweep wire, is found in the vertical column directly below this number. Example - In an 8-cutter sweep, intermediate cutter No. 1 is located 13 fathoms from the outboard end of the sweep wire, cutter No. 2, 28 fathoms, and so on.

4A-4K PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4A-4E. Cutter Spacing - 300 Fathom Sweep Wire

INTERMEDIATE NUMBER OF INTERMEDIATE CUTTERS ON SWEEP WIRE CUTTER NO. 123456789101112131415

1 90513527221916141211109988 2 141 89 65 51 42 36 31 27 24 22 20 19 17 16 3 172 119 90 72 60 51 44 39 36 32 30 27 25 4 194 141 110 90 76 65 57 52 46 42 38 35 5 210 159 127 106 90 78 70 62 56 51 46 6 221 173 142 119 102 91 80 72 65 59 7 230 185 153 130 115 101 90 81 73 8 237 194 163 143 124 110 99 89 9 242 203 175 151 133 119 107 10 248 212 182 159 141 127 11 254 217 188 166 149 12 257 221 194 173 13 259 225 200 14 261 230 15 263

Instructions 1. From the numbers at the top of the table, select the number of intermediate cutters to be used. 2. Location of each cutter in FATHOMS, measured from the OUTBOARD end of the sweep wire, is found in the vertical column directly below this number. Example - In an 8-cutter sweep, intermediate cutter No. 1 is located 14 fathoms from the outboard end of the sweep wire, cutter No. 2, 31 fathoms, and so on.

4A-4L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-4D. Cutter Mk 12 Breech Removing Tool

h. Wash expendable parts, cutter bodies and breech assemblies in accordance with MRC card. i. Stow in appropriate containers.

4A-4-2.5 Dud Cutter.

A DUD cutter is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge and presents a possible hazard to personnel during recovery. a. Disposition of a DUD. The possibility exists of recovering a DUD cutter. A DUD is a cutter which the cartridge failed to fire after being struck by the firing pin. Such a cutter, if left in an operable condition, is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge, and presents a possible hazard to personnel during recovery. It MUST be dealt with immediately while the cutter is still on the wire. b. If during recovery of elevating fin assembly, a cutter is found operated and the cutting punch is still intact, keep it on the sweep wire and immediately proceed as follows: (1) Install safety pin assemblies in the breech assembly of all cutters. (2) Connect tagline. (3) Cock firing plunger with cocking tool (Figure 4A-4C), insert safety pin in cutter body and remove cocking tool. (4) Remove breech assembly screw. (5) Lift out breech assembly using a breech removal tool, if necessary (Figure 4A-4D). (6) Using a cartridge extractor tool (screwdriver), carefully remove the DUD cartridge and immediately jettison. (7) Remove elevating fin from sweep wire and place in pre-designated safe area.

4A-4M PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4A-4-3 CUTTER/ELEVATING FIN ASSEMBLY MK 14 MOD 0.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. Never stow cutter assemblies with the breech block mounted to the cutter bodies or with the firing pin assembly in the cocked position.

4A-4-3.1 Cutter Punch Installation. a. Insert cutting punch. Use the punch positioning tool to line up holes for insertion of punch shear pin. Drive shear pin home until head bottoms (Figure 4A-4E).

4A-4-3.2 Cutter Elevating Fin Assembly. a. Fasten each cutter body assembly to the elevating fin with two assembly screws. Ensure screws are tightened after all bodies are correctly positioned (Figure 4A-4F).

Figure 4A-4E. Cutter Mk 14 Punch Positioning Tool

4A-4N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-4F. Cutter/Elevating Assembly Mk 14 Mod 0

4A-4P PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4A-4-3.3 Breech Assembly.

Keep hands and body well clear of the anvil. Ensure that the correct explosive cartridge is fitted. Always fit a safety pin in a cocked, armed cutter, and ensure there is enough tension so the pin cannot fall out. Do not remove the safety pin until the cutter is positioned on the sweep wire, and replace it, upon recovery, before removing the cutter or any debris from the wire. Always point explosive cutters in a safe direction; stow on deck facing outboard. Always treat a loaded cutter with the same respect as a loaded gun. NOTE The 1st LT is required to ensure proper cartridges are used and that all pertinent data concerning the cartridges is documented such as lot, Mk and Mod, quantity, etc. a. Place anvil in slot in cutter body. Guide end of trip pin into its positioning hole in anvil. Assemble anvil screw and tighten with a screwdriver (Figure 4A-4G). b. Cock firing plunger with cocking tool (Figure 4A-4H). Insert trip pin in guide slot in cutter body through the hole in firing plunger as far as it will go. Uncock firing plunger and remove cocking tool. Visually inspect the cutters as follows: (1) Ensure cutting punch is in position and shear pin head is properly bottomed. (2) Ensure trip pin is properly seated in anvil and firing plunger shaft. (3) Ensure anvil is in proper position and shear screw is tight. (4) Ensure the assembly screws securing the cutter bodies to the elevating fin are tight. c. Insert explosive cartridge. d. Place a safety pin in the breech assembly. Assemble the breech assembly in the cutter body. Insert breech assembly screw and tighten with a wrench. e. Attach a 3-foot tagline to the elevating fin assembly. The elevating fin assembly is now ready for positioning on sweep wire.

4A-4-3.4 Sweep Wire Attachment. NOTE Cut off fairings at designated wedge stop and elevating fin assembly placement. a. Assemble a wedge stop on sweep wire at desired location. b. Pay out the faired section of sweep wire until wedge stop is just aft of stern roller chock. On the non-faired section, return to the standard procedure. c. Hold the elevating fin assembly so that the anvil openings of the cutters face the ship.

4A-4Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-4G. Cutter Mk 14 Trip Pin Positioning

Figure 4A-4H. Cutter Mk 14 Cocking Tool

4A-4R PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. Ensure cutter handler holds the tagline securely to prevent loss of cutters during installation. Attach the elevating fin assembly to the sweep wire just outboard of stern roller chock by placing elevating fin inserts over the wire. Pulling up on the handle, opens the spring loaded arms allowing wire to fit into the inserts. Close the arms by releasing the handle. e. Remove the tagline, remove the safety pins, release elevating fin assembly and pay out sweep wire. f. Cutter spacing for various scopes of sweep wire is contained in Tables 4A-4A through 4A-4E.

4A-4-3.5 Cutter Recovery. a. As soon as the elevating fin assembly is within reach, perform the following: (1) Install safety pin assemblies in the breech assembly of all cutters. (2) Connect tagline. (3) Remove elevating fins from sweep wire and place in pre-designated safe area. (4) Disarm each cutter by performing the following: (a) Remove breech assembly screw. (b) Lift out breech assembly using a breech removal tool (Figure 4A-4J), if necessary and place in fresh water. (c) Using a cartridge extractor tool (screwdriver), carefully remove, clean, and stow cartridges. (d) Using cocking tool, cock firing plunger and remove trip pin. Uncock firing plunger and remove cocking tool. (5) Remove cutter bodies from elevating fins. (6) Remove expendable parts (anvil, cutting punch, trip pin, and shear pin). (7) Wash expendable parts, cutter bodies and breech assemblies in accordance with MRC card. (8) Stow in appropriate containers.

4A-4-3.6 Dud Cutter.

A DUD cutter is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge and presents a possible hazard to personnel during recovery. a. Disposition of a DUD. The possibility exists of recovering a DUD cutter. A DUD is a cutter which the cartridge failed to fire after being struck by the firing pin. Such a cutter, if left in an operable condition, is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge, and presents a possible hazard to personnel during recovery. It MUST be dealt with immediately while the cutter is still on the wire. b. If during recovery of elevating fin assembly, a cutter is found operated and the cutting punch is still intact, keep it on the sweep wire and immediately proceed as follows: (1) Install safety pin assemblies in the breech assembly of all cutters. (2) Connect tagline.

4A-4S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-4J. Cutter Mk 14 Breech Removing Tool

(3) Cock firing plunger with cocking tool (Figure 4A-4H). (4) Remove breech assembly screw. (5) Lift out breech assembly using a breech removal tool, if necessary (Figure 4A-4J). (6) Using a cartridge extractor tool (screwdriver), carefully remove the DUD cartridge and immediately jettison. (7) Uncock firing plunger and remove cocking tool. (8) Remove elevating fin from sweep wire and place in pre-designated safe area.

4A-4T PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4A-4-4 CUTTER ASSEMBLY MK 15 MOD 0.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. Never stow cutter assemblies with the breech block mounted to the cutter bodies or with the firing pin assembly in the cocked position.

4A-4-4.1 Firing Unit Body Preparation. a. Retract firing pin by pulling on cocking ring, and slip firing trip pin (cocking collar) into place (Figure 4A-4K). b. Place safety pin in position through holes provided in cocking collar.

4A-4-4.2 Main Frame and Barrel Body Preparation. a. Unscrew barrel retaining unit thumbscrew and remove. Ensure lockwasher, retaining pin barrel spring, and barrel retaining pin are in place. Replace thumbscrew tightening fully; then back off at least four full turns. Ensure friction catch screw, die retaining unit spring, and friction catch spring are in the main frame. b. Insert cutting punch and shear pin in barrel body, then drive shear pin down until head bottoms.

Arresting disc must be inserted for above water use only. c. Insert arresting disc, as shown in Figure 4A-4L, and position die retainer unit. d. Secure die retainer unit in frame by tightening die retaining unit screw. e. Ensure a 1/4-inch nylon line (approximately 6-feet long) is attached to the main frame (Figure 4A-4L).

4A-4-4.3 Sweep and Depressor Wire Attachment. a. Set towing pawl and secure drums on both depressor wire and sweep wire drums.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail. c. Cutters Mk 15 will be mounted on sweep wire and depressor wire aft of the instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4A-4M) back-to-back on sweep wire to allow for attachment of Cutter Mk 15.

4A-4U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-4K. Safety Pin and Trip Pin Installation

4A-4-4.4 Installation on Sweep/Depressor Wires.

Do not arm Cutter Mk 15 until it has been placed on wire. Always insert a safety pin in a cocked, armed cutter, and ensure there is enough tension so the pin cannot fall out. Do not remove safety pin except to fire Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0. Do not modify or alter cutter for firing as it may result in casualty to personnel or damage to the cutter. During underwater operation, all personnel must be removed from area within 25 feet of operation to prevent injury to personnel.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. NOTE The 1st LT is required to ensure proper cartridges are used and that all pertinent data concerning the cartridges is documented such as lot, Mk and Mod, quantity, etc. a. Verify arresting disc is installed for above water use, or removed for underwater use. b. Place cutter on wire rope for possible emergency break away. Tighten barrel body until contact is made; then back off one-quarter turn. c. Tighten barrel retaining unit thumbscrew.

4A-4V PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-4L. Cutter Assembly Mk 15 Mod 0

4A-4W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-4M. Wedge Stop Placement

4A-4X PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. Tie off cutter securing line to a securing point. e. Route a firing trip lanyard from the 01 level to Cutter Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutter.

4A-4-4.5 Arm Cutter Mk 15. a. Select proper explosive cartridge for designated application (Table 4A-4F). b. Insert cartridge into opening in barrel body. c. Install precocked firing unit, with safety pin and firing trip pin (cocking collar) installed, on barrel body. Ensure it is firmly seated against preformed packing (O-ring) on face of barrel body. d. Attach firing trip lanyard to precocked firing unit assembly. Ensure a straight line pull to the cutter. Ensure safety pin pulls free prior to firing trip pin (cocking collar).

Table 4A-4F. Cutter Mk 15 Cartridge

CARTRIDGE HEAD COLOR ROPE SIZE USE

Mk 154-Heavy (Type H) Red 1/4- to 51/64-inch Above Water Mk 155-Underwater Blue 1/4- to 51/64-inch Underwater Heavy (Type U)

4A-4-4.6 Removal from Sweep/Depressor Wires. a. If cutter was not operated: (1) Remove firing trip lanyard from firing unit assembly. (2) Remove firing unit body from barrel body. (3) Remove cartridge from barrel body using cartridge extracting tool. (4) Loosen barrel retaining unit thumbscrew at least four full turns. (5) Remove barrel from main frame. (6) Remove cutter from wire. (7) If cutter is to be stored, disassemble as required for stowage in the cutter assembly stowage box. If cutter is to be reused immediately, place it in a safe location until needed. b. If cutter was operated: (1) Remove firing unit body from barrel body. (2) Remove spent cartridge by inserting cartridge drift pin through cutting punch end of barrel and driving out with a hammer. (3) Loosen barrel retaining unit thumbscrew at least four full turns. (4) Remove barrel from main frame so cut parts of shear pin can be removed. (5) Remove die retaining unit, punch, spent arresting disc, and sheared parts of wire rope. (6) If cutter is to be stored, disassemble as required for stowage in the cutter assembly stowage box.

4A-4Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

(7) If cutter is to be reused immediately, follow steps outlined in paragraphs 4A-4-4.1 and 4A-4-4.2, then place Cutter Mk 15 in a safe location until needed.

A DUD cutter is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge and presents a possible hazard to personnel during recovery. c. Disposition of a DUD. The possibility exists of recovering a DUD cutter. A DUD is a cutter which the cartridge failed to fire after being struck by the firing pin. Such a cutter, if left in an operable condition, is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge, and presents a possible hazard to personnel during recovery. It MUST be dealt with immediately while the cutter is still on the wire. (1) Remove firing unit body from barrel body. (2) Carefully remove DUD cartridge from barrel body using cartridge extracting tool, and immediately dispose of cartridge by jettisoning. (3) Cock firing pin assembly, using cocking ring, pull up and away from firing unit body and install cocking collar and safety pin. (4) Reload cutter with proper cartridge and reassemble precocked firing unit.

4A-4-4.7 Installation on Equalizing Towing Bridle. a. Clear unnecessary personnel from fantail. b. Install Cutter Mk 15 on towing pendant of equalizing bridle midway between 8-inch, type E snatch block and roller chock assembly. c. Verify arresting disc is installed for above water use, or removed for underwater use. d. Place cutter on wire rope for possible emergency break away. Tighten barrel body until contact is made; then back off one-quarter turn. e. Tighten barrel retaining unit thumbscrew. f. Tie off cutter securing line to a securing point.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. g. Route a firing trip lanyard from 01 level to Cutter Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters.

4A-4-4.8 Arm Cutter Mk 15. a. Select proper explosive cartridge for designated application (Table 4A-4F). b. Insert cartridge into opening in barrel body.

4A-4Z PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

c. Install precocked firing unit, with safety pin and firing trip pin (cocking collar) installed, on barrel body. Ensure it is firmly seated against preformed packing (O-ring) on face of barrel body. d. Attach firing trip lanyard to precocked firing unit assembly. Ensure a straight line pull to the cutter. Ensure safety pin pulls free prior to firing trip pin (cocking collar).

4A-4-4.9 Removal from Equalizing Towing Bridle. a. If cutter was not operated: (1) Remove firing trip lanyard from firing unit assembly. (2) Remove firing unit body from barrel body. (3) Remove cartridge from barrel body using cartridge extracting tool. (4) Loosen barrel retaining unit thumbscrew at least four full turns. (5) Remove barrel from main frame. (6) Remove cutter from wire. (7) If cutter is to be stored, disassemble as required for stowage in the cutter assembly stowage box. If cutter is to be reused immediately, place it in a safe location until needed. b. If cutter was operated: (1) Remove firing unit body from barrel body. (2) Remove spent cartridge by inserting cartridge drift pin through cutting punch end of barrel and driving out with a hammer. (3) Loosen barrel retaining unit thumbscrew at least four full turns. (4) Remove barrel from main frame so cut parts of shear pin can be removed. (5) Remove die retaining unit, punch, spent arresting disc, and sheared parts of wire rope. (6) If cutter is to be reused immediately, follow steps outlined in paragraphs 4A-4-4.1 and 4A-4-4.2 to reassemble cutter. Place cutter in a safe location until needed.

A DUD cutter is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge and presents a possible hazard to personnel during recovery. c. Disposition of a DUD. The possibility exists of recovering a DUD cutter. A DUD is a cutter which the cartridge failed to fire after being struck by the firing pin. Such a cutter, if left in an operable condition, is subject to unpredictable self-initiation of the cartridge, and presents a possible hazard to personnel during recovery. It MUST be dealt with immediately while the cutter is still on the wire. (1) Remove firing unit body from barrel body. (2) Carefully remove DUD cartridge from barrel body using cartridge extracting tool, and immediately dispose of cartridge by jettisoning. (3) Cock firing pin assembly, using cocking ring, pull up and away from firing unit body and install cocking collar and safety pin. (4) Reload cutter with proper cartridge and reassemble precocked firing unit.

4A-4AA/(4A-4AB blank)

PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4A-5 ACOUSTIC POWER CABLE PREPARATION AND RIGGING

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Cable, acoustic power (APC) 1,650-foot Stocking, towing, lace-on single eye, 60- to 65-inch (1075-00-782-9881) (1-1/2- to 2-inch diameter cable) Stocking, towing, lace-on double eye (1-1/2- to 2-inch (5120-00-228-2247) (2) diameter cable) (5120-00-233-6276) (8) Stocking, towing, lace-on double eye (2-3/4- to 3-1/2- inch diameter cable) (5120-00-541-7250) (4) SUPPORT ITEMS Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Paint, enamel, white (TT-E-516) * Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Tape, insulation, electrical (friction), 1-1/2-inch Electrician Mate Tool Kit (5970-00-644-3167) Kit, cable repair (1075-00-176-1182) Tape, steel, measuring (100-foot) (5120-00-554-7092) Marline (4020-00-240-2185) Webbing, cotton, 3-inch W (8305-00-268-2436) Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) * * Hazardous Material.

4A-5-1 RIGGING.

4A-5-1.1 APC Preparation (Outboard 125-foot Nonbuoyant Section). a. Measure a distance of 5-feet from the locational point of each stocking hardeye and mark. b. Measure and mark a space 6-inches past each end of the 5-foot section. Between these marks, parcel the 6-foot length of cable with cotton webbing, single wrap, and overlap 2 inches (Figure 4A-5A). c. Tape both ends of the parceled section with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of each end of the parceling and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond ends of cotton webbing; serve marline over both sections of friction tape (Figure 4A-5A). 4A-5A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-5A. Acoustic Power Tow Cable Preparation and Towing Stocking Attachment

4A-5B PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4A-5-1.2 APC Preparation (Inboard 250-foot, Nonbuoyant Section). a. Measure inboard a distance of 5 feet from the locational point of each hardeye and mark. b. Measure and mark a space 6 inches past each end of the 5-foot section. Between these marks, parcel the 6-foot length of cable with cotton webbing, single wrap, and overlap 2 inches (Figure 4A-5A). c. Tape both ends of the parceled section with friction tape. 1-1/2 inches of each end of the parceling and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond ends of cotton webbing; serve marline over both sections of friction tape (Figure 4A-5A).

4A-5-1.3 APC Preparation (Foam-Covered Section) (Buoyant). a. For all stocking locations on the buoyant section, except the 425-foot position for the diversion stocking, measure outboard a distance of 5-feet from the locational point of each hardeye and mark. b. Measure and mark a space 6 inches past each end of the 5-foot section. Between these marks, parcel the 6-foot length of cable with No. 4 canvas, single wrap, and overlap 2 inches (Figure 4A-5A). c. Tape both ends of the parceled section with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of each end of the parceling and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond ends of the canvas; serve marline over both sections of friction tape (Figure 4A-5A). d. Use a steel tape measure to ensure accuracy of marks.

4A-5-2 TOWING STOCKING INSTALLATION.

4A-5-2.1 Acoustic Device Towing Stocking Installation. a. Measure 6 feet from outboard end connector and mark (Figure 4A-5B). b. Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.1. c. Attach a single hardeye towing stocking to cable with hardeye toward outboard end (Figure 4A-5B). d. Secure towing stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends full length of stocking. e. Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape. f. Install canvas chafing over towing stocking and over hardeye, to prevent chafing and damage to APC while it is stowed on drum. g. Split 1-1/2-inch x 5-foot section of fire hose (lengthways) and wrap around outboard end of APC cable, starting at device tow pendant stocking. Ensure approximately 1 foot of APC, closest to gland nut, is NOT covered. NOTE Split fire hose can be hand attached back together, if required. h. Wrap fire hose with two layers half-lapped electrical (black) tape and two layers half-lapped friction tape. Extend tapes 2 inches beyond each end of the fire hose.

4A-5C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-5B. Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings

4A-5D PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4A-5-2.2 Float Towing Stocking Installation. NOTE The float towing stockings are the attachment points for inhaul pendant and the nose line. Two single hardeye towing stockings may be substituted for a double hardeye stocking. a. Measure 50 feet from outboard end connector and mark (Figure 4A-5B). b. Prepare and wrap cable according to paragraph 4A-5-1.1. c. Attach a double hardeye towing stocking to APC with hardeyes toward outboard end. d. When attaching two single hardeye towing stockings, proceed as follows: (1) Attach one towing stocking to APC with hardeye facing toward outboard end of cable. Secure stocking, verify lacing, and bind with friction tape and marline as in steps d and e of paragraph 4A-5-2.1. (2) Superimpose a second, outer stocking over first stocking with hardeyes diametrically opposite and facing cable’s outboard end. e. Secure stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length. f. Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape. g. Install canvas chafing over stockings and over hardeyes to prevent chafing and damage to APC while it is stowed on drum.

4A-5-2.3 Preventer Stocking. a. Measure 25 feet from inboard end connector and mark (Figure 4A-5B). b. Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.2. c. Attach a single hardeye towing stocking to cable with hardeye toward inboard end (Figure 4A-5B). d. Secure towing stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends full length of stocking. e. Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape.

4A-5-2.4 Inboard Towing Stocking Installation. a. Measure 125 feet from the inboard end connector and mark (Figure 4A-5B). b. Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.2. c. Attach a double eye towing stocking with the hardeye toward the inboard end connector. Position the hardeye at the 125-foot mark. d. Secure stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length.

4A-5E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

e. Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape. f. Install canvas chafing over stockings and over hardeyes to prevent chafing and damage to APC while it is stowed on drum.

4A-5-2.5 Diversion Stockings Installation. NOTE Ensure the midpoint between the two towing stockings at 425-foot mark is exactly 300 feet from inboard towing stocking mark at 125 feet. a. Measure 425 feet from inboard end connector and mark. NOTE The diversion towing stocking’s hardeyes are positioned 3 feet apart and facing each other. b. For hardeye location marks, measure and mark a distance 1-1/2 feet to both sides of the 425-foot mark. c. Measure outboard and inboard a distance of 5 feet from the locational point of each hardeye. d. Prepare and wrap both cable sections according to paragraph 4A-5-1.3 steps b and c. e. Attach two double hardeye towing stockings to APC with hardeyes toward each other. f. Secure stockings and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length. g. Tape ends of stockings opposite hardeyes with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking ends and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape. h. Install canvas chafing over stockings to prevent chafing and damage to APC while it is stowed on drum.

4A-5-3 TOWING STOCKING INSTALLATION FOR FA2 AND FA2A SWEEPS. NOTE All installation measurements for the FA2 and FA2A sweeps are shown in Figure 4A-5B. All FA2 marks are painted red and all FA2A marks are painted blue after installation of the stockings. The outboard towing stocking marks are the first red and the first blue mark, respectively, from cable’s outboard end.

4A-5-3.1 FA2 or FA2A Outboard Towing Stocking Marks. a. Measure 645 and 690 feet from outboard end connector for FA2 and FA2A marks, respectively. b. Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.3. NOTE Two single eye hardeye towing stockings may be used if double hardeye towing stocking is not available. c. Attach two single eye or one double hardeye towing stocking to cable at both locations with hardeye(s) facing inboard. d. Secure stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length.

4A-5F PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

e. Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye(s) with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape. f. After installing stocking at its proper location, using PPE per MSDS, paint the mark and stocking in appropriate color; red for FA2 and blue for FA2A. g. Install canvas chafing over stocking and over hardeye(s) to prevent chafing and damage to APC while it is stowed on drum. Using PPE per MSDS, paint a matching color 6-inch indicator band on outside of canvas.

4A-5-3.2 FA2 or FA2A Outboard Marriage Stocking Installation. NOTE All installation measurements for the FA2 and FA2A sweeps are shown in Figure 4A-5B. The second red and blue marks, located inboard of the hardeyes for the outboard towing stockings, are used to identify placement of outboard marriage stockings. a. Measure 680 and 725 feet from outboard end connector for FA2 or FA2A marks respectively. b. Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.3. NOTE Two single eye hardeye towing stockings may be used if double hardeye towing stocking is not available. c. Attach two single or one double hardeye towing stocking to cable with hardeye(s) facing inboard at these marks. d. Secure stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length. e. Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye(s) with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape. f. After installing stocking at its proper location, using PPE per MSDS, paint the mark and stocking in appropriate color; red for FA2 and blue for FA2A. g. Install canvas chafing over stocking and over hardeye(s) to prevent chafing and damage to APC while it is stowed on drum. Using PPE per MSDS, paint a matching color 6-inch indicator band on outside of canvas.

4A-5-3.3 FA2 or FA2A Inboard Marriage Stocking Installation. NOTE For the FA2 and FA2A configurations, marks for inboard marriage stockings are inboard of the hardeyes used for outboard marriage stocking locations, as viewed from the APC’s outboard end. a. Measure 1,110 and 1,065 feet from outboard end connector for FA2 or FA2A marks respectively. b. Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.3. NOTE Two single eye hardeye towing stockings may be used if double hardeye towing stocking is not available. c. Attach two single eye or one double hardeye towing stocking to cable with hardeye(s) facing inboard at appropriate marks. 4A-5G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

d. Secure stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length. e. Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye(s) with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape. f. After installing stocking at its proper location, using PPE per MSDS, paint mark and stocking in appropriate color; red for FA2 and blue for FA2A. g. Install canvas chafing over stocking and over hardeye(s) to prevent chafing and damage to APC while it is stowed on drum. Using PPE per MSDS, paint a matching color 6-inch indicator band on outside of canvas.

4A-5-3.4 FA2 or FA2A Inboard Towing Installation Marks. NOTE The FA2 inboard towing connection at the red mark may be close to the towing mark at 125-foot mark. When these two points are within 10 feet of each other, the towing point at the 125-foot mark may be used as the FA2 inboard towing connection. a. Measure 1,510 and 1,410 feet from outboard end connector for FA2 and FA2A marks, respectively. b. Prepare and wrap cable in accordance with paragraph 4A-5-1.2. NOTE Two single eye hardeye towing stockings may be used if double hardeye towing stocking is not available. c. Attach two single eye or one double hardeye towing stocking to cable with hardeye(s) facing inboard at appropriate marks. d. Secure stocking and verify lacing is tight and extends stocking’s full length. e. Tape end of stocking opposite hardeye(s) with friction tape, 1-1/2 inches of stocking end and extending 1-1/2 inches beyond end onto APC; serve marline over friction tape. f. After installing stocking at its proper location, using PPE per MSDS, paint mark and stocking in appropriate color; red for FA2 and blue for FA2A. g. Install canvas chafing over stocking and over hardeye(s) to prevent chafing and damage to APC while it is stowed on drum. Using PPE per MSDS, paint a matching color 6-inch indicator band on outside of canvas.

4A-5H PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4A-6 MAGNETIC CABLES PREPARATION AND RIGGING

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (2) Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) Pendant, preventer, 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single leg, NM Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, (hardeye swaged each end), wire rope (3) 1 coax (5995-01-517-9337) Pendant, preventer, 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single leg, Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping nylon (hardeye spliced each end) 1 (6150-01-517-9327) (3) (two for S-Cable, one for Screw, cap, hex hd, aluminum, M16-2.0 x 30mm CL-Cable) (0099-LL-H61-6312) (4) Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (1075-00-262-1980) Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch (2) (5305-00-226-9204) (2) Cable Assembly, inboard pigtail (long leg) Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-inch (6150-01-519-0191) (2) (5305-00-226-9205) (2) Cable Assembly, inboard pigtail (short leg) Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch (6150-01-519-0204) (2) (5305-00-226-9206) (6) Cable Assembly, outboard pigtail (6150-01-519-0147) Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 7-1/2-inch (3) (0099-LL-H61-6310) (2) Clamp, hose, 2-5/16- to 3-1/4-inch Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch (4730-01-273-3672) (2) (4030-00-270-5483) (7) Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) Sleeve (CS/P) (5970-01-519-3170) (12) Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) (3) Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) (20) (70) Clamp, hose, 5-5/8- to 8-1/2-inch (4730-01-444-7836) See footnotes at end of table.

4A-6A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

SUPPORT ITEMS Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Coating, plastic preservative spray Stocking, towing, NM, lace-on (coax), double eye (8010-00-515-2487) * (5335-LL-H61-2590) (3) Electrician Mate Tool Kit Stocking, towing, NM, slip-on (CL), 2-3/4- to 3-1/2- Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * inch, double eye (5120-00-541-7250) Heat Shrink CFM 3500-48 Tape, bitumized, BT 2 (0099-LL-H61-2591) (3) Marline (4020-00-240-2185) Tape, steel, measuring, 100-foot (5210-00-554-7092) Multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4A-6-1 RIGGING THE MAGNETIC CABLE.

4A-6-1.1 Installing Coax Cable Into Ship. a. If possible, position shipping drum (cable reel) containing coax cable on pier aft of ship’s stern, otherwise use a barge or tender. b. Fairlead cable to ship’s stern with cable horizontal and not bending cable to a radius less than 72 inches. c. Install chafing gear or rollers at all locations where the cable will be subject to abrasions during transfer to ship’s drum. NOTE Steps in paragraph 4A-6-1.2 are performed when cables are first assembled, installed or replacing of an inboard pigtail.

4A-6-1.2 Attaching Inboard Pigtails. a. Connect inner conductor pigtails to inner conductor terminal as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a thin coat of Petrox to mating surfaces. (3) Secure both short leg inboard pigtails to inner conductor terminal with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 7-1/2-inch cap screws and two 5/8-inch flat washers. (4) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a thin coat of antiseize to cap screw threads. (5) Install cap screws with two 5/8-inch flat washers and two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts. Torque to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Using PPE per MSDS, coat connection with electrical insulation. (7) Cover connection with two layers of self-vulcanizing tape and two layers of black plastic tape. b. Connect outer conductor pigtails to outer conductor terminal as follows: NOTE Steps (1) through (8) are used for each leg of inboard pigtail. (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper and clean rag. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a thin coat of Petrox to mating surfaces.

4A-6B PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

To prevent damage to connectors, use only M16-2.0 x 30mm cap screws with anti-vibration washer. (3) Secure long leg inboard pigtail with two M16-2.0 x 30mm cap screws with anti-vibration washer. (4) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a thin coat of antiseize to cap screw threads. Torque to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (5) Using PPE per MSDS, coat connection with electrical insulation. (6) Cover connection with two layers of self-vulcanizing tape and two layers of black plastic tape. (7) Using 1/4-inch rubber insulating sheet, cut to fit around connections. Insulating sheet should extend a few inches past connections to help provide an electrical insulation barrier. (8) Secure insulating sheeting with marline seizing. Cover marline seizing with plastic tape. (9) Twist inboard pigtails one and a half to two twists to reduce stray fields. NOTE To prevent difficulties during plugging in, do not place 6-thread lashing closer than 24 inches from inboard plug connectors. (10) Secure and seize twisted pigtails with four to six turns of 6-thread line spaced two to three feet apart so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch.

4A-6-1.3 Attaching Cable Towing Stockings. NOTE Preventer and towing stockings are positioned and installed prior to installing the magnetic cable on the drum and may be installed pierside or shipboard. The preventer stocking is located approximately 9 feet from the shoulder of the winch termination. Towing stockings are located starting approximately 69 feet aft of the inboard end connector of magnetic cable. Measurements are adjusted for each ship. All hardeyes face toward the inboard end of magnetic cable. a. Estimate locations of the preventer and towing stockings from measurements made onboard ship. b. Unreel approximately 110-feet of cable (Figure 4A-6A) from the shipping drum then, mark estimated locations on cable.

4A-6C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-6A. Installing Towing Stockings at Estimated Locations

4A-6-1.4 Leading the Coax Cable to the Ship’s Drum. NOTE This operation may be facilitated by securing a 2-1/2-inch-circumference nylon line to inboard end of cable near the forward terminal and placing 3 to 4 turns of line on the magnetic cable drum. a. With minimal sag in the coax cable, bring its inboard end to the ship’s stern, through the roller chock assembly, and to the top of magnetic cable drum. b. Ensure inboard ends do not jam against fairlead rollers. c. Use stern crane to assist in fair leading of cable over or through fairleads.

4A-6-2 TOWING STOCKING INSTALLATION.

4A-6-2.1 Magnetic Cable Preparation Procedure. a. Mark magnetic cable 6 inches beyond forward hardeyes and after the end of towing stockings. b. Apply two half-lapped layers of 2-inch-wide bitumized tape over the marked areas on cable (Figure 4A-6A).

4A-6D PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4A-6-2.2 Inboard Preventer Stocking Installation.

Ensure the deck SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and power is not applied to the terminal box. Electrical power from the terminal box and/or PCU is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or while cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE The preventer pendants should be the same length between pulls. If not, modify one pendant to obtain identical length. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Using 5/8-inch shackles, secure two preventer pendants (1/2-inch x 5-foot), one to each of the port bitter-end attachment points at the drum (Figure 4A-6B). c. Minesweep electricians enter the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. f. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. g. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box. h. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation. i. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE.

4A-6E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-6B. Installing Magnetic Cable on Cable Drum

j. Bring magnetic cable over the drum. Cable winch termination should be pointing down and approximately eight feet off the deck. NOTE Ensure that the longer of the two pigtails connect to the short leg connector. k. Lead pigtails to terminal box (Figure 4A-6C). l. Drum area crew will connect the pigtails to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. m. Pigtails shall be bound tight, starting at a point 2 feet from the terminal box. n. Remove lashing from aft end of preventer stocking. o. Lead preventer pendants to hardeyes on respective inboard/outboard side of stocking. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach pendants to their respective hardeyes. NOTE Position inboard preventer stocking as far aft as possible. Allow 18 inches of slack in inboard pigtails in addition to cable length required for terminal box connection. p. Lay preventer stocking on magnetic cable. Pull hardeyes forward using 5/8-inch shackles. Shackle preventer pendants to hardeyes of preventer stockings. q. Place a mark on cable at their forward end. Place a second mark on cable 6 inches aft of stocking’s after end.

4A-6F PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-6C. Inboard Pigtail (Typical)

r. Remove inboard pigtail plugs from terminal box. Lash inboard pigtails together and fasten magnetic cable securing line near plugs. s. Hold magnetic cable with securing line and disconnect preventer pendants from preventer stocking. t. Remove stocking from marked area on magnetic cable. u. Prepare cable according to paragraph 4A-6-2.1. v. Locate stocking in position over bitumized tape, with aft end of stocking at mark. Adjust stocking on cable. w. Lacing strands must be the same material as the stocking. Double weave grips will be laced with a double strand (a single strand may be doubled). x. Start the lacing at the tow end of the stocking (eye end towards ship). Thread the lacings through the first two loops of the split and pull through until lacings are centered at this point. y. Lace as you would a pair of shoes, crossing the lacings before lacing the next two loops. z. Do not pull lacing too tight. Leave a space between adjoining loops approximately equal to the width of one diamond of the mesh. Continue along the length of stocking. aa. Twist the lacing strands tightly together at the aft end of the stocking. ab. Wrap the ends of the lacing once or twice tightly around the tail of the grip, twisting the ends together securely. Excess lace can be cut off. ac. Anchor aft end of stocking to magnetic cable with two 4-inch wraps of marline placed six inches apart. Cover marline with friction tape and extend tape 2 inches over each end of marline.

4A-6G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Ensure preventer grip pendants and shackles are wrapped to prevent chafing and do not lay between the cable and the drum or foul with the inboard preventer stocking. Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE Preventer pendants should remain secured to the preventer stocking and magnetic cable drum at all times. ad. Reshackle preventer pendants to stocking hardeyes. Heavily chafe all shackles to prevent damage to cable and preventer stocking.

4A-6-2.3 Towing Bridle Stocking Installation. NOTE Towing bridle stockings should be aligned with the outboard stocking hardeye butted against outboard end of the inboard stocking. a. Prepare and wrap cable according to paragraph 4A-6-2.1. b. Locate stockings in their positions over bitumized tape, with aft end of stockings at appropriate marks. c. Lacing strands must be the same material as the stocking. Double weave grips will be laced with a double strand (a single strand may be doubled). d. Start the lacing at the tow end of the stocking (eye end towards ship). Thread the lacings through the first two loops of the split and pull through until lacings are centered at this point. e. Lace as you would a pair of shoes, crossing the lacings before lacing the next two loops. f. Do not pull lacing too tight. Leave a space between adjoining loops approximately equal to the width of one diamond of the mesh. Continue along the length of stocking. g. Twist the lacing strands tightly together at the aft end of the stocking. h. Wrap the ends of the lacing once or twice tightly around the tail of the grip, twisting the ends together securely. Excess lace can be cut off. i. Adjust and tighten towing stockings on magnetic cable, and pull hardeyes forward. j. Anchor aft ends of stockings to magnetic cable with two 4-inch wraps of marline placed six inches apart. Cover marline with friction tape and extend tape 2 inches over each end of marline.

4A-6-3 MAGNETIC CABLE INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY.

4A-6-3.1 Installing Coax Cable on the Ship’s Drum (Reel). a. Cover contact plugs with insulating rubber boots (Figure 4A-6D). b. Bring cable securing line and a portion of magnetic cable forward of preventer stocking and around drum. Secure line.

4A-6H PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-6D. Insulating Boot, Straight End

c. Wrap canvas around magnetic cable, over and under stocking’s hardeyes, and over outside of stockings.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship. When paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. d. Wind magnetic cable on the drum in regular, even layers. NOTE Steps e through g are performed when when cables are first assembled, installed, or replacing of K-4 blank and pigtail. e. Attach K-4 blank as follows: (1) Butt K-4 blank to K-4 breakout. (2) Using K-4 blank clamp secure K-4 blank and clamp to K-4 breakout. (3) Using PPE per MSDS, apply three drops of loctite to threads. (4) Tighten clamp until an approximate uniform gap of 1/8-inch is between the two clamp halves.

4A-6J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

f. Attach an outboard pigtail to the K-4 blank as follows (Figure 4A-6E): (1) Modify a CK/P insulating sleeve by cutting the length of the sleeve so it just covers the metal to metal connection. (2) Skive or taper the ends. (3) Slip the modified CK/P insulating sleeve over the K-4 blank and slide back out of the way. (4) Clean contact surfaces of terminal with fine sandpaper. (5) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a thin coat of Petrox to mating surfaces. (6) Use two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws to secure outboard pigtails to K-4 blank. (7) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a thin coat of antiseize to cap screw threads. (8) Secure cap screws with four 5/8-inch flat washers and two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts. Torque to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. g. Waterproof K-4 blank and pigtail as follows: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide the modified sleeve over the connection. (4) Position a 24-inch length of CFM 3500-48 heat shrink over the sleeve and butt it up against K-4 breakout mold. (5) Shrink the heat shrink to follow the profile of the connection. h. Ground isolate (short leg pigtail) as follows: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around pigtail end making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over pigtail end (Figure 4A-6D). (4) Slide two 2-5/16- to 3-1/4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.

4A-6K PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4A-6E. Cable Assembly

4A-6L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

4A-6-3.2 Installing Outboard Pigtail to Outboard Long Leg Breakout. NOTE Two outboard pigtails and two CA-1454 S-Cables are used in one cable assembly. a. Connect the fitting at the long leg end of the coax cable to the lug on the outboard pigtail as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over the pigtail and two 5-5/8- to 8-1/2-inch hose clamps over the coax cable and slide out of the way. (3) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CS/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (4) Slip CS/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the outboard pigtail cable and slide back out of the way. (5) Connect end terminals and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4A-6F). Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables. (6) Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of the sleeve.

Figure 4A-6F. CA-1453 to Pigtail or CA-1454 Connection (Typical)

4A-6M PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(7) Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (8) Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps as shown in Figure 4A-6F and tighten clamps evenly and firmly.

Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should be avoided. (9) Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve. (10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of half-lapped friction tape.

4A-6-3.3 Installing S-Cable (Number One) to Outboard Pigtail. a. Connect the free end of the outboard pigtail lug on the S-Cable as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over the pigtail and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over the S-Cable and slide out of the way. (3) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtail and slide back out of the way. (5) Connect end terminals and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4A-6G). Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables. (6) Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of the sleeve. (7) Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (8) Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps as shown in Figure 4A-6G and tighten clamps evenly and firmly.

Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should be avoided. (9) Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve. (10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of half-lapped friction tape.

4A-6N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-6G. Outboard Pigtail to CA-1454 or CA-1454 to TJ Jumper

b. Heave in on the coax and S-Cable (number one) until one turn remains on the shipping drum. c. Ease the shipping drum end of the S-Cable to the ground. d. Remove empty shipping drum and position another CA-1454 S-Cable (number two) drum.

4A-6-3.4 Connecting Outboard Pigtail to S-Cable (Number One). a. Connect the outboard pigtail lug on the S-Cable as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over the pigtail and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over the S-Cable and slide out of the way. (3) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtail and slide back out of the way. (5) Connect end terminals and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4A-6G). Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables. (6) Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of the sleeve. (7) Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.

4A-6P PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(8) Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps as shown in Figure 4A-6G and tighten clamps evenly and firmly.

Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should be avoided. (9) Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve. (10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of half-lapped friction tape.

4A-6-3.5 Connecting S-Cable (Number Two) to Outboard Pigtail. a. Connect the free end of the outboard pigtail lug on the S-Cable as follows: (1) Lead S-Cable (number two) to free end of outboard pigtail on S-Cable (number one). (2) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over the pigtail and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over the larger cable and slide out of the way. (4) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (5) Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtail and slide back out of the way. (6) Connect end terminals and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4A-6G). Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables. (7) Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of the sleeve. (8) Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps as shown in Figure 4A-6G and tighten clamps evenly and firmly.

Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should be avoided. (10) Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve. (11) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of half-lapped friction tape.

4A-6Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

b. Heave in on S-Cable until one wrap remains on shipping reel. c. Attach 2-1/2-inch easing out line. Slip S-Cable to ship. d. Remove easing out line. Boot free end of S-Cable. e. Secure S-Cable to cable drum.

4A-6-4 CL-CABLE PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION.

4A-6-4.1 Position CL-Cable Shipping Drum for Installation on Ship’s Drum. a. Position shipping drum containing CA-1454, which will be used as a CL-Cable on pier aft of ship’s stern, if possible. Otherwise, use a barge or tender. b. Fairlead cable to ship’s stern with cable horizontal and not bending the cable to a radius less than 48 inches. c. Install chafing gear or rollers at all locations where cable will be subject to abrasions during transfer to ship’s drum.

4A-6-4.2 CL Preventer Stocking Installation. a. Measure and mark a 7-foot, 4-inch section starting 6 feet from the CL inboard end terminal lug and extending outboard along the cable (Figure 4A-6H). b. Mark the CL-Cable at 6 feet and 13 feet, 4 inches from inboard end terminal to locate the stocking’s hardeye and aft end, respectively. c. Apply two half-lapped layers of 2-inch bitumized tape over the marked section on the CL-Cable.

Figure 4A-6H. Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable

4A-6R PRE-OPERATIONAL SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. On the bitumized tape, 6 inches forward of its after end, mark location point for the towing stocking’s after end. e. Position stocking over the wrapped section with the hardeye(s) 6 feet from the CL-Cable inboard end. f. Anchor the aft end of stocking to the CL-Cable with two 4-inch wraps of marline placed six inches apart. Cover marline with friction tape and extend the tape 2 inches over each end of the marline.

4A-6-4.3 Drum Preventer Pendant Attachment. a. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot nylon preventer pendant to the stocking eye of the CL-Cable. b. Pad lug with rag(s), secure rag(s) with friction tape, install boot on terminal. c. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach one end of 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope drum pendant to free end of 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot preventer pendant and other end to CL-Cable drum (Figure 4A-6F). Tighten shackle to drum with a marline spike and seize with a minimum of two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. d. Reel preventer pendant(s) and CL-Cable on ship’s drum and secure to drum.

4A-6-5 K-4 ELECTRODES PREPARATION.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas chafing sleeve. a. The canvas chafing sleeve is fabricated onboard ship from No. 6 grade, 28-inch duck cotton cloth. Sleeve is formed by cutting 8-inch-wide strips to extend the full length of the K-4 electrodes. b. Wrap canvas around K-4 electrodes with 1 inch folded under on both long sides to create a double thick stitching edge. c. Stitch the double thick edges of canvas chafing sleeve together using a herringbone stitch, securing the sleeve to the electrode. d. Using PPE per MSDS, mark the K-4 electrode with painted bands or marline seizings to indicated positions for centering electrode floats (Figure 4A-6J). e. Stow K-4 electrodes on magnetic cable reel.

4A-6-6 MAGNETIC CABLE TEST AND REPAIR. a. Refer to SW570-F0-MMO-040 for testing and repair of magnetic cables. Major repairs are completed at SIMA-IMA using Depot Level Technical Repair Procedures.

4A-6S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 PRE-OPERATIONAL

Figure 4A-6J. Marking K-4 Electrode for Float Positioning

4A-6T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4B-1 O-TYPE, SINGLE OR DOUBLE SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, 11-inch (type L), NM (3940-00-809-7167) (2) Pendant, 3/4-inch x 6-foot chain, single leg (depressor Cutter Mk 12, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) span pendant) (as required) (1075-00-340-6803) (as required) Pendant float, size 1, NM, 5/16-inch, single leg, NM, Cutter Mk 14 Mod 0, NM (per Job wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (length as Sheet 4A-4) (1075-00-507-1201) (as required) required) (per Table 4B-1A) (4030-00-269-9772) Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Shackle, long, clevis-type, NM (5340-01-270-8709) (1075-00-265-0677) (as required) (2) Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch (1 per side (1075-00-332-5834) (as required) for float pendant connection) (4030-00-270-5483) Float, type O, size 1, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3) Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch x 4,000-foot, single leg, (1075-01-371-0568) (as required) NM, wire rope (RHL) (per Job Sheet 4A-2) Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye (4010-01-302-9008) (4030-00-290-6420) (as required) Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch x 4,000-foot, single leg, Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) NM, wire rope (LHL) (per Job Sheet 4A-2) (2) (4010-01-291-1611) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (depressor) (per Job Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as Sheet 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) required) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet Wire rope, depressor, single leg, NM, 5/8-inch x 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) (port or starboard) (as 1800-foot RHL (per Job Sheet 4A-2) required) (4010-01-296-5861) Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 SUPPORT ITEMS Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) (as required) Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) (as required) Grip, Klein, 1/2- to 3/4-inch (5120-00-224-2661) Line, tag, 21-thread x 3-foot (4) 1 Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4B-1A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4B-1-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. If both port and starboard sides are to be streamed, the windward side should be streamed first. When the side is operating correctly at 25-fathom scope or first cutter position, streaming of the leeward side may commence. No attempt should be made to commence streaming both sides simultaneously, as there is a high degree of risk that the two wires will foul.

4B-1-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order. c. Assemble type and quantity of cutters required and include one extra intermediate cutter for each wire. d. Rig depressor and otter for O-type sweep in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. e. Prepare sweep and depressor wires in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4B-1-1.2 Float Preparation.

If connecting float pendant (for moored configuration) is less than 30-feet long, use a combination of two pendants, not to exceed specified length. NOTE Table 4B-1A, identifies correct float pendant lengths for the intended sweep operation. a. Prepare size 1 float (moored configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3.

4B-1-1.3 Connecting Depressor Wire to Depressor. a. Engage depressor drum. b. Lead depressor wire through depressor wire instrumented fairlead sheave, through horizontal roller assembly (Figure 4B-1A), and around stern to depressor. c. Connect one 1-inch eye-and-jaw swivel to each end of 4-way connector with 1-inch shackles (Figure 4B-1B). d. Connect jaw end of eye-and-jaw swivel on 4-way connector to 4-inch ID towing ring of depressor bridle.

4B-1B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4B-1A. Wire and Float Pendant Length

SPEED THROUGH WATER

DEPTH 6 KNOTS 8 KNOTS 10 KNOTS OF SWEEP SCOPE OF SCOPE OF SCOPE OF DEPRESSOR LENGTH OF DEPRESSOR LENGTH OF DEPRESSOR LENGTH OF WIRE FLOAT WIRE FLOAT WIRE FLOAT PENDANT PENDANT PENDANT FATHOMS FATHOMS FATHOMS

Single Double Otter Single Double Otter Single Double Otter Fathoms Sweep Sweep Feet Depth Sweep Sweep Feet Depth Sweep Sweep Feet Depth

5 7 13 20 27 7 15 20 28 8 16 20 28

6 8 1630339 18303510193035

7 101940391121404312224043

8 122145451424505115265051

9 142450511627605817296058

10 16 27 60 58 19 30 65 66 20 33 65 66

12 20 33 70 72 24 36 80 83 25 39 80 85

14 25 38 85 86 29 42 100 100 31 46 105 105

16 30 44 100 100 33 49 120 119 36 53 130 127

18 35 50 115 115 38 55 140 138 41 60 150 149

20 39 56 130 130 43 62 150 158 47 68 170 172

25 51 72 165 168 55 80 210 210 60 87 230 232

30 62 89 205 208 68 98 265 265 74 106 300 300

35 74 105 250 248 80 116 330 328 87 126 370 372

40 85 122 290 290 93 134 400 400 101 146 465 486

4597—340338————————

50109—390390————————

4B-1C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4B-1A. Depressor Wire Preparation

4B-1D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4B-1B. Multiplane Kite Rigged as a Depressor with Span Pendant Attached

4B-1E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

e. Secure depressor wire to 1-inch eye-and-jaw swivel at forward end of 4-way connector (Figure 4B-1B). f. Attach span pendant to 4-way connector using a 7/8-inch shackle for single O sweep. Attach two span pendants to 4-way connector for double O sweep.

4B-1-1.4 Depressor Positioning. NOTE Otters and depressors may be secured at the stern rail, in ready release position, if streaming of the sweep is anticipated; otherwise, they will be secured in their stowage racks on the fantail. a. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift depressor, train aft of roller chock assembly, and lower depressor to deck level. b. Heave in on depressor wire until 4-way connector is on deck with arms in UP position. c. Secure depressor with a safety chain around roller, slack off crane whip and disengage depressor drum. d. Disconnect crane wire whip from depressor and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. Rotate crane forward. e. Attach a type L block to free end of depressor 6-foot span pendant with 7/8-inch shackle provided.

4B-1-1.5 Connecting Sweep Wire and End Cutter to Otter. a. Engage sweep wire drum(s). b. Lead sweep wire through instrumented fairlead sheave, through sweep wire roller chock, outboard of taffrail, and clear of all obstructions to otter stowage position (Figure 4B-1C). c. Connect float pendant to 3/4-inch shackle/towing beam. d. Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to sweep wire and to middle leg swivel of towing beam (Figure 4B-1D).

4B-1-1.6 Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. a. Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on the otter. b. Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4B-1E). c. Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. d. Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. e. Rotate crane forward. f. Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge. Disengage sweep wire drum(s).

4B-1-2 STREAMING (PORT OR STARBOARD).

4B-1-2.1 Streaming Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.

4B-1F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4B-1C. Sweep Wire Preparation

b. Slow to launching speed (4 knots), adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable to reduce rolling.

4B-1-2.2 Launching the Float. a. Request permission to put gear to the rail. b. Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4B-1F). c. Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. d. Tend line to bitt. e. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. f. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. g. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of ship and obstructions. h. Connect float pendant(s) if required using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. i. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE.

4B-1G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION Figure 4B-1D. Connecting Sweep Wire and Cutter Mk 9 to Otter (Starboard Configuration)

4B-1H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4B-1E. Otter in Ready Release Position

NOTE When streaming Double-O gear, launch windward side first. j. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4B-1E). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4B-1-2.3 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power to first cutter position or short stay (25-fathom scope), and check for proper diversion. c. Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake, maintaining slight tension of at least 500 lbs. Check for proper diversion. d. Streaming of second side may be started at this time, following the above procedures.

4B-1J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4B-1F. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4B-1K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4B-1-2.4 Intermediate Cutter Attachment.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Refer to Job Sheet 4A-4 for cutter spacing. a. When desired location for first intermediate cutter is just inboard of sweep wire roller chock, stop veering and attach a wedge stop on sweep wire (remove fairings as needed). b. On the faired section of wire, veer sweep wire until wedge stop is just outboard of the sweep wire roller chock. c. Mount first cutter on sweep wire, remove cutter tagline. d. Remove safety pins, and release cutter. e. Adjust speed to keep gear working. f. Continue above procedures until all cutters are mounted and sweep wire is veered to effective scope (Figure 4B-1G). g. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4B-1-2.5 Launching the Depressor. NOTE Refer to Table 4B-1B for tensions at various scopes and speeds. a. Slow to launch speed (4 knots). b. Engage sweep wire and depressor drum and remove depressor safety chain. c. Mount type L block on the end of depressor span pendant over sweep wire. d. Secure pin with seizing wire. e. Launch the depressor.

4B-1-2.6 Streaming to Full Scope. a. Pay out sweep wire and depressor wire simultaneously until required scope of depressor wire is at water’s edge (Table 4B-1A).

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. b. Stop paying out, disengage drums, and engage pawls on wire drums.

4B-1L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4B-1G. Moored Minesweeping Configuration (Single O-Type Gear Streamed to Starboard)

4B-1M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4B-1B. Sag or Lift of Sweep Wire and Tensions of Sweep and Depressor Wires

SCOPE OF SWEEP 5 KNOTS 6 KNOTS 7 KNOTS 8 KNOTS 9 KNOTS 10 KNOTS 11 KNOTS WIRE LESS SCOPE OF DEPRESSOR WIRE

FATHOMS FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET

100 ——————— 150 10 6 2 1/2, -1/3 — — — 200 21 12 6 2 1/2 1/2, -1 -3 1/2 — 250 35 23 14 8 1/2 4 2, -2 — 300 52 35 24 16 10 5, -1 2, -4 TENSIONS LBS LBS LBS LBS LBS LBS LBS

Sweep Wire 3,800 5,300 7,500 9,600 11,800 13,900 15,900 Depressor Wire 2,800 4,000 5,200 6,700 8,600 10,500 12,800 The scope of the sweep wire as specified by this table, is measured between the otter and depressor. The speed is the actual speed through the water with the gear streamed. The specified sag is the maximum sag of the sweep wire below a straight line running between the otter and depressor. A number preceded by a minus sign (-) indicates a rise above this line caused by water pressure against the lay of the wire. EXAMPLES: With 250 fathoms of sweep wire between the otter and depressor, and sweeping at a speed of 8 knots, the sweep wire sags 8 1/2 feet below the depth of the sweep wire at the otter and depressor when they are set to give the same depth. With 300 fathoms of sweep wire between the otter and depressor, and sweeping at a speed of 11 knots, the sweep wire will vary from a maximum sag of 2 feet to a maximum left of 4 feet.

4B-1-2.7 Streaming Double O-Type Sweep. a. At short stay, proceed as described in paragraphs 4B-1-2.2 through 4B-1-2.4. Attach two span pendants to 4-way connector. b. Engage port and starboard sweep wire drums and depressor wire drum. c. Mount type L blocks on outboard end of depressor span pendants over port and starboard sweep wires. d. Secure pin with seizing wire.

4B-1-2.8 Streaming to Full Scope. a. Pay out sweep wire and depressor wire simultaneously until required scope of depressor wire is at water’s edge (Figure 4B-1H).

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. b. Stop paying out, disengage drums, and engage the pawls on wire drums. 4B-1N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4B-1H. Moored Minesweeping Configuration (Double O-Type Gear Streamed to Port and Starboard)

4B-1P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4B-1-2.9 Securing Sweep Wire and Depressor Wire. a. Secure sweep wire drums. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4B-1J) back-to-back on sweep and depressor wires to allow for attachment of Cutters Mk 15. d. Attach Cutter Mk 15 to sweep wire between wedge stops attached in previous step. Attach Cutter Mk 15 to the depressor wire forward of the stern roller chock.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. f. Arm sweep wire and depressor wire cutters. g. Notify bridge that gear is fully streamed and stopped off on deck. h. Increase headway to sweep speed. i. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheave. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4B-1H).

4B-1-3 O-TYPE GEAR RECOVERY. NOTE Recovery is the reverse of streaming.

4B-1-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow ship to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea if practicable, to reduce rolling.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. d. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove sweep wire and depressor wire cutters and wedge stops.

4B-1Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4B-1J. Wedge Stop Placement

4B-1R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

e. Reman fantail. f. Request permission to recover gear. g. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. h. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to the whip with 5/8-inch shackle.

4B-1-3.2 Depressor Recovery. a. Engage all drums and remove pawls (one at a time). b. Heave in on sweep and depressor wires until type L blocks are in reach. c. Remove type L blocks from sweep wires. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail. Recover depressor and attach safety chain. Disengage depressor wire drum.

4B-1-3.3 Cutter Recovery.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. In case of a DUD cutter, proceed to DUD cutter instructions in Job Sheet 4A-4 immediately. a. Heave in on sweep wire until first intermediate cutter (last cutter mounted) comes into reach. Replace safety pins. Attach tagline to cutter. Remove cutter assembly from sweep wire and put in a safe place on deck. b. Heave in on sweep wire until wedge stop is between roller chock assembly and instrumented fairlead sheave; remove wedge stop. Continue until all cutters and wedge stops are recovered. c. If both sides are streamed, simultaneous recovery may proceed until sweep wires are at short stay and all cutters are removed. Stop heaving. Disengage windward drum, and continue recovery of leeward side until otter is up close to sweep wire roller chock. The leeward side must be recovered first to prevent the ship from drifting on the sweep gear. d. Continue heaving in until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. e. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4B-1-3.4 Float Recovery. NOTE Float recovery and otter recovery order may be reversed at the discretion of the fantail, when using float pendants over 60 feet in length. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, and heave in until float is in lifting position under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float.

4B-1S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float.

4B-1-3.5 Otter Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4B-1E) or on the stowage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4B-1-3.6 Recovery of Gear from Windward Side. a. Leeward gear recovery may begin when the windward O Float is recovered and the otter is controlled. b. Repeat procedures in paragraphs 4B-1-3.2 through 4B-1-3.5. c. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4B-1-3.7 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage.. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. When all cutters are recovered, they should be disarmed and disassembled. All components should be thoroughly washed in fresh water, dried, and lubricated in accordance with Planned Maintenance System (PMS). All gear should be stowed or secured.

4B-1-4 RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.

A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.

4B-1-4.1 Preparation. a. Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail. b. Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect. NOTE Wind will generally have more effect than current. c. Stop the screw on recovery side. d. Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside. e. Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle recovery pendant to recovery wire. f. Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch.

4B-1T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

g. Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane. h. Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float. i. Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire roller chock. j. Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain. k. If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand. l. If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire. m. Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.

4B-1-5 RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB). a. Approach float from downwind. b. Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should be done without RHIB. c. Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.

4B-1U/(4B-1V blank)

OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4B-2 SINGLE SHIP DEEP SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, 11-inch (type L), NM (3940-00-809-7167) (2) Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 (1075-00-265-0677) Pendant, 3/4-inch x 6-foot chain, single leg Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) (depressor span pendants) (3) (1075-00-340-6803) (9) Pendant, depressor, 5/8-inch x 50-foot, single leg, Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 (1075-00-332-5834) (2) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x (length as required), single Depressor Wire, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 1800-foot, NM, leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye Ring, 3-inch ID, NM (5365-01-346-8057) (2) outboard end, inboard end whipped) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch (4010-01-296-5861) (4030-00-270-5483) Float, type O, size 0, NM, (1075-01-357-9948) (per Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 7/8-inch Job Sheet 4A-3) (4030-00-270-5485) (12) Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, (4030-00-290-6420) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1, (depressor) (per Job Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/4-inch (4030-00-269-9769) Sheet 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) (2) (4) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) required) SUPPORT ITEMS Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) (as required) Line, messenger, 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot, hardeye one Grip, Klein, 1/2- to 3/4-inch (5120-00-224-2661) end other end whipped 1 Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Line, tag, 21-thread x 3-foot 1 Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4B-2A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4B-2-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE The single ship deep sweep has been designed to provide a deep-moored sweep for use by an MCM-type craft. This sweep uses a maximum number of standard MCM components and a minimum number of nonstandard components as necessary to complete the streaming arrangement. Sweep wire and miscellaneous connecting gear will be installed on the winch. All other standard and special items should be stowed in appropriate areas on deck.

4B-2-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order. c. Assemble type and quantity of cutters required and include one extra intermediate cutter for each wire. d. Rig depressor for single ship deep sweep in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. e. Prepare sweep and depressor wires in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4B-2-1.2 Sweep Wire Preparation. a. Prepare sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2. b. Lead sweep wire on sweep side of ship from the drum through instrumented fairlead sheave, over sweep wire roller chock, back aboard, over taffrail outboard of all obstructions, and lay it on deck.

4B-2-1.3 Otter Preparation. a. Prepare otter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1 and Figure 4B-2A. b. Attach an End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to sweep wire and to middle leg swivel of towing beam. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, connect 5/16-inch x 5-foot float pendant to upper end of otter beam. Attach free end of 5-foot float pendant to appropriate length float pendant (Table 4B-2A) with a 5/8-inch shackle. d. Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. e. Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4B-2B). f. Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion.

4B-2B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4B-2A. Connecting Sweep Wire and Cutter Mk 9 to Otter (Starboard Configuration)

4B-2C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION Table 4B-2A. Depressor Wire and Float Pendant Lengths for Single Ship Deep Sweep

SWEEP DEPTH DEPRESSOR WIRE LENGTH FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH (FMS) (FMS)1 (FT) 1

50 80 420 60 107 520 70 132 630 80 160 740 90 187 840 100 213 950 1 Depressor wire and float pendant lengths are approximate and will change with the ship speed and sea conditions.

Figure 4B-2B. Otter in Ready Release Position

4B-2D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

g. Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. h. Rotate the crane forward. i. Take slack out of the sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

4B-2-1.4 Depressor Wire Preparation. a. Prepare depressor wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2. b. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach 3/4-inch swivel to end of depressor wire (Figure 4B-2C). c. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect a 3-inch ID ring to free end of swivel. d. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect a 3/4-inch swivel to each end of a 50-foot, 5/8-inch depressor pendant. e. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect one swivel of 50-foot pendant to 3-inch ID ring.

4B-2-1.5 Depressor Preparation. a. Prepare depressor in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1 and Figures 4B-2D and 4B-2E. NOTE Both depressors must have the same sheer away from the gear and should be adjusted accordingly. b. Lead 50-foot pendant over depressor wire roller chock, and using a 1-inch shackle, connect free swivel on 50-foot pendant to 4-inch ID ring on bridle of the outboard depressor. Reel slack in depressor wire and 50-foot pendant onto depressor drum. c. Lift outboard depressor with articulated stern crane and reel in on the depressor drum until the depressor is pulled up tight to stern roller chock. d. Using 1-inch shackle, connect one end of 3/4-inch x 6-foot chain pendant to 4-inch ID ring on depressor bridle, and other end of a type L block. e. Lift inboard depressor from stowage rack using articulated crane and stow in empty otter quick release position.

4B-2-1.6 Size 0 Float Preparation for Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS). a. Prepare size 0 float (moored configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. b. For float pendant and depressor wire lengths, refer to Table 4B-2A.

4B-2-1.7 Cutter Preparation for Single Ship Deep Sweep (SSDS). a. Lay out ten 5/8-inch wedge stops and required hand tools. b. Lay out nine Elevating Fins Mk 12 and assemble nine Cutters Mk 12 in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4.

4B-2E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4B-2C. Depressor Wire Preparation

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. c. Inspect and arm nine Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 with Mk 192 Mod 0 Cartridge. d. Attach a 5/8-inch wedge stop at the first and second cutter locations on sweep wire (Table 4B-2B). e. Mount first cutter on sweep wire after first wedge stop.

4B-2-2 STREAMING. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea if practicable to reduce rolling.

4B-2F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4B-2D. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (Outboard Depressor)

4B-2G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4B-2E. Multiplane Kite Rigged as Depressor for Single Ship Deep Sweep (Inboard Depressor)

4B-2H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4B-2B. Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 Spacing for Single Ship Deep Sweep

CUTTER DISTANCE FROM OUTBOARD END NUMBER OF SWEEP WIRE (FEET)

11 23 36 416 531 663 7 106 8 142

4B-2-2.1 Launching the Size O Float. a. Request permission to put gear to the rail. b. Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4B-2F). c. Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. d. Tend line to bitt. e. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. f. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. g. Connect float pendant, if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. h. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. NOTE Due to length of float pendant, float will act erratically until pendant takes a strain. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4B-2B). Launch float. Cast nose line clear of ship.

4B-2J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4B-2F. Size 0 Float Rigged (Moored)

4B-2K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4B-2-2.2 Tripping the Otter. a. Ensure sweep wire drum is engaged on streaming side.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. b. When float pendant takes a strain, trip quick release (MacCluney) hook. Pay out sweep wire to the first cutter position. Install Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2. NOTE Proper diversion cannot be checked until all gear is streamed and stopped off and ship is at sweeping speed. c. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4B-2-2.3 Sweep Arming. a. Veer sweep wire until second wedge stop is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock. b. Install a Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2. c. Continue to veer sweep wire. Place wedge stops and mount cutters according to Table 4B-2B until all cutters are mounted and sweep wire is veered to effective scope as specified in tactical instructions.

4B-2-2.4 Launching the Depressor.

Use caution when veering the sweep wire to ensure sufficient tension is retained on the sweep wire and depressor wire, preventing slack in the depressor bridles and possible stalling and entanglement of the depressor. a. Slow to launch speed (4 knots). Adjust as required. b. Engage depressor wire drum and remove depressor safety chain. c. Mount type L block on end of depressor span pendant over sweep wire. d. Secure pin with seizing wire. e. Launch outboard depressor and veer 50-foot pendant until inboard 3-inch ID ring is just outboard of depressor wire roller chock. f. Using 7/8-inch shackles, connect two span pendants opposite each on 3-inch ID ring between the 3/4-inch swivels of depressor wire and 50-foot pendant (Figure 4B-2G). g. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach a type L block to free end of upper 6-foot span pendant. Attach type L block to sweep wire.

4B-2L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION Figure 4B-2G. Single Ship Deep Sweep Depressor Arrangement

4B-2M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

h. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, shackle free end of lower 6-foot span pendant to 4-inch ID ring of inboard depressor bridle and launch inboard depressor. i. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4B-2-2.5 Veering to Full Scope. a. Continue to veer depressor and sweep wire until instrumented fairlead sheave display indicates scope for sweep depth indicated in tactical instructions.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. b. Stop paying out, disengage drums, and engage pawls on wire drums.

4B-2-2.6 Securing Sweep Wire and Depressor Wire. a. Secure sweep wire and depressor wire drums. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4B-2H) back-to-back to sweep wire and to depressor wire forward of stern roller chock. Attach Cutter Mk 15 to sweep and depressor wires.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. d. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. e. Arm sweep wire and depressor wire Cutters Mk 15. f. Notify bridge that gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. g. Increase headway to sweep speed. h. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheave. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4B-2J).

4B-2-3 RECOVERY. NOTE Recovery is the reverse of streaming.

4B-2N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4B-2H. Wedge Stop Placement

4B-2P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4B-2J. Single Ship Deep Sweep Configuration

4B-2Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4B-2-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. d. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutters from wires. e. Reman fantail. f. Request permission to recover gear. g. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. h. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to the whip with 5/8-inch shackle.

4B-2-3.2 Depressor Recovery. a. Engage sweep and depressor wire drums and disengage pawls one at a time. Take a strain on both sweep and depressor wires. b. Simultaneously heave in on the sweep wire and depressor wire until inboard depressor is just aft of stern roller chock. c. Heave in on depressor wire until the type L block is within reach. Remove type L block from sweep wire. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel hook to lifting bail on depressor. Lift depressor and detach both depressor span pendants and remove from depressor wire. Recover the depressor and place in stowage rack using the articulated stern crane. d. Heave in on depressor and sweep wires until the type L block attached to the outboard depressor is at the stern roller chock. e. Remove the type L block from the sweep wire. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel hook to lifting bail on depressor. Recover the depressor and attach safety chain. Disengage the depressor wire drum.

4B-2-3.3 Cutter Recovery.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. In case of a DUD cutter, proceed to DUD cutter instructions in Job Sheet 4A-4 immediately. a. Heave in on sweep wire until first intermediate cutter (last mounted) comes into reach. Replace safety pins. Attach tagline to cutter; then depress the handle, opening the spring loaded arms. Remove cutter assembly from sweep wire and put in a safe place on deck.

4B-2R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

b. Heave in on sweep wire until wedge stop is between roller chock assembly and instrumented fairlead sheave; remove wedge stop. Continue until all cutters and wedge stops are recovered. c. Continue heaving in until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4B-2-3.4 Otter Recovery. NOTE Due to length of float pendant, float will act erratically until close aboard. a. Reduce speed to bare steerage way. b. Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter. c. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. d. Lift otter and place it in ready release position (Figure 4B-2B). e. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. f. Disengage sweep wire drum. g. Attach hardeye of 2-1/2-inch nylon line to eye of float pendant where it shackles to 5/16-inch x 5-foot pendant. h. Lead other end of 2-1/2-inch line to gypsy head. Heave in until 5-foot pendant can be unshackled. i. Heave in on 2-1/2-inch line and remaining float pendant until float is in reach.

4B-2-3.5 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Heave in on float pendant until nose line is within reach. c. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, and heave in until float is in lifting position under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. d. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. e. Remove emergency recovery pendant. f. Stow float. g. Notify bridge all gear is clear. h. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4B-2-3.6 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. When all cutters are recovered, they should be disarmed and disassembled. All components should be thoroughly washed in fresh water, dried, and lubricated in accordance with Planned Maintenance System (PMS). All gear should be stowed or secured.

4B-2S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4B-2-4 RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.

A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.

4B-2-4.1 Preparation. a. Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail. b. Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect. NOTE Wind will generally have more effect than current. c. Stop the screw on recovery side. d. Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside. e. Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle recovery pendant to recovery wire. f. Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch. g. Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane. h. Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float. i. Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire roller chock. j. Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in ready release position or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain. k. If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand. l. If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a chain stopper grip on severed sweep wire. m. Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.

4B-2-5 RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB). a. Approach float from downwind. b. Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should be done without RHIB. c. Haul in messenger line (if used) with the crane winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.

4B-2T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4B-3 TEAM DEEP SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS1

Block, 11-inch (type L), NM (3940-00-809-7167) (2) Pendant, 3/4-inch x 6-foot chain (depressor span Coupling, shear, NM, 16,000-lb (Consort) pendants) (3) (1075-00-376-4451) Ring, 3-inch ID, NM (5365-01-346-8057) (2) Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, NM (Consort-10, Guide-6) (per Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch (Guide) Job Sheet 4A-4) (1075-00-340-6803) (4030-00-270-5483) Cutter Mk 15, NM (per Job Sheet 4B-1) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 7/8-inch (Consort-15, (1075-00-332-5834) (2) Guide-14) (4030-00-270-5485) Depressor Wire, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 1800-foot, NM, Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard outboard end, inboard end whipped) end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) (4010-01-296-5861) Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (depressor) (per Job end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008) Sheet 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) (2) Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/4-inch (4030-00-269-9769) Line, messenger, 300-foot, graduated (Guide) 1 (4) Pendant, depressor, 5/8-inch x 50-foot, single leg, Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 2 required) SUPPORT ITEMS Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) (as required) Line, tag, 21-thread x 3-foot (2) 2 Grip, Klein, 1/2- to 3/4-inch (5120-00-224-2661) Signal Paddles (red/green) (6350-01-036-1989) (2) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Hook, boat 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) 1 Items are common for both GUIDE and CONSORT ships, unless otherwise specified. 2 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4B-3A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4B-3-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE The Team Deep Sweep is designed to provide a deep-moored sweep. This sweep uses a maximum number of standard MCM components and a minimum number of nonstandard components, as necessary, to complete the streaming arrangement. Only sweep wire and miscellaneous connecting gear will be installed on the wire drum. All other standard and special items should be stowed in appropriate areas below deck.

4B-3-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order. c. Assemble type and quantity of cutters required and include one extra intermediate cutter for each wire. d. Rig depressor for team deep sweep in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. e. Prepare sweep and depressor wires in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4B-3-1.2 Sweep Wire Preparation. a. Prepare sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2. b. During normal operations, the sweep wire will be streamed from the inboard sweep wire drum of both the GUIDE and CONSORT ships. c. Lead sweep wire from appropriate drum through instrumented fairlead sheave, over sweep wire roller chock, back aboard, over taffrail outboard of all obstructions, and lay it on deck. d. On the GUIDE, use a 7/8-inch shackle to attach a 3/4-inch swivel to end of sweep wire. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach one end of 300-foot graduated messenger line to free end of 3/4-inch swivel that is shackled to the GUIDE’s sweep wire. e. On the CONSORT, use a 7/8-inch shackle to attach a 3/4-inch swivel to end of the sweep wire; then use a 7/8-inch shackle to attach a shear coupling to the free end of the swivel.

4B-3-1.3 Depressor Wire Preparation. a. Prepare depressor wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2. b. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach 3/4-inch swivel to end of depressor wire (Figure 4B-3A). c. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect a 3-inch ID ring to free end of swivel.

4B-3B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4B-3A. Depressor Wire Preparation

d. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect a 3/4-inch swivel to each end of a 50-foot, 5/8-inch depressor pendant. e. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect swivel on end of 50-foot pendant to 3-inch ID ring on end of depressor wire.

4B-3-1.4 Depressor Preparation. a. Prepare depressor in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. b. Lead the 50-foot pendant through the depressor wire roller chock; and using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect free swivel on 50-foot pendant to 4-inch ring on bridle of the outboard depressor (Figure 4B-3B). Reel slack in depressor wire and 50-foot pendant onto depressor drum. c. Lift outboard depressor with articulated stern crane and reel in on depressor drum until depressor is pulled up tight to stern roller chock. d. Using 7/8-inch shackle, connect one end of span pendant to 4-inch ID ring on depressor bridle, and other end to a type L block. e. Lift inboard depressor from stowage rack using articulated crane and secure to taffrail MacCluney hook.

4B-3C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4B-3B. Rigging Outboard Depressor

4B-3D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4B-3-1.5 Cutter Preparation Team Deep Sweep. a. Lay out 5/8-inch wedge stops and required hand tools. b. Lay out Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 and the Mk 12 elevating fins, and assemble in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. c. Inspect and arm Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 with Mk 192 Mod 0 Cartridge. d. Attach a 5/8-inch wedge stop at the first and second cutter locations on sweep wire (Table 4B-3A).

Table 4B-3A. Team Deep Sweep Cutter Mk 12 Spacing

CUTTER DISTANCE FROM OUTBOARD END NUMBER OF SWEEP WIRE (FEET) 11 23 36 416 536 666 7 108 8 142

4B-3-2 STREAMING.

4B-3-2.1 Streaming Preparation. NOTE Each depressor should be hung alongside of the roller chock assembly that is to be used, clear of all obstructions; when it is connected to the sweep gear, the small stuff can be cut, and the depressors launched. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish communications; bridge-to-bridge, bridge-to-fantail, and fantail-to-fantail.

4B-3E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4B-3-2.2 Streaming Maneuvers. NOTE When both ships are ready to stream gear, the GUIDE will set a base course and speed to provide sufficient steerageway. The CONSORT will close on the GUIDE until they are streaming at the same course and speed, and are abeam at the nearest safe spacing for existing sea conditions. Gear will be streamed at minimal speed to maintain steerageway. a. When permission to pass a heaving line is granted by the GUIDE, a line should be passed from the CONSORT to the GUIDE by the appropriate means. b. When the heaving line is received, the GUIDE should secure it to the outboard end of the 300-foot graduated messenger line and inform the CONSORT to heave around. c. Before a strain is taken on the sweep wire, it should be free from the rail. The GUIDE’s winch should be engaged and payed out to ensure adequate slack for the CONSORT to heave sweep wire aboard and to facilitate handling after it is aboard. d. The CONSORT should bring the messenger line in through inboard roller chock and lead it to the gypsy head on sweep wire winch.

4B-3-2.3 Wire Connection and Arming. NOTE When the GUIDE’s sweep wire is brought aboard the CONSORT, ensure the CONSORT’s sweep wire is led out from the winch so the sweep wire can be connected easily at a clear work space on deck. a. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect swivel on the GUIDE’s sweep wire into shear coupling on CONSORT’s sweep wire. Unshackle 300-foot graduated messenger line and cut small stuff lashing swivel to line.

When the sweep wires of the two ships are connected together, the tension of the sweep wire between the two ships will create an extremely dangerous situation for all hands on both fantails. The GUIDE should monitor sweep wire tension continuously and keep a large catenary in the wire for safety purposes. Wire rope cutters should be readily available on both craft for cutting the sweep wire if such action appears necessary. NOTE The CONSORT will notify the GUIDE before starting the next step. b. The CONSORT shall heave in on GUIDE’s sweep wire until the wedge stop located 3 fathoms OUTBOARD of shear coupling is just outboard of the sweep wire roller chock. Ensure wedge stop is attached.

4B-3F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. c. CONSORT installs the Guides Number 2 Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 in reverse position just OUTBOARD of wedge stop. d. The CONSORT engages winch and begins to pay out the GUIDE’s sweep wire until the wedge stop 1 fathom OUTBOARD of the shear coupling is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock. Ensure wedge stop is attached. e. CONSORT installs the Guides Number 1 Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 (in reverse position) just OUTBOARD of wedge stop. f. The CONSORT continues to pay out its sweep wire until the wedge stop 1 fathom INBOARD of the shear coupling is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock. g. CONSORT installs Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 (Cutter Number 1) just INBOARD of wedge stop. h. When the attachment point for the CONSORT’s third intermediate cutter is outboard of the sweep wire roller chock, stop veering and attach a wedge stop on the sweep wire. Simultaneously, install CONSORT’s Number 2 Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 on the sweep wire OUTBOARD of sweep wire stern roller chock. i. Pay out until the attachment point for the CONSORT’s fourth intermediate cutter is between instrumented fairlead sheave and sweep wire roller chock. Attach a wedge stop on the sweep wire. Simultaneously, install CONSORT’s Number 3 Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 on the sweep wire OUTBOARD of sweep wire roller chock. j. The above procedure of installing cutters, listed in steps 3 through 9, should be continued until sweep wire has been armed with cutters at the spacing indicated in Table 4B-3A. k. After the CONSORT has streamed several hundred feet of sweep wire and given signal to the GUIDE, the GUIDE should recover its sweep wire to the attachment point of GUIDE’s Number 3 intermediate cutter, maintain a reasonable catenary, and attach and arm its remaining cutters in the same manner as described above.

4B-3-2.4 Launching the Depressors.

Use caution when paying out the depressor wire to ensure sufficient tension is retained in the sweep wire, preventing slack in depressor bridles and possible stalling and entanglement of the depressor. The sweep wire should be coordinated between the GUIDE and CONSORT to ensure that undue stresses are not placed on the sweep. No reference to actual scopes should be made over nonsecure circuits, but percent of the intended scope may be discussed to permit coordination between ships. a. On signal from the GUIDE, both ships should disengage sweep wire winches and veer the sweep wire to desired full scope in unison, using the sweep wire winch brake. b. While veering, the CONSORT ship gradually increases ship spacing to 400 yards.

4B-3G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. c. Veer to desired scope. d. Attach type L block of outboard depressor span pendant to sweep wire (Figure 4B-3C). e. On signal from the GUIDE, both ships should launch the outboard depressor and pay out the 50-foot pendant until the inboard 3-inch ID ring is just outboard of roller chock. f. Using 7/8-inch shackles, connect two span pendants opposite each other on 3-inch ID ring between 3/4-inch swivels of depressor wire and 50-foot pendant (Figure 4B-3C). g. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, attach a type L block to free end of upper 6-foot span pendant. Attach Type L block to the sweep wire. h. Using a 7/8-inch shackle, connect free end of the lower 6-foot span pendant to 4-inch ID ring of the inboard depressor bridle. i. Launch inboard depressor, and pay out on depressor wire winch until 50-fathom mark is just aft of roller chock and ensure depressor is clear and riding properly. j. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4B-3-2.5 Streaming to Full Scope. a. Station a monitor at the instrumented fairlead sheave readings.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. b. Continue to pay out sweep wire and depressor wire in 100-fathom increments until instrumented fairlead sheave readings indicate scope for sweep depth specified in tactical instructions. Stop paying out, disengage drums, and engage towing pawls on wire drums.

4B-3-2.6 Securing Sweep Wire and Depressor Wire. a. Secure sweep wire and depressor wire drums. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from the fantail.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4B-3D) back-to-back on sweep wire and two wedge stops on depressor wire allowing for attachment of Cutters Mk 15. d. Attach Cutter Mk 15 to sweep wire between instrumented fairlead sheave and stern roller chock. Attach Cutter Mk 15 to depressor wire forward of stern roller chock.

4B-3H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4B-3C. Depressor Arrangement for Deep Sweep

4B-3J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4B-3D. Wedge Stop Placement

4B-3K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. f. Arm sweep wire and depressor wire Cutters Mk 15. g. Notify bridge that the gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. h. The GUIDE will notify the CONSORT and both ships will increase headway simultaneously to desired sweep speed and ship spacing. i. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4B-3E).

4B-3-3 TEAM DEEP SWEEP OPERATION. NOTE The sweep will normally be operated with the ships on a steady course and speed, as determined by the operational situation. Performance of the gear will be monitored in accordance with NWP 35 (Series).

4B-3-3.1 Turning Procedures. a. The GUIDE’s responsibility will be shifted to the inboard MCM during the turn. b. Each turn will be carried out in steps of 20 degrees, or lesser amount remaining at the end of the turn. c. Ship spacing in turns should be 300 yards. d. Where sufficient depth will prevent bottoming of the gear, GUIDE should slow to approximately 3 knots and CONSORT should maintain a speed of 5 to 6 knots. e. Where bottoming of the gear is possible, GUIDE should maintain a speed of at least 4 knots and CONSORT should perform turns at 6 knots, provided its sweep wire tensions do not exceed 14,000 pounds. f. The start of each turn increment will be signaled by the GUIDE with the execution of flag Romeo. g. When the GUIDE is steady on course after a turn segment, it will close up flag Romeo. h. When the CONSORT has completed its turn segment and is again in the appropriate station abeam of the GUIDE, it will close up flag Romeo; then, the GUIDE will signal the next 20 degrees turn segment by executing flag Romeo. NOTE To reverse course with the deep sweep and to travel over a path very near that already traveled, a pseudo-Williamson turn may be carried out by turning approximately 60 degrees in one direction and then reversing direction by a 240 degrees turn the opposite way. This turn will usually allow return to a datum point within 10 degrees of a reciprocal heading. i. During night operations, turns are performed in a similar fashion utilizing flashing light signals.

4B-3L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION Figure 4B-3E. Team Deep Sweep Configuration

4B-3M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4B-3-4 RECOVERY. NOTE Recovery is the reverse of streaming.

4B-3-4.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-bridge, bridge-to-fantail, and fantail-to- fantail communications. b. The GUIDE will notify the CONSORT, and both ships will slow to recovery speed (3 to 4 knots) and decrease ship’s spacing to approximately 300 yards for recovery. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4B-3-4.2 Depressor Recovery.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutters from wires. b. Reman fantail. c. Both ships should engage sweep wire and depressor drums and simultaneously heave in on sweep wire and depressor wire until inboard depressor is just aft of stern roller chock. d. The GUIDE will notify the CONSORT, and the ships shall heave around on the sweep winch while closely monitoring the sweep wire counter and sweep and depressor wires coming aboard. Recover depressors in 100-fathom increments of the depressor wire; simultaneously, recover 300 fathoms of the sweep wire. e. Heave in on depressor wire until the type L block is within reach. Remove type L block from sweep wire. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail of depressor. Lift depressor and detach both depressor span pendants and remove them from depressor wire. Recover the depressor and place in stowage rack using the articulated crane. f. Heave in on depressor and sweep wires until the type L block attached to the outboard depressor is at stern roller chock. g. Secure the quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail of depressor, remove the type L block from the sweep wire, recover depressor and attach safety chain. Disengage the depressor wire drum. NOTE Otters and depressors may be secured at the stern rail, in ready release position, if restreaming of the sweep is anticipated; otherwise, they will be secured in their stowage racks on the fantail. h. The CONSORT should gradually close to approximately 200 feet to recover gear. i. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4B-3N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4B-3-4.3 Cutter Recovery.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. In case of a DUD cutter, proceed to DUD cutter instructions in Job Sheet 4A-4 immediately. a. Both ships should heave in on the sweep wire until number 8 cutter is just in the water. b. The CONSORT should close to 100 feet and, as its cutters come into reach, replace the safety pins; attach tagline to cutter, then depress the handles opening the spring loaded arms. Remove the Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 assembly from the sweep wire and put in a safe place on deck. c. Heave in on sweep wire until wedge stop is onboard, and remove wedge stop. d. Continue heaving in on sweep wire, removing Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 and wedge stops until all the CONSORT’s and the first two GUIDE’s cutters and wedge stops have been removed. e. Attach a messenger line to the GUIDE’s sweep wire, separate the GUIDE’s swivel from the CONSORT’s shear coupling, and release the GUIDE’s sweep wire. f. Inform GUIDE it may commence recovery. Release GUIDE’s sweep wire by paying out messenger line. g. The GUIDE should recover its own sweep wire, remove six remaining cutters and all wedge stops, and recover the messenger line. h. Notify the bridge all gear is clear.

4B-3-4.4 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. When all cutters are recovered, they should be disarmed and disassembled. All components should be thoroughly washed in fresh water, dried, and lubricated in accordance with Planned Maintenance System (PMS). All gear should be stowed or secured.

4B-3P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4B-4 IMPROVED DEEP-MOORED SWEEP (IDMS)

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS COMPONENTS 1 Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2, NM (1075-00-340-6803) (per Sweep Wire, catenary (IDMS), 5/8-inch x 1000-foot, Job Sheet 4A-4) (Consort-10, Guide-6) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each Cutter Mk 15, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) end) (4010-01-296-5861) (1075-00-332-5834) Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, Coupling, shear, NM, 16,000-lb (1075-00-376-4451) single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1, depressor (per Job Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, Sheet 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) (2) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard Line, messenger, graduated, 300-foot (Guide) 2 end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008) Pendant, depressor, 5/8-inch x 50-foot, single leg, Swivel, ball bearing, NM (0000-LC-CJ7-0669) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 2 Swivel, link-to-link, NM, Ring, 3-inch ID, NM (5365-01-346-8057) (2) 5/8-inch (4030-00-269-9768) (2) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 1-inch (4030-00-269-9770) (5) 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (6) Transmitter, IDMS (5895-LL-H41-4554) 1-inch (4030-00-270-5486) (10) Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as Shackle, 7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485) required) SUPPORT ITEMS Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Line, tag, 21-thread x 3-foot 2 Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) (2) Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Grip, Klein, 1/2- to 3/4-inch (5120-00-224-2661) Signal paddles (red/green) (6350-01-036-1989) (2) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) * Hazardous Material. 1 Items are common for both GUIDE and CONSORT ships unless otherwise specified. 2 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4B-4A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4B-4-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE The IDMS has been designed to provide an easily streamed, deep-moored sweep for use by MCM-type craft. When familiar with this sweep, an MCM crew can stream or recover the fully armed IDMS in less than 1 hour. This sweep uses a maximum number of standard MCM components and a minimum number of nonstandard components, as necessary, to complete the streaming arrangement. Only sweep wire and miscellaneous connecting gear will be installed on the winch. All other standard and special items should be stowed in appropriate areas below deck. a. During normal operations with this sweep, the sweep wire will be streamed from outboard sweep wire drums of both the GUIDE and CONSORT ships. This uses the lay of the wire to assist in diverting inboard end of the sweep catenary, since port wires will be streamed to starboard, and starboard wires streamed to port.

4B-4-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order. c. Assemble type and quantity of cutters required and include one extra intermediate cutter for each wire. d. Rig depressor for team deep sweep in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. e. Prepare sweep and depressor wires in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4B-4-1.2 5/8-Inch x 1,000-Foot IDMS Sweep Wire Preparation (For Guide and Consort). a. Prepare sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2. b. Determine which sweep wire drum will be outboard in the two-ship sweep. c. Using 1-inch shackles, attach two 1-inch swivels diametrically opposite to the inboard 3-inch ID ring (Figure 4B-4A). d. Using 1-inch shackles, attach free end of first swivel attached to ring in previous step to hardeye of sweep wire; then attach free end of second swivel attached to ring in previous step to hardeye of 5/8-inch x 50-foot wire rope pendant. e. Reel sweep wire with pendant and connecting gear back on to sweep wire drum. f. Using 1-inch shackle, connect remaining hardeye of 50-foot pendant to a third 1-inch swivel; connect other end of this swivel to second (outboard) 3-inch ID ring. g. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect a ball bearing swivel to second 3-inch ID ring and to hardeye of 5/8-inch x 1,000-foot IDMS sweep wire.

4B-4B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4B-4A. IDMS Sweep Wire Preparation

4B-4C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

h. Reel connecting gear and IDMS sweep wire on to sweep wire winch, stopping at each red-painted mark and attaching a 5/8-inch wedge stop. (Red-painted bands mark the cutter attachment point, Table 4B-4A.) Continue reeling until IDMS sweep wire is on sweep wire drum. NOTE Do not pass IDMS wire through instrumented sheaves. i. Using 7/8-inch shackle, attach diversion chain and cable grip to towing pad at base of instrumented sheave.

Table 4B-4A. IDMS Modified Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 Spacing

CUTTER DISTANCE FROM OUTBOARD END NUMBER OF SWEEP WIRE (FEET)

02 110 235 3 100 4 220 5 400 6 650 00 1001 1 Distance measured from inboard depressor on 5/8-inch sweep wire.

4B-4-1.3 Depressor Preparation. NOTE Both depressors must be adjusted to the same shear. a. Prepare depressor in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. b. Remove the two depressor span pendants from 4-way connector and 4-way connector from depressor bridle towing ring. Using a 1-inch shackle, attach one span pendant to the 4-inch ID ring on each depressor bridle (Figure 4B-4B). c. Attach jaw end of 1-inch eye-and-jaw swivel to bitter end of depressor span pendant. d. Secure depressor to stern rail with MacCluney hooks and mouse. The other depressor will be stowed in a convenient location and placed in the MacCluney hook when it becomes free.

4B-4-2 STREAMING.

4B-4-2.1 Preparation for Streaming. a. Lay out the Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 and the Elevating Fins Mk 12, and assemble in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4.

4B-4D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4B-4B. Depressor Rigging for IDMS Sweep Wire

4B-4E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. b. Check and arm Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 with Mk 192 Mod 0 Cartridge. c. Ensure sufficient heaving lines, bolos, and a line-throwing gun are available for line passing when required. Each ship will flake down a suitable 300-foot graduated messenger line on deck, free for running. d. Unreel 100 feet of the 5/8-inch IDMS sweep wire on GUIDE ship, lead wire out through outboard roller chock, and secure sweep wire eye outboard of rail toward CONSORT ship. e. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach a 5/8-inch swivel to eye of GUIDE’s IDMS sweep wire. f. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach 300-foot graduated messenger line to GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire (at the hardeye of IDMS sweep wire). Secure swivel to messenger line with small stuff (Figure 4B-4C). g. Ensure IDMS sweep wire and messenger line are clear of all obstructions. h. On board CONSORT ship, using 5/8-inch shackles, connect a 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel to outboard end of CONSORT’s IDMS sweep wire, and connect 16,000-pound shear coupling to free end of 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel. Position this connection between the instrumented sheave and sweep wire roller chock to facilitate hookup to GUIDE’s IDMS sweep wire (Figure 4B-4A). i. Ships employing SQQ-30 sonar are equipped with IDMS locator set. CONSORT ship can attach IDMS transmitter at the 5/8-inch shackle adjacent to the shear coupling. Using 1/2-inch shackle, attach a 5/16-inch x 5-foot float pendant to 5/8-inch shackle. Using 1/2-inch shackle, attach other end of 5/16-inch pendant to transmitter tow bail. j. Lay out Cutters Mk 15 on both ships for emergency release of sweep gear. k. Set minesweeping detail. Establish communications: bridge-to-bridge, bridge-to-fantail, and fantail-to-fantail.

4B-4-2.2 Streaming Maneuvers. NOTE When both ships are ready to stream gear, the GUIDE ship will set a base course and speed to provide a sufficient steerageway. The CONSORT ship will close on the GUIDE ship until they are at the same course and speed, and are abeam at the nearest safe spacing for existing sea conditions. Gear will be streamed at bare steerage way. a. When permission to pass a heaving line is granted by the GUIDE ship, a line should be passed from CONSORT ship to GUIDE ship by appropriate means. b. When the line is received, the GUIDE ship should secure this line to outboard end of 300-foot graduated messenger line and inform CONSORT ship to heave around.

4B-4F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4B-4C. Messenger Line with Small Stuff

4B-4G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

c. Before a strain is taken on the IDMS sweep wire, it should be free from the rail. GUIDE ship’s winch should be tended to ensure sufficient slack for CONSORT ship to haul GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire on deck, and to ensure sufficient slack to facilitate handling. d. CONSORT ship should bring messenger line in through appropriate sweep wire roller chock and lead it to the gypsy head.

4B-4-2.3 Wire Connection and Arming. NOTE When the GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire is brought aboard the CONSORT ship, ensure the CONSORT ship’s IDMS sweep wire is led out from the winch so it can be connected easily at a clear work space on deck. a. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, connect swivel on GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire into shear coupling (Figure 4B-4D). Unshackle 300-foot graduated messenger line and cut small stuff lashing swivel to line.

When the sweep wires of the two ships are connected together, the tension of the sweep wire between the two ships will create an extremely dangerous situation for all hands on both fantails. The GUIDE should monitor sweep wire tension continuously and keep a large catenary in the wire for safety purposes. Wire rope cutters should be readily available on both craft for cutting the sweep wire if such action appears necessary. b. CONSORT ship should heave in until wedge stop at 10-foot mark of GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. c. Install a Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 (in reverse position) just OUTBOARD of sweep wire roller chock. d. CONSORT ship begins to pay out the GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire until wedge stop at the GUIDE ship’s 2-foot mark is just inboard of sweep wire roller chock. e. Install 0 Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 (in reverse position) just OUTBOARD of sweep wire roller chock. NOTE The CONSORT ship will notify the GUIDE ship before starting the next step. f. CONSORT ship begins to pay out its own IDMS sweep wire until the 2-foot mark is just inboard of sweep wire roller chock. Install wedge stops if not previously accomplished. g. CONSORT ship pays out on its IDMS sweep wire until the 2-foot mark is just outboard the sweep wire roller chock. Install 0 cutter. h. Continue to pay out IDMS sweep wire slowly until the (second wedge stop) 10-foot mark is outboard of the sweep wire roller chock. Install number 1 cutter.

4B-4H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4B-4D. Improved Deep Moored Sweep (IDMS) Configuration

4B-4J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

i. The above procedure for installing cutters should be continued until IDMS sweep wire has been armed with cutters at the spacing indicated in Table 4B-4A and by the red-painted bands on the IDMS sweep wire. j. After CONSORT ship has installed its fifth cutter, notify the GUIDE ship. GUIDE ship shall recover its IDMS sweep wire to the third cutter position. While maintaining a reasonable catenary, attach and arm its remaining cutters in the same manner as described above.

4B-4-2.4 Launching the Depressors.

Use caution when paying out the depressor wire to ensure sufficient tension is retained in the sweep wire, preventing slack in depressor bridles and possible stalling and entanglement of the depressor. The sweep wire should be coordinated between the GUIDE and CONSORT to ensure that undue stresses are not placed on the sweep. No reference to actual scopes should be made over nonsecure circuits, but percent of the intended scope may be discussed to permit coordination between ships. NOTE Both ships should launch depressors together to keep sweep tension uniform. a. On signal from GUIDE ship, the CONSORT ship increases ship’s spacing to 200 yards when streaming the IDMS sweep wire. b. Ease out on sweep wire winch until outboard 3-inch ID ring is outboard of the sweep wire roller chock (Figure 4B-4E). c. Using a 1-inch shackle, connect outboard depressor span pendant into outboard 3-inch ID ring of the special 50-foot pendant and launch the OUTBOARD depressor. d. On signal from the GUIDE ship, ease out on sweep wire winch until the inboard 3-inch ID ring is outboard of sweep wire roller chock. Ensure outboard depressor is clear and riding properly. e. Place cable grip and diversion chain on ship’s sweep wire. f. Pay out sweep wire until cable grip takes a strain. g. Pass sweep wire into instrumented sheave. Ensure payout reading is zero. h. Using a 1-inch shackle, connect inboard depressor span pendant into the inboard 3-inch ID ring of the special pendant and launch inboard depressor. i. Heave in on sweep wire and remove cable grip. j. On signal from the GUIDE ship, ease out on sweep wire winch and ensure the inboard depressor is clear and riding properly. k. Pay out the sweep wire until the 00 wedge stop is outboard of sweep wire roller chock (100 feet from inboard depressor). Install 00 cutter. l. Disengage winch drum and prepare to veer sweep wire from the brake. m. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4B-4K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4B-4E. Depressor and Sweep Arrangement

4B-4L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4B-4-2.5 Completing the Sweep Streaming.

Use caution when veering the 5/8-inch x 50-foot depressor pendant to ensure sufficient tension is retained in the sweep wire, preventing slack in the depressor bridles and possible stalling and entanglement of the depressor. Sweep wire veering should be coordinated between GUIDE and CONSORT to ensure undue stresses are not placed on the sweep. No reference to actual scopes should be made over nonsecure circuits, but percent of the intended scope may be discussed to permit coordination between ships. a. Continue to veer sweep wire until sweep wire instrumented fairlead sheave display indicates proper scope for desired sweep depth, as indicated in tactical instructions NWP 35 (Series).

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. b. Engage pawls.

4B-4-2.6 Securing Sweep Wire. a. Secure sweep wire drum. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4B-4F) back-to-back on sweep wire. Install Cutter Mk 15 on sweep wire.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. d. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. e. Arm sweep wire cutter. f. Notify bridge that gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.

4B-4M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4B-4F. Wedge Stop Placement

4B-4N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

g. GUIDE ship will notify CONSORT ship, and both ships will increase headway simultaneously to desired sweep speed and ship spacing. h. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4B-4D).

4B-4-3 IDMS OPERATION. NOTE The IDMS will normally be operated with the ships on a steady course and speed, as determined by the operational situation. Performance of the gear will be monitored in accordance with NWP 35 (Series).

4B-4-3.1 Turning Procedures. a. GUIDE ship will be shifted to the inboard MCM in the turn. b. Each turn will be carried out in steps of 20 degrees or less. c. Ship spacing in turns should be 300 yards. d. Where sufficient depth will prevent bottoming of the gear, GUIDE ship should slow to approximately 3 knots and CONSORT ship should maintain a speed of 5 to 6 knots. e. Where bottoming of the gear is possible, the GUIDE ship should maintain a speed of at least 4 knots and CONSORT ship should perform turns at 6 knots, provided her sweep wire tensions do not exceed 14,000 pounds. NOTE To reverse course with the deep sweep and to travel over a path very near that already traveled, a pseudo-Williamson turn may be carried out by turning approximately 60 degrees in one direction and then reversing direction by a 240 degrees turn the opposite way. This turn will usually return to a datum point within 10 degrees of a reciprocal heading. f. The start of each turn increment will be signaled by GUIDE ship, with execution of flag Romeo. g. When GUIDE ship is steady on course after a turn segment, it should close up flag Romeo. h. When CONSORT has completed its turn segment and is again in the appropriate station abeam of the GUIDE, it will close up flag Romeo. The GUIDE ship will then signal next 20 degrees turn segment by executing flag Romeo. i. During night operations, turns are performed in a similar fashion utilizing flashing light signals.

4B-4-4 RECOVERY. NOTE Recovery is the reverse of streaming.

4B-4-4.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail and re-establish bridge-to-bridge, bridge-to-fantail, and fantail-to- fantail communications. b. GUIDE ship will notify the CONSORT ship, and both ships will slow to recovery speed (3 to 4 knots) and decrease ship spacing to approximately 300 yards for recovery. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4B-4P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4B-4-4.2 Depressor Recovery.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutters. b. Reman fantail. c. Upon word to commence recovery of the sweep, both ships should engage their sweep wire drums and release their towing pawls. d. Heave around on sweep drum while closely monitoring instrumented fairlead sheave readings and sweep wire coming on board. NOTE Maintain a close watch over the stern to prevent bringing fouled gear, depressor, or other rigging into sweep wire roller chock. GUIDE and CONSORT ships should recover gear at approximately the same rate. e. When inboard 00 cutter is nearing the surface and at the direction of GUIDE ship, CONSORT ship should close the range to GUIDE ship to approximately 100 yards. f. Both ships should continue to recover gear, removing the 00 cutter. Replace safety pin in 00 cutters, then remove cutters and place on deck. g. Place cable grip and diversion chain on ship's sweep wire. h. Pay out sweep wire until cable grip takes a strain. i. Remove sweep wire from instrumented sheave. j. Heave in on sweep wire and remove cable grip. k. Heave in on sweep wire until wedge stop is on board and remove wedge stop. l. Heave in on sweep wire until the inboard 3-inch ID ring is within reach. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail of depressor. Detach inboard depressor span pendant from sweep wire. Recover the depressor and place in stowage rack using the articulated crane. m. Heave in on sweep wire until the outboard 3-inch ID ring is within reach. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail of depressor and detach outboard depressor span pendant from the sweep wire. Recover the depressor using the articulated crane. NOTE Depressors may be secured at the stern rail, in the ready release position, if restreaming of the sweep is anticipated; otherwise, they will be secured in their stowage racks on the fantail. n. When GUIDE ship has taken in its outboard depressor, it should set sweep wire drum brake and await CONSORT ship’s IDMS sweep wire recovery. CONSORT ship should continue to recover its IDMS sweep wire until number 6 cutter is just outboard of the sweep wire roller chock.

4B-4Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4B-4-4.3 Cutter Recovery.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. In case of a DUD cutter, proceed to DUD cutter instructions in Job Sheet 4A-4 immediately. a. As soon as cutters come into reach, replace the safety pins; then depress the handle opening the spring loaded arms. Remove Cutter Mk 12 Mod 2 assembly from IDMS sweep wire and put in a safe place on deck. b. Heave in on IDMS sweep wire until wedge stop is on board and remove wedge stop. c. Continue heaving in on IDMS sweep wire, removing Cutters Mk 12 Mod 2 and wedge stops, until all are recovered and shear coupling is brought aboard. The CONSORT ship will then remove the first two cutters on GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire. d. The GUIDE ship should be informed when shear coupling is brought on board and removed, the 300-foot graduated messenger line attached, and GUIDE ship’s IDMS sweep wire veered clear of all obstructions. e. Both ships should then open to desired spacing while the GUIDE ship continues to recover the IDMS sweep wire, removing cutters and wedge stops until all gear is on board. f. Recover remaining gear. g. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4B-4-4.4 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. When all cutters are recovered, they should be disarmed and disassembled. All components should be thoroughly washed in fresh water, dried, and lubricated in accordance with Preventive Maintenance System (PMS). All gear should be stowed or secured.

4B-4R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4C-1 A MK 2(G) ACOUSTIC SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, 4A-4) (1075-00-265-0677) hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 20-foot, single leg, NM, (1075-00-332-5834) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Depressor, 5(g) auxiliary, NM (1075-00-360-1147) (as Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 3/8-inch required) (4030-00-270-5480) (8) Device, acoustic, A Mk 2(g) (1075-00-224-8945) (as Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 1/2-inch required) (4030-00-270-5482) (3) Flag, red and black, 33- x 33-inch Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, (8345-00-233-4112) (as required) single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard Flagstaff, 5-foot, ash wood (8345-00-179-0114) (as end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) required) Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, Float, type O, size 1, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard (1075-01-371-0568) end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008) Float, type O, size 5, NM (as required) Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767) (1075-00-254-9010) Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 5/8-inch (4030-00-269-9768) Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye (2) 2 (4030-00-290-6420) Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) required) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) SUPPORT ITEMS Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Pendant, lower bridle leg, 1/4-inch x 3-1/2-foot, single Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) leg, NM, wire rope, hardeye each end 1 Hook, boat 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Pendant, towing, lower, 1/4-inch x 12-foot, single leg, Hook, boat 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) NM, wire rope, hardeye each end 1; Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Pendant, towing, upper, 1/4-inch x 10-foot, single leg, Pendant, depressor, 1/4-inch x 1-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope, hardeye each end 1 wire rope, hardeye each end 1 Pendant, upper bridle leg, 1/4-inch x 2-1/2-foot, single Pendant, float, 1/4-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, leg, NM, wire rope, hardeye each end 1 wire rope, hardeye each end 1 Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040. 2 Two additional units are required when the depressor is used.

4C-1A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4C-1-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE Materials are for one set of Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g). Refer to the sweep order for number of sets required. Additional Cutters Mk 9, Cutter Mk 15, size 1 float, and kite will not be required.

4C-1-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4C-1-1.2 Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) Preparation. a. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach upper bridle leg to upper towing eye on Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) (Figure 4C-1A). b. Attach a 1/2-inch shackle to lower towing eye of device. c. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach lower bridle leg to 1/2-inch shackle at lower towing eye. d. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, connect free ends of upper and lower bridle legs of Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) to one end of lower towing pendant.

4C-1-1.3 Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) Depressor Preparation (Optional). a. The use of Size 5(g) auxiliary depressor for Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) is optional. b. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach a depressor pendant to 1/2-inch shackle at lower towing eye of device. c. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach free end of depressor pendant to 3/8-inch swivel of auxiliary depressor. d. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach the 3/8-inch swivel on depressor pendant to auxiliary depressor.

4C-1-1.4 Size 5 Float Preparation. a. Using a 1/2-inch shackle, attach a 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel to bail of a size 5 float (Figure 4C-1B). b. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach float pendant to lower link of the 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel. c. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach upper towing pendant to upper link of 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel on float bail.

4C-1B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4C-1A. Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) Rigged with an Auxiliary Depressor

4C-1C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4C-1B. Size 5 Float Preparation

4C-1D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, connect a 5/8-inch link-to-link swivel to free end of upper towing pendant. e. Rig and install float flag and flagstaff.

4C-1-1.5 Size 1 Float and Kite Preparation. a. Prepare size 1 float (moored configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1.

4C-1-1.6 Preparation of O-Type Components. a. Prepare sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2. b. Lead sweep wire from drum, through instrumented fairlead sheave and over sweep wire roller chock to otter. c. Attach an End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between otter bridle and sweep wire (Figure 4C-1C). d. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, connect float pendant to upper end of otter beam. NOTE Float pendant length is dependent on water depth, but cannot exceed 20 feet.

4C-1-1.7 Transfer Otter To Ready Release Position. a. Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on the otter. b. Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4C-1D). c. Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. d. Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. e. Rotate crane forward. f. Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge. Disengage sweep wire drum(s).

4C-1-2 STREAMING. NOTE Although Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) sweep may be streamed to either side, it is normally streamed to starboard.

4C-1-2.1 Streaming Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communication. b. Slow to streaming speed (4 knots). Increase speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable to reduce rolling.

4C-1-2.2 Launching the Float. a. Request permission to put gear to the rail. b. Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4C-1E).

4C-1E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION Figure 4C-1C. Connecting Sweep Wire and Cutter Mk 9 to Otter (Starboard Configuration)

4C-1F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4C-1D. Otter in Ready Release Position

c. Lead float nose line outboard to side that float is to be used, then lead line in through chock. d. Tend line to bitt. e. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. f. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. g. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of ship and obstructions. h. Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter.

4C-1G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4C-1E. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4C-1H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

i. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. j. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4C-1D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4C-1-2.3 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power to position for attaching first acoustic device, and check for proper diversion.

4C-1-2.4 Attachment of Acoustic Device and Size 5 Float to Sweep Wire. NOTE Positions on the sweep wire for attachment of Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) and float are directed by sweep order. a. Attach two wedge stops, nose-to-nose, about 1-foot apart on sweep wire at acoustic device attachment point (Figure 4C-1F). b. Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake, maintain slight tension of at least 500 lb. c. Continue to veer sweep wire until wedge stops are just outside sweep wire roller chock. d. Place Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) and its size 5 float forward of roller chock assembly. e. Using both articulated stern cranes, simultaneously lift and train acoustic device and size 5 float outboard of all obstructions.

Ensure all connections in the following steps are outboard and clear of all obstructions. f. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, connect free end of float pendant to lifting pad on top of acoustic device (Figure 4C-1F). g. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, connect free end of lower towing pendant to link of 5/8-inch swivel to which free end of upper towing pendant is connected (Figure 4C-1D). h. Using a 1/2-inch shackle with pin side toward swivel, attach free end of 5/8-inch swivel, connected to upper and lower towing pendants, to sweep wire between two wedge stops.

4C-1-2.5 Launching the Acoustic Device and Size 5 Float. a. Lower acoustic device and size 5 float into water and release. b. Veer sweep wire to next device attachment position as directed by sweep order. Repeat paragraphs 4C-1-2.4 and 4C-1-2.5 for each Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) and float used. c. After all launches are complete, return and restow articulated stern crane.

4C-1J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4C-1F. Attaching Acoustic Device A Mk 2(g) Gear to Sweep Wire

4C-1K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4C-1-2.6 Securing the Sweep Wire.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Veer sweep wire to full scope. Secure sweep wire winch and set pawl. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4C-1G) back-to-back on sweep wire to allow attachment of Cutter Mk 15. d. Attach Cutter Mk 15 to sweep wire between instrumented fairlead sheave and stern roller chock.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutter Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutter. f. Arm sweep wire cutter. g. Notify bridge that gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. h. Increase headway to sweep speed. i. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheave. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4C-1H).

4C-1-3 RECOVERY.

4C-1-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communication. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4C-1L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4C-1G. Wedge Stop Placement

4C-1M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4C-1H. A Mk 2(g) Acoustic Sweep Configuration

4C-1N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. d. Cutter Mk 15 personnel disarm and remove Cutter Mk 15. e. Reman fantail. f. Request permission to recover gear. g. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. h. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to the whip.

4C-1-3.2 Acoustic Device and Size 5 Float Recovery. a. Engage sweep wire drum, remove towing pawl. b. Heave in on sweep wire. Continue heaving in on sweep wire until acoustic device is directly astern and device attachment point and wedge stops are at sweep wire roller chock. c. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. Recover float and acoustic device. d. Disconnect float pendant from lifting pad of acoustic device. e. Disconnect upper and lower towing pendants from sweep wire. Remove wedge stops. f. Repeat until all acoustic devices and floats are recovered.

4C-1-3.3 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Continue heaving in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep roller chock. b. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4C-1-3.4 Size 1 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane and heave in until float is in lifting position under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float.

4C-1-3.5 Otter Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4C-1D) or on stowage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead.

4C-1P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

e. Secure sweep wire winch. f. Return and restow articulated stern crane. g. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4C-1-3.6 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage and conduct PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.

4C-1Q/(4C-1R blank)

OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4C-2 ACOUSTIC DEVICE TB-26 SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Cable, acoustic power (APC) (per Job Sheet 4A-5) Pendant, float (acoustic) 1/2-inch x length as required, (1075-00-782-9881) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each Device, acoustic, TB-26, NM (1075-01-368-2482) end) 1 Float, type O, size 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3) Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, (1075-01-357-9948) NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057) Line, nose, float (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot, Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 3/4-inch single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 (4030-00-270-5484) (5) Line, tail, float, 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot, single leg, nylon, Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch (hardeye splice one end, other end whipped) 1 (4030-00-270-5483) (12) Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Megohmmeter 500 Vdc Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Electrician Mate Tool Kit Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Gauge, pressure (0 to 30 psi) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490) 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4C-2-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4C-2A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4C-2-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4C-2-1.2 Size 0 Float Preparation. a. Ensure size 0 float (acoustic configuration) is prepared in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3.

4C-2-1.3 APC Preparation. a. Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.

4C-2-1.4 Acoustic Device TB-26 Preparation. a. Deck test acoustic device 24 hours prior to streaming in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040. Upon completion of test, pressurize device to 10 psi for 24 hours to ensure device is air tight. If more than a 1 psi loss of pressure is observed (indicated by soapy-water bubbles), release all air pressure and take corrective action. A 20 °F drop in temperature will have a 1 psi drop in pressure. If no loss of pressure is observed and device is to be launched soon thereafter, retain air pressure in housing until final pressurizing is accomplished; otherwise, release all pressure. b. Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, shackle 3-inch ID ring to aft hole in acoustic device towing and hoisting plate using Table 4C-2A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4C-2A). d. Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard, clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device TB-26. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease. e. Using 3/4-inch shackle, connect one end of device towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing pad (Figure 4C-2A). Wrap 3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.

Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant. f. Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with a 3/4-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure 4C-2A). g. Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4C-2B shows acoustic device in a cradled position. h. Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum. i. Using 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 0 float. j. Upon successful completion of air leak test, pressurize device to operating depth (Table 4C-2A).

4C-2B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4C-2A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure

DEPTH TO CENTER OF PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0 AIR DIAPHRAGM (FEET) FLOAT (FEET) PRESSURES (PSI)1

20 13 8.0 22 15 8.5 24 17 9.3 25 18 10.1 26 19 10.5 27 20 10.8 28 21 11.2 29 22 11.5 30 23 11.8 1 These air pressures for the TB-26 rising when streamed through the water.

Figure 4C-2A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing

4C-2C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4C-2B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled

4C-2-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING.

4C-2-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Check air pressure in device for appropriate depth (Table 4C-2A). c. Slow to streaming speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. d. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. e. Request permission to stream gear.

4C-2D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4C-2-2.2 Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-26. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. a. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. b. Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from nose line. c. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4C-2C, View A). d. Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 into water. Slack nose line enough to permit float to ride astern. e. Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-26 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect inhaul pendant. f. Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing stocking. g. Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4C-2C, View B). h. Bring nose line through roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through the free eye of the towing stocking. i. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4C-2-2.3 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Pay out the APC so that the inboard towing stocking on the APC is just forward of roller chock assembly. b. Remove canvas chafing gear from towing stocking. c. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye. Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4C-2D).

4C-2E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4C-2C. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26

4C-2F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4C-2D. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (Acoustic Sweep, TB-26 Astern)

4C-2G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

d. Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a tripping lanyard. e. Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.

4C-2-2.4 Entering Drum Area.

Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When the APC is connected, drum area crew shall enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-86-1. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. a. Minesweep electrician request permission to enter the drum area with drum area crew. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from the fantail. c. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away. d. Sweep configuration is shown in Figure 4C-2E.

4C-2-2.5 Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS. The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-86-1.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable with an approved 500 Vdc megohmmeter.

4C-2H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4C-2E. Acoustic Sweep Configuration TB-26 Astern

4C-2J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as the circuit to be tested. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle. d. Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working properly. e. Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel. f. Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable g. After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area. h. Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle. i. In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench.

4C-2-2.6 Departing the Drum Area. a. Clear danger tags from PCU b. Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU. c. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS SECURE, PCU IS ENERGIZED AND CONTROL TRANSFERRED TO THE ACU, then departs drum area.

4C-2-2.7 Towing the Sweep. a. Increase headway to sweep speed. b. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4C-2E). c. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.

4C-2-2.8 Maneuvering Instructions. a. There are no inherent problems in maneuvering with straight acoustic sweeps (Figure 4C-2E).

4C-2-3 RECOVERY.

Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.

4C-2-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4C-2K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4C-2-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. a. Ensure HPU has been secured. b. Transfer control from ACU to PCU, ensure that the ACU is secured and the PCU tagged out. c. Minesweep electrician reports to Safety Observer PCU IS SECURED. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-86-1. e. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-86-1. f. Reman fantail.

4C-2-3.3 Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable. b. In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle. c. Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug. d. Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the APC cable reel. e. Minesweep electrician reports to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED, CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area.

4C-2-3.4 Recovery of TB-26 and Float. a. Request permission to recover gear. b. Energize the hydraulic power unit.

4C-2L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

c. Heave in on APC to remove strain from towing pendant. Trip pelican hook. Chafe towing stocking. d. Heave in on APC until towing stocking at 50-foot mark is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.

Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant. e. Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take slack out of nose line until it takes strain. f. Train articulated stern crane outboard with stern crane head inboard. Detach inhaul pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip. g. Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection keeping slack out of nose line. h. Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-26 is suspended by crane and float is properly cradled.

Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from water. Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be recovered on deck. i. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously, and train gear inboard and forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary. j. Stow acoustic device and float on deck. k. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4C-2-3.5 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.

4C-2M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4C-3 TB-27 ACOUSTIC SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job Pendant, float (acoustic) 1/2-inch x length as required, Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each Device, acoustic, TB-27, NM (1075-01-368-2483) end) 1 Float, type O, size 1, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3) Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, (1075-01-371-0568) NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) Ring, 3-inch, NM (5365-01-346-8057) Line, nose, float (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot, Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 5/8-inch single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 (4030-00-270-5483) (18) Line, tail, float, 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot, single leg, nylon (hardeye splice one end, other end whipped) 1 Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Electrician Mate Tool Kit Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4C-3-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4C-3A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4C-3-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4C-3-1.2 Size 1 Float Preparation. a. Prepare size 1 float (acoustic) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3.

4C-3-1.3 APC Preparation. a. Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.

4C-3-1.4 Acoustic Device TB-27 Preparation. a. Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5. b. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-inch ID ring to second and fourth after holes on acoustic device towing and hoisting plate. Use Table 4C-3A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4C-3A). c. Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard, clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device TB-27. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease. d. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-foot towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot mark in APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing/hoisting plate. Wrap 3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear (Figure 4C-3A).

Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant. e. Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with a 5/8-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure 4C-3A). f. Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4C-3B shows acoustic device in a cradled position. g. Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum. h. Using 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 1 float. i. Deck test acoustic device per Planned Maintenance System.

4C-3-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING.

4C-3-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required.

4C-3B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 4C-3A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation

DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH (FEET) (FEET)

20 13 22 15 24 17 25 18 26 19 27 20 28 21 29 22 30 23

Figure 4C-3A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing

4C-3C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4C-3B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled

c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. d. Request permission to stream gear.

4C-3-2.2 Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-27. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. a. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to float flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. b. Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from nose line. c. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4C-3C, View A).

4C-3D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4C-3C. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27

4C-3E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

d. Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 into water. Slack nose line enough to permit float to ride astern. e. Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-27 until it is supported by the float. Move crane head until inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect the inhaul pendant. f. Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing stocking. g. Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4C-3C, View B). h. Bring nose line through roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at the 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking. i. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4C-3-2.3 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Pay out the APC so that the inboard towing stocking on the APC is just forward of roller chock assembly. b. Remove canvas chafing gear from towing stocking. c. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye. Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4C-3D). d. Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a tripping lanyard. e. Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.

4C-3F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4C-3D. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (Acoustic Sweep, TB-27 Astern)

4C-3G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4C-3-2.4 Entering Drum Area.

Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. When the APC is connected, drum area crew shall enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-86-1. Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. a. Minesweep electrician request permission to enter the drum area with drum area crew. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail. c. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away. d. Sweep configuration is shown in Figure 4C-3E.

4C-3-2.5 Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS. The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-86-1.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. NOTE Measure insulation resistance of APC prior to making connection to power outlet while the device is riding on towing pendant, in accordance with PMS. a. Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable with an approved 500 Vdc megohmmeter. b. Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as the circuit to be tested. 4C-3H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4C-3E. Acoustic Sweep Configuration TB-27 Astern

4C-3J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle. d. Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working properly. e. Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel. f. Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable. g. After the magnetic and APC connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum are. h. Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle. i. In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench.

4C-3-2.6 Departing the Drum Area. a. Clear danger tags from PCU b. Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU. c. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS SECURE, PCU IS ENERGIZED AND CONTROL TRANSFERRED TO THE ACU, then departs drum area.

4C-3-2.7 Towing the Sweep. a. Increase headway to sweep speed. b. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4C-3E). c. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck.

4C-3-2.8 Maneuvering Instructions. a. There are no inherent problems in maneuvering with straight acoustic sweeps (Figure 4C-3E).

4C-3-3 RECOVERY.

Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area.

4C-3-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable to reduce rolling.

4C-3K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4C-3-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. a. Ensure HPU has been secured. b. Transfer control from ACU to PCU, ensure that the ACU is secured and the PCU tagged out. c. Minesweep electrician reports to Safety Observer PCU IS SECURED. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-86-1. e. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-86-1. f. Reman fantail.

4C-3-3.3 Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable. b. In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle. c. Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug. d. Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the APC cable reel. e. Minesweep electrician reports to Safety Observer APC IS DISCONNECTED, CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area.

4C-3-3.4 Recovery of TB-27 and Float. a. Request permission to recover gear. b. Energize the hydraulic power unit.

4C-3L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

c. Heave in on APC to remove strain from towing pendant. Trip pelican hook. Chafe towing stocking. d. Heave in on APC until towing stocking at 50-foot mark is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.

Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant. e. Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take slack out of nose line until it takes strain. f. Train articulated stern crane outboard with stern crane head inboard. Detach inhaul pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip. g. Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out of nose line. h. Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-27 is suspended by crane and float is properly cradled.

Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from water. Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be recovered on deck. i. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously, and train gear inboard and forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary. j. Stow acoustic device and float on deck. k. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4C-3-3.5 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.

4C-3M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4D-1 M MK 5(A) MAGNETIC SWEEP (STRAIGHT TAIL)

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, snatch, 6-inch, (type D), NM Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12) (3940-00-368-7551) (4) Light, marker, distress (6230-00-067-5209) (2) Block, snatch, 8-inch, (type E), NM Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x (3940-00-368-7552) 5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1 Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) Line, towing, position buoy, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot, Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) single leg, nylon (hardeye splice one end, other Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) end whipped) 1 (4) Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (4) Buoy, position, NM, with flagstaff (2050-00-272-2423) Pendant, position buoy, chafing, 5/16-inch x 5-foot, Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one (1075-00-262-1980) (2) end, other end whipped) 1 Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, S Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) (2) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch (hardeye each end) 1 (4730-00-204-3491) (2) Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) (5305-00-226-9204) (4) Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, (2) 1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) (2) Clip, wire rope, 5/16-inch, NM (4030-00-269-9761) (2) 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (15) Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184) (1075-00-332-5834) Swivel, link-to-link, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767) Flag, position buoy, red and black, 18- x 18-inch Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) (8345-00-233-4111) (8) See footnotes at end of table.

4D-1A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Electrician Mate Tool Kit Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb Hook, boat, 12-foot (2400-00-268-9252) Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) (whipped each end) 1 * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4D-1-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4D-1-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4D-1-1.2 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4D-1A). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4D-1-1.3 Position Buoy Preparation. a. Insert flagstaff with a red and black horizontally striped flag attached into socket on position buoy attached to long leg. Attach distress marker light (Figure 4D-1B). b. Pass wire chafing pendant through tow hole in buoy. Secure pendant to position buoy with a 5/16-inch wire rope clip. c. Attach 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel to free end of pendant, using a 1/2-inch shackle. d. Connect hardeye of towing line to free end of 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel, using a 1/2-inch shackle. e. Lead towing line outboard over taffrail and back aboard through cable roller chock assembly.

4D-1B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-1A. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

4D-1-1.4 Electrode Floats. a. Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.

4D-1-1.5 K-4 Electrode Preparation.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas chafing sleeve. a. Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.

4D-1C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-1B. Rigging Position Buoy

4D-1-1.6 Long Leg Preparation. a. Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable. b. Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows: (1) Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection. (2) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (3) Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (4) Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4D-1D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

c. Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on, and position for streaming. d. Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4D-1-2 STREAMING.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

4D-1-2.1 Streaming Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to streaming speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. d. Request permission to stream gear.

4D-1-2.2 Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode. a. Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum and out through the level wind assembly, then out cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Pay out to 50 feet.

4D-1-2.3 Attachment of Buoy and Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4D-1C), then attach towing line of position buoy inboard of first float. b. Turn distress marker lights on. c. Pay out electrode and launch position buoy. d. Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart (Figure 4D-1D). e. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.

4D-1E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-1C. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode

4D-1-2.4 S/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out long leg electrode until S/K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure S/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4D-1-2.5 Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Continue streaming S-Cable, inspect for insulation breaks. Inspect sleeves for watertight integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required. b. Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of cable roller chock assembly. c. Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail. d. Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail. e. Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4D-1E). Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over small end of sleeve. (4) Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way.

4D-1F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4D-1D. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode

4D-1G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-1E. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection

(5) Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.

4D-1H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

f. Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail. g. Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and positioned for streaming. h. Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4D-1-2.6 Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. b. Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.

4D-1-2.7 Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4D-1C). b. Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart. c. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4D-1D).

4D-1-2.8 K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.

4D-1-2.9 Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Continue paying out coax cable. b. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4D-1-2.10 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.

4D-1J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4D-1A). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4D-1-2.11 Stopping Off the Sweep. a. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. b. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to towing pendant of equalizing towing bridle midway between 8-inch, Type E snatch block and roller chock assembly. c. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. d. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. e. Arm Cutters Mk 15. f. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4D-1K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-1-2.12 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or while cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. g. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and makes repairs as required. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation. l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box.

4D-1L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

n. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. o. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. p. Lower the terminal box cover. q. After connections have been made on the magnetic minesweep cable, ensure the port and starboard sides of the drum area are secured with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs creating an entrance barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4D-1-2.13 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.

4D-1-2.14 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4D-1F).

4D-1-2.15 Maneuvering Instructions. a. There are no inherent problems in maneuvering with straight tail sweeps.

4D-1-3 RECOVERY.

4D-1-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4D-1-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.

4D-1M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-1F. M Mk 5(a) Sweep Configuration

4D-1N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4D-1-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg). d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns.

The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. NOTE Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.

4D-1P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. k. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. l. Drum area crew departs drum area. m. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. n. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4D-1-3.4 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4D-1-3.5 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach.

4D-1Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4D-1-3.6 Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal. a. Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats. b. Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. c. Remove CK/P insulating sleeve. d. Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. e. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank pigtail. (4) Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-1G).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Continue heaving in on S section.

4D-1-3.7 Long Leg Electrode Recovery. NOTE Floats may be left on the long leg electrode if desired. a. Heave in on long leg electrode and remove position buoy. b. Secure hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling all of K-4 electrode onto magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg to drum with this line. c. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4D-1-3.8 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.

4D-1R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-1G. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

c. Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-1H).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. d. Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.

4D-1S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-1H. S-Cable Booted

4D-1T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4D-2 M MK 5(A) MAGNETIC SWEEP (CONFIGURATION C)

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM Flag, position buoy, red and black, 18- x 18-inch (3940-00-368-7551) (4) (8345-00-233-4111) Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12) (3940-00-368-7552) Light, marker, distress (6230-00-067-5209) (2) Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (3) 5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1 Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) Line, towing, position buoy, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot, (4) single leg, nylon (hardeye splice one end, other Buoy, position, NM, with flagstaff (2050-00-272-2423) end whipped) 1 Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6) Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (8) (1075-00-262-1980) (2) Pendant, position buoy, chafing, 5/16-inch x 5-foot, Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) end, other end whipped) 1 Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, S Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) (2) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as CL (per Job Sheet 4A-4) (6150-01-517-9327) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) Cable Assembly, outboard pigtail (6150-01-519-0147) (hardeye each end) 1 Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch Pendant, preventer (CL), 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single leg, (4730-00-204-3491) (2) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) Pendant, preventer (CL), 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single (2) leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) Pendant Stopper (CL), 1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot single (8) leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Clip, wire rope, 5/16-inch, NM (4030-00-269-9761) (2) Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) (5305-00-226-9204) (2) (1075-00-332-5834) See footnotes at end of table.

4D-2A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184) (5305-00-226-9206) (6) Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, Swivel, link-to-link, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767) 1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) (2) Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (15) (16) SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) Boatswain Mate Tool Kit (whipped each end) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Electrician Mate Tool Kit Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2400-00-268-9252) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4D-2-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE The CL section is added to the S section for this sweep configuration.

4D-2-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4D-2-1.2 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4D-2A). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4D-2-1.3 Position Buoy Preparation. a. Insert flagstaff with a red and black horizontally striped flag attached into socket on position buoy attached to long leg. Attach distress marker light (Figure 4D-2B).

4D-2B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-2A. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

b. Pass wire chafing pendant through tow hole in buoy. Secure pendant to position buoy with a 5/16-inch wire rope clip. c. Attach 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel to free end of pendant, using a 1/2-inch shackle. d. Connect hardeye of towing line to free end of 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel, using a 1/2-inch shackle. e. Lead towing line outboard over taffrail and back aboard through cable roller chock assembly.

4D-2-1.4 Electrode Floats. a. Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.

4D-2C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-2B. Rigging Position Buoy

4D-2-1.5 K-4 Electrode Preparation.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas chafing sleeve. a. Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.

4D-2-1.6 CL-Cable Preparation for M Mk 5(a) (C Configuration). a. Lead a K-4 Electrode to the outboard end of the CL-Cable. b. Insulate CL/K-4 connection and fitting as follows: (1) Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the CL-Cable connection. (2) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.

4D-2D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(3) Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard CL-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (4) Wrap CL/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on, and position for streaming. d. Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4D-2-1.7 Magnetic Cable Preparation for C Configuration - Attachment of Outboard Pigtail to S-Cable. a. Lead S-Cable end aft on fantail and position by depressor instrumented sheave. b. Attach outboard pigtail to S-Cable. Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing S/P insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4D-2C): (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of outboard pigtail cable and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over S-Cable; slide clamps out of way. (4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve (small end first) over outboard pigtail and slide back out of way.

Figure 4D-2C. Outboard Pigtail to CA-1454

4D-2E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

(5) Connect terminals of S and outboard pigtail cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over ends of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing several inches past the clamps on each side.

4D-2-2 STREAMING.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

4D-2-2.1 Streaming Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to streaming speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. d. Request permission to stream gear.

4D-2-2.2 Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode. a. Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum CL side and out through the stationary cable fairlead assembly, then out cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Pay out to 50 feet.

4D-2F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-2-2.3 Attachment of Buoy and Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4D-2D), then attach towing line of position buoy inboard of first float. b. Turn distress marker lights on. c. Pay out electrode and launch position buoy. d. Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart (Figure 4D-2E). e. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.

Figure 4D-2D. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode

4D-2-2.4 Stopping Off CL-Cable. a. Pay out CL-Cable until CL preventer pendant is on deck. b. Stop paying out CL-Cable. Attach a 3- to 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant to preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4D-2F) with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. c. Pay out CL-Cable until wire rope stopper pendant takes strain. d. Disconnect CL drum preventer pendant from CL-Cable (Figure 4D-2G).

4D-2-2.5 Attachment of S-Cable to CL-Cable. a. Pay out on magnetic cable, leading S-Cable and outboard pigtail to the free end of the CL-Cable. b. Attach CL-Cable to S section outboard pigtail. Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing an S/P insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4D-2C): (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity.

4D-2G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION Figure 4D-2E. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode

4D-2H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-2F. Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable

Figure 4D-2G. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant

4D-2J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

(3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over free end of outboard pigtail cable and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over CL-Cable; slide clamps out of way. (4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve (small end first) over outboard pigtail and slide back out of way. (5) Connect terminals of CL and outboard pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. c. Heave in on magnetic cable and disconnect wire rope stopper pendant from 6-foot preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4D-2F). Secure hardeye to CL with tape. d. Continue streaming magnetic minesweeping cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank is on deck.

4D-2-2.6 Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.

To avoid damage to equipment, pay close attention when passing cable through level wind. a. Continue streaming S-Cable, inspect for insulation breaks, inspect sleeves for watertight integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required. b. Continued streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of cable roller chock assembly. c. Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail. d. Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail.

4D-2K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

e. Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4D-2H). Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over small end of sleeve. (4) Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way. (5) Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Figure 4D-2H. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection

4D-2L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail. g. Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on, and positioned for streaming. h. Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4D-2-2.7 Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. b. Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.

4D-2-2.8 Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4D-2D). b. Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart. c. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4D-2E).

4D-2-2.9 K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting are wrapped with two layers rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Ensure ten turns of 21-thread are secured around K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.

4D-2M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-2-2.10 Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage to equipment, pay close attention when passing cable through level wind. a. Continue paying out coax cable. b. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4D-2-2.11 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4D-2A). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4D-2-2.12 Stopping Off the Sweep. a. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

4D-2N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. b. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to towing pendant of equalizing towing bridle midway between 8-inch, Type E snatch block and roller chock assembly. c. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. d. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. e. Arm Cutters Mk 15. f. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4D-2P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-2-2.13 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or while cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. g. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation. l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box.

4D-2Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

n. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. o. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. p. Lower the terminal box cover. q. After connections have been made on the magnetic minesweep cable, ensure the port and starboard sides of the drum area are secured with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs creating an entrance barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4D-2-2.14 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.

4D-2-2.15 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4D-2J).

4D-2-2.16 Maneuvering Instructions. a. There are no inherent problems in maneuvering with straight tail sweeps.

4D-2-3 RECOVERY.

4D-2-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4D-2-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured.

4D-2R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-2J. M Mk 5(a) Sweep (Configuration C)

4D-2S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4D-2-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg). d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns.

The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. NOTE Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box.

4D-2T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. k. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. l. Drum area crew departs drum area. m. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. n. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4D-2-3.4 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4D-2-3.5 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4D-2U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4D-2-3.6 Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal.

To avoid damage to equipment, pay close attention when passing cable through level wind. a. Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats. b. Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. c. Remove CK/P insulating sleeve. d. Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. e. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot (Figure 4D-2K). (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug.

Figure 4D-2K. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

4D-2V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(4) Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Continue heaving in on S section. NOTE If another M Mk 5(a) configuration C sweep streaming is anticipated, proceed with paragraph 4D-2-3.7 and then paragraph 4D-2-3.9; if not, proceed with paragraphs 4D-2-3.8 through 4D-2-3.9.

4D-2-3.7 Long Leg Electrode Recovery. NOTE Floats may be left on the long leg electrode if desired. a. Heave in on long leg electrode and remove position buoy. b. Secure a hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode. c. Keep a strain on hold-back line as long leg electrode is being reeled onto drum. d. Secure long leg electrode to drum with hold-back line. e. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4D-2-3.8 Disconnecting CL-Cable from S-Cable. a. Heave in on magnetic cable until CL to S-Cable pigtail connection is just aft of magnetic cable drum. b. Stop off CL-Cable by attaching 1/2-inch x 5-foot stopper pendant to 6-foot preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. c. Pay out magnetic cable until the stopper pendant takes a strain. d. Remove inboard pigtail from CL-Cable and S-Cable. e. Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercise: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around S-Cable terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.

4D-2W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

(4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-2L).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum. g. Ground isolate inboard end of CL-Cable: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around CL terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug.

Figure 4D-2L. S- or CL-Cable Booted

4D-2X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-2L).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. h. Secure drum preventer pendant to CL-Cable (Figure 4D-2G). Heave in and remove 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant. i. Secure a hold-back line to the outboard end of the S-Cable. j. Heave in on magnetic cable recovering the CL and S-Cable. k. Secure S-Cable to drum with hold-back line. l. Continue recovering CL-Cable and K-4 cable. m. Remove floats and position buoy. n. When all gear is clear of water, notify bridge all gear is clear. o. Detach K-4 electrode from CL-Cable. p. Ground isolate outboard end of CL-Cable: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around CL terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-2L).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. q. Secure a hold-back line to the outboard end of the CL-Cable. r. Heave in on CL-Cable and secure CL-Cable to drum with hold-back line. s. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4D-2Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4D-2-3.9 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary.

4D-2Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4D-3 M MK 6(A) MAGNETIC SWEEP (DIVERTED LOOP)

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, roller, quarter (type A), NM, with swivel eye Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) (3940-00-722-8995) (1075-00-332-5834) (2) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM Float, type O, size 1, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3) (3940-00-368-7551) (4) (1075-01-371-0568) Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12) (3940-00-368-7552) Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (4030-00-290-6420) Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet (4) 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6) Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x (1075-00-262-1980) (2) 5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1 Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, Lug, lamitex (1075-00-372-6221) S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (6) Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, (with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as (4730-00-204-3491) (2) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) (hardeye each end) 1 (2) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 (4) Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1 (1075-00-265-0677) See footnotes at end of table.

4D-3A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Pendant, roller block, 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg, Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184) nylon (hardeye each end) 1 Stop, T-bar, NM (1075-01-233-4952) Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, (5305-00-226-9204) (4) single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch outboard end, inboard end whipped) (5305-00-226-9208) (2) (4010-01-291-1611) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (20) (12) 3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484) Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as 7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485) required) 1-inch (4030-00-270-5486) SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Marline (4020-00-240-2185) Boatswain Mate Tool Kit, Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Chain, safety (2) (4010-00-599-6737) Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Electrician Mate Tool Kit Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-614-6185) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) (whipped each end) 1 * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4D-3-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4D-3-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4D-3-1.2 Float, Kite and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare size 1 float in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3 (moored configuration) utilizing 10-foot float pendants. 4D-3B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. c. Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4D-3-1.3 O-Type Components Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 to Otter. (1) Engage port sweep wire drum. (2) Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum. (3) Lead (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire roller chock assembly. (4) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant (Figure 4D-3A). (5) Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle. b. Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. (2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4D-3B). (3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. (5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

4D-3-1.4 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4D-3C). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4D-3-1.5 Electrode Floats. a. Splice a 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.

4D-3C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-3A. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)

4D-3-1.6 K-4 Electrode Preparation.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas chafing sleeve. a. Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.

4D-3-1.7 Long Leg Preparation. a. Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable. b. Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows: (1) Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection. (2) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (3) Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (4) Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4D-3D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-3B. Otter in Ready Release Position

c. Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on, and position for streaming. d. Install a lamitex lug to the long leg electrode using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. e. Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion (Figure 4D-3D). f. Attach a 1-inch shackle, pin inboard, at one end of roller block pendant. Connect roller block pendant to quarter roller block using a 5/8-inch shackle. g. Connect quarter roller block and pendant to lamitex lug using a 7/8-inch shackle.

4D-3E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-3C. Equalizing Towing Bridle

4D-3-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. NOTE Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.

4D-3F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-3D. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain

4D-3-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4D-3-2.2 Launching/Streaming O-Type gear. a. Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put gear to the rail. c. Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4D-3E). d. Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. e. Tend line to bitt. f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position float at rail.

4D-3G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-3E. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4D-3H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. h. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4D-3B). Launch float, slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4D-3-2.3 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock assembly. c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion. d. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4D-3-2.4 Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode. a. Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum and out through the level wind assembly, then out cable roller chock assembly. b. Mount quarter roller block on sweep wire and mouse quarter roller block pin. c. Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. d. Pay out to 50 feet.

4D-3-2.5 Attachment of Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4D-3F). b. Pay out electrode. c. Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart (Figure 4D-3G). d. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.

4D-3-2.6 S/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out long leg electrode until S/K-4 connector is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. 4D-3J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-3F. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode

c. Increase ship speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming. d. Pay out S-Cable to form catenary before veering sweep wire. e. Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake. f. Simultaneously, veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable while maintaining catenary. g. Keep otter working by veering sweep wire slowly. The magnetic tail should pay out to a longer length than the sweep wire so quarter roller block rides at the diversion point on the sweep wire.

4D-3-2.7 Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Continue streaming S-Cable. Inspect for insulation breaks, inspect sleeves for watertight integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required. b. Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of cable roller chock assembly. c. Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail. d. Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail. e. Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4D-3H). Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over small end of sleeve. (4) Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way.

4D-3K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4D-3G. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode

4D-3L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-3H. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection

(5) Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.

4D-3M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

f. Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail. g. Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and positioned for streaming. h. Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4D-3-2.8 Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. b. Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.

4D-3-2.9 Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4D-3F). b. Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart. c. Attach sixth (inboard float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4D-3G).

4D-3-2.10 K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layer of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continued tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.

4D-3-2.11 Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Continue paying out coax cable. When K-4 electrode to K-4 blank connection is awash, cast free the 21-thread securing line. b. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4D-3N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4D-3-2.12 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable.

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4D-3C). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4D-3-2.13 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the four red bands (1,200 feet) are at sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum. b. Minesweep electrician request permission to enter the drum area with drum area crew. c. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. d. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4D-3J) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented fairlead sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle midway between 8-inch Type E snatch block and roller chock assembly. e. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

4D-3P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-3J. Wedge Stop Placement

4D-3Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. f. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. g. Arm Cutters Mk 15. h. Safety Observer reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4D-3-2.14 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enter the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area.

4D-3R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. g. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and makes repairs as required. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation. l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box. n. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. o. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. p. Lower the terminal box cover. q. After connections have been made on the magnetic minesweep cable, ensure the port and starboard sides of the drum area are secured with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs creating an entrance barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4D-3-2.15 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.

4D-3-2.16 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4D-3K).

4D-3S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-3K. M Mk 6(a) Sweep Configuration

4D-3T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-3-2.17 Maneuvering Instructions. a. Turns should normally be made toward gear, port or starboard, and may be up to 180 degrees. The sweep wire may sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees, with the possibility that it may foul or suffer damage. To avoid this danger, sweep wire should be shortened in to about 75 fathoms during the turn, and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is imminent, rudder should be eased. b. Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic cable (Table 4D-3A).

Table 4D-3A. Sweep Wire Tensions

SPEED (KNOTS) CABLE TENSION (LB)

6 4,450 8 11,600

4D-3-3 RECOVERY.

4D-3-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4D-3-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4D-3U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4D-3-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg). d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns.

The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. NOTE Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. k. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. l. Drum area crew departs drum area.

4D-3V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

m. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. n. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4D-3-3.4 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4D-3-3.5 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4D-3-3.6 Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal. a. Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats. b. Pay out coax cable faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. c. Remove CK/P insulating sleeve. d. Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. 4D-3W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

e. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot (Figure 4D-3L). (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Continue heaving in on S section.

Figure 4D-3L. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

4D-3X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-3-3.7 Long Leg Electrode Recovery. NOTE Floats may be left on the long leg electrode if desired. a. Heave in on long leg electrode and sweep wire. b. When the quarter roller block and T-bar stop are outboard of the cable roller chock assembly, stop the sweep wire drum. c. Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop. d. Ease in magnetic cable until quarter roller block is just forward of cable roller chock assembly. Remove quarter roller block and pendant from outboard end of K-4 electrode. e. Secure hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling all of K-4 electrode onto the magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg to the drum with this line.

4D-3-3.8 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle. c. Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4D-3-3.9 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane and heave in until float is in lifting position under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow Float.

4D-3-3.10 Otter Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4D-3B) or stowage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane. f. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4D-3-3.11 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. 4D-3Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

c. Ground isolate S-Cable if cable is being stowed with no further sweep exercises: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-3M).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. d. Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.

Figure 4D-3M. S-Cable Booted

4D-3Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4D-4 M MK 6(H) MAGNETIC SWEEP (DIVERTED LOOP)

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, roller, quarter (type A), NM, with swivel eye Float, type O, size 1, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3) (3940-00-722-8995) (1075-01-371-0568) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye (3940-00-368-7551) (4) (4030-00-290-6420) Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) (3940-00-368-7552) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (3) Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 (4) Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, (12) coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 CL (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, S required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) (hardeye each end) 1 Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, (with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire (6) rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) Pendant, preventer (CL), 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single leg, (6) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Pendant, preventer (CL), 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single (1075-00-265-0677) leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Pendant, stopper (CL), 1-1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot, single (1075-00-332-5834) (2) leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 See footnotes at end of table.

4D-4A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Pendant, towing (TJ), 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg, Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) (5305-00-226-9206) (6) Towing Jumper TJ (1075-00-732-1791) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (27) (20) 3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484) Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) (3) required) Stop, T-bar, NM (1075-01-233-4952) SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) * Chain, safety (4010-00-599-6737) Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Electrician Mate Tool Kit Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) (whipped each end) (2) 1 * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4D-4-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4D-4-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4D-4-1.2 Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare size 1 float in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3 (moored configuration) utilizing 10-foot float pendants.

4D-4B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. c. Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4D-4-1.3 O-Type Component Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 to Otter. (1) Engage port sweep wire drum. (2) Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum. (3) Lead (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire roller chock assembly. (4) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant (Figure 4D-4A). (5) Connect float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle. b. Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. (2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4D-4B).

Figure 4D-4A. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)

4D-4C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-4B. Otter in Ready Release Position

(3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. (5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

4D-4D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-4-1.4 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4D-4C). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4D-4-1.5 Towing Jumper Assembly TJ. a. Remove long leg electrode from S-Cable (if attached). b. Bring end of S-Cable and end of CL-Cable off drum, pass them through cable roller chock assembly, and prepare the TJ towing jumper for connection in accordance with Figure 4D-4D.

Figure 4D-4C. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

4D-4E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-4D. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(h) Sweep Configuration

4D-4F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

c. Make the S/TJ and CL/TJ connections as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of TJ cable and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over the ends of the S- and CL-Cable and slide out of the way. (3) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity. (4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtails and slide back out of the way. (5) Connect each end terminal and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4D-4E). Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables. (6) Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of the S/P sleeve. (7) Slide the S/P sleeves over the connections and position evenly on terminal barrels.

Figure 4D-4E. Rubber Insulating Sleeve

4D-4G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should be avoided. (8) Slide clamps over ends of S/P sleeves and position clamps (Figure 4D-4E) and tighten clamps evenly and firmly. (9) Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve. (10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of half-lapped friction tape. d. Attach one end of 3-foot TJ towing pendant to towing tab on towing jumper with a 5/8-inch shackle, and other end to quarter roller block with a 5/8-inch shackle.

4D-4-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. NOTE Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.

4D-4-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4D-4-2.2 Launching/Streaming O Type Gear. a. Ensure ship's speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put gear to the rail. c. Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4D-4F). d. Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. e. Tend line to bitt. f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position float at rail.

4D-4H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-4F. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4D-4J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. h. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4D-4B). Launch float, slack aft, and cast nose line clear of ship.

4D-4-2.3 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until the long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock assembly. c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion. d. Mount quarter roller block (attached to 3-foot and TJ towing tab) on sweep wire (Figure 4D-4D). Mouse roller block pin. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4D-4-2.4 Paying Out CL-Cable and S-Cable.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Increase ship’s speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming. b. Pay out S-Cable and CL-Cable together until catenary is formed before veering sweep wire. c. Pay out all cables (S and CL) until CL preventer pendant is on deck.

Any maneuvering of the ship during this critical period of streaming operation may foul the gear. d. Stop paying out magnetic cables and sweep wire, then attach a 3- to 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant to preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4D-4G) with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye.

4D-4K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-4G. Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable

e. Pay out CL-Cable until wire rope stopper pendant takes strain. f. Disconnect CL drum preventer pendant from CL-Cable. Using PPE per MSDS, mark S-Cable for CL-Cable reattachment point (Figure 4D-4H).

Figure 4D-4H. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant

4D-4L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4D-4-2.5 Short Leg Electrode Removal (If Necessary). a. Adjust rate of pay out of magnetic cable to maintain catenary. b. Remove lashings from short leg electrode and S-Cable (if attached). c. Rotate drum, faking K-4 electrode (if attached) on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. d. Disconnect inboard end of K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. Replace cap screws and nuts in K-4 electrode end fitting (if attached). e. Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of the K-4 electrode).

4D-4-2.6 Attachment of CL-Cable to K-4 Blank Pigtail. a. Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of K-4 electrode). b. Attach CL-Cable to free end of K-4 blank pigtail section of coax cable. Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing an insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4D-4E): (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over free end of K-4 blank pigtail and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over CL-Cable; slide clamps out of way. (4) Connect terminals of CL and K-4 blank pigtail cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (5) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve. (6) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (7) Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (8) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (9) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. c. Heave in on magnetic cable and disconnect wire rope stopper pendant from 6-foot preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable. Secure hardeye to CL with tape. d. Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 blank pigtail and coax cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank. 4D-4M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-4-2.7 Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Continue paying out coax cable until coax/S and K-4 blank/pigtail connections are forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure all connections are adequately insulated to be moisture-free. Wrap connections and fitting with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4D-4-2.8 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4D-4C). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4D-4-2.9 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the four blue bands (1,056 feet) are at the sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum. b. Minesweep electrician request permission to enter the drum area with drum area crew. c. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

4D-4N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. d. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4D-4J) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented fairlead sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle midway between 8 inch, Type E snatch block and roller chock assembly. e. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. f. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. g. Arm Cutters Mk 15. h. Safety Observer reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4D-4P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-4J. Wedge Stop Placement

4D-4Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4D-4-2.10 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweep cable must satisfactorily pass meggering test before pulsing. Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends or inboard pigtails on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and makes repairs as required. g. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation. l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Conduct meggering test. Refer to PMS.

4D-4R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

n. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box. o. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35±2ftlb. p. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. q. Lower the terminal box cover. r. After connections have been made on the magnetic minesweep cable, ensure the port and starboard sides of the drum area are secured with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs creating an entrance barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4D-4-2.11 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.

4D-4-2.12 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4D-4K).

4D-4-2.13 Maneuvering Instructions. a. Turns should normally be made toward gear and may be up to 180 degrees. The sweep wire may sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees, with the possibility that it may foul or suffer damage. To avoid this danger, sweep wire should be shortened in to about 75 fathoms during the turn, and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is imminent, rudder should be eased. b. Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic cable (Table 4D-4A).

Table 4D-4A. Sweep Wire Tensions

SPEED (KNOTS) CABLE TENSION (LB)

6 4,450 8 11,600

4D-4S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-4K. M Mk 6(h) Sweep Configuration

4D-4T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-4-3 RECOVERY.

4D-4-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4D-4-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4D-4-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).

4D-4U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns. NOTE The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. k. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. l. Drum area crew departs drum area. m. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. n. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4D-4-3.4 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4D-4V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-4-3.5 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4D-4-3.6 Disconnecting CL-Cable From K-4 Blank Pigtail Cable. a. Reel in simultaneously the sweep wire and magnetic cable until CL to K-4 blank pigtail connection is just aft of magnetic cable drum. Hold sweep wire. b. Stop off CL-Cable by attaching 1/2-inch x 5-foot stopper pendant to 6-foot preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. c. Pay out coax cable until the stopper pendant takes a strain. d. Remove insulating sleeve. e. Detach CL-Cable from K-4 blank pigtail cable. f. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank. (4) Slide two hose clamps over end of boot. Position two 3-1/16- to 4-inch clamps at the end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-4L).

4D-4W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-4L. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. g. Reel in S-Cable and sweep wire until mark on S-Cable, which indicates point for attaching CL-Cable to drum preventer pendant is at hand. h. Ground isolate inboard end of CL connector: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around CL terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of S/B boot. Position clamps about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of S/B boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-4M).

4D-4X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-4M. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical)

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover S/B boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. i. Secure drum preventer pendant to CL-Cable. Heave in and remove 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant.

4D-4-3.7 Magnetic Cable Recovery. a. Heave in simultaneously on sweep wire, CL, and S-Cables until the TJ towing jumper assembly is just outboard of the roller chock assembly, and diversion point is accessible to the rigger. b. Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. c. Remove T-bar stop. d. Reel in remainder of CL and S-Cables.

4D-4Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4D-4-3.8 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle. c. Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4D-4-3.9 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane and heave in until float is in lifting position under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float.

4D-4-3.10 Otter Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4D-4B) or stowage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated crane. f. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4D-4-3.11 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. Ground isolate outboard ends of CL-Cable and S-Cable as follows: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of S/B boot. Position clamps about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of S/B insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-4M).

4D-4Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover S/B boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. d. Using hold-back lines, secure outboard ends of CL-Cable and S-Cable to drums.

4D-4AA/(4D-4AB blank)

OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4D-5 M MK 7(B) MAGNETIC SWEEP (DOUBLE DIVERTED LOOP)

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, roller (type A), NM, with swivel eye Clamp, hose, 2-5/16- to 3-/14-inch (3940-00-722-8995) (2) (4730-01-273-3672) (16) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM Clamp, hose, 5-5/8- to 8-1/2-inch (3940-00-368-7551) (4) (4730-01-444-7836) (4) Block, snatch 8-inch (type E), NM Connector, Special Y (5935-01-286-4849) (3940-00-368-7552) Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) (4) 4A-4) (1075-00-265-0677) (2) Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) (1075-00-332-5834) (3) (4) Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (18) Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (1075-00-262-1980) Float, type O, size 1, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3) (3) (1075-01-371-0568) (2) Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) (4030-00-290-6420) Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) (2) 450-foot (6150-01-517-9327) (2) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1, otter (per Job Sheet Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, 4A-2) (1075-00-391-9280) (2) CL (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) Line, nose, float, 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot, single leg, nylon Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, (hardeye splice one end, other end whipped) (2) 1 S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x Cable Assembly, outboard pigtail 5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) (18) 1 (6150-01-519-0147) Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM hardeye splice one end, other end whipped (2) 1 (with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) (2) Lug, lamitex (1075-00-372-6221) (2) Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (4730-00-204-3491) (14) (28) See footnotes at end of table.

4D-5A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 (5305-00-226-9206) (28) Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (27) (hardeye each end) 1 7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485) (12) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, 1-inch (4030-00-270-5486) (2) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (4) 1 Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184) Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire Sleeve (CS/P) (5970-01-519-3170) rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) (6) Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, NM, Stop, T-bar, NM (1075-01-233-4952) (2) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, single Pendant, preventer (CL), 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard end, leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) Pendant, preventer (CL), 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard end, Pendant, roller block, 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008) nylon (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) Pendant, stopper (CL), 1-1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot, (56) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as end) 1 required) SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) * Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Paint, enamel, green (TT-E-516) * Electrician Mate Tool Kit Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Paint, enamel, white (TT-E-516) * Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Rags (7920-00-205-1711)) Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) (2) Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Line, handling, 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot nylon, (whipped Spray, plastic preservative * each end) 1 Tape, measuring, 100-foot, steel, flexible Line, hold-back, 2-1/2-inch x 30-foot nylon, (whipped (4210-00-554-7092) each end) 1 Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4D-5-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4D-5-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4D-5B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-5-1.2 Initial Installation of Cable (If Required). a. Off-load the S-Cable, if attached, as follows: (1) Attach a 2-1/2-inch x 60-foot line to outboard end of S-Cable. (2) If alongside pier, lead line to pier through cable roller chock assembly. (3) Pay out on magnetic cable drum, either laying out S-Cable on pier or reeling the cable onto a reel located on pier. (4) Continue paying out magnetic cable until pigtail connecting outboard long leg breakout to the S-Cable is in clear area to work on. (5) Secure the S-Cable to the ship using a stopper line. (6) Disconnect the outboard pigtail from the S-Cable. Leave the pigtail secured to the long leg breakout. Slide sleeve and hose clamps clear of connection, but leave on pigtail. (7) Lead one of the two 450-foot CA-1454 S-Cables from the peer to the vicinity of the K-4 blank. b. Connect a Special Y-Connector to the short leg breakout K-4 blank as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Slip two hose clamps over the Special Y Connector and two large hose clamps over the K-4 blank and slide out of the way. (3) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity. (4) Slip insulating sleeve over the outboard pigtail cable and slide back out of the way. (5) Connect end terminals and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables. (6) Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of the sleeve. (7) Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.

Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should be avoided. (8) Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps as shown in (Figure 4D-5A). Tighten clamps evenly and firmly. (9) Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve. (10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of half-lapped friction tape.

4D-5C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-5A. Special Y Connector

4D-5-1.3 Connect Cables to Special Y-Connector. a. Connect the S-Cable to the special connector as follows: (1) Slip two hose clamps over the Special Y Connector and two large hose clamps over the K-4 blank and slide out of the way. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip insulating sleeve over the outboard pigtail cable and slide back out of the way. (4) Connect end terminals and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables. (5) Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of the sleeve. (6) Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.

Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should be avoided. (7) Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps as shown in (Figure 4D-5A). Tighten clamps evenly and firmly. (8) Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve.

4D-5D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(9) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of half-lapped friction tape. (10) Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion and stray fields. (11) Using PPE per MSDS, coat all taped coverings with plastic preservative spray. (12) Place ten turns of 21-thread lashing around K-4 blank pigtail and coax cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank. (13) Stack cables on magnetic cable drum in the following manner: (a) Reel cables side-by-side onto the magnetic drum, stacking carefully to prevent fouling. (b) When the outboard end of the 450-foot S-Cable is free, attach an outboard pigtail. NOTE This procedure can be accomplished on the pier or onboard the ship. b. Connect the two 450-foot S-Cables using an outboard pigtail. Insulate and waterproof the connections by installing insulating sleeves as follows: (1) Place an outboard pigtail between the free ends of the 450-foot S-Cables. (2) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (3) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity. (4) Slip two small hose clamps over each end of outboard pigtail cable and two large hose clamps over each CA-1454, slide clamps out of way. (5) Slip S/P insulating sleeves (small end first) over pigtail cable and slide back out of way. (6) Connect terminals of pigtail and CA-1454 cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (7) Wrap dry rag(s) around each terminal lug at cap screw and nut areas making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve. (8) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (9) Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (10) Slide hose clamps over ends of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4D-5B).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (11) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.

4D-5E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-5B. CA-1454 to Pigtail Connection

c. Install K-4 electrodes as follows: (1) Continue reeling cables onto the drum until the outboard ends of both CA-1454 S-Cables are on deck.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewn in a canvas chafing sleeve. (2) Prepare K-4 electrode(s) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6. (3) Connect a K-4 electrode to each S-Cable lug, torque to 35 ± 2 ft-lb, and fully waterproof each connection. (4) Tape connection with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. (5) Using PPE per MSDS, coat all taped coverings with plastic preservative spray. (6) Mark electrode ends. Mark port with a 1-foot wide red-painted band and starboard with a 1-foot wide green-painted band. (7) Continue reeling until inboard end of K-4 electrodes are on the drum. (8) Connect a lamitex lug to each electrode (Figure 4D-5C) and waterproof each connection following procedures in steps 4 and 5 above.

4D-5F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-5C. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Chafing Chain

(9) Shackle the two lamitex lugs together before reeling onto drum so electrodes will come off the drum together, preventing fouling during streaming. (10) Marry the electrodes together with 21-thread to prevent separation while stacking on the drum. (11) Reel electrodes onto drum until outboard ends are reached. (12) Secure electrodes to drum.

4D-5-1.4 CL-Cable Preparation for M Mk 7(b) Configuration.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewn in a canvas chafing sleeve. a. Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6. b. Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the CL-Cable.

4D-5G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

c. Insulate CL/K-4 connection and fitting as follows: (1) Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the CL-Cable connection. (2) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (3) Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard CL-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (4) Wrap CL/K-4 connection and fitting with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. d. Reel K-4 electrode onto CL drum. e. Insulate outboard end of K-4 connection as follows: (1) Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. f. Measure O-type sweep wire as follows: (1) Prepare sweep wires in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2. (2) Sweep length is critical and must be previously measured using a steel tape in at least 100-foot increments to reduce cumulative error. (3) After attachment of a 5/8-inch x 6-foot chafing chain with long link in the middle of each chain to each wire, measure from midpoint (3 foot or long link) of chain up sweep wire. (4) Both sweep wires must have a distinguishable red-white-blue mark at the 1,110-foot location.

4D-5-1.5 Floats, Kites, and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare size 1, O-type floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3 (moored configuration), utilizing 10-foot float pendant. b. Prepare size 1 kites as otters in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1 (one port, one starboard). c. Prepare sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4D-5-1.6 O-Type Component Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 to Otter. (1) Engage port sweep wire drum. (2) Attach a 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain with long link in middle to each sweep wire with a 5/8-inch shackle.

4D-5H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(3) Using a 5/8-inch shackle, shackle a 1/2-inch x 60-foot (LHL) wire rope otter pendant to 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain. Reel chain and about half the otter pendant back onto port sweep wire winch. (4) Lead outboard otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave, then through the sweep wire roller chock assembly. (5) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between otter bridle and 60-foot otter pendant (Figure 4D-5D). (6) Connect pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle on otter. (7) Using a 1/2-inch x 60-foot (RHL) wire rope pendant, repeat steps 1 through 6, attaching pendant to starboard otter. b. Transfer Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. (2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4D-5E). (3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with the tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip.

Figure 4D-5D. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Starboard Configuration)

4D-5J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-5E. Otter in Ready Release Position

(5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge. (7) Using starboard articulated stern crane, repeat steps 1 through 6, securing starboard otter and starboard float pendant.

4D-5-1.7 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4D-5F). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4D-5K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-5F. Equalizing Towing Bridle

4D-5-1.8 Electrode Floats. a. Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.

4D-5L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4D-5-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. NOTE When streaming both the port and starboard sides, the windward side should be streamed first.

4D-5-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4D-5-2.2 Launching/Streaming O Type Gear. a. Ensure ship's speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put gear to the rail. c. Ensure nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4D-5G). d. Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. e. Tend line to bitt. f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. h. Ensure float pendant(s) and nose line(s) are being tended and are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendants, if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant(s) are over the outboard corner of otter. NOTE Launch windward side first. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4D-5E). Launch float and slack aft. Cast nose line clear of ship.

4D-5M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-5G. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4D-5N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4D-5-2.3 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until the long link of chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock. c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion. d. Launch the leeward side O-type gear as in steps a through c above. e. Return and restow articulated stern cranes.

4D-5-2.4 Streaming Port and Starboard Long Leg Electrodes.

To reduce corrosion, ensure a lamitex lug is installed on the end of each electrode and the connection is taped. NOTE Adjust ship's speed as required to keep gear working. a. Pay out on magnetic drum, and lead port and starboard long leg electrodes (with 3-foot pendants and quarter roller blocks attached) out through stern roller chock assembly. b. Mount quarter roller blocks on port and starboard sweep wires, and mouse quarter roller block pins (Figure 4D-5C). c. Ensure electrode is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. d. Pay out both electrode legs to 30 feet. e. Attach electrode floats as follows: (1) Attach first electrode float to each leg (Figure 4D-5H). (2) Pay out electrodes. (3) Continue paying out, and attach five more floats 8-foot apart (20-foot from float center to float center) to each electrode leg (Figure 4D-5J). (4) Attach sixth (inboard) float, end-to-end with fifth float. NOTE Keep otters working by veering sweep wires more slowly than cable. The magnetic tail should veer to a longer length than sweep wire, so quarter roller blocks ride at diversion point on sweep wires. f. Veer sweep wires to 50 fathom scope, paying out port and starboard long leg electrodes. g. Continue paying out cables and wire. Ensure sweep wires carry the load to keep the sweep in balance.

4D-5P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-5H. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode

4D-5-2.5 Center Electrode (Short Leg) Streaming.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas chafing sleeve. a. Hold sweep wires at 50-fathom scope. b. Remove lashing securing electrode to CL drum. Ensure the outboard end of K-4 electrode is taped to reduce corrosion. Wrap two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Lead end of electrode out through stern roller chock. Pay out until 30 feet is astern. d. Attach one electrode float (Figure 4D-5H). e. Pay out electrodes and attach four more floats 8 feet apart; i.e., 20 feet from float center to float center, to the electrode leg (Figure 4D-5J). f. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.

4D-5Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION Figure 4D-5J. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode

4D-5R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-5-2.6 CL Leg to Outboard Short Leg Attachment.

As the cable is payed out, there is danger of the center leg crossing and fouling one of the diverted legs. If gear fouls, a speed change may clear it; otherwise, partial recovery will be necessary. a. Hold both sweep wires at 50-fathom scope and simultaneously pay out CL-Cable and both S-Cables. b. Stop paying out CL-Cable, then attach a 3- to 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant to preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4D-5K) with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. c. Pay out CL-Cable until wire rope stopper pendant takes strain. d. Disconnect the CL drum preventer pendant from CL-Cable (Figure 4D-5L).

4D-5-2.7 Attachment of CL-Cable to Outboard Short Leg Pigtail. a. Attach CL-Cable to free end of outboard short leg pigtail. Insulate and waterproof connection by installing an insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4D-5M): (1) Clean contact surface of terminal with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two small hose clamps over free end of pigtail and two large hose clamps over CL section; slide clamps out of way. (4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve (small end first) over pigtail and slide back out of way. (5) Connect terminals of CL and pigtail cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminal lugs are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

4D-5S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-5K. Preventer Stocking Attachment on CL-Cable

Figure 4D-5L. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant

4D-5T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-5M. Outboard Long Leg Breakout to Outboard Pigtail Connection

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing the tape several inches past the clamps on each side. (11) Using PPE per MSDS, coat all taped coverings with plastic preservative spray. b. Heave in on magnetic cable and disconnect the stopper pendant from the preventer stocking hardeye on the CL-Cable. Secure hardeyes to CL-Cable with tape.

4D-5U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4D-5-2.8 Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Continue paying out coax cable. b. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4D-5-2.9 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4D-5F). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the coax heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4D-5-2.10 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the red, white, and blue bands (1,110 feet) are at the sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawls and secure sweep wire drum. b. Minesweep electrician request permission to enter the drum area with drum area crew. c. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

4D-5V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. d. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4D-5N) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented fairlead sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle midway between 8-inch, Type E snatch block and roller chock assembly. e. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. f. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. g. Arm Cutters Mk 15. h. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4D-5W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-5N. Wedge Stop Placement

4D-5X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-5-2.11 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. g. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation. l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box.

4D-5Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

n. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35±2ftlb. o. Using cable clamps or 21-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. p. Lower the terminal box cover. q. After connections have been made on the magnetic minesweep cable, ensure the port and starboard sides of the drum area are secured with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs creating an entrance barrier. Ensure to gear adrift is left in drum area.

4D-5-2.12 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker.

4D-5-2.13 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4D-5P).

4D-5-2.14 Measuring Float Angles. a. Measure angles between the ship’s track and the port and starboard float with the pelorus on the signal bridge. These angles should be measured with sweep wires streamed to full scope, and with the sweep under tow at near maximum speed with two-engine propulsion. The otter should be adjusted for greater diversion if the two float angles are less than 32 degrees.

4D-5-2.15 Maneuvering Instructions. a. The M Mk 7(b) may be turned in either direction using a maximum constant rudder angle of 10 degrees. Should the gear on the inside of turn begin to lose diversion, it may be necessary to shorten in on the side. The turning diameter with the sweep streamed varies from 1,000 to 1,800 yards, depending on sea and weather conditions. b. Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic cable (Table 4D-5A).

Table 4D-5A. Sweep Wire Tensions

SPEED (KNOTS) CABLE TENSION (LB)

6 4,450 8 11,600

4D-5Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4D-5P. M Mk 7(b) Sweep (Double Diverted Loop)

4D-5AA SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4D-5-3 RECOVERY.

4D-5-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4D-5-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactor or solid state pulse generator circuit breakers shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4D-5-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).

4D-5AB OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns.

The clamps or 21-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. NOTE Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape (Figure 4D-5Q). k. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. l. Drum area crew departs drum area. m. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. n. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4D-5-3.4 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4D-5AC SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4D-5Q. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

4D-5-3.5 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4D-5AD OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4D-5-3.6 Disconnecting CL-Cable from Outboard Long Leg Breakout. a. Stop off CL-Cable by attaching 1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant to 6-foot preventer towing stocking hardeye on CL-Cable with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. b. Payout the coax cable until the stopper pendant takes a strain. c. Remove sleeves and detach CL-Cable and outboard pigtail from outboard long leg breakout. d. Ground isolate terminal lugs: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug (Figure 4D-5Q). (4) Slide hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. e. Secure drum preventer pendant to CL-Cable 6-foot preventer towing stocking. Heave in and remove wire rope stopper pendant.

4D-5-3.7 Center Leg (CL) Electrode Recovery. a. Continue recovery of CL-Cable and center leg electrode. b. Heave in on magnetic cable winch drum, removing electrode floats. Ensure port and starboard long leg cable loops remain astern of size 1 floats at all times. Adjust sweep wires as required. c. Lash center leg electrode securely to CL-Cable side of magnetic cable drum.

4D-5-3.8 Port and Starboard Long Leg Electrode Recovery. a. Continue heaving in on magnetic drum and sweep wires, stopping sweep wire winch when quarter roller blocks and T-bar stops are at taffrail. b. Remove quarter roller blocks and heave in remainder of K-4 electrode. c. Remove T-bar stops. NOTE The electrode floats may be left on cable electrodes if another M Mk 7(b) is anticipated. d. Secure hold-back line to outboard ends of S-Cable K-4 electrodes and keep a strain on them while reeling onto drum. Secure electrodes to drum with this line.

4D-5AE SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4D-5-3.9 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle. c. Heave in on sweep wires until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4D-5-3.10 Float Recovery. a. Train leeward side articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane. Heave in until float is in lifting position under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float.

4D-5-3.11 Otter Recovery. a. Train leeward side articulated stern crane outboard. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4D-5E) or stowage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Leeward sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated crane.

4D-5-3.12 Recovery of Gear from Windward Side. a. Repeat procedures in paragraphs 4D-5-3.6 through 4D-5-3.11 using windward side articulated stern crane. b. When all gear is clear of water, notify bridge all gear is clear.

4D-5-3.13 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. If no other M Mk 7(b) sweeps are anticipated, return magnetic cable to M Mk 5(a) configuration, minus K-4 electrodes. Ground isolate K-4 blank and outboard end of S-Cable.

4D-5AF OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4E-1 M MK 5(A) TB-26 (DIVERTED) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, quarter, roller (type A), NM with swivel eye Clip, wire rope, 5/16-inch, NM (4030-00-269-9761) (3940-00-722-8995) Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM (1075-00-265-0677) (3940-00-368-7551) (2) Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM (1075-00-332-5834) (2) (3940-00-368-7552) (4) Device, acoustic, TB-26, NM (1075-01-368-2483) Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) Flag, position buoy, red/black, 18- x 18-inch Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (8345-00-233-4111) Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12) (4) Float, type O, size 0, NM (acoustic) (per Job Sheet Buoy, position, NM, with flagstaff (2050-00-272-2423) 4A-3) (1075-01-357-9948) Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job Float, type O, size 1, NM (moored) (per Job Sheet Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881) 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568) Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6) Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye (1075-00-262-1980) (2) (4030-00-290-6420) Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, S Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) (with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) Light, marker, distress (6230-00-067-5209) (2) Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x (4730-00-204-3491) (2) 5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1 Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) Line, towing, position buoy, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot, (2) single leg, nylon (hardeye splice one end, other Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) end whipped) 1 (4) See footnotes at end of table.

4E-1A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, NM, wire (hardeye one end, other end whipped) 1 rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (4) Pendant, position buoy, chafing, 5/16-inch x 5-foot, Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye end, other end whipped) 1 each end) (2) 1 Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057) Pendant, diversion, inboard (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x Ring, 4-inch ID (5365-00-281-2187) 18-inch, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch Pendant, diversion, outboard (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x (5305-00-226-9204) (4) 24-inch, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, Pendant, diversion, special (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x 1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) (3) 6-foot, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 5/8-inch (4030-270-5483) (37) Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, 3/4-inch (4030-270-5484) (5) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184) Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, (hardeye each end) 1 single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767) Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye (24) each end) 1 Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, required) NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) Boatswain Mate Tool Kit (whipped each end) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Electrician Mate Tool Kit Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Gauge, pressure (0 to 30 psi) Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-1-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4E-1-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4E-1B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-1-1.2 Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare size 1 and size 0 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. The size 0 float used with Acoustic Device TB-26. The size 1 float for O gear (moored configuration) may utilize two 10-foot float pendants. b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (starboard configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. c. Prepare starboard sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4E-1-1.3 APC Preparation. a. Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.

4E-1-1.4 Acoustic Device TB-26 Preparation. a. Deck test acoustic device 24 hours prior to streaming in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040. Upon completion of test, pressurize device to 10 psi for 24 hours to ensure device is air tight. If more than a 1 psi loss of pressure is observed (indicated by soapy-water bubbles), release all air pressure and take corrective action. A 20 °F drop in temperature will have a 1 psi drop in pressure. If no loss of pressure is observed and device is to be launched soon thereafter, retain air pressure in housing until final pressurizing is accomplished; otherwise, release all pressure. b. Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, shackle 3-inch ID ring to aft hole in acoustic device towing and hoisting plate using Table 4E-1A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-1A). d. Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard, clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device TB-26. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease. e. Using 3/4-inch shackle, connect one end of device towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing pad (Figure 4E-1A). Wrap 3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.

Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant. f. Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with a 3/4-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure 4E-1A). g. Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-1B shows acoustic device in a cradled position.

4E-1C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Table 4E-1A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure

DEPTH TO CENTER OF PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0 AIR DIAPHRAGM (FEET) FLOAT (FEET) PRESSURES (PSI)1

20 13 8.0 22 15 8.5 24 17 9.3 25 18 10.1 26 19 10.5 27 20 10.8 28 21 11.2 29 22 11.5 30 23 11.8 1 These air pressures for the TB-26 rising when streamed through the water.

Figure 4E-1A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing

4E-1D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-1B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled

h. Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum. i. Using 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 0 float. j. Upon successful completion of air leak test, pressurize device to operating depth (Table 4E-1A).

4E-1-1.5 O-Type Components Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter. (1) Engage starboard sweep wire drum. (2) Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and a 60-foot (RHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on starboard sweep wire drum. (3) Lead 60-foot (RHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire roller chock assembly.

4E-1E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

(4) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot RHL otter pendant (Figure 4E-1C). (5) Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle. b. Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. (2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-1D). (3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on clevis shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. (5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

Figure 4E-1C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Starboard Configuration)

4E-1F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-1D. Otter in Ready Release Position

4E-1-1.6 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-1E). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4E-1-1.7 Position Buoy Preparation. a. Insert a flagstaff with a red and black horizontally striped flag attached into socket on position buoy attached to long leg electrode. Attach distress marker light(s) (Figure 4E-1F).

4E-1G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-1E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

b. Pass wire chafing pendant through tow hole in buoy. Secure pendant to position buoy with a 5/16-inch wire rope clip. c. Attach a 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel to free end of pendant, using a 1/2-inch shackle. d. Connect hardeye of towing line to free end of 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel using a 1/2-inch shackle. e. Lead towing line outboard over taffrail and back aboard through cable roller chock assembly.

4E-1-1.8 Electrode Floats. a. Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.

4E-1H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-1F. Rigging Position Buoy

4E-1-1.9 K-4 Electrode Preparation.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas chafing sleeve. a. Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.

4E-1-1.10 Long Leg Preparation. a. Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable. b. Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows: (1) Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection. (2) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper.

4E-1J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

(3) Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (4) Wrap S/K-4 connection and fitting with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on, and position for streaming. d. Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4E-1-1.11 Special Pendant Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles (Figure 4E-1G), attach 18-inch and 24-inch pendants to 4-inch ID ring. Attach a 5/8-inch shackle to free end of each pendant. b. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach one 2-1/2-inch x 6-foot nylon pendant to 4-inch ID ring, and free end of pendant to a quarter roller block.

4E-1-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING.

4E-1-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Check air pressure in device for appropriate depth (Table 4E-1A). c. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. d. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. e. Request permission to stream gear.

4E-1-2.2 Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-26. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. a. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. b. Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from nose line. c. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 (Figure 4E-1H, View A) simultaneously training gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure float nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4E-1H, View A). d. Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 into water. Slack nose line enough to permit float to ride astern. e. Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-26 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect inhaul pendant.

4E-1K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-1G. Special Pendant Assembly and Chain for Diversion Rigging

4E-1L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-1H. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26

4E-1M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

f. Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing stocking. g. Slack off on float nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-1H, View B). h. Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. i. Pay out APC until first hardeye of diversion towing stocking is forward of cable roller chock assembly. j. Return and restow articulated stern, if not needed.

4E-1-2.3 Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear. a. Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put gear to the rail. c. Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-1J). d. Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. e. Tend line to bitt. f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility (Figure 4E-1B). h. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4E-1D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4E-1-2.4 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of chain is just outboard of sweep roller chock assembly.

4E-1N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-1J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4E-1P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion. d. Connect free ends of 18-inch and 24-inch pendants of special pendant assembly to forward and after diversion stocking hardeyes, respectively, on APC (Figure 4E-1G). e. Pass quarter roller block of special pendant assembly aft of cable roller chock assembly, and mount on sweep wire. Mouse quarter roller block pin. f. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4E-1-2.5 Streaming to Full Scope. a. Simultaneously pay out sweep wire to 50 fathoms (1 red mark) and APC to the inboard 125-foot stocking.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. b. Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum.

4E-1-2.6 Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode. a. Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum and out through the level wind assembly, then out cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Pay out to 50 feet.

4E-1-2.7 Attachment of Buoy and Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-1K), then attach towing line of position buoy inboard of first float. b. Turn distress marker lights on. c. Pay out electrode and launch position buoy. d. Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart. e. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4E-1L).

4E-1-2.8 S/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out long leg electrode until S to K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure S/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4E-1Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-1K. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode

4E-1-2.9 Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Continue streaming S-Cable. Inspect for insulation breaks, inspect sleeves for watertight integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required. b. Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of cable roller chock assembly. c. Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail. d. Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail. e. Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4E-1M). Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over small end of sleeve. (4) Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way. (5) Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.

4E-1R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4E-1L. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode

4E-1S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-1M. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection

(9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail. g. Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and positioned for streaming. h. Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4E-1T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-1-2.10 Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. b. Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.

4E-1-2.11 Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-1K). b. Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart. c. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4E-1L).

4E-1-2.12 K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.

4E-1-2.13 Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Continue paying out coax cable. b. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-1-2.14 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4E-1E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

4E-1U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4E-1-2.15 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Pay out the APC so that the inboard 125-foot stocking of the APC is just forward of roller chock assembly. b. Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking. c. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye. Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-1N). d. Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a tripping lanyard. e. Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.

4E-1-2.16 Securing Sweep Wire.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the red band (50 fathoms) are at sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

4E-1V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4E-1N. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 5 (a) with TB-26)

4E-1W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-1P) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing towing bridle, midway between 8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly. d. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. f. Arm Cutters Mk 15. g. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4E-1X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-1P. Wedge Stop Placement

4E-1Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-1-2.17 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. g. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive too negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.

4E-1Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box. n. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. o. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. p. Lower the terminal box cover.

4E-1-2.18 Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS. The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500 Vdc megohmmeter. b. Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as the circuit to be tested. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle. d. Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working properly. e. Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.

4E-1AA SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

f. Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable. g. In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench. h. Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle. i. After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4E-1-2.19 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker. c. Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.

4E-1-2.20 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-1Q).

4E-1-2.21 Maneuvering Instructions. a. Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in to 425-foot diversion point during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder should be eased. b. Sweep gear for this configuration is normally streamed to starboard.

4E-1-3 RECOVERY.

4E-1-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4E-1AB OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-1Q. Sweep Configuration M Mk 5 (a) with Acoustic Device TB-26 Diverted to Starboard

4E-1AC SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-1-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4E-1-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg). d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

4E-1AD OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns. NOTE Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. k. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. l. Drum area crew departs drum area. m. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. n. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4E-1AE SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-1-3.4 Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. NOTE Disconnecting acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable. b. In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle. c. Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug. d. Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the APC cable reel. e. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area. f. If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable, no further action is required. NOTE APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area. g. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, check area for gear adrift.

4E-1AF OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-1-3.5 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4E-1-3.6 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4E-1-3.7 Sweep Gear Recovery. a. Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking. b. Heave in on APC, magnetic cable, and sweep wire. c. When quarter roller block and T-bar stop are at sweep wire roller chock, stop sweep wire, APC cable, and magnetic cable. d. Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop. e. Ease APC in until 18-inch and 24-inch pendants are just forward of cable roller chock assembly, remove pendant and chafe stockings.

4E-1AG SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

f. Continue heaving in on APC and magnetic cables until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section is outboard of cable roller chock assembly. g. Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to the cables per NAVSEA SW570-F0-MMO-040 job sheet.

4E-1-3.8 Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal. a. Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats. b. Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. c. Remove CK/P insulating sleeve. d. Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. e. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank. (4) Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-1R).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Continue heaving in on S section.

4E-1-3.9 Long Leg Electrode Recovery. NOTE Floats may be left on long leg electrode if desired. a. Heave in on long leg electrode and remove position buoy. b. Secure hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling all of K-4 electrode onto magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg to drum with this line.

4E-1-3.10 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.

4E-1AH OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-1R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

c. Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4E-1-3.11 Size 1 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, and heave in until float is in lifting position under stern crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail of float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float

4E-1-3.12 Otter Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-1D) or storage rack on fantail.

4E-1AJ SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-1-3.13 Recovery of TB-26 and Float. a. Continue recovering APC until 50-foot towing stocking is just aft of cable roller chock.

Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant. b. Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take slack out of nose line until it takes strain. c. Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip. d. Heave in on APC and articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection keeping slack out of float nose line. e. Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-26 is suspended by crane and float is properly cradled.

Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from water. Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be recovered on deck. f. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously and train gear inboard and forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary. g. Stow acoustic device and float on deck. h. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4E-1-3.14 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-1S).

4E-1AK OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-1S. S-Cable Booted

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. d. Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.

4E-1-4 RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.

A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.

4E-1-4.1 Preparation. a. Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail. b. Approach float upwind or up current, whichever has greatest effect.

4E-1AL SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

NOTE Wind will generally have more effect than current. c. Stop the screw on recovery side. d. Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside. e. Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle recovery pendant to recovery wire. f. Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch. g. Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane. h. Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float. i. Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire roller chock. j. Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain. k. If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand. l. If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire. m. Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.

4E-1-5 RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB). a. Approach float from downwind. b. Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should be done without RHIB. c. Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.

4E-1AM OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4E-2 M MK 5(A) TB-27 (DIVERTED) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS

Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel eye Clip, wire rope, 5/16-inch, NM (4030-00-269-9761) (3940-00-722-8995) Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM (1075-00-265-0677) (3940-00-368-7551) (4) Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM (1075-00-332-5834) (2) (3940-00-368-7552) Device, acoustic, TB-27, NM (1075-01-368-2483) Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) Flag, positioning buoy, red and black, 18- x 18-inch Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (8345-00-233-4111) Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12) (4) Float, type O, size 1, NM, moored (1), acoustic(1) Buoy, position, NM with flagstaff (2050-00-272-2423) (per Job Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568) Cable, acoustic power (APC) (per Job Sheet 4A-5) Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye (1075-00-782-9881) (4030-00-290-6420) Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6) Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x (1075-00-262-1980) (2) 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) Light, marker, distress (6230-00-067-5209) (2) Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x (with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) 5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1 Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch Line, towing, position buoy, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot, (4730-00-204-3491) (2) single leg, nylon (hardeye splice one end, other Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) end whipped) 1 (2) Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 (4) Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (4) See footnotes at end of table.

4E-2A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, NM, wire x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 each end) (2) 1 Pendant, position buoy, chafing, 5/16-inch x 5-foot, Pendant, diversion, inboard (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one 18-inch, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 end, other end whipped) 1 Pendant, diversion, outboard (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057) 24-inch, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 Ring, 4-inch ID (5365-00-281-2187) Pendant, diversion, special (acoustic), 2-1/2-inch x Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch 6-foot, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 (5305-00-226-9204) (12) Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) (3) Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (16) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184) (hardeye each end) 1 Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye outboard Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-302-9008) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767) (hardeye each end) 1 Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, (24) NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 required) SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) Boatswain Mate Tool Kit (whipped each end) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) (1) Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Electrician Mate Tool Kit Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wrench, T-handle (5120-01-406-6940) Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-2-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4E-2-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4E-2B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-2-1.2 Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare two size 1 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. One float to be used with Acoustic Device TB-27, other size 1 float is for O gear (moored configuration) and may utilize 10-foot float pendants. b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (starboard configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. c. Prepare starboard sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4E-2-1.3 APC Preparation. a. Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.

4E-2-1.4 Acoustic Device TB-27 Preparation. a. Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5. b. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-inch ID ring to second and fourth after holes in acoustic device towing and hoisting plate. Use Table 4E-2A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-2A). c. Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly then, pull cable outboard, clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device TB-27. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease. d. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing and hoisting plate. Wrap 3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear (Figure 4E-2A).

Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant. e. Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with a 5/8-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection. f. Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-2B shows acoustic device in a cradled position. g. Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum. h. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 1 float. i. Deck test acoustic device per Planned Maintenance System.

4E-2C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Table 4E-2A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation

DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH (FEET) (FEET)

20 13 22 15 24 17 25 18 26 19 27 20 28 21 29 22 30 23

Figure 4E-2A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing

4E-2D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-2B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled

4E-2-1.5 O-Type Components Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter. (1) Engage starboard sweep wire drum. (2) Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between starboard sweep wire and a 60-foot (RHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on starboard sweep wire drum. (3) Lead 60-foot (RHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire roller chock assembly. (4) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between otter bridle and otter pendant (Figure 4E-2C). (5) Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.

4E-2E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-2C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Starboard Configuration)

b. Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. (2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-2D). (3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secure position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. (5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

4E-2-1.6 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-2E). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4E-2F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-2D. Otter in Ready Release Position

4E-2-1.7 Position Buoy Preparation. a. Insert a flagstaff with a red and black horizontally striped flag attached into socket on position buoy attached to long leg electrode. Attach distress marker light(s) (Figure 4E-2F). b. Pass wire chafing pendant through tow hole in buoy. Secure pendant to position buoy with a 5/16-inch wire rope clip. c. Attach a 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel to free end of pendant, using a 1/2-inch shackle. d. Connect hardeye of towing line to free end of 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel, using a 1/2-inch shackle. e. Lead towing line outboard over taffrail and back aboard through cable roller chock assembly.

4E-2-1.8 Electrode Floats. a. Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.

4E-2G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-2E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

4E-2-1.9 K-4 Electrode Preparation.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas chafing sleeve. a. Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.

4E-2-1.10 Long Leg Preparation. a. Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable. b. Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows: (1) Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection.

4E-2H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-2F. Rigging Position Buoy

(2) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (3) Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (4) Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on and positioned for streaming. d. Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4E-2J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-2-1.11 Special Pendant Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles (Figure 4E-2G), attach 18-inch and 24-inch pendants to 4-inch ID ring. Attach 5/8-inch shackle to free end of each pendant. b. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 2-1/2-inch x 6-foot nylon pendant to 4-inch ID ring, and free end of pendant to a quarter roller block.

4E-2-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING.

4E-2-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. d. Request permission to stream gear.

4E-2-2.2 Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-27. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. a. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. b. Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from nose line. c. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 (Figure 4E-2H, View A) simultaneously training gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure float nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions. d. Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 into water. Slack nose line enough to permit float to ride astern. e. Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-27 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect inhaul pendant. f. Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing stocking. g. Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-2H, View B). h. Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.

4E-2K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-2G. Special Pendant Assembly and Chain for Diversion Rigging

4E-2L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-2H. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27

4E-2M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. i. Pay out APC until first hardeye of diversion towing stocking is forward of cable roller chock assembly. j. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-2-2.3 Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear. a. Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put gear to the rail. c. Ensure nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-2J). d. Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. e. Tend line to bitt. f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, and train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, install batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility (Figure 4E-2B). h. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4E-2D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4E-2-2.4 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release hook (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of chain is just outboard of sweep roller chock assembly. c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope). Check for proper diversion. d. Connect free ends of 18-inch and 24-inch pendants of special pendant assembly to forward and after diversion stocking hardeyes, respectively, on APC (Figure 4E-2G). e. Pass quarter roller block of special pendant assembly aft of cable roller chock assembly, and mount on sweep wire. Mouse quarter roller block pin. f. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4E-2N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-2J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4E-2P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-2-2.5 Streaming to Full Scope. a. Simultaneously pay out sweep wire to 50 fathoms (1 red mark) and APC to the inboard 125-foot stocking.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. b. Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum.

4E-2-2.6 Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode. a. Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum and out through the level wind assembly, then out cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Pay out to 50 feet.

4E-2-2.7 Attachment of Buoy and Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-2K), then attach towing line of position buoy inboard of first float. b. Turn distress marker lights on. c. Pay out electrode and launch position buoy.

Figure 4E-2K. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode

4E-2Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

d. Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart (Figure 4E-2L). e. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.

4E-2-2.8 S/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out long leg electrode until S to K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure S/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4E-2-2.9 Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Continue streaming S-Cable. Inspect for insulation breaks, inspect sleeves for watertight integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required. b. Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of cable roller chock assembly. c. Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail. d. Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail. e. Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4E-2M). Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over small end of sleeve. (4) Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way. (5) Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

4E-2R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4E-2L. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode

4E-2S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-2M. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail. g. Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and positioned for streaming. h. Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4E-2T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-2-2.10 Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. b. Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode

4E-2-2.11 Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-2K). b. Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart. c. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4E-2L).

4E-2-2.12 K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.

4E-2-2.13 Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Continue paying out coax cable. b. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-2-2.14 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4E-2E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

4E-2U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4E-2-2.15 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Pay out the APC so that the inboard 125-foot stocking of the APC is just forward of roller chock assembly. b. Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking. c. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye. Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-2N). d. Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a tripping lanyard. e. Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.

4E-2-2.16 Securing Sweep Wire.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the red band (50 fathoms) are at the sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawls and secure sweep wire drum. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

4E-2V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4E-2N. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(a) with TB-27)

4E-2W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-2P) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing towing bridle, midway between 8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly. d. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. f. Arm Cutters Mk 15. g. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4E-2X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-2P. Wedge Stop Placement

4E-2Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-2-2.17 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electricians enter the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. g. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.

4E-2Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box. n. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. o. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. p. Lower the terminal box cover.

4E-2-2.18 Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS. The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500 Vdc megohmmeter. b. Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as the circuit to be tested. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle. d. Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working properly. e. Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.

4E-2AA SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

f. Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable. g. In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench. h. Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle. i. After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4E-2-2.19 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker. c. Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.

4E-2-2.20 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-2Q).

4E-2-2.21 Maneuvering Instructions. a. Turns should normally be made toward gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in to 425-foot diversion point during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder should be eased. b. Sweep gear for this configuration is normally streamed to starboard.

4E-2-3 RECOVERY.

4E-2-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind and sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4E-2AB OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-2Q. Sweep Configuration M Mk 5(a) with Acoustic Device TB-27 Diverted to Starboard

4E-2AC SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-2-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4E-2-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg). d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.

4E-2AD OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns. NOTE Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. k. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. l. Drum area crew departs drum area. m. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. n. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4E-2AE SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-2-3.4 Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. NOTE Disconnecting acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable. b. In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle. c. Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug. d. Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the APC cable reel. e. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs drum area. f. If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable, no further action is required. NOTE APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area. g. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift.

4E-2AF OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-2-3.5 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4E-2-3.6 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4E-2-3.7 Sweep Gear Recovery. a. Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, and chafe towing stocking. b. Heave in on APC, magnetic cable, and sweep wire. c. When quarter roller block and T-bar stop are at sweep wire roller chock, stop sweep wire drum, APC, and magnetic cable. d. Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop. e. Ease APC in until 18-inch and 24-inch pendants are just forward of cable roller chock assembly and remove pendant and chafe stockings.

4E-2AG SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

f. Continue heaving in on APC and magnetic cable until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section is outboard of cable roller chock assembly. g. Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to the cables per NAVSEA SW570-F0-MMO-040 Job Sheet.

4E-2-3.8 Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal. a. Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats. b. Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. c. Remove CK/P insulating sleeve. d. Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank. e. Ground isolate K-4 blank: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank. (4) Slide hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-2R).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Continue heaving in on S section.

4E-2-3.9 Long Leg Electrode Recovery. NOTE Floats may be left on the long leg electrode if desired. a. Heave in on long leg electrode and remove position buoy. b. Secure hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling all of K-4 electrode onto magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg to drum with this line.

4E-2-3.10 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.

4E-2AH OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-2R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

c. Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4E-2-3.11 Size 1 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane and heave in until float is in lifting position under stern crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail of float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float.

4E-2-3.12 Otter Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-2D) or storage rack on fantail.

4E-2AJ SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-2-3.13 Recovery of TB-27 and Float. a. Continue recovering APC until 50-foot towing stocking is just aft of cable stern roller chock.

Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant. b. Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take slack out of nose line until it takes strain. c. Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip. d. Heave in on APC and articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection keeping slack out of float nose line. e. Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-27 is suspended by crane and float is properly cradled.

Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from water. Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be recovered on deck. f. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously and train gear inboard and forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary. g. Stow acoustic device and float on deck. h. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4E-2-3.14 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises. (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-2S).

4E-2AK OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-2S. S-Cable Booted

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. d. Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.

4E-2-4 RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.

A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.

4E-2-4.1 Preparation. a. Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail. b. Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect.

4E-2AL SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

NOTE Wind will generally have more effect than current. c. Stop the screw on recovery side. d. Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside. e. Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle recovery pendant to recovery wire. f. Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch. g. Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane. h. Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float. i. Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire roller chock. j. Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain. k. If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand. l. If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire. m. Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.

4E-2-5 RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB). a. Approach float from downwind. b. Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should be done without RHIB. c. Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.

4E-2AM OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4E-3 M MK 6(A) TB-26 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel eye Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) (3940-00-722-8995) (1075-00-265-0677) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) (2) (3940-00-368-7551) (4) (1075-00-332-5834) Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM Device, acoustic, TB-26 (1075-01-368-2482) (3940-00-368-7552) Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12) Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) Float, type O, size 0, NM (acoustic) (per Job Sheet Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) 4A-3) (1075-01-357-9948) Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) Float, type O, size 1, NM (moored) (per Job Sheet (4) 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568) Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881) (4030-00-290-6420) Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6) Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x (1075-00-262-1980) (2) 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) Line, securing, 21-thread x 40-foot (whipped each Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM end) 1 (with long leg in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch 5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1 (4730-00-204-3491) (2) Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 (2) Lug, lamitex (1075-00-372-6221) Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (6) (4) See footnotes at end of table.

4E-3A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch Ring, 3-inch ID, NM (5365-01-346-8057) x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch each end) (2) 1 (5305-00-226-9204) (4) Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 (5305-00-226-9208) (2) Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) 1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) (hardeye each end) 1 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (29) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, 3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484) (5) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485) Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as 1-inch (4030-00-270-5486) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184) (hardeye each end) 1 Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952) Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1 (12) Pendant, roller block, 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg, Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as nylon (hardeye each end) 1 required) SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) Boatswain Mate Tool Kit (whipped each end) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Chain, safety (1075-00-599-6737) (2) Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Electrician Mate Tool Kit Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Gauge, pressure (0 to 30 psi) Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490) Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-3-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4E-3-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4E-3B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-3-1.2 Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare size 1 and size 0 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. Size 0 float used with Acoustic Device TB-26. Size 1 float is for O gear (moored configuration) and may utilize 10-foot float pendants. b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. c. Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4E-3-1.3 APC Preparation. a. Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.

4E-3-1.4 Acoustic Device TB-26 Preparation. a. Deck test acoustic device 24 hours prior to streaming in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040. Upon completion of test, pressurize device to 10 psi for 24 hours to ensure device is air tight. If more than a 1 psi loss of pressure is observed (indicated by soapy-water bubbles), release all air pressure and take corrective action. A 20 °F drop in temperature will have a 1 psi drop in pressure. If no loss of pressure is observed and device is to be launched soon thereafter, retain air pressure in housing until final pressurizing is accomplished; otherwise, release all pressure. b. Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, shackle 3-inch ID ring to aft hole in acoustic device towing and hoisting plate using Table 4E-3A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-3A). d. Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard, clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device TB-26. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease. e. Using 3/4-inch shackle, connect one end of device towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing pad (Figure 4E-3A). Wrap 3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.

Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant. f. Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with a 3/4-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure 4E-3A). g. Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-3B shows acoustic device in a cradled position.

4E-3C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Table 4E-3A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure

DEPTH TO CENTER OF PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0 AIR DIAPHRAGM (FEET) FLOAT (FEET) PRESSURES (PSI)1

20 13 8.0 22 15 8.5 24 17 9.3 25 18 10.1 26 19 10.5 27 20 10.8 28 21 11.2 29 22 11.5 30 23 11.8 1 These air pressures for the TB-26 rising when streamed through the water.

Figure 4E-3A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing

4E-3D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-3B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled

h. Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum. i. Using 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 0 float. j. Upon successful completion of air leak test, pressurize device to operating depth (Table 4E-3A).

4E-3-1.5 O-Type Components Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter. (1) Engage port sweep wire drum. (2) Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum. (3) Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire roller chock assembly.

4E-3E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

(4) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant (Figure 4E-3C). (5) Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle. b. Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. (2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-3D). (3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. (5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

Figure 4E-3C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)

4E-3F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-3D. Otter in Ready Release Position

4E-3-1.6 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-3E). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4E-3-1.7 Electrode Floats. a. Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.

4E-3G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-3E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

4E-3-1.8 K-4 Electrode Preparation.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas chafing sleeve. a. Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.

4E-3-1.9 Long Leg Preparation. a. Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable. b. Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows: (1) Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection.

4E-3H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(2) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (3) Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (4) Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on, and positioned for streaming. d. Install a lamitex lug to the long leg electrode using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. e. Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion (Figure 4E-3F). f. Attach a 1-inch shackle pin inboard at one end of roller block pendant. Connect roller block pendant to quarter roller block using a 5/8-inch shackle. g. Connect quarter roller block and pendant to lamitex lug using a 7/8-inch shackle.

4E-3-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING. NOTE Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.

4E-3-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Check air pressure in device for appropriate depth (Table 4E-3A). c. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. d. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. e. Request permission to stream gear.

4E-3-2.2 Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-26. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. a. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. b. Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from nose line. c. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure float nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4E-3G,ViewA). d. Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride astern.

4E-3J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-3F. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain

e. Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-26 until it is supported by float. Move crane head inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect inhaul pendant. f. Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant softeye to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing stocking. g. Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-3G, View B). h. Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.

4E-3K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-3G. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26

4E-3L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. i. Pay out APC so that the inboard 125-foot stocking of the APC is just forward of roller chock assembly. j. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-3-2.3 Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear. a. Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put gear to the rail. c. Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-3H). d. Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. e. Tend line to bitt. f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. h. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendant, if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4E-3D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4E-3-2.4 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock assembly. c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion (Figure 4E-3F). d. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4E-3-2.5 Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode. a. Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum and out through the level wind assembly, then out cable roller chock assembly. b. Mount quarter roller block on sweep wire and mouse quarter roller block pin.

4E-3M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-3H. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4E-3N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

c. Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. d. Pay out to 50 feet.

4E-3-2.6 Attachment of Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-3J). b. Pay out electrode. c. Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart (Figure 4E-3K). d. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.

4E-3-2.7 S/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out long leg electrode until S/K-4 connector (Figure 4E-3L) is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Increase ship speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming. d. Pay out S-Cable to form catenary before veering sweep wire. e. Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake. f. Simultaneously, veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable maintaining catenary. g. Keep otter working by veering sweep wire slowly. The magnetic tail should pay out to a longer length than the sweep wire so quarter roller block rides at the diversion point on the sweep wire.

Figure 4E-3J. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode

4E-3P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4E-3K. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode

4E-3Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-3L. Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(a) Sweep Configuration

4E-3R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-3-2.8 Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Continue streaming S-Cable. Inspect for insulation breaks, inspect sleeves for watertight integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required. b. Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of cable roller chock assembly. c. Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail. d. Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail. e. Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4E-3M). Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over small end of sleeve. (4) Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way. (5) Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail. g. Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and positioned for streaming. h. Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. 4E-3S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-3M. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection

4E-3-2.9 Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. b. Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.

4E-3-2.10 Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-3J). b. Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart (Figure 4E-3K). c. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.

4E-3-2.11 K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.

4E-3T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-3-2.12 Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Continue paying out coax cable. When K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail connection is awash, cast free the 21-thread securing line. b. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-3-2.13 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4E-3E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4E-3-2.14 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Pay out the APC so that the inboard 125-foot stocking of the APC is just forward of roller chock assembly. b. Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking.

4E-3U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

c. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye. Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-3N). d. Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a tripping lanyard. e. Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.

4E-3-2.15 Securing Sweep Wire.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the four red bands (1,200 feet) are at sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable, APC and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-3P) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between 8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly. d. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. f. Arm Cutters Mk 15. g. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4E-3V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4E-3N. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(a) with TB-26)

4E-3W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-3P. Wedge Stop Placement

4E-3X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-3-2.16 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtail on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. g. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive too negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.

4E-3Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box. n. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. o. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. p. Lower the terminal box cover.

4E-3-2.17 Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS. The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500 Vdc megohmmeter. b. Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as the circuit to be tested. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle. d. Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working properly. e. Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.

4E-3Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

f. Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable. g. In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench. h. Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle. i. After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4E-3-2.18 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker. c. Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.

4E-3-2.19 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-3Q).

4E-3-2.20 Maneuvering Instructions. a. Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened to about 75 fathoms during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder should be eased. b. Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic cable. Table 4E-3B presents the increase in tension between 6 and 8 knots.

Table 4E-3B. Sweep Wire Tensions

SPEED (KNOTS) CABLE TENSION (LB)

6 4,450 8 11,600

4E-3-3 RECOVERY.

4E-3-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4E-3AA SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-3Q. Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(a) with Acoustic Device TB-26 Astern

4E-3AB OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-3-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4E-3-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg).

4E-3AC SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns. NOTE The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Reinstall protective boots on pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. k. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. l. Drum area crew departs drum area. m. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. n. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4E-3AD OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-3-3.4 Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. NOTE Disconnecting of acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable. b. In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle. c. Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug. d. Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the APC cable reel. e. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area. f. If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable, no further action is required. NOTE APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area. g. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, check area for gear adrift.

4E-3AE SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-3-3.5 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4E-3-3.6 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4E-3-3.7 Sweep Gear Recovery. a. Engage sweep wire drum. b. Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking. c. Heave in on acoustic power and magnetic cables and sweep wire, keeping the acoustic device aft of the magnetic tail, until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and hold until all other gear is recovered. d. Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to the cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-3AF OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-3-3.8 Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal. a. Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats. b. Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. c. Remove CK/P insulating sleeve. d. Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. e. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot (Figure 4E-3R). (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Continue heaving in on S section.

4E-3-3.9 Long Leg Electrode Recovery. a. Heave in on long leg electrode and sweep wire. NOTE Floats may be left on the long leg electrode if desired. b. When the quarter roller block and T-bar stop are outboard of the cable roller chock assembly, stop the sweep wire. c. Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop. d. Ease in on magnetic cable until the quarter roller block is just forward of cable roller chock assembly. Remove quarter roller block and pendant from outboard end of K-4 electrode. e. Secure hold-back line to the outboard end of the long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling all of the K-4 electrode onto the magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg electrode to drum with this line.

4E-3-3.10 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.

4E-3AG SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-3R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

c. Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4E-3-3.11 Size 1 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, and heave in until float is in lifting position under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail of float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow Float.

4E-3-3.12 Otter Recovery. a. Train port articulated stern crane outboard over otter. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-3D) or storage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-3AH OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-3-3.13 Recovery of TB-26 and Float. a. Continue recovering of APC until 50-foot towing stocking is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.

Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant. b. Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take slack out of nose line until it takes strain. c. Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul pendant from APC, attach inhaul pendant to crane whip. d. Heave in on APC and articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection keeping slack out of nose line. e. Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-26 is suspended by crane and float is properly cradled.

Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from water. Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be recovered on deck. f. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously and train gear inboard and forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary. g. Stow device and float on deck. h. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4E-3-3.14 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-3S).

4E-3AJ SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-3S. S-Cable Booted

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. d. Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.

4E-3-4 RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.

A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.

4E-3-4.1 Preparation. a. Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail. b. Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect.

4E-3AK OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

NOTE Wind will generally have more effect than current. c. Stop the screw on recovery side. d. Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside. e. Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle recovery pendant to recovery wire. f. Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch. g. Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane. h. Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float. i. Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire roller chock. j. Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain. k. If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand. l. If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a chain stopper grip on severed sweep wire. m. Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.

4E-3-5 RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB). a. Approach float from downwind. b. Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should be done without RHIB. c. Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.

4E-3AL/(4E-3AM blank)

OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4E-4 M MK 6(A) TB-27 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel eye Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) (3940-00-722-8995) (1075-00-332-5834) (2) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM Device, acoustic, TB-27, NM (1075-01-368-2483) (3940-00-368-7551) (4) Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12) Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM Float, type O, size 1, NM, moored (1), acoustic(1) (3940-00-368-7552) (per Job Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568) Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (4030-00-290-6420) Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881) Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet (1075-00-262-1980) (2) 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, Line, securing, 21-thread x 40-foot (whipped each coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) end) 1 Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) 5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1 Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, (with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch Lug, lamitex (1075-00-372-6221) (4730-00-204-3491) (2) Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (6) Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch (2) x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) each end) (2) 1 (4) Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 (1075-00-265-0677) See footnotes at end of table.

4E-4A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (5305-00-226-9208) (2) (hardeye each end) 1 Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, 1/2-inch (4020-00-270-5482) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (41) Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as 3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484) (8) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) 7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485) (hardeye each end) 1 1-inch (4030-00-270-5486) Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184) NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952) end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1 end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) Pendant, roller block, 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg, Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) nylon (hardeye each end) 1 (12) Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057) Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch required) (5305-00-226-9204) (4) SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Electrician Tool Kit Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) (whipped each end) 1 * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-4-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. This sweep utilizes red sweep wire and APC markings.

4E-4-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4E-4B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-4-1.2 Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare two size 1 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. One float to be used with Acoustic Device TB-27. The other size 1 float is for O gear (moored configuration) and may utilize 10-foot float pendants. b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. c. Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4E-4-1.3 APC Preparation. a. Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.

4E-4-1.4 Acoustic Device TB-27 Preparation. a. Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5. b. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-inch ID ring to second and fourth holes on acoustic device towing and hoisting plate. Use Table 4E-4A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-4A). c. Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard, clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device TB-27. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease. d. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-foot towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing/hoisting plate. Wrap 3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.

Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant. e. Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with a 5/8-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure 4E-4A). f. Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-4B shows acoustic device in a cradled position. g. Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum. h. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 1 float. i. Deck test acoustic device in accordance with Planned Maintenance System.

4E-4C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Table 4E-4A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation

DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH (FEET) (FEET)

20 13 22 15 24 17 25 18 26 19 27 20 28 21 29 22 30 23

Figure 4E-4A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing

4E-4D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-4B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled

4E-4-1.5 O-Type Components Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter. (1) Engage port sweep wire drum. (2) Attach a 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and a 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum. (3) Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire roller chock assembly. (4) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant (Figure 4E-4C). (5) Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.

4E-4E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-4C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)

b. Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Use appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. (2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-4D). (3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. (5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

4E-4-1.6 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-4E). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4E-4F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-4D. Otter in Ready Release Position

4E-4-1.7 Electrode Floats. a. Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.

4E-4-1.8 K-4 Electrode Preparation.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas chafing sleeve. a. Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.

4E-4G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-4E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

4E-4-1.9 Long Leg Preparation. a. Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable. b. Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows: (1) Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection. (2) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (3) Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (4) Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4E-4H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

c. Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on and positioned for streaming. d. Install a lamitex lug to the long leg electrode using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. e. Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion (Figure 4E-4F). f. Attach a 1-inch shackle pin inboard at one end of roller block pendant. Connect roller block pendant to quarter roller block using a 5/8-inch shackle. g. Connect quarter roller block and pendant to lamitex lug using a 7/8-inch shackle.

4E-4-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING. NOTE Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.

4E-4-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. d. Request permission to stream gear.

4E-4-2.2 Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-27. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. a. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. b. Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from nose line. c. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure float nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4E-4G,ViewA). d. Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride astern. e. Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-27 until it is supported by float. Move crane head inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect inhaul pendant. f. Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant softeye to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking. g. Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-4G, View B).

4E-4J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-4F. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain

h. Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through eye of towing stocking.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. i. Pay out APC so that the inboard 125-foot stocking of the APC is just forward of cable roller chock assembly. j. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-4-2.3 Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear. a. Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put gear to the rail. c. Ensure nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-4H). d. Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. e. Tend line to bitt.

4E-4K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-4G. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27

4E-4L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-4H. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4E-4M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. h. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendant, if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4E-4D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4E-4-2.4 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock. c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope). Check for proper diversion (Figure 4E-4F). d. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4E-4-2.5 Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode. a. Lead long leg electrode from magnetic cable drum and out through the level wind assembly, then out cable roller chock assembly. b. Mount quarter roller block on sweep wire and mouse quarter roller block pin. c. Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. d. Pay out to 50 feet.

4E-4-2.6 Attachment of Electrode Floats. a. Attache first electrode float (Figure 4E-4J). b. Pay out electrode. c. Continue paying out and attach four more floats seven feet apart (Figure 4E-4K). d. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.

4E-4-2.7 S/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out long leg electrode until S/K-4 connector (Figure 4E-4L) is forward of cable roller chock assembly.

4E-4N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-4J. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode

b. Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Increase ship speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming. d. Pay out S-Cable to form catenary before veering sweep wire. e. Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake. f. Simultaneously, veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable maintaining catenary. g. Keep otter working by veering sweep wire slowly. The magnetic tail should pay out to a longer length than the sweep wire so quarter roller block rides at the diversion point on the sweep wire.

4E-4-2.8 Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Continue streaming S-Cable. Inspect for insulation breaks, inspect sleeves for watertight integrity and condition of tape. Repair as required. b. Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of cable roller chock assembly. c. Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail. d. Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail. e. Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4E-4M). Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over small end of sleeve.

4E-4P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4E-4K. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode

4E-4Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-4L. Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(a) Sweep Configuration

4E-4R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-4M. K-4 Blank Pigtail to K-4 Electrode Connection

(4) Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way. (5) Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.

4E-4S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

f. Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank. g. Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and positioned for streaming. h. Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion.

4E-4-2.9 Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. b. Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.

4E-4-2.10 Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-4J). b. Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart (Figure 4E-4K). c. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.

4E-4-2.11 K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.

4E-4-2.12 Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Continue paying out coax cable. When K-4 connection to K-4 blank pigtail is awash, cast free the 21-thread securing line. b. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-4T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-4-2.13 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4E-4E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4E-4-2.14 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Pay out the APC so that the inboard 125-foot stocking of the APC is just forward of roller chock assembly. b. Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking. c. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye. Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-4N). d. Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a tripping lanyard. e. Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.

4E-4-2.15 Securing Sweep Wire.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the four red bands (1,200 feet) are at sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

4E-4U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION Figure 4E-4N. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(a) with TB-27)

4E-4V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-4P) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between 8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly. d. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. f. Arm Cutters Mk 15. g. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4E-4W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-4P. Wedge Stop Placement

4E-4X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-4-2.16 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electricians enter the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtail on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. g. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive too negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.

4E-4Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box. n. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb.

It is permissible to add more canvas and 21-thread to close air gaps, but caution must be used to prevent overheating of the PQ section due to restricting air flow caused by overchafing and wrapping. o. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. p. Lower the terminal box cover.

4E-4-2.17 Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS. The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500 Vdc megohmmeter. b. Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as the circuit to be tested. 4E-4Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle. d. Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working properly. e. Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel. f. Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable. g. In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench. h. Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle. i. After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4E-4-2.18 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker. c. Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.

4E-4-2.19 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-4Q).

4E-4-2.20 Maneuvering Instructions. a. Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in to about 75 fathoms during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder should be eased. b. Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic cable. Table 4E-4B presents increase in tension between 6 and 8 knots.

Table 4E-4B. Sweep Wire Tensions

SPEED (KNOTS) CABLE TENSION (LB)

6 4,450 8 11,600

4E-4AA SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-4Q. Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(a) with Acoustic Device TB-27 Astern

4E-4AB OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-4-3 RECOVERY.

4E-4-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4E-4-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4E-4-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.

4E-4AC SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg). d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns.

The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. NOTE Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove inboard pigtail cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Reinstall protective boots on pigtail connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. k. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. l. Drum area crew departs drum area. m. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. n. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4E-4AD OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-4-3.4 Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. NOTE Disconnecting of acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable. b. In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle. c. Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug. d. Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the APC cable reel. e. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area. f. If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable, no further action is required. NOTE APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area. g. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, check area for gear adrift.

4E-4AE SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-4-3.5 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4E-4-3.6 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4E-4-3.7 Sweep Gear Recovery. a. Engage sweep wire drum. b. Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking. c. Heave in on acoustic power and magnetic cables and sweep wire, keeping the acoustic device aft of the magnetic tail until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and hold until all other gear is recovered. d. Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to the cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-4AF OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-4-3.8 Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal. a. Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats. b. Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. c. Remove CK/P insulating sleeve. d. Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank connection. e. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail : (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot (Figure 4E-4R). (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Continue heaving in on S section.

4E-4-3.9 Long Leg Electrode Recovery. a. Heave in on long leg electrode and sweep wire. NOTE Floats may be left on the long end electrode if desired. b. When the quarter roller block and T-bar stop are outboard of the cable roller chock assembly, stop the sweep wire. c. Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop. d. Ease in magnetic cable until quarter roller block is just forward of cable roller chock assembly. Remove quarter roller block and nylon pendant from outboard end of K-4 electrode. e. Secure hold-back line to the outboard end of the long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling all of the K-4 electrode onto the magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg electrode to drum with this line.

4E-4-3.10 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle.

4E-4AG SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-4R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

c. Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4E-4-3.11 Size 1 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, and heave in until float is in lifting position under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail of float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float.

4E-4-3.12 Otter Recovery. a. Train port articulated stern crane outboard over otter. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-4D) or storage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-4AH OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-4-3.13 Recovery of TB-27 and Float. a. Continue recovery of APC until 50-foot towing stocking is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.

Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant. b. Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take slack out of nose line until it takes strain. c. Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip. d. Heave in on APC and articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out of nose line. e. Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-27 is suspended by crane and float is properly cradled.

Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from water. Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be recovered on deck. f. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously, and train gear inboard and forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary. g. Stow acoustic device and float on deck. h. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4E-4-3.14 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-4S).

4E-4AJ SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-4S. S-Cable Booted

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. d. Using hold-back line, secure outboard end of S-Cable to drum.

4E-4-4 RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.

A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.

4E-4-4.1 Preparation. a. Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail. b. Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect.

4E-4AK OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

NOTE Wind will generally have more effect than current. c. Stop the screw on recovery side. d. Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside. e. Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle recovery pendant to recovery wire. f. Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch. g. Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane. h. Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float. i. Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire roller chock. j. Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain. k. If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand. l. If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a chain stopper grip on severed sweep wire. m. Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.

4E-4-5 RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB). a. Approach float from downwind. b. Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should be done without RHIB. c. Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.

4E-4AL/(4E-4AM blank)

OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4E-5 M MK 6(H) TB-26 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel eye Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) (3940-00-722-8995) (1075-00-332-5834) (2) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM Device, acoustic, TB-26, NM (1075-01-368-2482) (3940-00-368-7551) (2) Float, type O, size 0, NM (acoustic) (per Job Sheet Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM 4A-3) (1075-01-357-9948) (3940-00-368-7552) (4) Float, type O, size 1, NM (moored) (per Job Sheet Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568) Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (3) Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) (4030-00-290-6420) (4) Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881) Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, CL (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) (12) Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch (with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) each end) (2) 1 (6) Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 (6) Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (1075-00-265-0677) (hardeye each end) 1 See footnotes at end of table.

4E-5A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, Ring, 3-inch ID, NM (5365-01-346-8057) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as (5305-00-226-9206) (6) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, (hardeye each end) 1 1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (36) NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one 3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484) (5) end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) (3) Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire Stop, T-bar, NM (1075-01-233-4952) rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, Pendant, preventer (CL), 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) Pendant, preventer (CL), 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single Towing Jumper TJ (1075-00-732-1791) leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) Pendant, stopper (CL), 1-1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot, (20) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as end) 1 required) Pendant, towing (TJ), 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) * Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Chain, safety (4010-00-599-6737) (2) Paint, enamel, white (TT-E-516) * Electrician Mate Tool Kit Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Gauge, pressure (0 to 30 psi) Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490) Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) (whipped each end) (2) * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-5-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4E-5-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4E-5B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-5-1.2 Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare size 1 and size 0 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. Size 0 float used with Acoustic Device TB-26. Size 1 float is for O gear (moored configuration) and may utilize 10-foot float pendants. b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. c. Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4E-5-1.3 APC Preparation. a. Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.

4E-5-1.4 Acoustic Device TB-26 Preparation. a. Deck test acoustic device 24 hours prior to streaming in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040. Upon completion of test, pressurize device to 10 psi for 24 hours to ensure device is air tight. If more than a 1 psi loss of pressure is observed (indicated by soapy-water bubbles), release all air pressure and take corrective action. A 20 °F drop in temperature will have a 1 psi drop in pressure. If no loss of pressure is observed and device is to be launched soon thereafter, retain air pressure in housing until final pressurizing is accomplished; otherwise, release all pressure. b. Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, shackle 3-inch ID ring to aft hole in acoustic device towing and hoisting plate using Table 4E-5A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-5A). d. Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard, clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device TB-26. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease. e. Using 3/4-inch shackle, connect one end of device towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing pad (Figure 4E-5A). Wrap 3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.

Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant. f. Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with a 3/4-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure 4E-5A). g. Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-5B shows acoustic device in a cradled position.

4E-5C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Table 4E-5A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure

DEPTH TO CENTER OF PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0 AIR DIAPHRAGM (FEET) FLOAT (FEET) PRESSURES (PSI)1

20 13 8.0 22 15 8.5 24 17 9.3 25 18 10.1 26 19 10.5 27 20 10.8 28 21 11.2 29 22 11.5 30 23 11.8 1 These air pressures for the TB-26 rising when streamed through the water.

Figure 4E-5A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing

4E-5D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-5B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled

h. Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum. i. Using 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 0 float. j. Upon successful completion of air leak test, pressurize device to operating depth (Table 4E-5A).

4E-5-1.5 O-Type Components Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter. (1) Engage port sweep wire drum. (2) Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum. (3) Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire roller chock assembly. (4) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant (Figure 4E-5C). (5) Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.

4E-5E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-5C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)

b. Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. (2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-5D). (3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. (5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

4E-5-1.6 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-5E). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4E-5F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-5D. Otter in Ready Release Position

4E-5-1.7 Towing Jumper Assembly TJ. a. Remove long leg electrode from S-Cable (if attached). b. Bring end of S-Cable and end of CL-Cable off drum, pass them through cable roller chock assemblies, and prepare the TJ towing jumper for connection in accordance with Figure 4E-5F. c. Make the S/TJ and CL/TJ connections as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of TJ cable and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over the end of the S- and CL-Cable and slide out of the way. (3) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity.

4E-5G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-5E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

(4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtail and slide back out of the way. (5) Connect each end terminal and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4E-5G). Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables. (6) Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of the S/P sleeve. (7) Slide the S/P sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.

4E-5H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-5F. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(h) Sweep Configuration

4E-5J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-5G. Rubber Insulating Sleeve

Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should be avoided. (8) Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps (Figure 4E-5G) and tighten clamps evenly and firmly. (9) Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve. (10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of half-lapped friction tape. d. Attach one end of 3-foot TJ towing pendant to towing tab on towing jumper with a 5/8-inch shackle, and other end to quarter roller block with a 5/8-inch shackle.

4E-5-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING. NOTE Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.

4E-5-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.

4E-5K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

b. Check air pressure in device for appropriate depth (Table 4E-5A). c. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. d. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. e. Request permission to stream gear.

4E-5-2.2 Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-26. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. a. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. b. Pass nose line through starboard chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from nose line. c. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4E-5H, View A). d. Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride astern. e. Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-26 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect inhaul pendant. f. Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing stocking. g. Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-5H, View B). h. Bring nose line through roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. i. Pay out APC until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section is outboard of cable roller chock assembly before launching O gear. j. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-5-2.3 Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear. a. Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put gear to the rail. c. Ensure nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-5J). d. Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.

4E-5L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-5H. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26

4E-5M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-5J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4E-5N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

e. Tend line to bitt. f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. h. Ensure float pendant(s) and nose line are being tended and float pendant(s) and line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4E-5D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4E-5-2.4 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes a strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock assembly. c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion. d. Mount quarter roller block (attached to 3-foot pendant and TJ towing tab) on sweep wire. Mouse roller block pin (Figure 4E-5F). e. Increase speed as required to assist in streaming gear. f. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4E-5-2.5 Paying Out of CL-Cable and S-Cable.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Increase ship’s speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming. b. Pay out S-Cable, and CL-Cable together until catenary is formed before veering sweep wire. c. Pay out all three cables (APC, S, and CL) until CL preventer pendant is on deck.

4E-5P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

During streaming, ensure the sweep wire carries the main tow load and the acoustic device remains astern of the magnetic loop. Any maneuvering of the ship during this critical period of streaming operation may foul the gear. d. Stop paying out magnetic cables and sweep wire, then attach a 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant to preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4E-5K) with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. e. Pay out CL-Cable until wire rope stopper pendant takes strain. f. Disconnect CL drum preventer pendant from CL-Cable. Using PPE per MSDS, mark S-Cable for CL-Cable reattachment point (Figure 4E-5L).

4E-5-2.6 Short Leg Electrode Removal (If Necessary). a. Adjust rate of pay out of magnetic cable to maintain catenary. b. Remove lashings from short leg electrode and S-Cable (if attached). c. Rotate drum, faking K-4 electrode (if attached) on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. d. Disconnect inboard end of K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. Replace cap screws and nuts in K-4 electrode end fitting (if attached). e. Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of the K-4 electrode).

Figure 4E-5K. Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable

4E-5Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-5L. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant

4E-5-2.7 Attachment of CL-Cable to K-4 Blank and Pigtail. a. Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of K-4 electrode). b. Attach CL-Cable to free end of K-4 blank and pigtail. Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing an S/P insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4E-5G): (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over free end of K-4 blank pigtail and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over CL-Cable; slide clamps out of way. (4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve (small end first) over K-4 blank pigtail, and slide back out of way. (5) Connect terminals of CL and K-4 blank pigtail cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

4E-5R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. c. Heave in on magnetic cable and disconnect wire rope stopper pendant from 6-foot preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable. Secure hardeye to CL with tape. d. Place ten turns of 21-thread lashing around K-4 blank pigtail and coax cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank.

4E-5-2.8 Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

Maintain slack in APC at all times. a. Veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable, ensure the sweep wire carries the main load. b. Veer sweep wire to full scope (176 fathoms). c. Stop APC when 125-foot inboard towing stocking is just aft of roller chock assembly. d. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-5-2.9 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4E-5E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

4E-5S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4E-5-2.10 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Pay out the APC so that the four red marks at 1,510 feet of the APC are just forward of roller chock assembly. b. Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking. c. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave pad eye. Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-5M). d. Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install cotter pin with a tripping lanyard. e. Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.

4E-5-2.11 Securing Sweep Wire.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the four blue bands (1,056 feet) are at sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawls and secure sweep wire drum. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

4E-5T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4E-5M. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(h) with TB-26)

4E-5U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-5N) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between 8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly. d. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. f. Arm Cutters Mk 15. g. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4E-5V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-5N. Wedge Stop Placement

4E-5W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-5-2.12 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweep cable must satisfactorily pass meggering test before pulsing. Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enter the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required. g. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive too negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.

4E-5X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Conduct meggering test. Refer to PMS. n. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box. o. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. p. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. q. Lower the terminal box cover.

4E-5-2.13 Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS. The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500 Vdc megohmmeter. b. Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as the circuit to be tested. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle. d. Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working properly.

4E-5Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

e. Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel. f. Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable. g. In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench. h. Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle. i. After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4E-5-2.14 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker. c. Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.

4E-5-2.15 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-5P).

4E-5-2.16 Maneuvering Instructions. a. Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened to about 75 fathoms during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder should be eased. b. Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic cable. Table 4E-5B presents increase in tension between 6 and 8 knots. c. Sweep gear for this configuration is always streamed to port.

Table 4E-5B. Sweep Wire Tensions

SPEED (KNOTS) CABLE TENSION (LB)

6 5,650 8 11,800

4E-5Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-5P. Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(h) with Acoustic Device TB-26 Astern

4E-5AA SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-5-3 RECOVERY.

4E-5-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4E-5-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4E-5-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.

4E-5AB OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg). d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns. NOTE The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove lugged cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Install meggering device leads to cable long and short leg lugs. k. Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. l. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. m. Drum area crew departs drum area. n. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. o. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4E-5AC SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-5-3.4 Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. NOTE Disconnecting acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable. b. In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle. c. Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug. d. Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the APC cable reel. e. Minesweep electrician makes report, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR and departs the drum area. f. If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable, no further action is required. NOTE APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area. g. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, check area for gear adrift.

4E-5AD OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-5-3.5 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4E-5-3.6 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4E-5-3.7 Sweep Gear Recovery. a. Engage sweep wire drum. b. Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking. c. Heave in on acoustic power cable, magnetic cable, and sweep wire, keeping the acoustic device aft of magnetic tail until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and hold until all other gear is recovered. d. Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to the cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-5AE SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-5-3.8 Disconnecting CL-Cable From K-4 Blank and Pigtail Cable. a. Reel in simultaneously the sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until CL to K-4 blank pigtail connection is just aft of magnetic cable drum. Hold APC and sweep wire. b. Stop off CL-Cable by attaching 1/2-inch x 5-foot stopper pendant to 6-foot preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. c. Pay out coax cable until the stopper pendant takes a strain. d. Remove insulating sleeve. e. Detach CL-Cable from K-4 blank pigtail cable. f. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug. (4) Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-5Q).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. g. Reel in S-Cable and sweep wire until mark on S-Cable which indicates point for attaching CL-Cable to drum preventer pendant is at hand. h. Ground isolate inboard end of CL connector: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around CL terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of S/B boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

4E-5AF OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-5Q. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. i. Secure drum preventer pendant to CL-Cable. Heave in and remove 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant.

4E-5-3.9 Magnetic Cable Recovery. a. Heave in simultaneously on sweep wire, CL, and S-Cables until the TJ towing jumper assembly is just outboard of the roller chock assembly, and diversion point is accessible to the rigger. b. Remove quarter roller block from chain on sweep wire. c. Remove T-bar stop. d. Reel in remainder of S and CL-Cables simultaneously.

4E-5-3.10 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.

4E-5AG SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle. c. Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4E-5-3.11 Size 1 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, heave in until float is in lifting position under articulated stern crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float.

4E-5-3.12 Otter Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-5D) or storage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-5-3.13 Recovery of TB-26 and Float. a. Continue recovery of APC until 50-foot mark is just aft of cable roller chock.

Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant. b. Detach nose line from APC. Lead nose line through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take slack out of nose line until it takes strain. c. Train starboard articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip. d. Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out of float nose line. e. Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-26 is suspended by crane and float is properly cradled.

4E-5AH OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from water. Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be recovered on deck. f. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously and train outboard and forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary. g. Stow acoustic device and float on deck. h. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4E-5-3.14 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. Ground isolate outboard ends of CL- and S-Cables as follows: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boots. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boots over terminal lugs. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of S/B boots. Position clamps about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-5R).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. d. Using hold-back lines, secure outboard ends of CL-Cable and S-Cable to drums.

4E-5-4 RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.

A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.

4E-5-4.1 Preparation. a. Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail.

4E-5AJ SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-5R. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical)

b. Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect. NOTE Wind will generally have more effect than current. c. Stop the screw on recovery side. d. Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside. e. Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle recovery pendant to recovery wire. f. Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch. g. Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane. h. Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float. i. Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire roller chock. j. Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain. k. If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand. l. If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire. m. Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.

4E-5AK OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-5-5 RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB). a. Approach float from downwind. b. Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should be done without RHIB. c. Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.

4E-5AL/(4E-5AM)

OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4E-6 M MK 6(H) TB-27 (ASTERN) COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel eye Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) (3940-00-722-8995) (1075-00-332-5834) (2) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM Device, acoustic, TB-27, NM (1075-01-368-2483) (3940-00-368-7551) (4) Float, type O, size 1, NM, acoustic (1), moored (1) Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM (per Job Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568) (3940-00-368-7552) Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) (4030-00-290-6420) Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (3) Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) (4) Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881) 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) CL (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) (12) Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, S Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM each end) (2) 1 (with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 (6) Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (6) (hardeye each end) 1 Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, (1075-00-265-0677) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 See footnotes at end of table.

4E-6A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (5305-00-226-9206) (6) (hardeye each end) 1 Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, 1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one 3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5485) end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (44) Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) (3) rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952) Pendant, preventer (CL), 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single leg, Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard Pendant, preventer (CL), 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 Towing Jumper TJ (1075-00-732-1791) Pendant, stopper (CL), 1-1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot, single Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5130-00-614-3505) leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 (12) Pendant, towing (TJ), 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg, Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as nylon (hardeye each end) 1 required) Ring, 3-inch ID, NM (5365-01-346-8057) SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) * Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) Paint, enamel, white (TT-E-516) * Electrician Mate Tool Kit Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, grapnel, NM (4020-00-287-9643) Wrench, T-Handle (5120-00-972-0490) Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb (whipped each end) (2) * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-6-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4E-6-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4E-6B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-6-1.2 Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare two size 1 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3; one float to be used with Acoustic Device TB-27, the other size 1 float is for O-gear (moored configuration) and may utilize 10-foot float pendants. b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. c. Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4E-6-1.3 APC Preparation. a. Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.

4E-6-1.4 Acoustic Device TB-27 Preparation. a. Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5. b. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-inch ID ring to second and fourth after holes in acoustic device towing and hoisting plate. Use Table 4E-6A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-6A). c. Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard, clear of all obstructions and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device TB-27. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease. d. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-foot towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing/hoisting plate. Wrap 3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.

Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant. e. Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with a 5/8-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring, behind float pendant connection (Figure 4E-6A). f. Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-6B shows acoustic device in a cradled position. g. Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum. h. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 1 float. i. Deck test acoustic device in accordance with Planned Maintenance System.

4E-6C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Table 4E-6A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation

DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH (FEET) (FEET)

20 13 22 15 24 17 25 18 26 19 27 20 28 21 29 22 30 23

Figure 4E-6A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing

4E-6D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-6B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled

4E-6-1.5 O-Type Components Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter. (1) Engage port sweep wire drum. (2) Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle, between sweep wire and a 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum. (3) Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire roller chock assembly. (4) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant (Figure 4E-6C). (5) Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle. b. Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter.

4E-6E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-6C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)

(2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-6D). (3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. (5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

4E-6-1.6 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-6E). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4E-6F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-6D. Otter in Ready Release Position

4E-6-1.7 Towing Jumper Assembly TJ. a. Remove long leg electrode from S-Cable (if attached). b. Bring end of S-Cable and end of CL-Cable off drum, pass them through cable roller chock assembly, and prepare the TJ towing jumper for connection in accordance with Figure 4E-6F. c. Make the S/TJ and CL/TJ connections as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of TJ cable and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over the ends of the S- and CL-Cable and slide out of the way. (3) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity. (4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtail and slide back out of the way.

4E-6G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-6E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

(5) Connect each end terminal and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4E-6G). Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables. (6) Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of the S/P sleeve. (7) Slide the sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.

4E-6H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-6F. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for M Mk 6(h) (Sweep Configuration)

4E-6J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-6G. Rubber Insulating Sleeve

Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should be avoided. (8) Slide clamps over ends of S/P sleeves and position clamps (Figure 4E-6G) and tighten clamps evenly and firmly. (9) Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve. (10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of half-lapped friction tape. d. Attach one end of 3-foot TJ towing pendant to towing tab on towing jumper with a 5/8-inch shackle, and other end to quarter roller block with a 5/8-inch shackle.

4E-6-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING. NOTE Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.

4E-6-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications.

4E-6K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

b. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as require. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. d. Request permission to stream gear.

4E-6-2.2 Launching/Streaming the Float and Acoustic Device TB-27. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. a. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. b. Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from nose line. c. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27, simultaneously training gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4E-6H, View A). d. Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride astern. e. Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-27 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect inhaul pendant. f. Bring inhaul pendant aboard through roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing stocking. g. Slack off nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-6H, View B). h. Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of the towing stocking.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. i. Pay out APC until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section is outboard of cable roller chock assembly, before launching O gear. j. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-6-2.3 Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear. a. Ensure ship's speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put gear to the rail. c. Ensure nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-6J). d. Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock.

4E-6L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-6H. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27

4E-6M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-6J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4E-6N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

e. Tend line to bitt. f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. h. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and that float pendant and line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4E-6D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4E-6-2.4 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock assembly. c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion. d. Mount quarter roller block (attached to 3-foot pendant and TJ towing tab) on sweep wire. Mouse roller block pin (Figure 4E-6F). e. Increase speed as required to assist in streaming gear. f. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4E-6-2.5 Paying Out of CL-Cable and S-Cable.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Increase ship’s speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming. b. Pay out S-Cable and CL-Cable together until catenary is formed before veering sweep wire. c. Pay out all three cables (APC, S, and CL) until CL preventer pendant is on deck.

4E-6P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

During streaming, ensure the sweep wire carries the main tow load and the acoustic device remains astern of the magnetic loop. Any maneuvering of the ship during this critical period of streaming operation may foul the gear. d. Stop paying out magnetic cables and sweep wire, then attach 1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant to preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4E-6K) with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. e. Pay out CL-Cable until wire rope stopper pendant takes strain. f. Disconnect CL drum preventer pendant from CL-Cable. Using PPE per MSDS, mark S-Cable for CL-Cable reattachment point (Figure 4E-6L).

4E-6-2.6 Short Leg Electrode Removal (If Necessary). a. Adjust rate of pay out of magnetic cable to maintain catenary. b. Remove lashings from short leg electrode and S-Cable (if attached). c. Rotate drum, faking K-4 electrode (if attached) on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. d. Disconnect inboard end of K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. Replace cap screws and nuts in K-4 electrode end fitting (if attached). e. Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of the K-4 electrode).

Figure 4E-6K. Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable

4E-6Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-6L. CL-Cable Drum Preventer Pendant

4E-6-2.7 Attachment of CL-Cable to K-4 Blank and Pigtail. a. Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of K-4 electrode). b. Attach CL-Cable to free end of K-4 blank and pigtail. Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing a S/P insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4E-6G): (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over free end of K-4 blank pigtail and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over CL-Cable; slide clamps out of way. (4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve (small end first) over K-4 blank pigtail and slide back out of way. (5) Connect terminals of CL and K-4 blank pigtail cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

4E-6R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. c. Heave in on magnetic cable and disconnect wire rope stopper pendant from 6-foot preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable. Secure hardeye to CL with tape. d. Place ten turns of 21-thread lashing around K-4 blank pigtail and coax cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank.

4E-6-2.8 Streaming Coax Cable to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

Maintain slack in APC at all times. a. Veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable and APC, ensure the sweep wire carries the main tow load. b. Veer sweep wire to full scope (176 fathoms). c. Stop APC when 125-foot inboard towing stocking is at roller chock assembly. d. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-6-2.9 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4E-6E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

4E-6S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4E-6-2.10 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Pay out the APC so that the four red marks at 1,510 feet of the APC are just forward of roller chock assembly. b. Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking. c. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye. Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-6M). d. Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install cotter pin with a tripping lanyard. e. Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.

4E-6-2.11 Securing Sweep Wire.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the four blue bands (1,056 feet) are at sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawls and secure sweep wire drum. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

4E-6T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4E-6M. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (M Mk 6(h) with TB-27)

4E-6U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-6N) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between 8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly. d. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. f. Arm Cutters Mk 15. g. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4E-6V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-6N. Wedge Stop Placement

4E-6W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-6-2.12 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweep cable must satisfactorily pass meggering test before pulsing. Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required. g. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive too negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.

4E-6X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Conduct meggering test. Refer to PMS. n. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box. o. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. p. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. q. Lower the terminal box cover.

4E-6-2.13 Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS. The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500 Vdc megohmmeter. b. Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as the circuit to be tested. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle. d. Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working properly.

4E-6Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

e. Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel. f. Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable. g. In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench. h. Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle. i. After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4E-6-2.14 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker. c. Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.

4E-6-2.15 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-6P).

4E-6-2.16 Maneuvering Instructions. a. Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may sag after the ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in to about 75 fathoms during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder should be eased. b. Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic cable. Table 4E-6B presents increase in tensions between 6 and 8 knots. c. Sweep gear for this configuration is always streamed to port.

Table 4E-6B. Sweep Wire Tensions

SPEED (KNOTS) CABLE TENSION (LB)

6 5,650 8 11,800

4E-6Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-6P. Sweep Configuration M Mk 6(h) with Acoustic Device TB-27 Astern

4E-6AA SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-6-3 RECOVERY.

4E-6-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4E-6-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4E-6-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position.

4E-6AB OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg). d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns. NOTE The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove lugged cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Install meggering device leads to cable long and short leg lugs. k. Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. l. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. m. Drum area crew departs drum area. n. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. o. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4E-6AC SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-6-3.4 Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. NOTE Disconnecting of acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable. b. In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle. c. Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug. d. Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the APC cable reel. e. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR and departs the drum area. f. If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable, no further action is required. NOTE APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area. g. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, check area for gear adrift.

4E-6AD OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-6-3.5 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4E-6-3.6 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4E-6-3.7 Sweep Gear Recovery. a. Engage sweep wire drum. b. Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking. c. Heave in on acoustic power cable, magnetic cable, and sweep wire, keeping the acoustic device aft of the magnetic tail, until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and hold until all other gear is recovered. d. Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to the cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-6AE SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-6-3.8 Disconnecting CL-Cable from K-4 Blank and Pigtail Cable. a. Reel in simultaneously the sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until CL to K-4 blank pigtail connection is just aft of magnetic cable drum. Hold APC and sweep wire. b. Stop off CL-Cable by attaching 1/2-inch x 5-foot stopper pendant to 6-foot preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. c. Pay out coax cable until the stopper pendant takes a strain. d. Remove insulating sleeve. e. Detach CL-Cable from K-4 blank pigtail cable. f. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug. (4) Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-6Q).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. g. Reel in S-Cable and sweep wire until mark on S-Cable which indicates point for attaching CL-Cable to drum preventer pendant is at hand. h. Ground isolate inboard end of CL connector: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around CL terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

4E-6AF OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-6Q. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. i. Secure drum preventer pendant to CL-Cable. Heave in and remove 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant.

4E-6-3.9 Magnetic Cable Recovery. a. Heave in simultaneously on sweep wire, CL, and S-Cables until the TJ towing jumper assembly is just outboard of the roller chock assembly, and diversion point is accessible to the rigger. b. Remove quarter roller block from chain on sweep wire. c. Remove T-bar stop. d. Reel in remainder of the S and CL-Cables simultaneously.

4E-6-3.10 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane.

4E-6AG SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle. c. Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4E-6-3.11 Size 1 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane, and heave in until float is in lifting position under articulated stern crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float.

4E-6-3.12 Otter Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-6D) or storage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-6-3.13 Recovery of TB-27 and Float. a. Continue recovery of APC until 50-foot mark is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.

Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant. b. Detach nose line from APC. Lead nose line through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take slack out of nose line until it takes the strain. c. Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip. d. Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out of nose line. e. Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-27 is suspended by crane and float is properly cradled.

4E-6AH OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from water. Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be recovered on deck. f. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously and train onboard and forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary. g. Stow acoustic device and float on deck. h. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4E-6-3.14 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. Ground isolate outboard ends of CL- and S-Cables as follows: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boots. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulting boots over terminal lugs. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boots. Position clamps about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-6R).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. d. Using hold-back lines secure outboard ends of CL-Cable and S-Cable to drums.

4E-6-4 RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.

A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.

4E-6-4.1 Preparation. a. Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail.

4E-6AJ SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-6R. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical)

b. Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect. NOTE Wind will generally have more effect than current. c. Stop the screw on recovery side. d. Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside. e. Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle recovery pendant to recovery wire. f. Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch. g. Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane. h. Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float. i. Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire roller chock. j. Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain. k. If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand. l. If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire. m. Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.

4E-6AK OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-6-5 RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB). a. Approach float from downwind. b. Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should be done without RHIB. c. Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.

4E-6AL/(4E-6AM blank)

OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4E-7 FA2 WITH TB-26 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, 11-inch (type L), NM (3940-00-809-7167) Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel (1075-00-265-0677) (3940-00-722-8995) Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM (1075-00-332-5834) (2) (3940-00-368-7551) (4) Device, acoustic, TB-26, NM (1075-01-368-2482) Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12) (3940-00-368-7552) (3) Float, type O, size 0, NM (acoustic) (per Job Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-357-9948) Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) Float, type O, size 1, NM (moored) (per Job Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568) (4) Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job (4030-00-290-6420) Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881) Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6) 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) (1075-00-262-1980) (2) Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, Line, securing, 21-thread x 40-foot (whipped each S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) end) 1 Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x (with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) 5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1 Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, (4730-00-204-3491) (2) hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) Lug, lamitex (1075-00-372-6221) Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (6) (2) See footnotes at end of table.

4E-7A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch Pendant, towing, diversion, 2-1/2-inch x 7-foot, single x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye leg, nylon (hardeye splice each end) 1 each end) (2) 1 Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057) Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 (5305-00-226-9204) (4) Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (5305-00-226-9208) (2) (hardeye each end) 1 Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, 1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (43) Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as 3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484) (5) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) 7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485) (hardeye each end) 1 1-inch (4030-00-270-5486) Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3184) NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952) end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, Pendant, marriage, 2-1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard nylon (hardeye each end) (2) 1 end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1 (12) Pendant, roller block, 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg, Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as nylon (hardeye each end) 1 required) SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) Boatswain Mate Tool Kit (whipped each end) 1 Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Electrician Mate Tool Kit Probe, shorting, (5975-01-029-4176) Gauge, pressure (0 to 30 psi) Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490) Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-7-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE This sweep utilizes red sweep wire and APC markings.

4E-7-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4E-7B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-7-1.2 Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare size 1 and size 0 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. The size 0 float is for Acoustic Device TB-26. The size 1 float for the O gear (moored configuration) may utilize the 10-foot float pendants. b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. c. Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4E-7-1.3 APC Preparation. a. Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.

4E-7-1.4 Acoustic Device TB-26 Preparation. a. Deck test acoustic device 24 hours prior to streaming in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040. Upon completion of test, pressurize device to 10 psi for 24 hours to ensure device is air tight. If more than a 1 psi loss of pressure is observed (indicated by soapy-water bubbles), release all air pressure and take corrective action. A 20 °F drop in temperature will have a 1 psi drop in pressure. If no loss of pressure is observed and device is to be launched soon thereafter, retain air pressure in housing until final pressurizing is accomplished; otherwise, release all pressure. b. Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, shackle 3-inch ID ring to aft hole in acoustic device towing and hoisting plate using Table 4E-7A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-7A). d. Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard, clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device TB-26. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease. e. Using 3/4-inch shackle, connect one end of device towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing pad (Figure 4E-7A). Wrap 3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.

Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant. f. Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with a 3/4-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure 4E-7A). g. Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-7B shows acoustic device in a cradled position.

4E-7C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Table 4E-7A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure

DEPTH TO CENTER OF PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0 AIR DIAPHRAGM (FEET) FLOAT (FEET) PRESSURES (PSI)1

20 13 8.0 22 15 8.5 24 17 9.3 25 18 10.1 26 19 10.5 27 20 10.8 28 21 11.2 29 22 11.5 30 23 11.8 1 These air pressures for the TB-26 rising when streamed through the water.

Figure 4E-7A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing

4E-7D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-7B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled

h. Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum. i. Using 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 0 float. j. Upon successful completion of air leak test, pressurize device to operating depth (Table 4E-7A).

4E-7-1.5 O-Type Components Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter. (1) Engage port sweep wire drum. (2) Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle between sweep wire and a 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum.

4E-7E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

(3) Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire roller chock assembly. (4) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant (Figure 4E-7C). (5) Connect float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle. b. Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. (2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-7D). (3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. (5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

Figure 4E-7C. Attachment of Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly (Port Configuration)

4E-7F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-7D. Otter in Ready Release Position

4E-7-1.6 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-7E). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4E-7-1.7 Electrode Floats. a. Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.

4E-7G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-7E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

4E-7-1.8 K-4 Electrode Preparation.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas chafing sleeve. a. Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.

4E-7-1.9 Long Leg Preparation. a. Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable. b. Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows: (1) Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection. 4E-7H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(2) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (3) Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (4) Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode, until outboard end is clear to work on and positioned for streaming. d. Install a lamitex lug to the long leg electrode using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. e. Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion (Figure 4E-7F). f. Attach a 1-inch shackle, pin inboard, at one end of roller block pendant. Connect roller block pendant to quarter roller block using a 5/8-inch shackle. g. Connect quarter roller block and pendant to lamitex lug using a 7/8-inch shackle.

4E-7-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING. NOTE Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.

4E-7-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Check air pressure in device for appropriate depth (Table 4E-7A). c. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. d. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable to reduce rolling. e. Request permission to stream gear.

4E-7-2.2 Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-26. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify photo cell is working. a. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. b. Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from nose line.

4E-7J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-7F. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain

c. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstruction (Figure 4E-7G, View A). d. Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride astern. e. Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-26 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect inhaul pendant. f. Bring inhaul pendant through the roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking. g. Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-7G, View B). h. Bring nose line through roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.

4E-7K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-7G. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-26

4E-7L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. i. Pay out APC until hardeye of diversion towing stocking at first red mark (645 feet) is forward of cable roller chock assembly. j. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-7-2.3 Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear. a. Ensure ship's speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put gear to the rail. c. Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-7H). d. Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. e. Tend line to bitt. f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. h. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4E-7D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4E-7-2.4 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock. c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion. d. Return and restow articulated stern crane. e. Increase speed as required to assist in streaming gear.

4E-7-2.5 Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode. a. Lead long leg electrode (with a 3-foot pendant and quarter roller block attached) out through level wind assembly then cable roller chock assembly.

4E-7M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-7H. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4E-7N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Mount quarter roller block on sweep wire and mouse quarter roller block pin. c. Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. d. Pay out long leg to 50 feet.

4E-7-2.6 Attachment of Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-7J) b. Pay out electrode. c. Continue paying out and attach four more floats 7 feet apart (Figure 4E-7K). d. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.

4E-7-2.7 S/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out long leg electrode until S/K-4 connector is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Increase ship speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming. d. Pay out S-Cable to form catenary before veering sweep wire. e. Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake. f. Simultaneously, veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable maintaining catenary. g. Keep otter working by veering sweep wire slowly. The magnetic tail should pay out to a longer length than the sweep wire so quarter roller block rides at the diversion point on the sweep wire.

Figure 4E-7J. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode

4E-7P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4E-7K. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode

4E-7Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

h. Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is forward of cable roller chock assembly. i. Remove lashing securing short leg electrode to S-Cable.

4E-7-2.8 Diversion Stocking Attachment to Sweep Wire. a. Place two wedge stops (Figure 4E-7L) back-to-nose at the one red band (360 feet) on sweep wire (Figure 4E-7M). b. Holding the magnetic gear, veer sweep wire until two red bands (390 feet) are just inboard of sweep wire roller chock assembly. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of a 7-foot diversion towing pendant to hardeye of diversion towing stocking first red mark (645 feet) on APC. d. Simultaneously, place two wedge stops (Figure 4E-7L) back-to-nose on sweep wire at the two red bands (390 feet). e. Attach 7-foot diversion towing pendant to an open 11-inch, type L block using a 3/4-inch shackle (Figure 4E-7N). f. Attach 11-inch, type L block to sweep wire forward of the one red band (360 feet), ensuring the diversion towing pendant passes under S magnetic cable (Figure 4E-7N, View A).

4E-7-2.9 APC Outboard Marriage Attachment to Sweep Wire. a. Veer sweep wire until wedge stops at two red bands (390 feet) are just aft of sweep wire roller chock assembly. b. Pay out APC until second red mark (stocking) (680 feet) on cable is aft of cable roller chock assembly. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of a 10-foot outboard marriage pendant to hardeye of first marriage stocking second red mark (680 feet) on APC (Figure 4E-7N, View B). d. Attach free end of 10-foot outboard marriage pendant to an 8-inch (type E) snatch block using a 3/4-inch shackle. e. Attach 8-inch snatch block to sweep wire, forward of wedge stops at the two red bands (390 feet), ensuring marriage pendant passes under S magnetic cable. Allow snatch block to ride free.

4E-7-2.10 Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.

During streaming, ensure the sweep wire carries the main tow load and the acoustic device remains astern of the magnetic loop. To prevent damage to the acoustic cable, the APC must be slack during the streaming operation. a. Veer out sweep wire while paying out the APC and magnetic cable. b. Adjust rate of veering of sweep wire to prevent APC from taking the tow load. c. Adjust rate of pay out of magnetic cable to keep cable forward of float attached to acoustic device.

4E-7R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-7L. Wedge Stop Placement

4E-7S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-7M. Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings

4E-7T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-7N. Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment

d. Continue streaming sweep wire, APC, and S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of cable roller chock assembly. e. Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail. f. Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail. g. Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4E-7M). Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over small end of sleeve. (4) Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way.

4E-7U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

(5) Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. h. Hold sweep wire and APC. i. Place ten turns of 21-thread lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail. j. Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and positioned for streaming. k. Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. l. Attach a 21-thread line, approximately 40 feet, to outboard end of K-4 electrode. m. Pass 21-thread line over APC, through starboard stern chock and secure to starboard bitts.

4E-7-2.11 Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. b. Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.

4E-7-2.12 Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-7J). b. Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart. c. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4E-7K).

4E-7V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-7-2.13 K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.

4E-7-2.14 Streaming Coax Cable.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Continue paying out coax cable. When K-4 blank connection is awash, cast free the 21-thread securing line. Pay out sweep wire, APC, and coax cable. b. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-7-2.15 APC Inboard Marriage Attachment to Sweep Wire. a. Continue to veer sweep wire while paying out the APC and magnetic cable. b. Veer sweep wire until the three red bands (810 feet) are forward of roller chock and pay out APC until the third red mark (1,110 feet) stocking on the APC is just aft of roller chock assembly. c. Secure two wedge stops back-to-nose at the three red bands (810 feet) on sweep wire. d. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of inboard marriage pendant to hardeye at the third red mark (1,110 feet) stocking on APC (Figure 4E-7N). e. Attach free end of inboard marriage pendant to an 8-inch (type E) snatch block using a 3/4-inch shackle. f. Veer sweep wire until the wedge stops are just aft of roller chock assembly. g. Attach 8-inch snatch block to sweep wire, forward of wedge stops at the three red bands (810 feet), ensuring marriage pendant passes under magnetic cable. Allow snatch block to ride free.

4E-7W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-7-2.16 Streaming to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

Maintain slack in APC at all times. a. Veer sweep wire while paying out the APC and magnetic cable, ensuring the sweep wire carries the main load. b. Veer sweep wire to full scope (1,200 feet). c. Stop APC when 1,510-foot stocking is on roller chock assembly. d. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-7-2.17 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4E-7E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4E-7X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-7-2.18 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking. b. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye. Attach pelican hook to the free end of the towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-7P). c. Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a tripping lanyard. d. Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.

4E-7-2.19 Securing Sweep Wire.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the four red bands (1,200 feet) are at the sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. c. Attach two wedge stops back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between 8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly. d. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

4E-7Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION Figure 4E-7P. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2 Sweep)

4E-7Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. f. Arm Cutters Mk 15. g. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4E-7-2.20 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is begin pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.

4E-7AA SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enter the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtail on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable end. g. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation. l. Use an approved type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box. n. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush andfullyinserted.Securingfastenerswillbetorquedto35±2ftlb. o. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. p. Lower the terminal box cover.

4E-7AB OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-7-2.21 Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS. The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500 Vdc megohmmeter. b. Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as the circuit to be tested. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle. d. Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working properly. e. Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel. f. Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable. g. In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench. h. Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle. i. After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4E-7AC SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-7-2.22 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker. c. Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.

4E-7-2.23 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-7Q).

4E-7-2.24 Maneuvering Instructions. a. Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in the turn. If chafing is evident, rudder should be eased. If sweep wire needs to be shortened further, inboard marriage point needs to be broken. b. Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic cable. Table 4E-7B presents the increase in tension between 6 and 8 knots. c. Sweep gear for this configuration is normally streamed to port.

Table 4E-7B. Sweep Wire Tensions

SPEED (KNOTS) CABLE TENSION (LB)

6 4,450 8 11,600

4E-7-3 RECOVERY.

4E-7-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4E-7AD OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-7Q. FA2 with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration

4E-7AE SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-7-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4E-7-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg). d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.

4E-7AF OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns. NOTE The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove lugged cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Reinstall protective boots on pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. k. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. l. Drum area crew departs drum area. m. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. n. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4E-7AG SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-7-3.4 Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. NOTE Disconnecting acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable. b. In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle. c. Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug. d. Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the APC cable reel. e. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area. f. If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable, no further action is required. NOTE APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area. g. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift.

4E-7AH OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-7-3.5 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4E-7-3.6 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4E-7-3.7 Sweep Gear Recovery. a. Engage sweep wire drum and reel in sweep wire to provide slack in APC. Hold sweep wire at this scope. b. Heave in APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking. c. Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-7AJ SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-7-3.8 Wedge Stops and Inboard Marriage Pendant Removal.

When reeling in the sweep wire, the APC, and the magnetic cable, ensure sweep wire always carries the main load. If necessary, cease reeling in the APC or magnetic cable. a. Simultaneously reel in on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable. b. Adjust rate of recovery of magnetic cable to ensure that cable is always forward of acoustic device float. c. Stop hauling in on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable when inboard marriage pendant and wedge stops located at the three red bands (810 feet) on sweep wire are just outside of roller chock assembly. d. Remove snatch block and inboard 10-foot marriage pendant from sweep wire. e. Reel in sweep wire until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock and remove. Ensure snatch block is on deck; then remove the 10-foot pendant from APC towing stocking. f. Wrap marriage stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being stowed on cable drum.

4E-7-3.9 Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal. a. Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats. b. Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. c. Remove CK/P insulating sleeve. d. Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. e. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot (Figure 4E-7R). (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

4E-7AK OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-7R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Continue heaving in on S section. g. Stow K-4 electrode.

4E-7-3.10 Wedge Stops and Outboard Marriage Pendant Removal. a. Simultaneously reel in on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until the 10-foot outboard marriage pendant and wedge stops at the two red bands (390 feet) on sweep wire are just outside roller chock assemblies. b. Remove snatch block and outboard 10-foot marriage pendant from sweep wire. c. Reel in sweep wire until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock and remove. Ensure snatch block is on deck; then remove 10-foot pendant from APC towing stocking. d. Wrap marriage stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being stowed on cable drum.

4E-7AL SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-7-3.11 Disconnecting Diversion Towing Stocking.

When reeling in the sweep wire, the APC, and the magnetic cable, ensure sweep wire always carries the main load. If necessary, cease reeling in the APC or magnetic cable. a. Reel in simultaneously on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until 7-foot diversion towing pendant type L block (forward of wedge stops located at the one red band (360 feet) on sweep wire) is just outside roller chock assembly. b. Remove type L block of outboard 7-foot diversion towing pendant from sweep wire. c. Reel in sweep wire and APC until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock. Ensure type L block is on deck, then remove 7-foot pendant and wedge stops. d. Wrap towing stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being stowed on cable drum. e. Continue recovery of sweep wire, magnetic cable, and APC, keeping acoustic device aft of magnetic cable until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and hold until all other gear is recovered.

4E-7-3.12 Long Leg Electrode Recovery. a. Heave in on long leg electrode and sweep wire. NOTE Floats may be left on long leg if desired. b. When the quarter roller block and T-bar stop are outboard of the cable roller chock assembly, stop the sweep wire. c. Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop. d. Ease in magnetic cable until quarter roller block is just outboard of cable roller chock assembly. Remove quarter roller block from outboard end of K-4 electrode. e. Secure hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling all of K-4 electrode onto magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg to drum with this line.

4E-7-3.13 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip articulated stern crane. b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle. c. Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4E-7-3.14 Size 1 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach.

4E-7AM OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane. Heave in until float is in lifting position under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float.

4E-7-3.15 Otter Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard over otter. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-7D) or storage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-7-3.16 Recovery of TB-26 and Float. a. Continue recovering APC until 50-foot towing stocking is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.

Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant. b. Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take slack out of nose line. c. Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip. d. Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out of nose line. e. Heave in on the inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-26 is suspended by the crane and float is properly cradled.

Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from water. Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be recovered on deck. f. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously and train gear inboard and forward, clearing APC and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary. g. Stow acoustic device and float on deck. h. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4E-7AN SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-7-3.17 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-7S).

4E-7-4 RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.

A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.

Figure 4E-7S. S-Cable Booted

4E-7AP OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-7-4.1 Preparation. a. Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail. b. Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect. NOTE Wind will generally have more effect than current. c. Stop the screw on recovery side. d. Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside. e. Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle recovery pendant to recovery wire. f. Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch. g. Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane. h. Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float. i. Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire roller chock. j. Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain. k. If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand. l. If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire. m. Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.

4E-7-5 RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB). a. Approach float from downwind. b. Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should be done without RHIB. c. Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.

4E-7AQ/(4E-7AR blank)

OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4E-8 FA2 WITH TB-27 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, 11-inch (type L), NM (3940-00-809-7167) Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel (1075-00-265-0677) (3940-00-722-8995) Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM (1075-00-332-5834) (2) (3940-00-368-7551) (4) Device, acoustic, TB-27, NM (1075-01-368-2483) Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM Float, cellular rubber (1075-00-372-6128) (12) (3940-00-368-7552) (3) Float, type O, size 1, NM, moored (1), acoustic (1) Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) (per Job Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568) Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) (4030-00-290-6420) (4) Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881) Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) Cable Assembly, electrode, K-4 (per Job Sheet 4A-6) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet (1075-00-262-1980) (2) 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, Line, securing, 21-thread x 40-foot (whipped each coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) end) 1 Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, Line, securing (electrode float-center), 21-thread x S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) 5-foot, single leg, manila (each end whipped) 1 Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, (with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 Clamp, hose, 1-9/16- to 2-1/2-inch Lug, lamitex (1075-00-372-6221) (4730-00-204-3491) (2) Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) (6) Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye (2) each end) (2) 1 See footnotes at end of table.

4E-8A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as (5305-00-226-9204) (4) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch (hardeye each end) 1 (5305-00-226-9208) (2) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (35) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) 7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485) (hardeye each end) 1 1-inch (4030-00-270-5486) Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, Sleeve (CK/P) (5970-01-519-3189) NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952) end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, Pendant, marriage, 2-1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard nylon (hardeye each end) (2) 1 end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1 (12) Pendant, roller block, 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg, Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as nylon (hardeye each end) 1 required) Pendant, towing, diversion, 2-1/2-inch x 7-foot, single leg, nylon (hardeye splice each end) 1 SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Electrician Mate Tool Kit Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) (whipped each end) 1 * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-8-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE This sweep utilizes red sweep wire and APC markings.

4E-8-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4E-8B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-8-1.2 Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare two size 1 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. One float is used with the Acoustic Device TB-27, the other size 1 is for O gear (moored configuration) and may utilize the 10-foot float pendants. b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. c. Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4E-8-1.3 APC Preparation. a. Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.

4E-8-1.4 Acoustic Device TB-27 Preparation. a. Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5. b. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-inch ID ring to second and fourth holes in acoustic device towing and hoisting plate. Refer to Table 4E-8A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-8A). c. Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly then, pull cable outboard, clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device TB-27. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease. d. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-foot towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing/hoisting plate. Wrap 3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.

Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant. e. Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with a 5/8-inch shackle with screw pin end of 3-inch ID ring, behind float pendant connection (Figure 4E-8A). f. Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-8B shows acoustic device in a cradled position. g. Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum. h. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach nylon line to tail of size 1 float. i. Deck test acoustic device in accordance with Planned Maintenance System.

4E-8C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Table 4E-8A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation

DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH (FEET) (FEET)

20 13 22 15 24 17 25 18 26 19 27 20 28 21 29 22 30 23

Figure 4E-8A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing

4E-8D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-8B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled

4E-8-1.5 O-Type Components Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter. (1) Engage port sweep wire drum. (2) Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle between sweep wire and a 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum. (3) Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire roller chock assembly. (4) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant (Figure 4E-8C). (5) Connect float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle.

4E-8E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-8C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)

b. Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. (2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-8D). (3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. (5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

4E-8-1.6 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-8E). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4E-8F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-8D. Otter in Ready Release Position

4E-8-1.7 Electrode Floats. a. Splice 5-foot (21-thread) pendant to both ends of each float.

4E-8-1.8 K-4 Electrode Preparation.

To reduce electrolysis, K-4 electrode(s) should be sewed in a canvas chafing sleeve. a. Prepare K-4 electrode in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-6.

4E-8-1.9 Long Leg Preparation. a. Lead a K-4 electrode to the outboard end of the S-Cable.

4E-8G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-8E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

b. Insulate S/K-4 connection and fitting as follows: (1) Place inboard end of long leg K-4 electrode in vicinity of the S-Cable connection. (2) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (3) Connect the long leg K-4 electrode to the outboard S-Cable using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 1-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (4) Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Heave in on magnetic reel, stacking K-4 electrode until outboard end is clear to work on, and positioned for streaming.

4E-8H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. Install a lamitex lug to the long leg electrode using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. e. Tape outboard electrode terminal lug with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black plastic tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion (Figure 4E-8F). f. Attach a 1-inch shackle, pin inboard, at one end of roller block pendant. Connect roller block pendant to quarter roller block using a 5/8-inch shackle. g. Connect quarter roller block and pendant to lamitex lug using a 7/8-inch shackle.

4E-8-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING. NOTE Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.

4E-8-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. d. Request permission to stream gear.

4E-8-2.2 Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-27. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. a. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. b. Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from nose line. c. Hoist cradled float and acoustic device TB-27 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4E-8G, View A). d. Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride astern. e. Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-27 until it is supported by float. Move the crane head until inboard and continue to pay out the inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from the crane whip. Disconnect inhaul pendant. f. Bring inhaul pendant aboard through the roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing stocking. g. Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-8G, View B). h. Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through from eye of towing stocking.

4E-8J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-8F. Quarter Roller Block Assembly and K-4 Electrode Installed on Diversion Chain

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. i. Pay out APC until hardeye of diversion towing stocking at first red mark (645 feet) is forward of cable roller chock assembly. j. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-8-2.3 Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear. a. Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put gear to the rail. c. Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-8H). d. Lead float nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. e. Tend line to bitt.

4E-8K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-8G. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB 27

4E-8L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-8H. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4E-8M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. h. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and that float pendant and line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4E-8D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4E-8-2.4 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock. c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion. d. Return and restow articulated stern crane. e. Increase speed as required to assist in streaming gear.

4E-8-2.5 Streaming of Outboard (Long Leg) Electrode. a. Lead long leg electrode (with a 3-foot pendant and quarter roller block attached) out through level wind assembly then cable roller chock assembly. b. Mount quarter roller block on sweep wire and mouse quarter roller block pin. c. Ensure K-4 electrode terminal lug is properly taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, apply two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. d. Pay out long leg to 50 feet.

4E-8-2.6 Attachment of Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-8J) b. Pay out electrode. c. Continue paying out and attach four more floats 7 feet apart (Figure 4E-8K). d. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float.

4E-8-2.7 S/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out long leg electrode until S/K-4 connector is forward of cable roller chock assembly.

4E-8N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-8J. Tying Float to K-4 Electrode

b. Wrap S/K-4 connection and fittings with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Increase ship speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming. d. Pay out S-Cable to form catenary before veering sweep wire. e. Disengage sweep wire drum. Veer sweep wire using hydraulic brake. f. Simultaneously, veer sweep wire and pay out magnetic cable maintaining catenary. g. Keep otter working by veering sweep wire slowly. The magnetic tail should pay out to a longer length than the sweep wire so quarter roller block rides at the diversion point on the sweep wire. h. Continue streaming S-Cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is forward of cable roller chock assembly. i. Remove lashing securing short leg electrode to S-Cable.

4E-8-2.8 Diversion Stocking Attachment to Sweep Wire. a. Place two wedge stops (Figure 4E-8L) back-to-nose at the one red band (360 feet) on sweep wire (Figure 4E-8M). b. Holding the magnetic gear, veer sweep wire until two red bands (390 feet) are just inboard of sweep wire roller chock assembly. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of a 7-foot diversion towing pendant to hardeye of diversion towing stocking first red mark (645 feet) on APC. d. Simultaneously, place two wedge stops (Figure 4E-8L) back-to-nose on sweep wire at the two red bands (390 feet). e. Attach 7-foot diversion towing pendant to an open 11-inch, type L block using a 3/4-inch shackle (Figure 4E-8N, View A). f. Attach 11-inch, type L block to sweep wire forward of the one red band (360 feet), ensuring the diversion towing pendant passes under the S-Cable (Figure 4E-8N, View A). 4E-8P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4E-8K. Attaching Floats to K-4 Electrode

4E-8Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-8L. Wedge Stop Placement

4E-8R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-8M. Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings

4E-8S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-8N. Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment

4E-8-2.9 APC Outboard Marriage Attachment to Sweep Wire. a. Veer sweep wire until wedge stops at the two red bands (390 feet) are just aft of sweep wire roller chock assembly. b. Pay out APC until the second red mark (stocking at 680 feet) on cable is aft of cable roller chock assembly. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of a 10-foot outboard marriage pendant to hardeye of first marriage stocking on APC (Figure 4E-8N, View B). d. Attach free end of 10-foot outboard marriage pendant to an 8-inch (type E) snatch block using a 3/4-inch shackle. e. Attach 8-inch snatch block to sweep wire, forward of wedge stops at the two red bands (390 feet), ensuring marriage pendant passes under the S-Cable. Allow snatch block to ride free.

4E-8T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-8-2.10 Installation of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode.

During streaming, ensure the sweep wire carries the main tow load and the acoustic device remains astern of the magnetic loop. To prevent damage to the acoustic cable, the APC must be slack during the streaming operation. a. Veer out sweep wire while paying out the APC and magnetic cable. b. Adjust rate of veering of sweep wire to prevent APC from taking the tow load. c. Adjust rate of pay out of magnetic cable to keep cable forward of float attached to acoustic device. d. Continue streaming sweep wire, APC, and S-Cable until outboard short leg breakout and K-4 blank pigtail is forward of cable roller chock assembly. e. Remove boot from K-4 blank pigtail. f. Lead a K-4 electrode end to the K-4 blank pigtail. g. Attach K-4 electrode to K-4 blank pigtail (Figure 4E-8M). Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing a CK/P insulating sleeve as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the CK/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over large end of sleeve and two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over small end of sleeve. (4) Slip CK/P insulating sleeve over K-4 electrode and slide back out of way. (5) Connect terminals of K-4 electrode and K-4 blank pigtail using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of CK/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide CK/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

4E-8U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. h. Hold sweep wire and APC. i. Place ten turns of 21-thread line lashing around K-4 electrode and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail. j. Heave in on magnetic cable until outboard end of short leg electrode is clear to work on and positioned for streaming. k. Tape the outboard end of K-4 electrode with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. l. Attach a 21-thread line, approximately 40 feet, to outboard end of K-4 electrode. m. Pass 21-thread line over APC, through starboard stern chock and secure to starboard bitts.

4E-8-2.11 Streaming of Inboard (Short Leg) K-4 Electrode. a. Ensure K-4 electrode outboard terminal lug is taped with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. b. Pay out 50 feet of the short leg electrode.

4E-8-2.12 Attachment of Short Leg Electrode Floats. a. Attach first electrode float (Figure 4E-8J). b. Continue paying out and attach four additional floats seven feet apart. c. Attach sixth (inboard) float end-to-end with fifth float (Figure 4E-8K).

4E-8-2.13 K-4 Blank Pigtail/K-4 Connector Inspection. a. Continue paying out short leg electrode until K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection is forward of cable roller chock assembly. b. Ensure K-4 blank pigtail/K-4 connection and fitting is wrapped with two layers rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers of half-lapped electrical black tape, and two layers of half-lapped friction tape. Continue tape several inches past the connection on each side. Ensure that all exposed metal is covered to reduce corrosion. c. Ensure ten turns of 21-thread line lashing is around the K-4 blank pigtail and S-Cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank pigtail.

4E-8V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-8-2.14 Streaming Coax Cable.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Continue paying out coax cable. When K-4 blank connection is awash, cast free the 21-thread securing line. Pay out sweep wire, APC, and coax cable. b. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-8-2.15 APC Inboard Marriage Attachment to Sweep Wire. a. Continue to veer sweep wire while paying out the APC and magnetic cable. b. Veer sweep wire until the three red bands (810 feet) are forward of roller chock and pay out APC until the third red mark (1,110 feet) stocking on the APC is just aft of roller chock assembly. c. Secure two wedge stops back-to-nose at the three red bands (810 feet) on sweep wire. d. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of inboard marriage pendant to hardeye at the third red mark (1,110 feet) stocking on APC (Figure 4E-8N, View B). e. Attach free end of inboard marriage pendant to an 8-inch (type E) snatch block using a 3/4-inch shackle. f. Veer sweep wire until the wedge stops are just aft of roller chock assembly. g. Attach the 8-inch snatch block to sweep wire, forward of wedge stops at the three red bands (810 feet), ensuring marriage pendant passes under magnetic cable. Allow snatch block to ride free.

4E-8-2.16 Streaming to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

Maintain slack in APC at all times. a. Veer sweep wire, while paying out the APC and magnetic cable. Ensure the sweep wire carries the main load. b. Veer sweep wire to full scope (1,200 feet).

4E-8W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

c. Stop APC when 1,510-foot stocking is at roller chock assembly. d. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-8-2.17 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4E-8E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4E-8-2.18 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking. b. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye. Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-8P). c. Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a tripping lanyard. d. Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.

4E-8X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 4E-8P. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2 Sweep)

4E-8Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-8-2.19 Securing Sweep Wire.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the four red bands (1,200 feet) are at the sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-8L) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between 8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly. d. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. f. Arm Cutters Mk 15. g. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4E-8Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-8-2.20 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtails on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. g. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.

4E-8AA SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

l. Use an approved type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to safety observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box. n. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. o. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2-inch. p. Lower the terminal box cover.

4E-8-2.21 Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS. The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500 Vdc megohmmeter. b. Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as the circuit to be tested. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle. d. Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working properly. e. Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel.

4E-8AB OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

f. Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable. g. In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench. h. Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle. i. After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4E-8-2.22 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker. c. Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.

4E-8-2.23 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-8Q).

4E-8-2.24 Maneuvering Instructions. a. Turns should normally be made toward gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may sag after the ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk of fouling or damaging the sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in to the onboard marriage point during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder should be eased. If sweep wire needs to be shortened further, inboard marriage point needs to be broken. b. Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to the magnetic cable. Table 4E-8B presents increase in tensions between 6 and 8 knots. c. Sweep gear for this configuration is normally streamed to port.

Table 4E-8B. Sweep Wire Tensions

SPEED (KNOTS) CABLE TENSION (LB)

6 4,450 8 11,600

4E-8AC SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-8Q. FA2 with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration

4E-8AD OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-8-3 RECOVERY.

4E-8-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4E-8-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4E-8-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.

4E-8AE SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg). d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns. NOTE The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove lugged cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Reinstall protective boots on pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. k. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. l. Drum area crew departs drum area. m. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. n. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4E-8AF OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-8-3.4 Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. NOTE Disconnecting acoustic power cable and magnetic minesweep cable may be accomplished simultaneously at this time. a. Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable. b. In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle. c. Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug. d. Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the APC cable reel. e. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA CLEAR and departs the drum area. f. If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable, no further action is required. NOTE APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area. g. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, check area for gear adrift.

4E-8AG SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-8-3.5 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4E-8-3.6 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4E-8-3.7 Sweep Gear Recovery. a. Engage sweep wire drum and reel in sweep wire to provide slack in APC. Hold sweep wire at this scope. b. Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking. c. Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-8AH OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-8-3.8 Wedge Stops and Inboard Marriage Pendant Removal.

When reeling in the sweep wire, the APC, and the magnetic cable, ensure sweep wire always carries the main load. If necessary, cease reeling in the APC or magnetic cable. a. Simultaneously reel in on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable. b. Adjust rate of recovery of magnetic cable to ensure cable is always forward of acoustic device float. c. Stop hauling in on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable when inboard marriage pendant and wedge stops located at the three red bands (810 feet) on sweep wire are just outside of roller chock assembly. d. Remove snatch block and inboard 10-foot marriage pendant from sweep wire. e. Reel in sweep wire until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock and remove. Ensure snatch block is on deck; then remove the 10-foot pendant from APC towing stocking. f. Wrap marriage stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being stowed on cable drum.

4E-8-3.9 Short Leg Electrode Recovery/Removal. a. Heave in on short leg electrode and remove electrode floats. b. Pay out coax cable, faking K-4 electrode on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. c. Remove CK/P insulating sleeve. d. Disconnect and remove K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. e. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot (Figure 4E-8R). (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at end of boot about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

4E-8AJ SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-8R. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. f. Continue heaving in on S section. g. Stow K-4 electrode.

4E-8-3.10 Wedge Stops and Outboard Marriage Pendant Removal. a. Simultaneously reel in sweep, APC, and magnetic cable until 10-foot outboard marriage pendant and wedge stops at the two red bands (390 feet) on sweep wire are just outside roller chock assemblies. b. Remove snatch block and outboard 10-foot marriage pendant from sweep wire. c. Reel in sweep wire until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock and remove. Ensure snatch block is on deck; then remove 10-foot pendant from the APC towing stocking. d. Wrap marriage stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being stowed on cable drum.

4E-8AK OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-8-3.11 Disconnecting Diversion Towing Stocking.

When reeling in the sweep wire, the APC, and the magnetic cable, ensure sweep wire always carries the main load. If necessary, cease reeling in the APC or magnetic cable. a. Reel in simultaneously on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until 7-foot diversion towing pendant type L block (forward of wedge stops located at the one red band (360 feet) on sweep wire) is just outside roller chock assembly. b. Remove type L block of outboard 7-foot diversion towing pendant from sweep wire. c. Reel in sweep wire and APC until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock. Ensure type L block is on deck, then remove 7-foot pendant and wedge stops. d. Wrap towing stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being stowed on cable drum. e. Continue recovery of sweep wire, magnetic cable, and APC, keeping acoustic device aft of magnetic cable until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and hold until all other gear is recovered.

4E-8-3.12 Long Leg Electrode Recovery. a. Heave in on long leg electrode and sweep wire. NOTE Floats may be left on the long leg, if desired. b. When the quarter roller block and T-bar stop are outboard of the cable roller chock assembly, stop the sweep wire. c. Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop. d. Ease in magnetic cable until quarter roller block is just outboard of cable roller chock assembly. Remove quarter roller block from outboard end of K-4 electrode. e. Secure hold-back line to outboard end of long leg electrode and keep a strain on it while reeling all of K-4 electrode onto magnetic cable drum. Secure long leg to drum with this line.

4E-8-3.13 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle. c. Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4E-8-3.14 Size 1 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach.

4E-8AL SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane. Heave in until float is in lifting position under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float.

4E-8-3.15 Otter Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-8D) or storage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-8-3.16 Recovery of TB-27 and Float. a. Continue recovering APC until 50-foot towing stocking is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.

Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant. b. Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take slack out of nose line. c. Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul pendant from APC. Attach the inhaul pendant to crane whip. d. Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out of nose line. e. Heave in on inhaul pendant until the weight of Acoustic Device TB-27 is suspended by the crane and float is properly cradled.

Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from water. Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be recovered on deck. f. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously and train gear inboard and forward clearing APC and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary. g. Stow acoustic device and float on deck. h. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4E-8AM OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-8-3.17 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. Ground isolate S-Cable, if cable is being stowed, with no further sweep exercises. (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around S terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-8S).

4E-8-4 RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.

A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.

Figure 4E-8S. S-Cable Booted

4E-8AN SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-8-4.1 Preparation. a. Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail. b. Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect. NOTE Wind will generally have more effect than current. c. Stop the screw on recovery side. d. Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside. e. Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle recovery pendant to recovery wire. f. Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch. g. Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane. h. Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float. i. Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire roller chock. j. Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain. k. If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand. l. If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire. m. Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.

4E-8-5 RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB). a. Approach float from downwind. b. Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should be done without RHIB. c. Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.

4E-8AP OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4E-9 FA2A WITH TB-26 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, 11-inch (type L), NM (3940-00-809-7167) Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel (1075-00-265-0677) (3940-00-722-8995) Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM (1075-00-332-5834) (2) (3940-00-368-7551) (4) Device, acoustic, TB-26, NM (1075-01-368-2482) Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM Float, type O, size 0, NM (acoustic) (per Job Sheet (3940-00-368-7552) 4A-3) (1075-01-357-9948) Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) Float, type O, size 1, NM (moored) (per Job Sheet Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (3) 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568) Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye (4) (4030-00-290-6420) Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881) 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) CL (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) Cable Assembly, outboard pigtail (6150-01-519-0147) (12) Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch (with long leg in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) each end) (2) 1 (6) Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 (6) See footnotes at end of table.

4E-9A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as Pendant, towing (TJ), 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single leg, required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) nylon (hardeye each end) 1 (hardeye each end) 1 Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 (5305-00-226-9206) (6) Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) 1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) (hardeye each end) 1 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (35) Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, 3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484) (5) NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one 7/8-inch (4030-00-270-5485) (3) end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) (3) Pendant, marriage, 2-1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952) nylon (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1 end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) Pendant, preventer (CL), 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single Towing Jumper TJ (1075-00-732-1791) leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) Pendant, preventer (CL), 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single (20) leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as Pendant, stopper (CL), 1-1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot, single required) leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Pendant, towing, diversion, 2-1/2-inch x 7-foot, single leg, nylon (hardeye splice each end) 1 SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) * Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) Paint, enamel, white (TT-E-516) * Electrician Mate Tool Kit Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Gauge, pressure (0 to 30 psi) Rags Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490) Lacquer * Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) (whipped each end) (2) * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-9-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE This sweep utilizes blue sweep wire and APC markings.

4E-9B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-9-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4E-9-1.2 Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare one size 1 and one size 0 float in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. The size 0 float is to be used with Acoustic Device TB-26. The size 1 float for O gear (moored configuration) may utilize 10-foot float pendants. b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. c. Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4E-9-1.3 APC Preparation. a. Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.

4E-9-1.4 Acoustic Device TB-26 Preparation. a. Deck test acoustic device 24 hours prior to streaming in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040. Upon completion of test, pressurize device to 10 psi for 24 hours to ensure device is airtight. If more than a 1 psi loss of pressure is observed (indicated by soapy water bubbles), release all air pressure and take corrective action. A 20 °F drop in temperature will have a 1 psi drop in pressure. If no loss of pressure is observed and device is to be launched soon thereafter, retain air pressure in housing until final pressurizing is accomplished; otherwise, release all pressure. b. Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, shackle 3-inch ID ring to aft hole in acoustic device towing and hoisting plate using Table 4E-9A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-9A). d. Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard, clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device TB-26. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease. e. Using 3/4-inch shackles, connect one end of towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing pad (Figure 4E-9A). Wrap 3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear.

4E-9C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Table 4E-9A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Depth and Air Pressure

DEPTH TO CENTER OF PENDANT LENGTH SIZE 0 AIR DIAPHRAGM (FEET) FLOAT (FEET) PRESSURES (PSI)1

20 13 8.0 22 15 8.5 24 17 9.3 25 18 10.1 26 19 10.5 27 20 10.8 28 21 11.2 29 22 11.5 30 23 11.8 1 These air pressures for the TB-26 rising when streamed through the water.

Figure 4E-9A. Acoustic Device TB-26 Rigged for Towing

4E-9D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant. f. Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with a 3/4-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring behind float pendant connection (Figure 4E-9A). g. Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-9B shows acoustic device in a cradled position. h. Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum. i. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach nylon tail line to tail of size 0 float. j. Upon successful completion of air leak test, pressurize device to operating depth (Table 4E-9A.)

Figure 4E-9B. Acoustic Device TB-26 Cradled

4E-9E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-9-1.5 O-Type Components Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter. (1) Engage port sweep wire drum. (2) Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle between sweep wire and a 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum. (3) Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire roller chock assembly. (4) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant (Figure 4E-9C). (5) Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle. b. Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. (2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-9D).

Figure 4E-9C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)

4E-9F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-9D. Otter in Ready Release Position

(3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. (5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

4E-9-1.6 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-9E). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4E-9G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-9E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

4E-9-1.7 Towing Jumper Assembly TJ. a. Remove long leg electrode from S-Cable (if attached). b. Bring end of S-Cable and end of CL-Cable off drum, pass them through cable roller chock assembly, and prepare the TJ towing jumper for connection in accordance with Figure 4E-9F. c. Make the S/TJ and CL/TJ connections as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over the end of TJ cable and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over the ends of the S- and CL-Cable and slide out of the way. (3) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity.

4E-9H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-9F. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for FA2A Sweep Configuration

4E-9J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

(4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtail and slide back out of the way. (5) Connect each end terminal and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4E-9G). Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables. (6) Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of the S/P sleeve. (7) Slide the S/P sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.

Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should be avoided. (8) Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps (Figure 4E-9G) and tighten clamps evenly and firmly. (9) Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve. (10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of half-lapped friction tape. d. Attach one end of 3-foot TJ towing pendant to towing tab on towing jumper with a 5/8-inch shackle, and other end to quarter roller block with a 5/8-inch shackle.

4E-9-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING. NOTE Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.

4E-9-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Check air pressure in device for appropriate depth (Table 4E-9A). c. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. d. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. e. Request permission to stream gear.

4E-9-2.2 Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-26. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. a. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility.

4E-9K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-9G. Rubber Insulating Sleeve

b. Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from nose line. c. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure nose line and APC are clear of all obstructions (Figure 4E-9H, View A). d. Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride astern. e. Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-26 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect inhaul pendant. f. Bring inhaul pendant aboard through the roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing stocking. g. Slack off nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-9H). h. Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.

4E-9L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-9H. Streaming Procedure for Acoustic Device TB-26

4E-9M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. i. Pay out APC until hardeye of diversion towing stocking at first blue mark (690 feet) is forward of cable roller chock assembly. j. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-9-2.3 Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear. a. Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put the gear to the rail. c. Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-9J). d. Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. e. Tend line to bitt. f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. h. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and float pendant and nose line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4E-9D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4E-9-2.4 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock. c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion. d. Increase speed as required to assist in streaming gear. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4E-9N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-9J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4E-9P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-9-2.5 Streaming TJ Jumper Assembly. a. Mount quarter roller block (attached to 3-foot pendant and TJ towing tab) on sweep wire (Figure 4E-9E). Mouse roller block pin. b. Veer sweep wire until one blue band (360 feet) is forward of sweep wire roller chock.

4E-9-2.6 Paying Out CL-Cable and S-Cable.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Increase ship's speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming. b. Pay out S-Cable and CL-Cable together until a catenary is formed before veering sweep wire.

4E-9-2.7 Stopping Off CL-Cable. a. Pay out all three cables (APC, S, and CL) until CL preventer pendant is on deck.

During streaming, ensure the sweep wire carries the main tow load and the acoustic device remains astern of the magnetic loop. Any maneuvering of the ship during this critical period of streaming operation may foul the gear. b. Stop paying out magnetic cables and sweep wire, then attach a 1/2-inch wire rope stopper pendant to preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4E-9K) with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. c. Pay out CL-Cable until stopper pendant takes strain off cable. d. Disconnect CL drum preventer pendant from CL-Cable. Using PPE per MSDS, mark S-Cable to indicate CL-Cable reattachment point (Figure 4E-9L).

4E-9-2.8 Diversion Stocking Attachment to Sweep Wire. a. Place two wedge stops (Figure 4E-9M) back-to-nose at the one blue band (360 feet) on sweep wire (Figure 4E-9N). b. Holding magnetic gear, veer sweep wire until two blue bands (390 feet) are just inboard of sweep wire roller chock assembly. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of a 7-foot diversion towing pendant to hardeye of diversion towing stocking first blue mark (690 feet) on APC. d. Simultaneously place two wedge stops (Figure 4E-9M) back-to-nose on sweep wire at the two blue bands (390 feet).

4E-9Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-9K. Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable

Figure 4E-9L. Cable Drum Preventer Pendant

4E-9R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-9M. Wedge Stop Placement

4E-9S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-9N. Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings

4E-9T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

e. Attach 7-foot diversion towing pendant to an open 11-inch, type L block, using a 3/4-inch shackle (Figure 4E-9P, View A). f. Attach 11-inch, type L block to sweep wire forward of the one blue band (360 feet), ensuring the diversion towing pendant passes under S and CL magnetic cables (Figure 4E-9P, View A).

4E-9-2.9 APC Outboard Marriage Attachment to Sweep Wire. a. Veer sweep wire until wedge stops at the two blue bands (390 feet) are just aft of sweep wire roller chock assembly. b. Pay out APC until second blue mark (stocking at 725 feet) on cable is aft of cable roller chock assembly. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of 10-foot outboard marriage pendant to hardeye of first marriage stocking (725 feet) on APC.

Figure 4E-9P. Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment

4E-9U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

d. Attach free end of 10-foot marriage pendant to an 8-inch (type E) snatch block using a 3/4-inch shackle. e. Attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to sweep wire, forward of wedge stops at two blue bands (390 feet). Ensuring marriage pendant passes under S- and CL-Cables, allow snatch block to ride free.

4E-9-2.10 Short Leg Electrode Removal (If Necessary). a. Adjust rate of pay out of magnetic cable to maintain catenary. b. Remove lashings from short leg electrode and S-Cable (if attached). c. Rotate drum, faking K-4 electrode (if attached) on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. d. Disconnect inboard end of K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. Replace cap screws and nuts in K-4 electrode end fitting (if attached). e. Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of the K-4 electrode).

4E-9-2.11 Attachment of CL-Cable to K-4 Blank and Pigtail. a. Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of K-4 electrode). b. Attach CL-Cable to free end of K-4 blank and pigtail. Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing an insulating sleeve as follows (Figure 4E-9G): (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over free end of K-4 blank pigtail and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over CL-Cable; slide clamps out of way. (4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve (small end first) over K-4 blank pigtail, and slide back out of way. (5) Connect terminals of CL and K-4 blank pigtail cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

4E-9V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. c. Heave in on magnetic cable and disconnect wire rope stopper pendant from 6-foot towing stocking hardeye on CL-Cable. Secure hardeye to CL with tape. d. Place ten turns of 21-thread lashing around K-4 blank pigtail and coax cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank.

4E-9-2.12 APC Inboard Marriage Attachment to Sweep Wire.

To prevent damage to the acoustic cable, the APC must be slack during the streaming operation. a. Continue to veer sweep wire while paying out the APC and magnetic cable. b. Veer sweep wire until the three blue bands (720 feet) are forward of roller chock and pay out APC until the third blue mark (1,065 feet) stocking on the APC (Figure 4E-9Q) is just aft of roller chock assembly. c. Secure two wedge stops back-to-nose at the three blue bands (720 feet) on sweep wire. d. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of inboard marriage pendant to hardeye at the third red mark (1,110 feet) stocking on APC (Figure 4E-9P, View B). e. Attach free end of inboard marriage pendant to an 8-inch (type E) snatch block using a 3/4-inch shackle. f. Veer sweep wire until wedge stops are just aft of roller chock assembly. g. Attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to sweep wire, forward of wedge stops at the three blue bands (720 feet), ensuring marriage pendant passes under magnetic cable. Allow snatch block to ride free.

4E-9W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION Figure 4E-9Q. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2A Sweep)

4E-9X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-9-2.13 Streaming to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

Maintain slack in APC at all times. a. Veer sweep wire, while paying out the magnetic cable and APC, ensure the sweep wire carries the main tow load. b. Veer sweep wire to full scope (1,056 feet). c. Stop APC when 1,410-foot stocking is at roller chock assembly. d. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair cable in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-9-2.14 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4E-9E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4E-9Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-9-2.15 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking. b. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye. Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-9Q). c. Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a tripping lanyard. d. Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.

4E-9-2.16 Securing Sweep Wire.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the four blue bands (1,056 feet) are at sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawl and secure sweep wire drum. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-9M) back-to-back on sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between 8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly. d. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

4E-9Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. f. Arm Cutters Mk 15. g. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4E-9-2.17 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweep cable must satisfactorily pass meggering test before pulsing. Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area.

4E-9AA SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtail on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required. g. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive to negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known source to ensure proper operation. l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Conduct meggering test. Refer to PMS. n. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box. o. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush and fully inserted. Securing fasteners will be torqued to 40 ft-lb. p. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. q. Lower the terminal box cover.

4E-9AB OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-9-2.18 Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS. The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500 Vdc megohmmeter. b. Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as the circuit to be tested. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle. d. Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working properly. e. Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel. f. Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable. g. In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench. h. Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle. i. After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4E-9AC SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-9-2.19 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker. c. Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.

4E-9-2.20 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-9R).

4E-9-2.21 Maneuvering Instructions. a. Turns should normally be made towards gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk of fouling or damaging the sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in to marriage point inboard during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder should be eased. If sweep wire needs to be shortened further, inboard marriage point needs to be broken. b. Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic cable. Table 4E-9B presents increase in sweep wire tension between 6 and 8 knots. c. The sweep gear for this configuration is normally streamed to port.

Table 4E-9B. Sweep Wire Tensions

SPEED (KNOTS) CABLE TENSION (LB)

6 5,650 8 11,800

4E-9-3 RECOVERY.

4E-9-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4E-9AD OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-9R. FA2A with TB-26 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration

4E-9AE SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-9-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4E-9-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg). d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.

4E-9AF OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns. NOTE The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove lugged cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Install meggering device leads to cable long and short leg lugs. k. Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. l. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. m. Drum area crew departs drum area. n. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. o. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4E-9AG SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-9-3.4 Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. NOTE Disconnecting of magnetic minesweep cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable. b. In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle. c. Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug. d. Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the APC cable reel. e. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR and departs the drum area. NOTE APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area. f. If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable, no further action is required. g. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, check area for gear adrift.

4E-9AH OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-9-3.5 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4E-9-3.6 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4E-9-3.7 Sweep Gear Recovery. a. Engage sweep wire drum and reel in sweep wire to provide slack in APC. Hold sweep wire at this scope. b. Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking. c. Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-9AJ SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-9-3.8 Wedge Stop and Inboard Marriage Pendant Removal.

When reeling in the sweep wire, the APC, and the magnetic cable, ensure sweep wire always carries the main load. If necessary, cease reeling in the APC or magnetic cable. a. Reel in simultaneously on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable. b. Adjust rate of recovery of magnetic cable to ensure cable is always forward of acoustic device float. c. Stop hauling in on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable when inboard marriage pendant and wedge stops located at the three blue bands (720 feet) on sweep wire are just outside of roller chock assembly. d. Remove snatch block and inboard 10-foot marriage pendant from sweep wire. e. Reel in sweep wire until wedge stops on sweep wire are inboard of stern roller chock and remove. Ensure snatch block is on deck; then remove the 10-foot pendant from APC towing stocking. f. Wrap marriage stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being stowed on cable drum.

4E-9-3.9 Disconnecting CL-Cable from K-4 Blank and Pigtail. a. Reel in simultaneously the sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until CL to K-4 blank pigtail connection is just aft of magnetic cable drum. Hold APC and sweep wire. b. Stop off CL-Cable by attaching 1/2-inch x 5-foot stopper pendant to 6-foot preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. c. Pay out coax cable until the stopper pendant takes a strain. d. Remove insulating sleeve. e. Detach CL-Cable from K-4 blank pigtail cable. f. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug. (4) Slide two 3-1/6- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps about 1 inch apart with outer clamp about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-9S).

4E-9AK OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-9S. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover boot end with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. g. Reel in S-Cable and sweep wire until mark on S-Cable which indicates point for attaching CL-Cable to drum preventer pendant is at hand. h. Ground isolate inboard end of CL-Cable: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around CL terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of S/B boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

4E-9AL SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. i. Secure drum preventer pendant to CL-Cable. Heave in and remove 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant.

4E-9-3.10 Wedge Stops and Outboard Marriage Pendant Removal. a. Simultaneously, reel in sweep wire, magnetic cable, and APC until outboard marriage pendant and wedge stops located at two blue bands (390 feet) on sweep wire are just outside roller chock assemblies. b. Remove snatch block and outboard marriage pendant from sweep wire. c. Reel in sweep wire until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock and remove. Ensure snatch block is on deck; then remove the pendant from the APC towing stocking. d. Wrap marriage stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being stowed on cable drum.

4E-9-3.11 Disconnecting Diversion Towing Stocking.

When reeling in the sweep wire, the APC, and the magnetic cable, ensure sweep wire always carries the main load. If necessary, cease reeling in the APC or magnetic cable. a. Reel in simultaneously sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until diversion towing pendant type L block (forward of wedge stops located at the one blue band (360 feet) on sweep wire) is just outside roller chock assembly. b. Remove type L block of 7-foot diversion towing pendant from sweep wire. c. Reel in sweep wire and APC until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock. Ensure type L block is on deck, then remove 7-foot pendant and wedge stops. d. Wrap towing stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being stowed on cable drum. e. Continue recovery of sweep wire, magnetic cable, and APC, keeping acoustic device aft of magnetic cable until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and hold until all other gear is recovered.

4E-9-3.12 Magnetic Cable Recovery. a. Simultaneously reel in sweep wire and magnetic cable.

4E-9AM OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

b. Stop sweep wire and magnetic cable when T-bar stop on chafing chain is just outside roller chock assembly. c. Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop. d. Reel in remainder of S and CL-Cables simultaneously.

4E-9-3.13 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle. c. Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4E-9-3.14 Size 1 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane and heave in until float is in lifting position under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float.

4E-9-3.15 Otter Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-9D) or storage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-9-3.16 Recovery of TB-26 and Float. a. Continue recovering APC until towing stocking is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.

Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant. b. Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take slack out of nose line. c. Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip.

4E-9AN SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

d. Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out of float nose line. e. Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-26 is suspended by crane and float is properly cradled.

Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from water. Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be recovered on deck. f. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-26 simultaneously and train outboard and forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary. g. Stow acoustic device and float on deck. h. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4E-9-3.17 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. Ground isolate outboard ends of CL and S-Cable as follows: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boots. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boots over terminal lugs. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-9T).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. d. Using hold-back lines, secure outboard ends of CL-Cable and S-Cable to drums.

4E-9AP OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-9T. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical)

4E-9-4 RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.

A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.

4E-9-4.1 Preparation. a. Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail. b. Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect. NOTE Wind will generally have more effect than current. c. Stop the screw on recovery side. d. Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside. e. Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle recovery pendant to recovery wire. f. Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch. g. Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane.

4E-9AQ SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

h. Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float. i. Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire roller chock. j. Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain. k. If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand. l. If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire. m. Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.

4E-9-5 RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB). a. Approach float from downwind. b. Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should be done without RHIB. c. Haul in messenger line (if used) with the crane winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.

4E-9AR OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4E-10 FA2A WITH TB-27 COMBINATION INFLUENCE SWEEP

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions and Emergency Break Away Procedures listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel. The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel. The following procedures require handling of an explosive-loaded component. Forces afloat handle in accordance with NAVSEA OP 4.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Block, 11-inch (type L), NM (3940-00-809-7167) Cutter Mk 15 Mod 0, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) Block, quarter roller (type A), NM, with swivel (1075-00-332-5834) (2) (3940-00-722-8995) Device, acoustic, TB-27, NM (1075-01-368-2483) Block, snatch, 6-inch (type D), NM Float, type O, size 1, NM, moored (1), acoustic (1) (3940-00-368-7551) (4) (per Job Sheet 4A-3) (1075-01-371-0568) Block, snatch, 8-inch (type E), NM Hook, tripping, NM, 1-3/4-inch eye (3940-00-368-7552) (3) (4030-00-290-6420) Boot (P/B) (5970-01-519-3342) Hook, pelican, 5/8-inch with tripping wire and 3/16- x Boot (S/B) (5970-01-519-3356) (3) 3-inch cotter pin (1075-00-273-8638) Boot, insulating, inboard pigtail (5970-01-519-3342) Hook, recovery pole assembly (1075-01-392-6986) (4) Kite, multiplane, M/S, size 1 (otter) (per Job Sheet Cable, acoustic power (APC), 1,650-foot (per Job 4A-1) (1075-00-391-9280) Sheet 4A-5) (1075-00-782-9881) Line, tripping, 1-1/2-inch x 20-foot, single leg, nylon, Cable Assembly CA-1453, magnetic minesweeping, hardeye splice one end, other end whipped 1 coax (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (5995-01-517-9337) Nut, self-locking, 5/8-11UNC (0099-LL-H61-6313) Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, (12) CL (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) Pendant, device, towing/stopper (acoustic), 1/2-inch Cable Assembly CA-1454, magnetic minesweeping, x 3-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye S (per Job Sheet 4A-6) (6150-01-517-9327) each end) (2) 1 Chain, diversion, 5/8-inch x 6-foot, single leg, NM Pendant, equalizing, 1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, (with long link in middle) (4010-00-171-8906) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Clamp, hose, 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch (4730-01-143-9460) Pendant, equalizing, towing, 1/2-inch x length as (6) required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) Clamp, hose, 3-1/16- to 4-inch (4730-00-277-7132) (hardeye each end) 1 (6) Pendant, float, 5/16-inch x 10-foot, single leg, NM, Cutter Mk 9, End Assembly, NM (per Job Sheet 4A-4) wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 (1075-00-265-0677) See footnotes at end of table.

4E-10A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS (Continued) Pendant, float (acoustic), 1/2-inch x length as Pendant, towing (TJ), 2-1/2-inch x 3-foot, single required, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 (hardeye each end) 1 Ring, 3-inch ID (5365-01-346-8057) Pendant, inhaul/outhaul (acoustic), 5/8-inch x 90-foot, Screw, cap, hex hd, 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one (5305-00-226-9206) (6) end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, Pendant, marriage, 2-1/2-inch x 10-foot, single leg, 1/2-inch (4030-00-270-5482) nylon (hardeye each end) (2) 1 5/8-inch (4030-00-270-5483) (45) Pendant, otter, 1/2-inch x 60-foot, single leg, wire 3/4-inch (4030-00-270-5484) (5) rope (LHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Sleeve (S/P) (5970-01-519-3176) (3) Pendant, preventer (CL), 1/2-inch x 5-foot, single Stop, T-bar (1075-01-233-4952) leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 Sweep Wire, faired, 5/8-inch (7 x 7) x 4000-foot, Pendant, preventer (CL), 2-1/2-inch x 86-foot, single single leg, NM, wire rope (LHL) (hardeye outboard leg, nylon (hardeye each end) 1 end, inboard end whipped) (4010-01-291-1611) Pendant, stopper (CL), 1-1/2-inch x 3- to 5-foot, Towing Jumper TJ (1075-00-732-1791) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each Washer, flat, aluminum, 5/8-inch (5310-00-614-3505) end) 1 (20) Pendant, towing, diversion, 2-1/2-inch x 7-foot, single Wedge Stop, M/S, 5/8-inch (1075-01-392-6983) (as leg, nylon (hardeye splice each end) 1 required) SUPPORT ITEMS Ax, fireman’s (4210-00-142-4949) Megohmmeter, 500 Vdc Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Multimeter, analog (0 to 250 Vdc range) Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 4 (8305-00-170-5385) Paint, enamel, blue (TT-E-516) * Canvas, duck, cotton, No. 6 (8305-00-185-8652) Paint, enamel, red (TT-E-516) * Chain, safety (1075-00-559-6737) Paint, enamel, white (TT-E-516) * Electrician Mate Tool Kit Probe, shorting (5975-01-029-4176) Grease, silicone (9150-01-080-9652) * Rags Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Small Stuff, 6-thread (4020-00-231-9021) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Lacquer * Wrench, T-handle (5120-00-972-0490) Line, hold-back, 1-1/2-inch x 30-foot (21-thread) Wrench, torque, 0 to 50 ft-lb (whipped each end) (2) * Hazardous Material. 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-10-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. NOTE This sweep utilizes blue sweep wire and APC markings.

4E-10-1.1 Preparation. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel for minesweeping operations. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig for type of sweep specified in operational order.

4E-10B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-10-1.2 Float, Kite, and Sweep Wire Preparation.

For influence sweeps, the length of float pendant to otter is dependent on water depth. Two float pendants may be connected together, if required. Total length cannot exceed 20 feet. a. Prepare two size 1 floats in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-3. One float to be used with Acoustic Device TB-27, the other size 1 float is for O gear (moored configuration) and may utilize 10-foot float pendants. b. Prepare size 1 kite as an otter (port configuration) in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-1. c. Prepare port sweep wire in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-2.

4E-10-1.3 APC Preparation. a. Prepare APC in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5.

4E-10-1.4 Acoustic Device TB-27 Preparation. a. Prepare towing stocking in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-5. b. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-inch ID ring to second and fourth holes in acoustic device towing and hoisting plate. Use Table 4E-10A for depth and float pendant correlation. Connect float pendant to ring (Figure 4E-10A). c. Lead outboard end of APC aft through cable roller chock assembly; then, pull cable outboard, clear of all obstructions, and forward to acoustic device. Connect cable to Acoustic Device TB-27. If required, apply a light coat of silicone grease. d. Using 5/8-inch shackles, connect 3-foot towing pendant to hardeye of towing stocking at 6-foot mark on APC. Connect pendant’s free end to device towing/hoisting plate. Wrap 3-foot towing pendant and shackles with chafing gear (Figure 4E-10A).

Ensure inhaul pendant is connected aft of float pendant. Failure to do so could cause damage to float pendant and inhaul pendant. e. Pass hardeye of inhaul pendant down through float fairlead tube to 3-inch ID ring and attach with a 5/8-inch shackle with screw pin end on 3-inch ID ring, behind float pendant connection (Figure 4E-10A). f. Shackle softeye of inhaul pendant to crane whip, using a 1/2-inch shackle. Figure 4E-10B shows acoustic device in a cradled position.

4E-10C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Table 4E-10A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Depth and Float Pendant Correlation

DEPTH TO CENTER OF DIAPHRAGM FLOAT PENDANT LENGTH (FEET) (FEET)

20 13 22 15 24 17 25 18 26 19 27 20 28 21 29 22 30 23

Figure 4E-10A. Acoustic Device TB-27 Rigged for Towing

4E-10D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-10B. Acoustic Device TB-27 Cradled

g. Take in on crane whip until inhaul pendant is wound on cable drum. h. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach tail line to tail of size 1 float. i. Deck test acoustic device in accordance with Planned Maintenance System.

4E-10-1.5 O-Type Components Preparation. a. Connecting Otter Pendant and End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly to Otter. (1) Engage port sweep wire drum. (2) Attach 5/8-inch x 6-foot chain, with long link in the middle between sweep wire and a 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant, using 5/8-inch shackles. Five interlocking 5/8-inch shackles may be used in lieu of chain. Reel in on port sweep wire drum. (3) Lead 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant through instrumented fairlead sheave; then through sweep wire roller chock assembly.

4E-10E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

(4) Attach End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly between the otter bridle and 60-foot (LHL) otter pendant (Figure 4E-10C). (5) Connect 10-foot float pendant to 3/4-inch tow beam shackle. b. Transferring Otter to Ready Release Position. (1) Using appropriate crane, hoist otter by its lifting bail. Ensure long shackle is on otter. (2) Swing crane aft with bridle chain fittings on otter inboard, and lower otter until long shackle is just aft of quick release (MacCluney) hook on taffrail (Figure 4E-10D). (3) Engage quick release (MacCluney) hook on long shackle; set hook in secured position and secure by mousing with tripping lanyard. Attach safety chain to stanchion. (4) Disconnect crane wire whip from otter and reel in slack just short of two-blocking the crane whip. (5) Rotate crane forward. (6) Take slack out of sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is positioned at deck edge.

Figure 4E-10C. End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly Attachment (Port Configuration)

4E-10F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-10D. Otter in Ready Release Position

4E-10-1.6 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Preparation. a. Using 5/8-inch shackles, attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to the depressor instrumented sheave padeye. Attach two 6-inch (type D) snatch blocks, one each to the snatch block padeyes on deck immediately inboard of taffrail stanchions (Figure 4E-10E). b. Pass 1/2-inch equalizing towing pendant through the three blocks listed in step a above, secure block pins with two turns of seizing wire, and attach a 6-inch snatch block to each end using 5/8-inch shackles.

4E-10-1.7 Towing Jumper Assembly TJ. a. Remove long leg electrode from S-Cable (if attached). b. Bring end of S-Cable and end of CL-Cable off drum, pass them through cable roller chock assembly, and prepare the TJ towing jumper for connection in accordance with Figure 4E-10F.

4E-10G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-10E. Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly

c. Make the S/TJ and CL/TJ connections as follows: (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over the end of TJ cable and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over the ends of the S- and CL-Cable and slide out of the way. (3) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeves to aid in installing the sleeves and to increase watertight integrity. (4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve small end first, over the pigtail and slide back out of the way. (5) Connect each end terminal and secure with two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers (Figure 4E-10G). Torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. Make certain end terminals are properly oriented so the contact area of each terminal is at a longitudinal centerline of both cables.

4E-10H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-10F. TJ Jumper Assembly - Diversion Rigging for FA2A Sweep Configuration

4E-10J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-10G. Rubber Insulating Sleeve

(6) Wrap a couple of layers of dry rags over the cap screw and nuts after connecting the end terminals together and secure with electrical tape. Do not exceed the inside diameter of the S/P sleeve. (7) Slide the S/P sleeve over the connection and position evenly on terminal barrels.

Excessive tightening of sleeve or boot clamps will press a permanent groove around the lug barrels or damage the insulating sleeve and should be avoided. (8) Slide clamps over ends of sleeves and position clamps (Figure 4E-10G) and tighten clamps evenly and firmly. (9) Apply two layers of half-lapped self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape starting approximately 2 inches before and ending 2 inches after the insulated sleeve. (10) Apply two layers of half-lapped electrical insulating tape; then apply two layers of half-lapped friction tape. d. Attach one end of 3-foot TJ towing pendant to towing tab on towing jumper with a 5/8-inch shackle, and other end to quarter roller block with a 5/8-inch shackle.

4E-10K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-10-2 LAUNCHING/STREAMING. NOTE Sweep gear for this configuration is streamed to port.

4E-10-2.1 Streaming Preparations. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to launching speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling. d. Request permission to stream gear.

4E-10-2.2 Launching/Streaming Float and Acoustic Device TB-27. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. a. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. b. Pass nose line through chock and tend around mooring bitts. Heave in to remove slack from nose line. c. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously, training gear outboard to position gear for launch. Ensure float nose line and APC are clear of all deck obstructions (Figure 4E-10H, View A). d. Lower cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 into water. Slack nose line to permit float to ride astern. e. Continue to lower Acoustic Device TB-27 until it is supported by float. Move crane head until inboard and continue to pay out inhaul pendant until it can be disconnected from crane whip. Disconnect inhaul pendant. f. Bring inhaul pendant aboard through the roller chock assembly. Attach inhaul pendant to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC, using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through one eye of towing stocking. g. Slack off on nose line until gear is being towed by APC (Figure 4E-10H, View B). h. Bring nose line through the roller chock assembly. Attach nose line to towing stocking at 50-foot mark on APC using a 5/8-inch shackle passed through free eye of towing stocking.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. i. Pay out APC until hardeye of diversion towing stocking at first blue mark (690 feet) is forward of cable roller chock assembly. j. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-10L SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-10H. Streaming Procedures for Acoustic Device TB-27

4E-10M OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-10-2.3 Launching/Streaming O-Type Gear. a. Ensure ship’s speed is 4 knots. b. Request permission to put gear to the rail. c. Ensure that nose line is attached to the float with 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-10J). d. Lead nose line outboard to side on which float is to be used and in through chock. e. Tend line to bitt. f. Using appropriate articulated stern crane, lift float, tend nose line, train outboard to position float at rail. NOTE Prior to attaching Xenon flasher to flagstaff, load with batteries and verify that the photo cell is working. g. Verify Xenon flasher is secured to flagstaff for 360 degrees of visibility. h. Ensure float pendant and nose line are being tended and that float pendant and line are clear of ship and obstructions. i. Connect float pendant(s), if required, using a 5/8-inch shackle. Verify float pendant is over the outboard corner of otter. j. Engage sweep wire drum. Remove otter safety chain. Announce WIRE IS LIVE. k. Request permission to stream gear. Remove mousing from quick release (MacCluney) hook securing otter (Figure 4E-10D). Launch float and slack aft, cast nose line clear of ship.

4E-10-2.4 Tripping the Otter. a. Trip quick release (MacCluney) hook when float pendant takes strain. b. Pay out sweep wire under power until long link of 6-foot chain is just outboard of sweep wire roller chock. c. Attach a T-bar stop to long link at center of chain. Disengage sweep wire winch drum. Veer until the T-bar stop is at short stay (25-fathom scope) and check for proper diversion. d. Increase speed as required to assist in streaming gear. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane.

4E-10-2.5 Streaming TJ Jumper Assembly. a. Mount quarter roller block (attached to 3-foot pendant and TJ towing tab) on sweep wire (Figure 4E-10E). Mouse roller block pin. b. Veer sweep wire until one blue band (360 feet) is forward of sweep wire roller chock.

4E-10N SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-10J. Size 1 Float Rigged (Moored)

4E-10P OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-10-2.6 Paying Out CL-Cable and S-Cable.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action. a. Increase ship's speed as required to enhance magnetic cable streaming. b. Pay out S-Cable and CL-Cable together until a catenary is formed before veering sweep wire.

4E-10-2.7 Stopping Off CL-Cable. a. Pay out all three cables (APC, S, and CL) until CL preventer pendant is on deck.

During streaming, ensure the sweep wire carries the main tow load and the acoustic device remains astern of the magnetic loop. Any maneuvering of the ship during this critical period of streaming operation may foul the gear. b. Stop paying out magnetic cables and sweep wire, then attach a 1/2-inch wire rope stopper pendant to preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable (Figure 4E-10K) with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. c. Pay out CL-Cable until stopper pendant takes strain off cable. d. Disconnect CL drum preventer pendant from CL-Cable. Using PPE per MSDS, mark S-Cable to indicate CL-Cable reattachment point (Figure 4E-10L).

4E-10-2.8 Diversion Stocking Attachment to Sweep Wire. a. Place two wedge stops (Figure 4E-10M) back-to-nose at the one blue band (360 feet) on sweep wire (Figure 4E-10N). b. Holding magnetic gear, veer sweep wire until two blue bands (390 feet) are just inboard of sweep wire roller chock assembly. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of a 7-foot diversion towing pendant to hardeye of diversion towing stocking first blue mark (690 feet) on APC. d. Simultaneously, place two wedge stops (Figure 4E-10M) back-to-nose on sweep wire at the two blue bands (390 feet). e. Attach 7-foot diversion towing pendant to an open 11-inch, type L block using a 3/4-inch shackle (Figure 4E-10P, View A). f. Attach 11-inch, type L block to sweep wire forward of one blue band (360 feet), ensuring the diversion towing pendant passes under S and CL magnetic cables (Figure 4E-10P, View A).

4E-10Q SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-10K. Preventer Stocking on CL-Cable

Figure 4E-10L. Cable Drum Preventer Pendant

4E-10R OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-10M. Wedge Stop Placement

4E-10S SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-10N. Acoustic Power Tow Cable and Sweep Wire Markings

4E-10T OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4E-10P. Diversion Towing and Marriage Pendant Attachment

4E-10-2.9 APC Outboard Marriage Attachment to Sweep Wire. a. Veer sweep wire until wedge stops at the two blue bands (390 feet) are just aft of sweep wire roller chock assembly. b. Pay out APC until second blue mark stocking at (725 feet) on cable is aft of cable roller chock assembly. c. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of a 10-foot outboard marriage pendant to hardeye of first marriage stocking (690 feet) on APC. d. Attach free end of 10-foot marriage pendant to an 8-inch (type E) snatch block using a 3/4-inch shackle. e. Attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to sweep wire, forward of wedge stops at two blue bands (390 feet). Ensure marriage pendant passes under S and CL-Cables. Allow snatch block to ride free.

4E-10U SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-10-2.10 Short Leg Electrode Removal (If Necessary). a. Adjust rate of pay out of magnetic cable to maintain catenary. b. Remove lashings from short leg electrode and S-Cable (if attached). c. Rotate drum, faking K-4 electrode (if attached) on deck until K-4 blank pigtail connection is in a clear work area. d. Disconnect inboard end of K-4 electrode from K-4 blank pigtail. Replace cap screws and nuts in K-4 electrode end fitting (if attached). e. Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of the K-4 electrode).

4E-10-2.11 Attachment of CL-Cable to K-4 Blank and Pigtail. a. Remove K-4 blank pigtail boot (if attached in place of K-4 electrode). b. Attach CL-Cable to free end of K-4 blank and pigtail. Insulate and waterproof the connection by installing an insulating sleeve (tapered) as follows (Figure 4E-10G): (1) Clean contact surfaces of terminals with fine sandpaper. (2) Using PPE per MSDS, apply a small amount of silicone grease on the inside of the S/P insulating sleeve to aid in installing the sleeve and to increase watertight integrity. (3) Slip two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over free end of K-4 blank pigtail and two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over CL-Cable; slide clamps out of way. (4) Slip S/P insulating sleeve (small end first) over K-4 blank pigtail, and slide back out of way. (5) Connect terminals of CL and K-4 blank pigtail cables using two 5/8-11UNC-2A x 2-1/4-inch cap screws, two 5/8-11UNC self-locking nuts, and four 5/8-inch flat washers. Ensure terminals are oriented so contact area of each terminal is at longitudinal centerline of each cable; then, torque nuts to 35 ± 2 ft-lb. (6) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/P insulating sleeve. (7) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (8) Slide S/P insulating sleeve over connection and position evenly on terminal barrels. (9) Slide hose clamps over end of sleeve. Position clamps at each end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating sleeve. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (10) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side.

4E-10V OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

c. Heave in on magnetic cable and disconnect wire rope stopper pendant from 6-foot preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable. Secure hardeye to CL with tape. d. Place ten turns of 21-thread lashing around K-4 blank pigtail and coax cable to relieve towing strain on K-4 blank.

4E-10-2.12 APC Inboard Marriage Attachment to Sweep Wire.

To prevent damage to the acoustic cable, the APC must be slack during the streaming operation. a. Continue to veer sweep wire, while paying out the APC and magnetic cable. b. Veer sweep wire until the three blue bands (720 feet) are forward of roller chock and pay out APC until the third blue mark (1,065 feet) stocking on the APC (Figure 4E-10Q) is just aft of roller chock assembly. c. Secure two wedge stops back-to-nose at the three blue bands (720 feet) on sweep wire. d. Using a 3/4-inch shackle, attach one end of inboard marriage pendant to hardeye at the third blue mark (1,065-foot) stocking on APC (Figure 4E-10A). e. Attach free end of inboard marriage pendant to an 8-inch (type E) snatch block using a 3/4-inch shackle (Figure 4E-10L). f. Veer sweep wire until wedge stops are just aft of roller chock assembly. g. Attach 8-inch (type E) snatch block to sweep wire, forward of wedge stops at the three blue bands (720 feet), ensuring marriage pendant passes under magnetic cable. Allow snatch block to ride free.

4E-10-2.13 Streaming to Full Scope.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

Maintain slack in APC at all times. a. Veer sweep wire, while paying out the APC and magnetic cables, ensure the sweep wire carries the main load. b. Veer sweep wire to full scope (1,056 feet).

4E-10W SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION Figure 4E-10Q. Acoustic Cable Towing Setup (FA2A Sweep)

4E-10X OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

c. Stop APC when 1,410-foot stocking is at roller chock assembly. d. Pay out coax cable until the towing stockings on magnetic cable are forward of cable roller chock assembly, simultaneously checking for cable breaks. Repair in accordance with SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-10-2.14 Equalizing Towing Bridle Assembly Connection. a. Remove canvas chafing gear from equalizing towing bridle stockings on magnetic cable. b. Secure equalizing pendants of equalizing towing bridles to towing stockings on magnetic cable with 5/8-inch shackles. c. Ease the equalizing pendants and towing stockings through cable roller chock assembly until just aft. Secure bights of equalizing pendants in outboard snatch blocks of towing pendant (Figure 4E-10E). Secure snatch block pins with two turns of seizing wire.

To avoid damaging cables, ensure the heavy to buoyant splice is streamed awash at all times. d. Pay out magnetic cable until equalizing towing bridle takes strain.

4E-10-2.15 Stopping Off the Sweep.

Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Remove canvas chafing from APC towing stocking. b. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, attach towing pendant to the starboard instrumented sheave padeye. Attach pelican hook to the free end of towing pendant with a 5/8-inch shackle (Figure 4E-10Q). c. Secure both eyes of towing stocking into the bail of pelican hook. Install a cotter pin with a tripping lanyard. d. Pay out the APC until the towing pendant takes the strain.

4E-10Y SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-10-2.16 Securing Sweep Wire.

Do not insert lock pins when towing pawl is engaged. a. Stop veering sweep wire when the four blue bands (1,056 feet) are at sweep wire roller chock. Engage pawls and secure sweep wire drum. b. Clear all unnecessary personnel from fantail.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable, APC, and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. c. Attach two wedge stops (Figure 4E-10M) back-to-back to sweep wire aft of instrumented sheave. Attach Cutters Mk 15 to sweep wire and towing pendant of equalizing bridle, midway between 8-inch (type E) snatch block and roller chock assembly. d. Ensure fireman’s ax is on station in case of emergency break away.

After the installation and arming of the Cutters Mk 15, drum area personnel will enter or exit the drum area only through QAWTD 1-90-2.

To prevent accidental firing of Cutter Mk 15, ensure firing (trip) lanyards do not become entangled and are long enough to reach the monitoring station on the 01 level. e. Route a trip line from the 01 level to Cutters Mk 15 and secure, ensuring a straight-line pull to cutters. f. Arm Cutters Mk 15. g. Safety Observer makes reports to the bridge and drum area personnel that THE CUTTERS MK 15 ARE ARMED AND THE TRIP LANYARDS ARE LAID OUT.

4E-10Z OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-10-2.17 Connecting Magnetic Power Cable to Terminal Box.

Minesweep cable must satisfactorily pass meggering test before pulsing. Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Servicing the terminal box or connecting and disconnecting the magnetic minesweeping cable shall be accomplished by a qualified minesweep electrician. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. NOTE Connecting magnetic cable and acoustic cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Ensure HPU has been secured prior to entering drum area. b. Obtain permission from CO/OOD before entering drum area. c. Minesweep electrician enters the drum area from the port side to ensure that the SAFE/RUN switch is in the SAFE position and make report to Safety Observer. d. Drum area crew enters the drum area. e. Drum area crew removes magnetic cable from reel and places lugged ends of inboard pigtail on electrical rubber matting. f. Minesweep electrician inspects sleeves attaching inboard pigtails to cable winch termination for insulating cracks and breaks and make repairs as required. g. Minesweep electrician removes protective boots from cable ends. h. Minesweep electrician opens the terminal box. i. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. j. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking, conductors to ground and conductor to conductor for the cable and ground to terminal and long leg to short leg terminals (positive too negative) in the terminal box. k. Again check the multimeter to a known DC source to ensure proper operation.

4E-10AA SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

l. Use an approved type ground rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box and magnetic minesweep cable. When complete make report to Safety Observer NO APPARENT VOLTAGE. m. Conduct meggering test. Refer to PMS. n. Using sandpaper, sand the male lugs of the cable and the female contact areas of the terminal box. o. Drum area crew will connect the magtail to the terminal box, ensuring that connections are flush andfullyinserted.Securingfastenerswillbetorquedto35±2ftlb. p. Using 6-thread, maintain the tightness of the cable so that there are no air gaps greater than 1/2 inch. q. Lower the terminal box cover.

4E-10-2.18 Connecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN, before entering drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Measure insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable prior to making connections to power outlet in accordance with PMS. The PCU operator shall exit drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. a. Verify measurement of insulation resistance of acoustic device and cable, with an approved 500 Vdc megohmmeter. b. Verify power is secured prior to connecting the APC. This is accomplished by checking the plug receptacle with a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) that has been checked against a known DC source to ensure proper operation. The source should be the same type and voltage range as the circuit to be tested. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using a multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range), checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor in the acoustic power receptacle. d. Recheck the multimeter to the known DC source to ensure the multimeter is still working properly.

4E-10AB OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

e. Remove inboard end of APC cable from interior of APC cable reel. f. Remove protective boot from inboard end of APC cable. g. In a straight line, connect APC cable to receptacle and tighten gland nut using T-handle wrench. h. Remove cover from acoustic cable receptacle. i. After the magnetic and APC cable connections have been made, secure the drum area on the port and starboard sides with DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, creating any entry barrier. Ensure no gear adrift is left in drum area.

4E-10-2.19 Departing the Drum Area. a. Minesweep electrician places SAFE/RUN switch in RUN position and makes report to Safety Observer that DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE RUN POSITION, then departs drum area. b. Clear danger tags from PCU and minesweep generator circuit breaker. c. Energize PCU, start acoustic device and transfer control to ACU.

4E-10-2.20 Towing the Sweep. a. Notify bridge that all gear is fully streamed and secured on deck. b. Increase headway to sweep speed. c. Observe and record tension readings from instrumented fairlead sheaves. d. Verify correct operation of sweep gear (Figure 4E-10R).

4E-10-2.21 Maneuvering Instructions. a. Turns should normally be made toward gear and may be up to 180 degrees. Sweep wire may sag after ship has turned about 60 degrees. To avoid excessive sagging and consequential risk of fouling or damaging sweep gear, sweep wire should be shortened in to the marriage point inboard during turn and veered again to full scope upon completion of turn. If chafing is evident, rudder should be eased. If sweep wire needs to be shortened further, inboard marriage point needs to be broken. b. Speeds in excess of 6 knots are not recommended due to the danger of damage to magnetic cable. Table 4E-10B presents increase in tensions between 6 and 8 knots. c. Sweep gear for this configuration is normally streamed to port.

Table 4E-10B. Sweep Wire Tensions

SPEED (KNOTS) CABLE TENSION (LB)

6 5,650 8 11,800

4E-10AC SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-10R. FA2A with TB-27 Combination Influence Sweep Configuration

4E-10AD OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-10-3 RECOVERY.

4E-10-3.1 Preparation. a. Set minesweeping detail. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. b. Slow to recovery speed (4 knots). Adjust speed as required. c. Set course into wind or sea, if practicable, to reduce rolling.

4E-10-3.2 Reentering the Drum Area.

Minesweeping DC contactors, solid state pulse circuit breakers, and Power Converter Unit (PCU) shall be DANGER tagged OPEN before entering the drum area. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. Ensure that a person who is capable of rendering first aid for electric shock is on the scene and not involved in handling or rigging of the cables. Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. a. Transfer control from ACU to PCU and ensure ACU is secured. b. Verify that DC contactor or SSPG circuit breaker and PCU has been DANGER tagged OPEN. c. Ensure HPU is secured. d. Obtain permission from the CO/OOD to enter the drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2. e. Minesweep electrician enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2 and turns SAFE/RUN switch to the SAFE position. f. Minesweep electricians reports to Safety Observer SAFE/RUN SWITCH IS IN THE SAFE POSITION.

4E-10-3.3 Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable.

Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed. Stand clear of magtail if another minecraft is pulsing within 1,000 yards. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. a. Check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation.

4E-10AE SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Minesweep electrician secures terminal box cover in the open position. c. Check to ensure that there is no voltage present using an analog multimeter (0 to 250 Vdc range) checking conductors to ground and conductor to conductor (long to short leg). d. Again check multimeter to a known DC electrical source to ensure proper operation. e. Use an approved-type grounding rod to discharge any static electrical charge from terminal box while the magnetic minesweep cable is connected. Make NO APPARENT VOLTAGE report to the safety officer. f. Drum area crew enters drum area through QAWTD 1-90-2.

Cable may be hot to the touch after pulsing. Use gloves if necessary when handling cable to prevent burns. NOTE The 6-thread line may be removed at this time to facilitate easier handling of cable. Disconnecting magnetic minesweep cable and Cutter Mk 15 may be accomplished simultaneously. g. Minesweep electrician loosen connection fasteners inside tail box. h. Minesweep electrician and tail box riggers remove lugged cable ends from terminal box and carefully place them on electrical rubber matting. i. Close and secure, terminal box. j. Install meggering device leads to cable long and short leg lugs. k. Reinstall protective boots on inboard pigtail cable connectors and secure them with several wraps of plastic electrical tape. l. Restow inboard end of cable on cable drum. m. Drum area crew departs drum area. n. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE signs. Check area for gear adrift. o. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR, and departs drum area.

4E-10AF OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-10-3.4 Disconnecting the Acoustic Power Cable.

Hydraulic power unit shall be de-energized prior to personnel working on the inboard end of the cable or while in the drum area. Prior to removing or reattaching bitter end of the APC to or from the cable drum, a towing pendant must be placed on the acoustic cable. When connecting and disconnecting cables, minesweep electrician shall wear Class-O (Red Label - 1000V) type electrical rubber gloves that meet PMS standards. Electrical power from the terminal box is capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Use extreme caution when working on electrical connections or when cable is being pulsed.

APC drum must not be operated at rated load with less than three turns of cable on the drum. NOTE Disconnecting of magnetic cable acoustic cable may be accomplished simultaneously. a. Using the T-Handle wrench, electrician loosens the APC gland nut at the APC receptacle, and slides it back off from the bitter end of the cable. b. In a straight line pull, remove cable from the receptacle. c. Reinstall the APC receptacle non-conducting plug. d. Reinstall the APC inboard end protective boot and secure inboard cable end to the interior of the APC cable reel. e. Minesweep electrician makes report to Safety Observer, APC IS DISCONNECTED AND CABLE IS SECURED, DRUM AREA IS CLEAR and departs the drum area. f. If procedure is being performed in conjunction with Disconnecting the Magnetic Minesweep Cable, no further action is required. NOTE APC handlers may assist other personnel still working in the drum area. g. If all other work in the drum area is done at this time, remove the DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE signs, check area for gear adrift.

4E-10AG SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4E-10-3.5 Cutter Removal.

Cutters are capable of causing serious injury or death to personnel. Always treat cutters with the same respect as a loaded gun. Ensure all safety pins are installed. a. Cutter Mk 15 installers disarm and remove cutter in accordance with Job Sheet 4A-4. This can be accomplished while disconnecting the magnetic power cable. b. Reman fantail. c. Request permission to recovery gear.

4E-10-3.6 Coax Cable Recovery.

To prevent stray magnetic fields and eddy currents that could endanger the ship, when paying out/retrieving cable, visually inspect for breaks in insulation jacket or sleeves. Report suspected cable damage to minesweep electrician for appropriate action.

To avoid damage, stack cable on drum utilizing level wind assembly. When possible, avoid use of tools or devices that force cable into position on the drum. Inspect cable as it is recovered. a. Energize cable drum hydraulic power unit. b. Heave in on cable and remove snatch blocks and towing pendants of equalizing towing bridle as they come within reach. c. Lash towing stocking hardeyes against cable, taking care to prevent cable damage from hardeyes. Install canvas chafing. d. Continue heaving in on coax section.

4E-10-3.7 Sweep Gear Recovery. a. Engage sweep wire drum and reel in sweep wire to provide slack in APC. Hold sweep wire at this scope. b. Heave in on APC, remove pelican hook, chafe towing stocking. c. Inspect cables for cuts, abrasions, and cracks as cables come onboard, making minor repairs to cables per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4E-10AH OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4E-10-3.8 Wedge Stops and Inboard Marriage Pendant Removal.

When reeling in the sweep wire, the APC, and the magnetic cable, ensure sweep wire always carries the main load. If necessary, cease reeling in the APC or magnetic cable. a. Simultaneously reel in sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable. b. Adjust rate of recovery of magnetic cable to ensure cable is always forward of acoustic device float. c. Stop hauling in on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable when inboard marriage pendant and wedge stops located at the three blue bands (720 feet) on sweep wire are just outside of roller chock assembly. d. Remove snatch block and inboard 10-foot marriage pendant from sweep wire. e. Reel in sweep wire until wedge stops on sweep wire are inboard of stern roller chock and remove. Ensure snatch block is on deck; then remove the 10-foot pendant from APC towing stocking. f. Wrap marriage stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being stowed on cable drum.

4E-10-3.9 Disconnecting CL-Cable From K-4 Blank and Pigtail. a. Reel in simultaneously the sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until CL to K-4 blank pigtail connection is just aft of magnetic cable drum. Hold APC and sweep wire. b. Stop off CL-Cable by attaching 1/2-inch x 5-foot stopper pendant to 6-foot preventer stocking hardeye on CL-Cable with a 5/8-inch shackle. Using a 5/8-inch shackle, secure other end to port instrumented sheave padeye. c. Pay out coax cable until the stopper pendant takes a strain. d. Remove insulating sleeve. e. Detach CL-Cable from K-4 blank pigtail cable. f. Ground isolate K-4 blank pigtail: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of P/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide P/B insulating boot over K-4 blank pigtail terminal lug. (4) Slide two 3-1/16- to 4-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-10S).

4E-10AJ SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-10S. K-4 Blank Pigtail Booted

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. g. Reel in S-Cable and sweep wire until mark on S-Cable which indicates point for attaching CL-Cable to drum preventer pendant is at hand. h. Ground isolate inboard end of CL-Cable: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around CL terminal lug at cap screw and nut area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boot. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boot over terminal lug. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of S/B boot. Position clamps at end about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart.

4E-10AK OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. i. Secure drum preventer pendant to CL-Cable. Heave in and remove 1/2-inch x 5-foot wire rope stopper pendant.

4E-10-3.10 Wedge Stops and Outboard Marriage Pendant Removal. a. Simultaneously reel in sweep wire, magnetic cable, and APC until 10-foot outboard marriage pendant and wedge stops at the two blue bands (390 feet) on sweep wire are just outside the roller chock assemblies. b. Remove snatch block and outboard marriage pendant from sweep wire. c. Reel in sweep wire until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock and remove. Ensure snatch block is on deck; then remove the pendant from the APC towing stocking. d. Wrap marriage stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being stowed on cable drum.

4E-10-3.11 Disconnecting Diversion Towing Stocking.

When reeling in the sweep wire, the APC, and the magnetic cable, ensure sweep wire always carries the main load. If necessary, cease reeling in the APC or magnetic cable. a. Reel in simultaneously on sweep wire, APC, and magnetic cable until diversion towing pendant type L block (forward of wedge stops located at the one blue band (360 feet) on sweep wire) is just outside the roller chock assembly. b. Remove type L block of 7-foot diversion towing pendant from sweep wire. c. Reel in sweep wire and APC until wedge stops are inboard of stern roller chock. Ensure type L block is on deck, then remove 7-foot pendant and wedge stops. d. Wrap towing stocking with canvas chafing to prevent damage to APC while cable is being stowed on cable drum. e. Continue recovery of sweep wire, magnetic cable, and APC, keeping acoustic device aft of magnetic cable until approximately 50 feet of buoyant section remains outboard, and hold until all other gear is recovered.

4E-10-3.12 Magnetic Cable Recovery. a. Simultaneously reel in sweep wire and magnetic cable.

4E-10AL SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

b. Stop sweep wire and magnetic cable when T-bar stop on 6-foot chain is just outside the roller chock assembly. c. Remove quarter roller block from diversion chain on sweep wire. Remove T-bar stop. d. Simultaneously reel in remainder of S and CL-Cables.

4E-10-3.13 O-Type Gear Recovery. a. Remove tripping hook from whip of articulated stern crane. b. Secure quick recovery hook (less handle) or grapnel to whip with 5/8-inch shackle. c. Heave in on sweep wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is at sweep wire roller chock. d. Disengage sweep wire drum.

4E-10-3.14 Size 1 Float Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane head outboard. b. Recover float pendant with a boat hook. c. Heave in on float pendant until float nose line is within reach. d. Walk nose line forward under articulated stern crane and heave in until float is in lifting position under crane. Remove flagstaff from float. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on float. e. Recover float and disconnect float pendant by tripping pelican hook. f. Remove emergency recovery pendant. g. Stow float.

4E-10-3.15 Otter Recovery. a. Train appropriate articulated stern crane outboard. b. Secure quick recovery hook or grapnel to lifting bail on otter. c. Lift otter and place in ready release position (Figure 4E-10D) or storage rack on fantail. d. Attach safety chain. Sweep wire is now dead. e. Return and restow articulated stern crane, if not needed.

4E-10-3.16 Recovery of TB-27 and Float. a. Continue recovering APC until 50-foot towing stocking is just aft of cable roller chock assembly.

Ensure nose line is clear of APC and inhaul pendant. b. Detach nose line from APC and pass through stern chock. Tend around mooring bitts. Take slack out of nose line. c. Train articulated stern crane outboard and, with stern crane head inboard, detach inhaul pendant from APC. Attach inhaul pendant to crane whip.

4E-10AM OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. Heave in on articulated stern crane whip and inhaul wire connection, keeping slack out of nose line. e. Heave in on inhaul pendant until weight of Acoustic Device TB-27 is suspended by the crane and float is properly cradled.

Ensure float is properly seated in its cradle before hoisting device from water. Ensure enough APC is streamed to allow acoustic device and float to be recovered on deck. f. Hoist cradled float and Acoustic Device TB-27 simultaneously and train outboard and forward, clearing acoustic cable and nose line from stern obstructions. Slack nose line as necessary. g. Stow acoustic device and float on deck. h. Notify bridge all gear is clear.

4E-10-3.17 Securing Gear. a. Clean, inspect, and return all components to proper storage. Conduct required PMS. b. Replace or repair defective parts as necessary. c. Ground isolate inboard end of CL connector: (1) Wrap dry rag(s) around terminal lugs at cap screw and but area making certain that thickness around wrapping does not exceed inside diameter of S/B insulating boots. (2) Secure rags in place with one wrap of 3/4-inch friction tape between cap screws. (3) Slide S/B insulating boots over terminal lugs. (4) Slide two 2-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch hose clamps over end of boot. Position clamps about 1 inch apart with outer clamps about 1/2 inch from end of insulating boot. Rotate clamps so securing screws on each end are 180 degrees apart (Figure 4E-10T).

Avoid tightening the clamps excessively to prevent the formation of grooves in the terminal barrels. (5) Tighten clamps evenly and firmly and cover sleeve ends with two layers of half-lapped rubber self-vulcanizing insulating tape, two layers half-lapped electrical black tape and two layers of half-lapped friction tape, continuing tape several inches past the clamps on each side. d. Using hold-back lines, secure outboard ends of CL-Cable and S-Cable to drums.

4E-10AN SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4E-10T. S- or CL-Cable Booted (Typical)

4E-10-4 RECOVERY OF DAMAGED (CUT OR PARTED) GEAR.

A mine could be fouled in the gear; proceed with caution.

4E-10-4.1 Preparation. a. Lead a recovery wire from a free winch drum or the gypsy head on sweep wire winch, through sweep wire roller chock, and outboard of taffrail to recovery position on fantail. b. Approach float upwind or upcurrent, whichever has greatest effect. NOTE Wind will generally have more effect than current. c. Stop the screw on recovery side. d. Hook float with a grapnel or boat hook and haul float alongside. e. Hook softeye quick recovery pendant and pull pendant free from flagstaff socket. Shackle recovery pendant to recovery wire. f. Hook crane whip into float lifting pad and take a strain on recovery wire with winch. g. Heave in on recovery wire and crane whip simultaneously, keeping strain on recovery wire so weight of sweep gear is not taken by crane.

4E-10AP OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

h. Hoist float and trip pelican hook to release float pendant. Stow float. i. Continue heaving in on recovery wire until End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly is up close to sweep wire roller chock. j. Utilizing articulated stern crane, stow otter in the quick recovery hook in ready release position or on stowage rack on fantail. Attach safety chain. k. If severed end of the sweep wire is in sight, recover by hand. l. If severed end of the sweep wire is not in sight, secure a cable grip on severed sweep wire. m. Remove End Cutter Mk 9 Assembly and recover sweep wire.

4E-10-5 RECOVERY OF PARTED GEAR USING RIGID HULL INFLATABLE BOAT (RHIB). a. Approach float from downwind. b. Retrieve the float nose line and attach messenger line (if required). If possible, recovery should be done without RHIB. c. Haul in messenger line (if used) with the winch/gypsy head until the float is in lifting position. In either method of recovery, when float is in a lifting position, haul it aboard and stow.

4E-10AQ/(4E-10AR blank)

OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4F-1 MK 12 MOD 0, TYPE-3, DAN BUOY (SINGLE AND DOUBLE)

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in injury or death to personnel. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Anchor, Danforth, 30-lb (2040-00-287-9702) Nut, 1/4-20UNC (5310-00-903-5966) (3) Bolt, 1/4-20UNC x 1-3/4-inch (5306-00-087-1630) (3) Nut (5310-00-767-0445) Bolt, 5/16-18UNC x 1-3/4-inch (5306-00-727-4578) Pendant, recovery (dan buoy), 1/4-inch x 30-foot, (2) single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye swage Buoy Assembly, Dan, type 3, NM one end, other end 12-inch softeye) 3 (2050-01-216-9251) 1 Reflector, radar, 8-inch spherical (5840-01-216-9252) Chain, chafing, 3/8-inch x 3-foot (4010-00-599-6737) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 3/8-inch, as required (2) 1 (8 per single, 11 per double) (4030-00-270-5480) Chain, chafing, 3/8-inch x 8-foot (4010-00-274-3033) 2 Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767) Clump Assembly, lead Tube, counterweight, 6-foot stainless steel Hanger Assembly (4220-01-291-9640) 1 (6670-01-216-9246) Weight, lead (4220-01-291-9641) 1 Washer, lock (5310-00-974-6623) Counterweight Assembly, 48 lb, Washer, lock, 1/4-inch (5310-00-933-8121) (3) cylindrical/hemispherical both ends Wire, mooring, 1/4-inch diameter, single leg, hardeye (1075-01-231-4621) each end, 740 feet total, in lengths specified Flag (red and yellow) (8345-00-233-4109) below. Set consists of: 3 Flasher, Xenon (9905-01-216-9250) 20 feet, seven lengths Float Assembly (1075-01-216-9247) 100 feet, one length Guard, lens (6210-01-231-4622) 200 feet, one length Line, grasp (Dan/MRB), 1-1/2-inch x 35-foot, single 300 feet, one length leg, nylon, with electrode floats attached 3 Zinc collar (3040-01-216-9249) Mast Assembly (5985-01-217-7726) (includes light housing weldment) SUPPORT ITEMS Battery, D, carbon (6135-00-120-1020) Marline (4020-00-240-2185) Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Small Stuff, 21-thread (4020-00-231-2572) Grip, Klein, 3/16-inch to 1/2-inch (5120-00-238-4436) Twine, sail Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Hook, snap, 1-1/8-inch x 6-1/2-inch (5340-00-200-8823) 1 Additional unit required for double Dan buoy assembly. 2 Used as a chafing chain only in the single float assembly. In the double Dan buoy assembly, the chain is used as a span pendant to connect the main and auxiliary floats. 3 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4F-1A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4F-1-1 RIGGING SINGLE DAN BUOY.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire.

4F-1-1.1 Preparation of Single Dan Buoy. a. On either side of fantail, lay buoy float with counterweight end aft. b. Insert counterweight tube into flat end of float and ensure stop ring engages shoulder inside float socket (Figure 4F-1A). c. Using two 5/16-18UNC x 1-3/4-inch bolts, connect 48-pound counterweight to counterweight tube. d. Attach zinc collar to counterweight tube at necked down location using screws provided. NOTE If long links are not on chafing chains, 3/8-inch shackles may be added, one for each end. e. Using two 3/8-inch shackles, connect a 3/8-inch x 8-foot chafing chain to mounting plate on bottom of float. Attach a 3/8-inch shackle to bitter end of chafing chain. f. Secure buoy to taffrail (outboard) with 21-thread.

4F-1-1.2 Preparation of Spherical Radar Reflector. a. Verify Xenon flasher operates prior to installation. b. Attach cast aluminum lens guard to upper mast using 1/4-20UNC x 1-3/4-inch bolts, 1/4-20UNC nuts, and 1/4-inch lockwashers. c. Thread Xenon flasher into upper end of light housing. d. Fasten spherical radar reflector on mounting surface of lens guard using nut provided. e. Ensure cotter pins are installed. f. Tape mounting screws and bolts. g. Insert assembled mast into float socket.

4F-1-1.3 Securing Flag to Mast. a. Using marline, take three full turns through grommet and secure with two half hitches. b. Allowing 1-inch of slack, secure top of flag, using three full turns around mast at base of lens guard secured with two half hitches. c. Secure bottom of flag to mast using method described in previous step. d. Cover three turns of marline at top and bottom with two layers of electrical tape to prevent movement of flag up and down mast.

4F-1B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4F-1A. Rigging Single Dan Buoy, Type 3

4F-1C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4F-1-1.4 Rigging Clump and Danforth Anchor. a. Assemble lead clump assembly for 100 pounds by placing one (1) additional weight on the hanger assembly. b. Position lead clump assembly and Danforth anchor as far outboard of taffrail on fantail as possible. c. Using 3/8-inch shackles, connect two 3/8-inch x 3-foot chafing chains to padeye of lead clump assembly. d. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, connect free end of one 3-foot chafing chain to Danforth anchor.

4F-1-1.5 Preparation of Mooring Wire. a. When rigged, the 3/8-inch shackle on free end of 8-foot chafing chain, attached to float, will allow mooring wire to pass down through it, but it will not allow the 3/8-inch shackle attaching the mooring wire to the recovery pendant to pass through it (Figure 4F-1A). b. Lead bitter end of mooring wire (Table 4F-1A) outboard of all obstructions to free end of 8-foot chafing chain. c. Run mooring wire through 3/8-inch shackle on free end of 8-foot chafing chain and attach it to thimble end of recovery pendant, using a 3/8-inch shackle. d. Using a 3/8-inch shackle and 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel, connect free end of mooring wire to free end of 3-foot chafing chain on lead clump assembly (Figure 4F-1A).

Table 4F-1A. Type 3 Dan Buoy - Length of Mooring and Approximate Offset for Various Depths and Currents

MAXIMUM CURRENT IN BUOYING AREA (KNOTS)

DEPTH 1 23412 3 4 RANGE (FATHOMS) LENGTH OF APPROXIMATE OFFSET RANGE MOORING WIRE (FEET) (YARDS)

SINGLE DAN

5-10 80 100 -- -- 15-10 20-15 -- -- 10-15 100 140 — -- 20-10 35-25 — -- 15-20 140 200 — -- 25-15 64-45 — -- 20-30 220 -- — — 40-30 ------30-40 300 -- — — 60-45 -- -- — 40-50 400 -- -- — 80-60 -- -- — DOUBLE DAN

10-15 — — 140 — -- -- 30-25 -- 15-20 — 160 180 — — 35-25 45-35 -- 20-30 — 240 280 -- — 55-40 70-60 -- 30-40 — 320 -- -- — 70-55 -- -- 40-60 440 480 -- -- 90-60 110-80 -- -- 60-80 580 800 -- -- 120-80 220-170 -- -- 80-100 760 ------160-110 -- — -- 100-125 980 ------200-150 — — — 125-150 1160 ------250-190 — -- —

4F-1D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4F-1-1.6 Preparation of Grasp Line. NOTE The grasp line has 30 cellular rubber disc floats (ex-electrode floats), spaced 1 foot apart. a. Splice a 1-1/8-inch snap hook to 1-1/2-inch grasp line. b. Each disc float is attached to a 1-1/2-inch circumference nylon line by tying an overhand knot in the line, feeding float onto the line to the knot, and then tying another overhand knot to secure float placement. Attach first float 5 feet from snap hook end of line; continue attaching floats in same manner, 1 foot apart, until 30 floats are on grasp line. Giving a total length of 35 feet. c. Connect snap hook of grasp line to eye in recovery pendant.

4F-1-2 LAYING SINGLE DAN BUOY AND ANCHOR.

Buoy laying is an extremely hazardous operation. Any line used in buoy laying must be free running. All personnel must stay clear of bights of line that will be pulled overboard. a. Establish sound powered phone communications with fantail-to-bridge. b. Insert upper mast assembly into top of float. Using small stuff, secure lens guard assembly to ring at top of float. c. Using tape (two turns), attach recovery pendant to upper mast assembly, 1 foot above float (Figure 4F-1A). d. Position personnel for launching buoy, lead clump assembly, anchor and grasp line. e. Begin streaming bight of mooring wire 200 yards prior to buoy planting position. f. On command, kick anchor/lead clump assembly over the side, cut 21-thread to release buoy, and push buoy away from taffrail.

4F-1-3 RECOVERY OF SINGLE DAN BUOY AND ANCHOR.

4F-1-3.1 Dan Buoy Recovery. a. Station one man with a sound-powered phone near the articulated stern crane operator and one man in position to connect crane whip to recovery pendant.

Avoid a windward approach to buoy. Wind will set ship on buoy. Ensure ship's screws are not fouled. NOTE If it is necessary to break Danforth anchor free of bottom, an upwind approach is preferred. b. Approach buoy with the grasp line either astern or parallel to ship.

4F-1E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

c. Using a boat hook or grapnel, hook grasp line and recovery pendant. Attach crane whip to recovery pendant with a 1/2-inch shackle. Disconnect and recover grasp line.

Using the articulated stern crane, heave in slowly as shackles pass over sheave when attached to the crane whip. d. Heave in with articulated stern crane, and swing and lower Dan buoy assembly and lead clump/anchor assembly to deck. e. Disconnect mooring wire. f. Clean, stow and secure all gear.

4F-1-4 RIGGING DOUBLE DAN BUOY.

4F-1-4.1 Preparation of First Buoy. a. Prepare one float in same manner as a single Dan buoy.

4F-1-4.2 Rigging Clumps and Danforth Anchor. a. Assemble two lead clump assemblies for 100 pounds each, by placing one additional weight on each hanger assembly. b. Position lead clump assemblies and Danforth anchor as far outboard of taffrail on fantail as possible. c. Using 3/8-inch shackles, connect two 3/8-inch x 3-foot chafing chains to padeye of both lead clump assemblies. d. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, connect free end of one chafing chain to Danforth anchor.

4F-1-4.3 Preparation of Auxiliary Float (Second Buoy). a. Lay auxiliary float alongside first float, and attach a 3/8-inch shackle to mounting plate on bottom of second float. b. Attach a second 3/8-inch shackle to 3/8-inch shackle on bottom of auxiliary float. c. Attach 3/8-inch shackle already attached to free end of 8-foot chafing chain attached to float, to a 3/8-inch shackle on bottom of auxiliary float. d. Secure buoys to taffrail (outboard) with 21-thread.

4F-1-4.4 Preparation of Mooring Wire. a. When rigged, the 3/8-inch free shackle on second float will allow mooring wire to pass up through it, but it will not allow the 3/8-inch shackle attaching mooring wire to recovery pendant to pass through it. b. Lead bitter end of mooring wire (Table 4F-1A) outboard of all obstructions auxiliary buoy. c. Run mooring wire through free 3/8-inch shackle on second float and attach it to thimble end of recovery pendant, using a 3/8-inch shackle on the auxiliary buoy.

4F-1F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. Attach recovery pendant to chafing chain approximately 2 feet from each float with sail twine. This will relieve strain and prevent pulling pendant loop from upper mast. e. Using a 3/8-inch shackle and 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel, connect free end of mooring wire to free end of second 3-foot chafing chain on lead clump assembly.

4F-1-4.5 Preparation of Grasp Line. a. Repeat procedures used in paragraph 4F-1-1.6.

4F-1-5 LAYING DOUBLE DAN BUOY AND ANCHOR.

Buoy laying is an extremely hazardous operation. Any line used in buoy laying must be free running. All personnel must stay clear of bights of line that will be pulled overboard. Ensure sufficient standby is given. a. The double Dan buoy is laid in same manner as single Dan buoy (Figure 4F-1B). Repeat procedures used in paragraph 4F-1-2.

4F-1-6 DOUBLE DAN BUOY AND ANCHOR RECOVERY. a. The double Dan buoy is recovered in same manner as single Dan buoy. Repeat procedures used in paragraph 4F-1-3.

4F-1G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4F-1B. Rigging Double Dan Buoy

4F-1H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4F-2 F MK 6 MOD 0, MASTER REFERENCE BUOY

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in injury or death to personnel. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS Anchor, Danforth, 30-lb (2040-00-287-9702) Pendant, winch (MRB), 3/16-inch x 72-foot, single leg, Arms, cross, 1/4-inch x 6-foot, aluminum NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye one end, other end (1075-00-905-0701) (2) whipped) 1 Bolt, 3/8-16UNC-2A x 3-1/2-inch, CRES Pin, cotter, 1/16-inch x 3-inch, CRES (5306-00-905-0698) (2) (5315-00-182-4173) (19) Bolt, machine, hex, 1/4-20 x 1-3/4-inch Plate, end, 1/4-inch x 7-inch (1075-00-905-0703) (2) (5306-00-087-1630) (3) Reflector, radar (5840-01-216-9252) Bushing, 2-inch x 1-1/16-inch (aluminum) x 2-foot Screw, 3/8-16UNC-2A x 2-3/4-inch, CRES (1075-00-905-0700) (5305-00-964-0635) (2) Chain, chafing, 3/8-inch x 3-foot (4010-00-599-6737) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 3/8-inch Chain, chafing, 3/8-inch x 8-foot (4010-00-274-3033) (4030-00-270-5480) (8) Clip, wire rope, 3/16-inch, NM (4020-00-778-8899) (2) Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767) Clump Assembly, lead Thimble, 1/8-inch (4030-00-262-1890) Hanger Assembly (4220-01-291-9640) Thimble, NM, 3/16-inch (4030-00-171-4912) Pin, lock (5315-01-217-7726) (2) Tube, lower, 2-inch x 18-foot, aluminum Weight, lead (4220-01-291-9641) (5) (4710-00-905-0704) Counterweight, 2-inch x 8-foot, CRES Tube, upper, 1-1/2-inch x 18-foot aluminum (1075-00-104-6942) (4710-00-905-0708) Eye Bolt, with nut, 3/8-inch x 3-1/2-inch, CRES Washer, 3/16-inch x 3-inch (1075-00-905-0699) (8) (5306-00-905-0698) (4) Washer, lock, 1/4-inch (5310-00-933-8121) (3) Flag (red and yellow) (8345-00-233-4109) (5) Washer, lock, 3/8-inch (5310-00-984-7042) (5) Flasher, Xenon (9905-01-216-9250) Washer, lock, 7/16-inch (5310-00-973-8786) Float, 10-1/2-inch x 30-inch (1075-00-104-6941) (4) Weldment Light Housing (5985-01-216-9248) Line, grasp (Dan/MRB), 1-1/2-inch x 35-foot, single Winch, 500-lb capacity, positive locking, CRES leg, nylon, with electrode floats attached 1 (3950-00-691-4110) Nut, M10 x 1.5-6G (5310-01-176-5555) Wire, mooring, 1/8-inch, NM (hardeye each end) (for Nut, 3/8-16UNC-2B (5310-00-913-8881) (5) depth over 30-fathoms) 2 Nut, plain hex, 1/4-inch CRES (5310-00-903-5966) Wire, mooring, 3/16-inch, NM (hardeye each end) (for (3) depth under 30-fathoms) 2 Pendant, recovery (MRB), 1/4-inch x 78-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL), single leg (hardeye one end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 See footnotes at end of table.

4F-2A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

MATERIALS

SUPPORT ITEMS

Battery (type D), carbon (6135-00-120-1020) Hook, snap, 1-1/8-inch x 6-1/2-inch Boatswain Mate Tool Kit (5340-00-200-8823) Grip, Klein, 3/16-inch to 1/2-inch (5120-00-238-4436) Tape, electrical Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Twine, sail Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Wrench, 3/8-inch 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040. 2 Fabricate on station after completion of navigational check run.

4F-2-1 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with a marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. Strict adherence to mooring wire length is necessary to ensure buoy’s position-keeping ability is not impaired.

4F-2-1.1 Master Reference Buoy F Mk 6 Mod 0. a. A Master Reference Buoy (MRB) assembly is shown in Figure 4F-2A, referencing appropriate assembly sequence.

4F-2-1.2 Assembly of Floats to Lower Tube. a. Lay out upper and lower tubes end to end in a clear working space. b. Insert bushing between upper and lower tubes. c. Attach both tubes with an eye bolt. d. Mount winch to upper tube using curved washers. Ensure eye of eye bolt is oriented perpendicular to longitudinal axis of upper tube to receive winch pendant. e. Run approximately 30 feet of winch pendant down through upper eye bolt. f. Slide upper end plate over winch pendant to upper eye bolt. g. Lead winch pendant through floats. h. Slide four floats up tubes carefully ensuring winch pendant is not fouled. i. Slide lower end plate upward against bottom float and insert winch pendant through slot provided. j. Install eye bolt and curved washer on lower tube. k. Thread winch pendant down through eye bolt.

4F-2-1.3 Counterweight Assembly to Lower Tube. a. Insert end of counterweight with 1/2-inch-diameter hole into lower end of lower tube and line up holes of both pieces (Figure 4F-2B).

4F-2B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4F-2A. Master Reference Buoy F Mk 6 Mod 0

4F-2C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4F-2B. Lower Tube and Counterweight Assembly

4F-2D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

b. Insert a 3/8-16UNC-2A x 3-1/2-inch bolt through both pieces with a curved washer on each side of tube. c. Install and tighten a 3/8-inch nut on bolt.

4F-2-1.4 Preparation of Spherical Radar Reflector. a. Verify Xenon flasher operates prior to installation. b. Thread Xenon flasher into upper end of light housing (Figure 4F-2C). c. Attach lens guard to upper mast using 1/4-20UNC x 1-3/4-inch bolts, 1/4-20UNC nuts, and 1/4-inch lockwashers. d. Fasten spherical radar reflector on mounting surfaces of lens guard using nut provided. e. Ensure all cotter pins are installed. f. Tape mounting screws and bolts. g. Using small stuff, secure lens guard assembly to upper tube per Figure 4F-2C.

4F-2-1.5 Assembly of Crossarms and Upper Tube. a. Insert crossarms through two holes perpendicular to each other in upper tube so ends of crossarms are equidistant from tube (Figure 4F-2C). b. Secure crossarms with two cotter pins through each arm, one on each side of tube. c. Attach one yellow and red flag to arms on each side of tube (four flags total). Secure flags with seizing wire. d. Attach identification flag to upper tube just below the four flags. Secure flag with seizing wire. e. Bolt winch to tube with nuts and bolts provided.

4F-2-1.6 Preparation and Attachment of Grasp Line. NOTE The grasp line has 30 cellular rubber disc floats (from old sausage floats), spaced 1 foot apart. a. Splice a 1-1/8-inch-diameter snap hook to 1-1/2-inch grasp line (Figure 4F-2A). b. Each disc float is attached to a 1-1/2-inch nylon line by tying an overhand knot in the line, feeding float onto the line to knot, and then tying another overhand knot to secure float placement. Attach first float 5 feet from snap hook end of line. Continue attaching floats in same manner, 1 foot apart, until 30 floats are on grasp line. Giving a total length of 35 feet. c. Connect snap hook to 12-inch softeye of recovery pendant attached to upper tube (Figure 4F-2D).

4F-2-1.7 Rigging Lead Clump Assembly and Danforth Anchor. a. Position lead clump assembly and Danforth anchor as far outboard on fantail as possible and secure clump with safety chain. b. Assemble lead clump by placing five (5) additional weights on hanger assembly. c. Using 3/8-inch shackles, connect 8-foot chafing chain between Danforth anchor and padeye on lead clump assembly (Figure 4F-2E).

4F-2E SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4F-2C. Crossarm and Radar Reflector Assembly

4F-2F OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4F-2D. Upper and Lower Tube Assembly

4F-2G SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4F-2E. Anchor and Lead Clump Assembly Rigging and Mooring

4F-2H OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. Using 3/8-inch shackles, connect 3-foot chafing chain between padeye on lead clump assembly and 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel (Figure 4F-2E). e. Coil required length of mooring wire on deck (depth of water minus 4 fathoms), and stop off mooring wire with electrical tape (two turns). f. Using a 3/8-inch shackle, attach free end of 3/8-inch link-to-link swivel to lower end of mooring wire. g. Using 3/8-inch shackle, attach 3/8-inch shackles on free ends of recovery and winch pendants to upper end of mooring wire (Figure 4F-2B). h. Coil excess recovery pendant above floats, and tape it to upper tube with electrical tape (two turns). i. Connect 3/8-inch shackle to free ends of recovery and winch pendants.

4F-2-2 LAUNCHING.

During launch, personnel should stand clear to avoid being struck by the upper section of the MRB as it whips upright. NOTE The MRB is laid while under way at speeds up to 6 knots. The buoy may be placed from either the taffrail or quarter rail. Ensure lead clump assembly safety chain is removed prior to launch.

4F-2-2.1 Taffrail Method. a. Use five men to balance the buoy on taffrail. Ensure men are well clear of radar reflector and crossarms. On signal, push buoy outboard, and kick the lead clump assembly and anchor simultaneously.

4F-2-2.2 Quarter Rail Method. a. Use five men to hold the buoy alongside of fantail, counterweight aft (Figure 4F-2F). At 2-minute standby, stream mooring wire in a bight, ensuring there are no kinks. At 1-minute standby, lift buoy. On signal, kick the lead clump assembly over the side, push buoy outboard.

4F-2-2.3 Depth Adjustment. a. The buoy may have to be adjusted for depth after it is laid. This is most easily accomplished by the use of semi-rigid hull boat. The boat’s crew should reel down with hand winch on upper tube of MRB until top of float is 1-foot above surface. Winch ratchet should then lock at whatever depth buoy is pulled.

4F-2J SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

Figure 4F-2F. Launching Master Reference Buoy from Starboard Quarter Rail

4F-2K OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

4F-2-3 RECOVERY OF MASTER REFERENCE BUOY.

4F-2-3.1 Buoy Recovery. NOTE If several MRBs are to be recovered, time may be saved by utilizing the semi-rigid hull boat. Boat’s crew should take messenger from ship and shackle it to retrieving loop. a. Station one man with a sound-powered phone near articulated stern crane operator and one man in position to connect crane whip to recovery pendant.

Avoid a windward approach to buoy. Wind will set ship on buoy. Ensure ship’s screws are not fouled. NOTE If it is necessary to break Danforth anchor free of bottom, an upwind approach is preferred. b. Approach buoy with grasp line either astern or parallel to ship. c. Approach buoy slowly and bring it alongside. d. Hook grasp line and recovery pendant, attach articulated crane whip to recovery pendant with 5/8-inch shackle. Disconnect and recover grasp line.

Using the articulated stern crane, heave in slowly as shackles pass over sheave when attached to the crane whip. e. Heave in with articulated stern crane and swing MRB assembly to deck. f. Disconnect and remove radar reflector.

4F-2-3.2 Anchor/Lead Clump Assembly Recovery. a. Heave in with articulated stern crane and swing lead clump assembly and anchor assembly to deck. b. Disconnect mooring wire. c. Stow and secure all gear.

4F-2L/(4F-2M blank)

OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4F-3 SONAR CONDITION SHAPE INERT MK 6 MOORED MINE CASE

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in injury or death to personnel. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS

Buoy Assembly, Dan, Type 3, NM Pendant, recovery (upper), 5/16-inch x 30-foot, single (2050-01-216-9251) leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye swage one Case, UMN, inert, ET, Mk-6 (without ballast installed) end, other end 12-inch softeye) 1 (1350-00-328-8083) Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 1/2-inch Clump assembly, lead (4030-00-270-5482) (10) Hanger Assembly (4220-01-291-9640) (2) Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 3/8-inch (4030-00-269-9767) Pin, lock (5315-01-098-6455) (2) Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 5/8-inch (4030-00-269-9768) Weight, lead (4220-01-291-9641) (8) (2) Line grasp, 1-1/2-inch x 35-foot, single leg, nylon, Wire, mooring, NM, 5/16-inch x 30-foot, single leg with electrodes attached 1 (hardeye each end) Pendant, recovery (lower), 5/16-inch x 100-foot, single leg, NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) 1 SUPPORT ITEMS

Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) Grommet, wire rope, 1/2-inch 1 Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Hook, MacCluney (4030-01-306-2717) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040.

4F-3-1 PREPARATION. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig mine for sonar checks.

4F-3A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4F-3-2 RIGGING.

Ensure shackle pins are tightened with marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. Environmental conditions may cause sonar shape to move. In order to maintain sonar shape at intended position, additional weights may be required. The following procedures require assembly of lead weights that weigh approximately 250 lb each. To avoid injury, ensure multiple personnel are utilized when attempting to lift and/or launch these weights.

4F-3-2.1 Weight. a. Assemble two sets of weights with four 50 lb lead weights on each hanger (Figure 4F-3A). b. Attach 3/8-inch x 3-foot chafing chain between the hangers, using 1/2-inch shackles. c. Attach a second 3/8-inch x 3-foot chafing chain to one hanger using 1/2-inch shackle. d. Attach 5/8-inch swivel to free end of the chafing chain (step c) using 1/2-inch shackle. e. Attach 5/8-inch swivel (step d) to lower recovery pennant and mooring wire, using 1/2-inch shackle.

To avoid loss of sonar shape, lower recovery pendant must be approximately 1-1/4 times longer than water depth. To ensure accuracy of sonar readings, Mk 6 mine case depth should be set at 15 feet below water surface.

4F-3-2.2 Mine Case. a. Attach wire rope grommet in top lifting eye on Mk 6 mine case. b. Using 1/2-inch shackle, attach 5/8-inch swivel to bottom eye on Mk 6 mine case. c. Attach 1/2-inch shackle to free end of 5/8-inch swivel. d. Pass lower recovery pendant through 1/2-inch shackle attaching mooring wire to Mk 6 mine case. e. Install grommet, attached to Mk 6 mine case, into MacCluney hook and position mine case for launch.

4F-3-2.3 Dan Buoy. a. Using 1/2-inch shackle, attach 3/8-inch swivel to body of Dan buoy. b. Attach 1/2-inch shackle to other end of 3/8-inch swivel and route lower recovery pendant through shackle. c. Using 1/2-inch shackle, attach lower recovery pendant to upper recovery pendant. 4F-3B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4F-3A. Mk 6 Moored Mine Case Rigging

4F-3C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

d. Coil upper recovery pendant and tape to body of Dan buoy. e. Attach grasp line to upper recovery pendant.

4F-3-3 LAUNCHING.

Launching sonar mine shapes is an extremely dangerous operation. Any line used must be free running. All personnel involved must stay clear of bights of line or wire that will be pulled overboard. a. Ensureshipmaintains3-6knotheadway. b. Position both weights on stern. c. Position personnel for launching shape, weights, float, and grasp line. d. Begin streaming bight of wire 200 yards prior to shape planting position. e. On command, release MacCluney hook, deploy weights, and throw float and grasp line clear of ship.

4F-3-4 RECOVERY OF SONAR CONDITION SHAPE.

Avoid a windward approach to buoy. Wind will set ship on buoy. Ensure ship's screws are not fouled. a. Rig a cline hook on fantail to hold wire should it be necessary to remove fouled lines during recovery. b. Approach buoy with grasp line either astern or parallel to ship. c. Using a boat hook or grapnel, retrieve grasp line and recovery pendant. Attach crane whip to recovery pendant with a 1/2-inch shackle. Disconnect and recover grasp line.

During recovery, a mine shape can swing violently. Exercise extreme caution to avoid damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

Recovery requires heaving in on stern crane slowly while shackles attached to crane whip pass over sheave. d. Heave in with stern crane until mine shape clears fantail, then swing mine shape onto deck. e. Disconnect mooring wire from Mk 6 mine case. f. Clean, stow, and secure all gear.

4F-3D OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

JOB SHEET 4F-4 SONAR CONDITION SHAPE INERT MK 36 BOTTOM MINE

The following procedures involve potentially hazardous conditions. Prior to proceeding, ensure all personnel are familiar with all applicable safety precautions listed in Chapter 2 of this manual. Failure to comply could result in injury or death to personnel. Prior to equipment usage, ensure all required PMS situational requirement checks are performed in accordance with current PMS instructions. Failure to comply could result in damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

MATERIALS

COMPONENTS

Buoy Assembly, Dan, Type 3, NM Pendant, mooring, 5/16-inch, variable length (hardeye (2050-01-216-9251) each end) 1,2 Case, UMN, Inert, Mk 36 (free flooding, without Pendant, 5/16-inch x 18-inch, single leg, NM, wire ballast installed) (1350-00-438-0613) rope (RHL) (hardeye each end) (2) 1 Line, grasp, 1-1/2-inch x 35-foot, single leg, nylon, Shackle, screw pin anchor, NM, 1/2-inch with electrode floats attached 1 (4030-00-270-5482) (7) Pendant, recovery, 5/16-inch x 30-foot, single leg, Swivel, link-to-link, NM, 5/8-inch (4030-00-269-9768) NM, wire rope (RHL) (hardeye swaged one end, (2) other end 12-inch softeye) 1 SUPPORT ITEMS

Boatswain Mate Tool Kit Hook, grapnel, NM (2040-00-287-9643) Hook, MacCluney (4030-01-306-2717) Tape, electrical Hook, boat, 8-foot (2040-00-268-9251) Wire, seizing, 1/16-inch (4010-00-641-6185) Hook, boat, 12-foot (2040-00-268-9252) 1 Fabricate per SW570-F0-MMO-040. 2 Length should be at least 1-1/4 x water depth.

4F-4-1 PREPARATION. a. Establish bridge-to-fantail communications. Pass word to clear fantail of nonessential personnel. b. Assemble necessary components on fantail to rig mine for sonar checks.

4F-4A SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

4F-4-2 RIGGING.

Ensure all shackle pins are tightened with marline spike and secured with at least two turns of 1/16-inch seizing wire. To ensure proper sonar conditioning return, mine should be removed from crate prior to launch. NOTE Center of gravity for Mk 36 mine case is located between suspension lugs.

4F-4-2.1 Mk 36 Mine Case. a. Remove and retain crate bolts and top half of mine crate from mine. b. Attach one 5/16-inch x 18-inch pendant to each suspension lug of mine case using a 1/2-inch shackle (Figure 4F-4A). c. Attach 5/8-inch swivel to mooring pendant using 1/2-inch shackle d. Using a 1/2-inch shackle attach ends of both 5/16-inch x 18-inch pendants to 5/8-inch swivel on mooring pendant.

4F-4-2.2 Float. a. Attach 5/8-inch swivel to Dan buoy body, using 1/2-inch shackle. b. Route mooring pendant through 1/2-inch shackle attached to bottom of 5/8-inch swivel. c. Attach mooring pendant to recovery pendant, using 1/2-inch shackle. d. Coil recovery pendant and tape to Dan buoy body. e. Attach grasp line to soft eye of recovery pendant.

4F-4-3 LAUNCHING.

Launching sonar mine shapes is an extremely dangerous operation. Any line used must be free running. All personnel involved must stay clear of bights of line or wire that will be pulled overboard. a. Ensureshipmaintains3-6knotsheadway. b. Remove mine from lower crate and position on fantail for launch. c. Two methods are authorized for launching Mk 36 sonar shape: (1) Method 1: Position Mk 36 mine case over the water with the MacCluney hook through the 18-inch pendant between suspension lugs. (2) Method 2: Use MacCluney hook to hold Dan buoy and position mine shape on opposite side of fantail with mooring line lead fair to Dan buoy and free for running. d. Position personnel for launching shape, float, and grasp line.

4F-4B OPERATION SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 4F-4A. Mk 36 Bottom Mine Rigging

4F-4C SW570-F0-MMO-A70 OPERATION

e. Begin streaming bight of wire 200 yards prior to shape planting position. f. On command, release MacCluney hook, deploy float and mine, and throw grasp line clear of ship.

4F-4-4 RECOVERY OF SONAR CONDITION SHAPE.

Avoid a windward approach to buoy. Wind will set ship on buoy. Ensure ship's screws are not fouled. a. Rig a cline hook on fantail to hold wire should it be necessary to remove fouled lines during recovery. b. Approach buoy with grasp line either astern or parallel to ship. c. Using a boat hook or grapnel, retrieve grasp line and recovery pendant. Attach crane whip to recovery pendant with a 1/2-inch shackle. Disconnect and recover grasp line.

During recovery, a mine shape can swing violently. Exercise extreme caution to avoid damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

Recovery requires heaving in on stern crane slowly while shackles attached to crane whip pass over sheave. d. Heave in with stern crane until mine shape clears fantail, then swing mine shape onto deck. e. Disconnect recovery wire. f. Clean, stow, and secure all gear.

4F-4D SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

5-1 INTRODUCTION.

5-1.1 The information contained in this chapter provides general and detailed functional descriptions of the AN/SLQ-37(V) Influence Minesweeping System. Descriptions are provided at two levels and are supported by functional block diagrams.

5-2 SYSTEM FUNCTION DIRECTORY.

5-2.1 Operation control functions and signal data for the AN/SLQ-37(V) is listed in Table 5-1 and is further described in the following paragraphs.

5-3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION.

5-3.1 First Level of Functional Description. The function of the AN/SLQ-37(V) Influence Minesweeping System is to generate acoustic and/or magnetic waveforms that emulate the influence signatures of a passing ship and cause influence mines to be swept, or detonated. Acoustic control voltage waveforms are generated by the ACU, sent to the PCU where they are converted to constant and/or variable motor voltages (depending upon TB being used), and applied to TB-26 or TB-27, which in turn creates acoustic signals aft of the ship. Magnetic control voltage waveforms are generated by the ACU and sent to the ships' Magnetic Minesweeping Generator Equipment where they are converted to high amperage currents and applied to magnetic minesweeping cables, which in turn creates the magnetic fields aft of the ship. The origin of input and output signals used to operate the Influence Minesweeping System is illustrated in Figure 5-1.

5-3.2 Detailed (Second) Level of Functional Description. Detailed explanations of the functions of the major components of the AN/SLQ-37(V) Influence Minesweeping System are presented in the following paragraphs.

5-3.2.1 Automatic Control Unit SG-122A/SLQ-37(V). The ACU (Figure 5-2) receives 115 Vac 60 Hz operational voltage from the ship’s single-phase power generator, and digital timing input from the ship’s Cesium clock. EMI and RFI filters are used to minimize effects of external RF radiation on the operation of the ACU. 115 Vac is used to operate the internal cooling blower fan and power supplies. These power supplies convert 115 Vac to +5 Vdc, +12 Vdc and -12 Vdc for Circuit Card Assemblies (CCAs) and control indicators. Various CCAs contain the CPU, create output acoustic and magnetic analog waveforms, interface various ACU functions, and create -5 Vdc for use by the Microprocessor CCA. Controls and indicators provide interface between operator and control logic devices. Operators input control data via keyboards, switches and controls, then receive information via system display, indicators and sonic alarm. 5-3.2.1.1 Operators must manually enter requirements for acoustic signals into the ACU using switches and controls located on the front panel. The ACU then generates 0 to +10 Vdc, acoustic control voltage waveforms (Figure 5-2), correlating to maximum 2000-RPM motor speed requirements of TB-26 and TB-27 (0 Vdc/0 RPM, +10 Vdc/2000 RPM). ACU acoustic output is fed to the PCU via cable W3.

5-1 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 EQUIPMENT) (1) Ship’s single phase power/ACU/Cable(2) W6 Ship’s clock/ACU/Cable W5 (1) ACU/PCU/Cable W2 (2) ACU/MMGTG/Minesweeping SWBD, Cable W1 (1) Ship’s three phase power/PCU/(2) Cable ACU/PCU/ W7 Cable W2 (1) PCU/TB-26/Cable W3, APC(APC) bulkhead connector, Tow cable (2) PCU/TB-27/Cable W3, APC(APC) bulkhead connector, Tow cable W3 (1) Ships gas turbine engine/(2) MMGTG ACU/ /Reduction Minesweep gearing SWBD/ cables Table 5-1. AN/SLQ-37(V) System Function Directory (2) Digital (1) 0-+10 Vdc (Acoustic) (2) -9 to +9 Vdc (Magnetic) (2) 0 to +10to Vdc 0 Acoustic to (Correlating 2000 RPM) (1) Variable 0-150 VdcVariable to 0-240 field Vdc winding/ to armature (2) Constant 0-150 Vdcwinding/ to Variable field 0-240 Vdcarmature to 0-340 Vdc0-300 VdcVariable 0-240 VdcAcoustic (0 to 2000 RPM/Variable Hz) TB/Ocean waters/Direct (2) TB-26/PCU/ -5 Tow to cable +5to (APC), Vdc 0 APC Magnetic to bulkhead (Correlating 5000 connector, A) and PCU/TB-26/Cable Cable W3,Electromagnetic APC PCU/DBU/Cable (0 bulkhead W4 to connector, 5000 Tow A) cable (APC) MMGTG /Magnetic minesweeping cables/Tailbox, MMGTG feeder FUNCTION SIGNAL TYPE SIGNAL PATH (ORIGIN/TERMINATION/CONNECTING ACU receives inputGeneration of control voltage waveforms PCU receives input (1) 115 Vac, 60 Hz Control voltage rectified, then applied to TB motor (1) 440 Vac 60 Hz TB-26 motor generates feedback voltage Feedback voltage is shuntedDBU to TB-26 motor slows, then accepts control signals from PCU TB-26/27 generates acoustic signals MMGTG receives inputPulse current generated, then applied (1) to RPM magnetic minesweeping cables

5-2 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-1. AN/SLQ-37(V) Systems Block Diagram

5-3 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-2. Acoustic Control Unit SG-122A/SLQ-37(V)

5-4 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

5-3.2.1.2 Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM) can store up to 99 magnetic waveforms; however, only 11 of these waveforms are used. Manual input is used to generate unclassified magnetic waveforms. EPROM stored data is used to generate 11 classified magnetic waveforms or can be used during depot systems testing. Ship’s should not have the test EPROM on board. Verification of type EPROM installed is made during selection of magnetic waveforms. Systems Display reading of 0-11 indicates Operational EPROM is installed and display reading of 0-99 indicates Test EPROM is installed. The Operational EPROM must be installed prior to commencement of actual sweep operations. 5-3.2.1.3 ACU selection of dual waveforms causes both magnetic and acoustic waveforms to be generated simultaneously. In this mode, the operator selects a single magnetic waveform and manually inputs parameters for acoustic waveforms. If the desired sweep utilizes the TB-27, the ACU operator can also choose pulsed or modulated operation for the TB. Manual or timed start of the dual mode is optional (Manual only or Timed only) and the acoustic waveform may be selected to occur in synchronization or in asynchronization with the magnetic waveform. For asynchronous operation, the pulses do not start at the same time. 5-3.2.1.4 ON/OFF controls for POWER, MAGNETIC MODE OUTPUT, and ACOUSTIC MODE OUTPUT are located on the front panel of the ACU. During emergency conditions, these controls should be secured by operating their switches to the OFF (down) position.

5-3.2.2 Power Converter Unit CV-3846/SLQ-37(V). The PCU (Figure 5-3) receives inputs of 440 Vac 60 Hz operational voltage from the ship’s three- phase power generator, 0 to +10 Vdc acoustic control voltage from the ACU. 0 to +340 Vdc can be generated by the TB-26 motor and fed back to the PCU. If this occurs, the DBU acts as a voltage breaker. 5-3.2.2.1 The PCU acts as a signal-conditioning unit for acoustic control voltage waveforms, providing full wave rectification and very low ripple output voltage to the field and armatures windings of TB-26/TB-27 motors. The PCU also monitors field/armature - voltage/current, motor RPM, and flood post signals from TB-26 and TB-27. Voltage generated by the TB-26 motor is sensed by the PCU Dynamic Braking module and is shunted to the DBU. 5-3.2.2.2 Controls and functions of the PCU allow two options for TB operation. (a) PCU starts TB motors, then controls its speed. (b) PCU functions in tandem with the ACU, first starting the TB motor, then allowing the ACU to control its speed. Switches and controls for these functions are located on the front panels of the PCU and the ACU. Strap position on PCU power converter terminal board (A2A1TB1) controls selection of TB Mk/Mod being utilized. 5-3.2.2.3 ON/OFF controls for MAIN POWER and LOGIC POWER are located on the front panel of the PCU. During emergency conditions, these controls should be secured by operating their switches to the OFF (down) position.

5-3.2.3 Dynamic Braking Unit MX-10746/SLQ-37(V). The DBU (Figure 5-4) only functions after PCU motor operating voltage has been removed from TB-26. During this time, the TB motor continues to run and acts as a generator, providing 0 to +340 Vdc feedback to the PCU. As this voltage is sensed by the PCU Dynamic Braking module, 0 to +300 Vdc is shunted to the DBU, where it is absorbed by large wattage resistors and effectively produces an electronic braking effect on the TB-26 motor. This effect enables the motor to slow and respond to operational commands from the PCU. Whenever TB-26 motor RPM is increasing or is constant, the DBU is electronically disconnected from the operating circuit. The DBU functions only with TB-26 and does not have exterior ON/OFF controls. The DBU is secured when power to the PCU is secured.

5-5 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-3. Power Converter CV-3846 (PCU)

5-6 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-4. Dynamic Braking Unit MX-10746 (DBU)

5-3.2.4 Submersible Connector Receptacle (APC Bulkhead Connector). The APC bulkhead connector (Figure 5-5) provides motor control voltage to the APC cable, which in turn provides motor control voltage to TB-26 or TB-27. The APC bulkhead connector is electrically connected to the PCU via Cable W3 and is mechanically attached to the ship’s bulkhead forward of the APC cable reel, where it serves as an attachment point for the APC cable. Receptacle pins of the APC bulkhead connector are identified by the same color code used for APC cable connectors and TB cable receptacle pins, (BLACK-armature voltage/current; WHITE-common; RED/field voltage/current, and GREEN-flood posts/TB-26 motor RPM). The APC Bulkhead Connector has no external controls and is secured by first removing the APC cable, then reinstalling its receptacle cover.

5-3.2.5 APC Cable CX-13260/SLQ-37(V). The APC cable (Figure 5-6) is 1,650 feet long, has buoyant and non-buoyant sections of its insulation jacket, and is utilized to tow the TB at a safe distance from the ship. Connector plugs attached at each end of the APC cable allow connection to the APC bulkhead connector and to receptacles on TB-26/TB-27. The APC cable has four conductors and electrically connects the PCU to TB-26 or TB-27. The APC cable then provides a means for the PCU to apply motor control voltage while monitoring TB-26 tachometer and TB-26/TB-27 field posts and motors. APC connector pins are identified by the same color-code used for APC Bulkhead Connector and APC receptacles pins on the TB.

5-3.2.6 Towed Body TB-26 Mods 1 and 2. The TB-26 (Figure 5-7) is manufactured with a non-magnetic case and has two movable diaphragms, which are mounted on opposite exterior surfaces of the case and powered by an electric motor. The case has an APC cable receptacle with color-coded connector sockets that match connector pins of the APC cable. 5-3.2.6.1 Prior to operation, the APC cable is connected to the TB case receptacle and depending upon ambient temperature the TB motor may require a 30 minute warm up period. After completion of a deck test and verification of watertight integrity, the case is pressurized to the appropriate PSI for its planned operational depth. This pressurization balances internal/external pressures and allows the eccentric assembly to operate properly. TB-26 may also be subjected to periodic acoustic test, using an Acoustic Test Set (TS-4144/P) (Figure 5-8) to verify its output.

5-7 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-5. APC Cable Bulkhead Connector (Shown with Cover Removed)

5-3.2.6.2 During operation, TB-26 is towed a safe distance aft of the ship, where its weight is supported by a size 0 float. The TB-26 motor is normally started by the PCU and afterward the ACU provides voltages that cause automatic modulation of the TB. An internal eccentric assembly causes the diaphragms to oscillate in opposition to one another and generate acoustic signals. The frequency and pressure of these signals is controlled by the speed of the motor. TB-26 incorporates tachometer and flood posts in the eccentric assembly that are monitored by the PCU, via the APC cable. 5-3.2.6.3 TB-26 Mods 1 and 2 utilize different eccentric tachometer feedback to regulate their motor speeds. Mod 1 motor is regulated at 0-1800 RPM and Mod 2 motor is regulated at 0-1200 RPM. During sweep operations, when PCU operating voltage is removed from TB-26, the motor continues to run, generating voltage. This voltage is felt by the Dynamic Breaking module of the PCU and is shunted to the DBU. (Refer to paragraph 5-3.2.3). TB-26 does not have an exterior ON/OFF switch and is secured when power to the PCU is secured.

5-3.2.7 Towed Body TB-27. The TB-27 (Figure 5-9) is manufactured with a non-magnetic case and a resonating circular steel diaphragm mounted in the front of its torpedo-shaped case. The case has an APC cable receptacle with color-coded connector sockets that match connector pins of the ACP cable.

5-8 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 5-6. Tow Cable CX-13260 (APC Cable)

5-9 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-7. Towed Body TB-26

5-3.2.7.1 Prior to operation, the APC cable is connected to the TB case receptacle and depending upon ambient temperature the TB motor may require a 30-minute warm up period. After completion of a deck test, watertight integrity is also verified. Unlike TB-26, the case of TB-27 is not pressurized prior to use. TB-27 may also be subjected to periodic acoustic test, using Acoustic Test Set (TS-4144/P) to verify its output. 5-3.2.7.2 During operation, TB-27 is towed a safe distance aft of the ship, where its weight is supported by a size 1 float. The TB-27 motor is normally started by the PCU and afterward the ACU provides voltages that cause automatic or pulsed modulation of the TB. The motor causes an internal spring-loaded hammer to strike the diaphragm, thereby generating acoustic signals. The frequency of these signals is controlled by the speed of the motor. TB-27 does not have a tachometer, however it does incorporates flood posts in the assembly that are monitored, via the APC cable, by the PCU. TB-27 does not have an exterior ON/OFF switch and is secured when power to the PCU is secured.

5-3.2.8 Ships' Magnetic Minesweeping Generator Equipment. MCM 1 – 8 utilize a conventional gas turbine DC generator set (Figure 5-10) consisting of the MMGTG (Figure 5-11) and its Prime Mover, the gas turbine engine. The two units are coupled together through reduction drive gearing and mounted on a common, rigid subbase. The gas turbine DC generator set is also used to supply ship service DC power when minesweeping operations are not being conducted. In this mode the generator feeds continuous 240 Vdc/2800 amp into the DC Ship Service Switchboard (Figures 5-12 and 5-13) to power the bow thruster motor and low-speed low-load propulsion motors.

5-10 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-8. Acoustic Test Set TS-4144/P

5-11 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-9. Towed Body TB-27

5-3.2.8.1 Switching of generator output between the DC Ship Service Switchboard and the Magnetic Minesweeping Cable Tail Connector Panel (Tailbox) is accomplished through the electrically operated DC Contactor Panel. When the generator is placed in the DC ship service mode, limited control of the generator and its gas turbine engine can be transferred to the Main Control Console (MCC) (Figure 5-14) in the Central Control Station. 5-3.2.8.2 During magnetic minesweeping operations, the MMGTG receives magnetic control voltage waveforms and generator excitation voltage from the ACU via the Minesweep SWBD. MMGTG output (pulsed 0 to 350 Vdc/0 to 5000 A) is determined by the rate and level of excitation the generator receives. Output voltage/current is applied, via MMGTG feeder cables, to the ship’s magnetic minesweeping cable tailbox where it is then applied to the magnetic minesweeping cables. 5-3.2.8.3 The system can be controlled in automatic or manual minesweeping mode. Mode selection is made at the Minesweep SWBD. In the automatic mode, the system is keyed by a reference signal supplied by the ACU. Control circuitry provides feedback control of system output current to achieve desired pulse shaping and amplitude. In the manual mode, control of generator output is provided by means of impulse switch and pulse magnitude rheostats. The rheostats for manual mode provide direct open loop control of generator output voltage magnitude. The impulse switch is used for manual ON/OFF keying of the system in forward or reverse polarity.

5-12 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 5-10. Gas Turbine Generator Set

5-13 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-11. Magnetic Minesweeping Gas Turbine Generator (MMGTG)

5-14 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure5-12.MCM1–8,Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment

5-15 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-13. MCM 9 – 14, Magnetic Minesweeping Equipment

5-16 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 5-14. Main Control Console (MCC)

5-17 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

5-3.2.8.4 MCMs 9 – 14 utilize an AC generator set consisting of the AC generator pulse frequency changer (PFC) and its prime mover (gas turbine engine). The two units are coupled together through a reduction drive gearing and mounted on a common, rigid sub-base. The sub-base in turn is resiliently mounted to the ships foundation. The gas turbine AC generator set is also used to supply the ship with DC power when minesweeping operations are not being conducted. In the DC ships service mode the AC generator feeds continuous 550 kW, 435 Vac, 1,404 amps, 420/362 Hz into the ship’s AC minesweep switchboard to power the ship’s bow thruster and port and starboard light load propulsion motors (LLPMs) through their respected Silicone Controlled Rectifier (SCR) driver cabinets. Switching of generator output between ships service mode (bow thruster, LLPMs) and minesweep mode (magnetic minesweeping cable tailbox) is accomplished through the electrically operated switch on the AC minesweep switchboard. When the generator is placed in the ships service mode, control of the generator and its gas turbine engine can be transferred to the Main Control Console (MCC) in Central Control Station (CCS). 5-3.2.8.5 When minesweeping mode is used, the AC generator feeds intermittent 1615 kW, 435 Vac, 3350 amps, 420/362 Hz. The AC generator and gas turbine set utilizes a two-part system to generate a required output for minesweeping mode. The first part of this system receives a mechanical input from the gas turbine and an electrical input from the Automatic Control Unit (ACU) via the AC minesweep switchboard. Output AC voltage from one part of the AC minesweep generator is fed to the second part of the AC minesweep generator where its frequency is changed to 420 Hz. The output from the second part of the generator is fed to the AC minesweep switchboard then to the Solid State Pulse Generators (SSPG #1 and SSPG#2). Each of the SSPG’s units can produce a rectified output of 0 to 250 Vdc and 0 to 2500 amps, together when operated in parallel they produce 0 to 250 Vdc and 5,000 amps. 5-3.2.8.6 The system can be controlled in automatic or manual minesweeping mode. Mode selection is made at the AC minesweep switchboard. In the automatic mode, the system is keyed by a reference signal supplied by the ACU. The control circuitry provides feedback control of the generator output current to achieve desired pulse shaping and amplitude. In the manual mode, the control of the generator output is provided by means of impulse switch and pulse magnitude rheostats on the AC minesweep switchboard. The rheostats for manual mode provide direct open loop control of the generator output magnitude. The impulse switch is used for manual On/Off keying of the generator in forward or reverse polarity.

5-3.2.9 Magnetic Minesweeping Cable Terminal Box Receptacle (Tailbox). The Magnetic Minesweeping Cable Tailbox (Figure 5-15) is a plug-in-type receptacle for magnetic minesweeping cable assembly. MMGTG feeder cables are attached internally to the Tailbox and pigtail contact plugs of the coax cable connect externally to the Tailbox. The Tailbox transmits electrical pulses from the MMGTG to the coax cable and all other magnetic minesweeping cables as required for particular sweep configurations. An external RUN/SAFE switch for the Tailbox is located on the forward bulkhead near the Tailbox. Electrical input to the RUN/SAFE switch and the Tailbox is also secured when the MMGTG is secured. The Tailbox receptacles are secured when the cover is closed and secured.

5-3.2.10 Magnetic Minesweeping Cables. A brief introduction to each of the magnetic minesweeping cables (Figure 5-16) is presented prior to the detailed explanation of their use and functions. 5-3.2.10.1 Coax Section (Coax Cable). All magnetic minesweeping cable configurations begin with the coax cable. The coax cable has two conductors cabled in the coax cable. One diagonally opposite conductor is referred to as the short leg. The remaining conductor is referred to as the long leg. The coax cable is divided into two sections; heavy and buoyant. The heavy (inboard) section is 115 feet long and the buoyant (outboard) section is 686 feet long. These sections are joined together at the heavy to buoyant splice. The coax section inboard end is terminated with an inner conductor(long leg) and an outer conductor (long leg). These conductors are connected to the tailbox via pigtails that are terminated with contact plugs, which are plugged into the tailbox during magnetic minesweeping operations. The

5-18 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-15. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable Terminal Box (Tailbox)

buoyant section has breakout connectors with terminals attached to facilitate connection of K-4 electrode, and S- or CL-Cables. 5-3.2.10.2 S Section CA-1454 (S-Cable). The S-Cable (Figure 5-17) is buoyant, 450-feet long, and has terminals attached at each end to facilitate connection to the coax cable, K-4 electrode, TJ jumper, or pigtails. Two 450-foot sections are connected to form one 900-foot S section. 5-3.2.10.3 CL Section CA-1454 (CL-Cable). The CL-Cable (Figure 5-17) is buoyant, 450-feet long, and has terminals attached at each end that facilitate connection to coax cable, or TJ jumper. 5-3.2.10.4 Tow Jumper (TJ Jumper). The TJ Jumper (Figure 5-18) is non-buoyant, 11 feet 6 inches and elliptical in shape, and has terminals attached to each leg that facilitate connection to S- and CL-Cables. The TJ is used as a tow point for closed loop type sweeps. 5-3.2.10.5 Electrode CX-13263 (K-4 Electrode). The K-4 electrode (Figure 5-19) is non-buoyant, 150-feet long, and has terminals attached at each end to facilitate attachment to coax and S-Cables. 5-3.2.10.6 Use and Function. Magnetic minesweeping cables are stored on cable reels located on the fantail (Figure 5-20) of the MCM ship, where they are assembled in various configurations, as required for different types of influence mine sweeps. During minesweeping operations, these cables are streamed aft of the ship where they receive pulsed current from the MMGTG and transmit electromagnetic pulses into surrounding waters. 5-3.2.10.7 Minesweeping cables are manufactured with wire ropes that lay along the length of the cables. Electric current pulsed through these cables causes an electromagnetic field to build and decay. The direction of this field is determined by the polarity of the current being applied through the cables (Figure 5-21). The magnitude and strength of the electromagnetic field is determined by the amount of current being applied to the cables and by the open or closed loop configurations of the cable.

5-19 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-16. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, General Configuration

5-20 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-17. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, S or CL

5-3.2.10.8 In order to emulate the magnetic signature of steel hull ships, current is pulsed in different polarities, intensities, and durations through minesweeping cables. Magnetic minesweeping cables are streamed in such a manner that electromagnetic fields are produced in waters aft of the ship where they cause influence mines to detonate at safe distance away from the ship. 5-3.2.10.9 Magnetic minesweeping cables may also be utilized in tandem with acoustic minesweeping devices in order to create a combination of acoustic and magnetic signatures, thereby providing improved countermeasures against combination acoustic/magnetic influence mines.

5-21 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-18. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, TJ Jumper

5-22 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 5-19. Magnetic Minesweeping Cable, K-4 Electrode

5-23 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Figure 5-20. Fantail of MCM Ship, Typical

5-24 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 5-21. Magnetic Minesweeping

5-25/(5-26 blank)

SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CHAPTER 6 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

6-1 INTRODUCTION.

6-1.1 Purpose. This chapter provides scheduled maintenance information utilized to maintain influence minesweeping equipment in a ready condition. Scheduled maintenance is performed in accordance with instructions provided in individual equipment manuals and the provisions of NAVY PMS-CD (Diesel, Steam, and Others). The instructions in this manual are intended to duplicate those furnished in the Planned Maintenance System (PMS) and are listed for information only. In case of any conflicts, the PMS documentation shall take precedence. Such conflicts should be reported immediately using TMDER forms located at the back of this manual.

6-1.2 Scope. Scheduled maintenance is primarily preventive inspection and preventive services to ensure reliable operation of magnetic minesweeping cables and all associated equipment on board the ships. Scheduled maintenance requirements are integrated with operational procedures such as those listed in Chapter 4. All scheduled maintenance procedures must be completed by qualified personnel. Qualifications are obtained by completion of Personnel Qualification Standards (PQS) and/or completion of approved courses. Scheduled maintenance includes inspection and servicing of the equipment. Inspection includes the preventive maintenance procedures required to detect problem areas before they cause failure of the equipment.

6-1.3 Arrangement. The PMS system is a systematic approach to reduce the maintenance of equipment to simple procedures. PMS provides a means of planning, scheduling, and controlling maintenance. Since effective maintenance is the function of retaining equipment in, or restoring it to, a serviceable condition, maintenance activities are categorized as scheduled or unscheduled. The following documents are provided by the PMS program for controlling and monitoring planned maintenance: a. Department PMS records. b. Work Center PMS records. c. OPNAVINST 4790.4. d. Maintenance index page (MIP) sets. e. Maintenance requirement card (MRC) sets. f. NAVY PMS-CD (Diesel, Steam, and Others).

6-2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ACTION INDEX.

6-2.1 Maintenance Index Page. The MIP prescribes the planned maintenance schedule for the assembly by listing the periodicity code (Table 6-1) for each MRC. For example, Q-1 indicates the requirement is performed on a quarterly basis. If maintenance must also be performed whenever a specific situation occurs, the calendar periodicity code (quarterly, in this example) would be combined with a non-calendar code to create, for example, Q-1R. However, certain activities may require increased maintenance on a more frequent basis. Unscheduled maintenance occurs in these instances. The MIP is a list of a complete set of MRCs that apply to a major assembly. MIPs include the following type information: a. Title that identifies the MRC set

6-1 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 6-1. Periodicity Codes

PERIODICITY CODE

Daily D Weekly W Monthly M Quarterly (3 months) Q Semiannually (6 months) S Annually A Every 18 months 18M Situation requirement R Unscheduled maintenance U

b. Reference publications c. Configuration data for the equipment d. Designator to indicate which MRCs include on or more tests e. MRC control number and periodicity code f. All maintenance requirements for a given system, subsystem, and periodicity code g. Recommended rates (job codes), estimated man-hours, and a periodicity code for related maintenance.

6-2.2 Maintenance Requirement Cards. MRCs provide detailed procedures for performing required scheduled maintenance procedures for performing required scheduled maintenance on magnetic minesweeping cables and support equipment. An example of MIPs and MRCs utilized aboard MCM ships for influence minesweeping equipment is listed in Table 6-2. (This table is provided only as an example and does not preclude requirements of the shipboard 3-M system). MRCs include the following type information: a. Brief statement of the task b. Periodicity code. c. Recommended rates (job codes), total man-hours, and elapsed time. d. Required safety precautions. e. Required tools, parts, materials, and test equipment. f. Detailed maintenance procedures.

6-3 SCHEDULED TEST PROCEDURES.

6-3.1 Components of the AN/SLQ-37(V) are listed in Table 6-3. Dual use components of the AN/SLQ-38(V) system are listed in Table 6-4. Ancillary Equipment is listed in Table 6-5. AN/SLQ-37(V) influence minesweeping equipment shall be maintained in accordance with the ships' 3-M system.

6-2 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 6-2. Example of Shipboard MIPs and MRCs, Typical

MIP NO. MRC NO. REQUIREMENT PERIODICITY

4761/017-46 47 8GHW N Clean and inspect boots and sleeves. Q-1R — — — 47 8GHX N Clean and inspect Y-connector Q-2R — — — 46 GHY N Measure insulation resistance of towing jumper. Q-3R — — — 47 GJA N Clean and inspect towing jumper. Q-4R — — — 46 4MNL N 1. Measure insulation resistance of Q-1R magnetic sweep cables. 2. Clean and inspect magnetic sweep cable end fittings and contact plugs. — — — 46 4MNQ N Measure insulation resistance of CL connecting link Q-5 cable. — — — B1 8TDK N Clean and inspect tailbox; measure insulation M-1 resistance of minesweeping generator feeder cables.

Table 6-3. AN/SLQ-37(V)3 Components

EIC PART NUMBER ITEM

N164000 CV-3846/SLQ-37(V) Power Converter Unit, Acoustic N165000 CX-13260/SLQ-37(V) Cable Assembly, Acoustic Power N16D000 SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V) Automatic Control Unit N16G000 TB-26/SLQ-37(V) Towed Body, Acoustic N16H000 TB-27/SLQ-37(V) Towed Body, Acoustic N16J000 MX-10746/SLQ-37(V) Dynamic Braking Unit — — — CA-1453/SLQ-37(V) Magnetic Cable Assembly, Coax Section CA-1453 — — — CA-1454/SLQ-37(V) Magnetic Cable Assembly, S Section CA-1454 N168000 CX-13263/SLQ-37(V) Magnetic Cable Assembly, Electrode K-4 — — — CA-1454/SLQ-37(V) Magnetic Cable Assembly, CL Section CA-1454 — — — TJ/SLQ-37(V) Magnetic Cable Assembly, Tow Jumper TJ — — — 10798 and 11744 Acoustic Device, A Mk 2 (g), Rattle Bars

6-3 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 6-4. Dual Use AN/SLQ-38 Components

EIC PART NUMBER ITEM

N181200 MX-10597/SLQ-38 Sweep Wire, 5/8 inch N181500 MX-10600/SLQ-38 Depressor Wire, 5/8 inch — — — 1464351 Multiplane Kite N181700 MX-10602/SLQ-38 Bridle Chain Assembly (Depressor) N181900 MX-10604/SLQ-38 Bridle Chain Assembly (Otter) N181B00 MX-10606/SLQ-38 Float, Minesweeping, Size 1 N181D00 MX-10608/SLQ-38 End Cutter Mk 9, Assembly N181E00 MX-10614/SLQ-38 Float, Minesweeping, Size 0 N183100 MX-10611/SLQ-38 Cutter, Minesweeping, Mk 15 Mod 0 N183200 MX-10612/SLQ-38 Grip, Cable, Klein

Table 6-5. Ancillary Equipment

EIC PART NUMBER ITEM

— — — — — — Master Reference Buoy — — — — — — Dan Buoy, Type 3 Mk 12 Mod 0 — — — TS-4144/P Acoustic Test Set — — — 725 (Holiday Detector) Spark Gap Tester

6-3.2 Organizational Level Maintenance. O-Level Maintenance consists of inspections and servicing of equipment on a periodic basis. It also includes troubleshooting and isolating faults that require minor repair or replacement of components that are spared at the O-level. Faulty, defective, damaged, or deteriorating components are returned to the depot for disposition. Standard shipboard equipment is to be used for troubleshooting.

6-3.3 Intermediate Level Maintenance. I-Level Maintenance will be accomplished when required to screen components and isolate faults to replaceable components and plug-in units such as EPROMS/PROMS on circuit boards. Repairs to boards are limited to components that can be replaced without destroying the conformal coating. I-level maintenance is conducted by an authorized Shore Intermediate Maintenance Activity (SIMA) or is deferred to the depot.

6-4 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

6-3.4 Depot Level Maintenance. D-Level Maintenance is performed on components that cannot be repaired at either organizational or intermediate levels. Maintenance will consist of overhaul, screening for repair refurbishment or disposal. AN/SLQ-37(V)3 support is provided by Naval Surface Warfare Center, Panama City, Florida (NSWCPC), which serves as In-Service Engineering Agent (ISEA) for the system.

6-4 WIRE ROPE MAINTENANCE. a. A wire rope should be thought of as a piece of machinery having many moving parts. Refer to the appropriate PMS procedures. b. Wire rope normally gives ample warning of impending failure through the parting of individual strands. A thorough inspection of wire rope before and after each usage is essential. At the same time, do not exceed the SWL as this may cause the wire to part without warning. c. The surfaces over which a wire rope travels have an effect on its wear and life. Metal surfaces of a sheave wear and score rapidly and produce an abrasive effect on the wire. Sheaves should be examined regularly and any defects remedied. Common sheave defects are: (1) Groove too large. (a) Such a sheave not only gives insufficient support to the wire, but increases the wear and fatigue rate on individual strands. Ideally, about 135 degrees of the wire circumference should be supported by the sheave. (b) The remedy is to replace the sheave. (2) Groove too tight or pinching. (a) Tight grooves create an excessive amount of friction and a constant reduction in wire life. (b) The remedy is to replace the sheave or remachine the groove. The minimum tolerance by which groove diameters should exceed normal rope diameters is in Table 6-6. (3) Sheave corrugated. (a) The remedy is to replace or remachine. (4) Sheave worn on one side. (a) This is usually due to an acute lead angle to the sheave or to poor alignment. (b) The remedy is to replace or remachine. (c) Correct the cause of the problem, if possible. (5) Sheave out of round. (a) A flat spot in the sheave causes the wire to shift at each revolution of the sheave leading to vibration and fatigue. (b) The remedy is to replace or remachine.

6-5 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 6-6. Groove Diameter Tolerance

NOMINAL WIRE ROPE DIAMETER MINIMUM TOLERANCE (INCHES) (INCHES) 1/4 to 5/16 1/64 3/8 to 3/4 1/32 13/16 to 1-1/8 3/64

(6) Defective sheave bearings. (a) A wobbling sheave has the same effect as one with a flat spot. (b) The remedy is to replace the sheave. (7) Broken flanges. (a) A broken flange may result in the wire jumping the broken part, causing the wire to part or suffer damage. There is also the danger of injury to personnel. (b) The remedy is to replace the sheave. d. To maintain service usage, wire should be evenly, tightly, and level wound to their appropriate drum. e. A wire rope normally wears faster at one end. The life of a wire can be extended by end-for-ending every 300 hours of total logged towing time or until excessive damage is observed. Continual end-for-ending may be carried out until wire no longer meets PMS standards. f. With the exception of end fittings, no other splices are authorized in sweep or depressor wires.

6-5 WEDGE STOP MAINTENANCE. a. After each use, wedge stops must be visually inspected to determine if neoprene rubber and/or bronze insert is damaged. Replace rubber and/or bronze insert if either of the following conditions is present: (1) Rubber is badly torn or separates from bronze insert. (2) Peaks of bronze insert show excessive wear (becomes smooth).

The following procedure involves the use of hazardous materials. Ensure all personnel are familiar with the hazards listed in the specific manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) guidance is followed. b. Replace rubber strips on inserts as follows: (1) Remove the damaged rubber strips.

6-6 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

(2) Using sandpaper, roughen an area approximately 0.375-inch area on each end of 0.500-inch strips of neoprene rubber. (Provided by Naval Surface Warfare Center, Panama City, FL (NSWCPC).) (3) Using PPE per MSDS, apply cement compound, NSN 8040-00-273-8717 (maintained shipboard) to roughened ends of rubber strips; then align and install strips in insert halves. (4) Apply clamping force and allow cement compound 24 hours to cure.

6-6 MAINTENANCE REPORTING.

6-6.1 Maintenance Reporting should be accomplished using the Maintenance and Material Management (3-M) reporting system. This is the source document for reporting and analyzing Fleet maintenance and maintenance deficiencies. OPNAVINST 4790.4B is the governing directive for 3-M and should be referred to when needed to ensure correct reporting. 3-M standard data elements are used to record maintenance information to allow the use of automatic data processing equipment. The premise of the 3-M is the information collected by maintenance personnel will be recorded once, and the 3-M Data Bank will provide information to all who have a need for it. The effectiveness of 3-M is dependent on the accuracy, completeness, and timeliness of the information provided to the system.

6-7/(6-8 blank)

SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CHAPTER 7 FAULT ISOLATION

7-1 INTRODUCTION.

7-1.1 This chapter contains fault isolation procedures and illustrations. It includes procedures for isolation of a trouble to a single equipment or functional area. It provides procedures to isolate the functional area of the potential equipment fault and then refer the user to the equipment technical manual information necessary to restore function.

7-2 OPERATION-BASED SYMPTOM FAULT DIRECTORY.

7-2.1 Fault isolation and troubleshooting procedures are listed in Tables 7-1 through 7-3. System faults observed during operation are described in individual equipment manual fault isolation diagrams.

7-3 FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURES.

7-3.1 Acoustic Device, TB-26/SLQ-37(V).

Prior to servicing acoustic device, ensure it is stowed/chocked in such a manner as to prevent movement which could injure personnel.

7-3.1.1 Localizing troubles in the acoustic device will proceed from specific operating symptoms. Improper operation will register as either excessively high armature current as indicated on the manual control ammeter.

Keep away from energized circuits. Do not make adjustments inside equipment with power supply on. Always remove power and ground circuits prior to servicing this equipment. Use a multimeter (Simpson 260, or equivalent) to verify equipment is de-energized.

7-3.1.2 Table 7-4 and steps listed below are a general guide for use in determining probable cause and recommended corrective action when an equipment malfunction occurs. a. Device should be secured and checked for causes of improper performance if its current requirement is radically different from that generally required to run the particular device. b. Motor current can be checked by noting current and RPM, reading on ACU or PCU, and comparing these readings with values given in equipment manual. c. Another way to check for unsatisfactory performance is to remove cover plate(s) and listen to device run. Foreign noises can often be detected in this manner.

7-1 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 S9324-B5-MMO-010 SW565-F0-MMO-020 SW565-F0-MMO-020 S9324-B5-MMO-010 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 EQUIPMENT MANUAL 1 FAULT DIAGRAM ISOLATION 1 REF. ALINEMENT PROCEDURE 1 FAULT ISOLATION PROC. REF. 1 REF Table 7-1. Magnetic Minesweeping Fault Isolation . SYMPTOM FUNC. DESC. streaming properly readings outside acceptable ranges not illuminated, meters doindicate not proper voltages/amperages, or red flags not displayed on breakers Refer to equipment manual 1 Magnetic minesweeping gear not 2 Indicator not illuminated or meter 35 ACU indicator(s) not illuminated 6 ACU indicator(s) still illuminated DC Ships Service Mode Indicator 7 Minesweeping gear not retrieved 4-5 STEP TABLE 1

7-2 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 SW565-F0-MMO-020 SW565-F0-MMO-040 SW565-F0-MMO-040 SW565-F0-MMO-020 SW565-F0-MMO-040 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 SW570-F0-MMO-040 EQUIPMENT MANUAL 1 FAULT DIAGRAM ISOLATION 1 REF. ALINEMENT PROCEDURE 1 FAULT ISOLATION PROC. REF. 1 REF Table 7-2. Acoustic Minesweeping Fault Isolation . SYMPTOM FUNC. DESC. or PCU and ACUcorrespond meters do not Control Indicator not illuminated streaming properly generating appropriate acoustic signal 67 PCU indicator(s) still8 illuminated ACU indicator(s) still illuminated Minesweeping gear not retrieved SW570-F0-MMO-A70 4 ACU indicator(s) not illuminated 3 PCU Remote Ready For ACU 2 Acoustic minesweeping gear not 1 Towed Body does not Refer to equipment manuals STEP 4-6 - 4-8 TABLES 1

7-3 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 SW570-F0-MMO-040 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 S9324-B5-MMO-010 SW565-F0-MMO-040 SW565-F0-MMO-020 SW565-F0-MMO-040 SW565-F0-MMO-040 SW565-F0-MMO-020 S9324-B5-MMO-010 EQUIPMENT MANUAL 1 FAULT DIAGRAM ISOLATION 1 REF. ALINEMENT PROCEDURE 1 FAULT ISOLATION PROC. REF. 1 REF Table 7-3. Combination Influence Minesweeping Fault Isolation SYMPTOM FUNC. DESC. minesweeping gear not streaming properly readings outside acceptable ranges Control Indicator not illuminated or PCU and ACUcorrespond meters do not not illuminated, meters doindicate not proper voltages/amperages, or red flags not displayed on breakers appropriate acoustic signal 2 Acoustic or magnetic 3 Indicator not illuminated4 or meter 5 PCU Remote Ready For ACU ACU indicator(s) not7 illuminated 8 PCU indicator(s)9 still illuminated ACU indicator(s) still illuminated DC Ships Service Mode Indicator 1 Towed Body does not generate 10 Minesweeping gear not retrieved SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Refer to equipment manual. STEP TABLES 4-9 - 4-11 1

7-4 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 7-4. TB-26 Troubleshooting

SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE

Device fails to operate out of water. 1. Incorrect wiring. 2. Defective motor. 3. Defective motor coupling. 4. Loose motor coupling. 5. Seized bearing(s) in eccentric mechanism. 6. Broken drive shaft. 7. Incorrect pressure. 8. Excessively worn brushes. 9. Insufficient brush tension. Motor operates with excessive sparking. 1. Worn brushes. 2. Brush yoke out of position. PCU operates but device fails to start. 1. Incorrect wiring. 2. Break in armature circuit. 3. Burned out coil in motor field or armature. Excessively high armature current on controller 1. Incorrect wiring. ammeter. 2. Incorrect air pressure in device. 3. Open shunt field. 4. Seized bearings. 5. Broken hanger shaft. 6. Broken drive shaft. 7. Locked armature. 8. Rotated brush yoke. 9. Misalignment of internal parts. Flood switch light on. Water in device. No sound output-excessive speed. 1. Broken drive shaft. 2. Loose or defective coupling. Device operates but no reading on tachometer. 1. Defective wiring. 2. Defective bridge rectifier. 3. Malfunctioning tachometer. 4. Loose tachometer coupling. Device operates with excessive noise and 1. Loose parts. vibration. 2. Broken hanger shafts. 3. Broken weld on diaphragm lugs. 4. Damaged or bent hanger(s). 5. Misalignment of motor shaft. 6. Dry bearings. 7. Excessively worn bearings in eccentric mechanism or hangers. Motor fails to operate. 1. Failure of power source. 2. Shorted, grounded, or open circuit. Device fails to start in water. 1. Slow ship's speed to3-4knots.

7-5 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

d. Mechanism bearing housing should be marked with a temperature stick to determine whether bearings are overheating. After device has run for approximately one hour, it should be possible for the hand to be placed against bearing housings without discomfort providing bearing(s) are not overheating. e. Current requirement for new devices will usually be in the upper limits of values given in equipment manual.

7-3.2 Acoustic Device, TB-27/SLQ-37(V).

Keep away from live circuits. Operating personnel must at all times observe safety regulations. Do not make adjustments inside equipment with power supply on. To avoid casualties, always cut off power and ground circuits prior to touching them. Verify the system in de-energized using an appropriate electrical instrument (Simpson 260 or equivalent). Do not service or adjust alone. Under no circumstances should any person reach within the enclosure for the purpose of servicing or adjusting the equipment without the immediate presence or assistance of another person capable of rendering aid.

7-3.2.1 Failure of any of the components of the acoustic device will usually register on the controllers as either increased current or complete interruption of operation. Localizing troubles in the acoustic device will proceed from specific operating symptoms. Improper operation will register as either an excessively low or excessively high armature current. Use the troubleshooting chart (Table 7-5) as a guide in repairing the acoustic device.

7-4 SYSTEM FAULT LOGIC DIAGRAMS.

7-4.1 Fault logic diagrams illustrate fault indications observed during scheduled tests and operations. Isolate functional area of equipment fault. Refer to equipment technical manuals for diagrams.

7-5 FAULT LOGIC DIAGRAMS.

7-5.1 Fault logic diagrams are based on a fault indication observed during troubleshooting. Refer to equipment technical manuals for diagrams.

7-6 CONTROL FUNCTION DIAGRAMS.

7-6.1 Control function diagrams are illustrated in Figures 7-1 through 7-3.

7-7 CONTROL DIAGRAMS.

7-7.1 Control diagram is illustrated in Figure 7-4.

7-8 DATA FUNCTION DIAGRAMS.

7-8.1 Diagram details of system information required to isolate faults or data with flow plans are included in equipment technical manual.

7-6 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

7-9 SIGNAL FLOW DIAGRAMS.

7-9.1 Signal flow diagram is illustrated in Figures 7-5 and 7-6. Cable run sheets are listed in Tables 7-6 through 7-9.

Table 7-5. TB-27 Troubleshooting

SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE

Armature current readings fail to indicate 1. Diaphragm too heavy or too light (70.5±2lb). resonance. 2. Mechanical trouble; e.g., binding in ball and socket, slipping pulley belts, loose eccentric and shaft, etc. 3. Broken diaphragm. 4. Hammer adjusted too far from standard setting. 5. Low voltage. 6. Striker not hitting diaphragm squarely. Armature current very low (1 to 1-1/2 amps). 1. Broken striker spring. 2. Loose pulley belts. 3. Pulley turning on shaft. 4. Sheared motor support bolts. Flood fault during start. 1. Short circuited electrical connector. 2. Box flooded. 3. Leak in cable causing short circuit at connections at end of cable. 4. Flood switch short circuited to box. Hammer starts but armature current is very low. Armature and field leads reversed at the control station, at the receptacle, or at the motor. Controller fuses burn out during starting. 1. Short-circuited electrical connector. 2. Short-circuited armature leads. 3. Box flooded. 4. Leak in cable causing short circuit at connections at end of cable. 5. Starter operates too rapidly. 6. Flood switch short-circuited to box. Device starts but armature current increases 1. Open-circuit in field leads or winding. rapidly until PCU fuses burn out. 2. Burned out field rheostat. Device has a tendency to race, then slow down. Loose connection in motor circuit. Low sound level as measured on Acoustic Test 1. Improper speed setting. Set when gear appears otherwise normal. 2. Striker adjusted too far forward. 3. Striker adjusted too far back. 4. Broken diaphragm.

7-7 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 7-1. ACU Acoustic Mode Prompts

7-8 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 7-2. ACU Magnetic Mode Prompts

7-9 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 7-3. ACU Dual Mode Prompts

7-10 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 7-4. Control Circuits

7-11 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 7-5. Influence Minesweeping Equipment

7-12 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

MAGNETIC MMGTG CABLE DC TAILBOX CONTACTOR PANEL

MCC

DC SHIP'S MINESWEEPING SERVICE CONTROL SWITCHBOARD SWITCHBOARD

PORT STBD SLOW SLOW BOW ISWG GENERATOR SPEED SPEED THRUSTOR (ACU) CONTROL PROPULSION PROPULSION MOTOR MOTOR

Figure 7-6. Ship’s Magnetic Minesweeping Generator Equipment

7-13 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Table 7-6. Cable Run Sheet, Cable W6

CABLE TYPE AND SIZE LSTGU (NOTE 1) ACTIVE WIRES 2 CABLE DESIGNATION W6 UNIT A UNIT B

UNIT NUMBER UNIT 1

UNIT NAME AUTOMATIC CONTROL UNIT SHIP’S POWER 115 VAC, 1 PHASE, 60 SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V) Hz) CABLE CONNECTOR MS3406DJ15D-2S

UNIT A TERM NO. WIRE NO. COLOR UNIT B TERM NO. FUNCTION CODE

J1 PIN A 1 BLK NOT USED (SEE NOTE 2) J1 PIN B 2 WHT 115 VAC J1 PIN C 3 RED 115 VAC RTN J1 PIN D NOT USED

NOTES 1. CABLE SIZE TO BE DETERMINED BY INSTALLING ACTIVITY.

2. THIS CABLE IS NOT TO BE CONNECTED TO GROUND.

7-14 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Table 7-7. Cable Run Sheet, Cable W5

CABLE TYPE AND SIZE LS2SWU-7 ACTIVE WIRES 9 CABLE DESIGNATION R-KT(1) W5 UNIT A UNIT B

UNIT NUMBER UNIT 1

UNIT NAME AUTOMATIC CONTROL UNIT SHIP’S CLOCK SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V) CABLE CONNECTOR MS3406DJ20B-27P

UNIT A TERM NO. WIRE NO. COLOR UNIT B TERM NO. FUNCTION CODE

J3 PIN 1 BLK BCD LINE 1 J3 PIN 1 WHT BCD LINE 2 J3 PIN 1 SHLD SHIELD J3 PIN 2 BLK BINARY DATA LINE Q1 J3 PIN 2 WHT BINARY DATA LINE Q2 J3 PIN 2 SHLD SHIELD J3 PIN 3 BLK BINARY DATA LINE Q3 J3 PIN 3 WHT BINARY DATA LINE Q4 J3 PIN 3 SHLD SHIELD J3 PIN 4 BLK COMMON LINE J3 PIN 4 WHT SPARE J3 PIN 4 SHLD SHIELD J3 PIN 5 BLK SPARE J3 PIN 5 WHT SPARE J3 PIN 5 SHLD SHIELD J3 PIN 6 BLK SPARE J3 PIN 6 WHT SPARE J3 PIN 6 SHLD SHIELD J3 PIN 7 BLK SPARE J3 PIN 7 WHT SPARE J3 PIN 7 SHLD SHIELD J3 PIN BLK NOT USED J3 PIN NOT USED J3 PIN NOT USED

7-15 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Table 7-8. Cable Run Sheet, Cable W1

CABLE TYPE AND SIZE LS3SWU-3 ACTIVE WIRES 6 CABLE DESIGNATION K-MM(1) W1 UNIT A UNIT B

UNIT NUMBER UNIT 1

UNIT NAME AUTOMATIC CONTROL UNIT SHIP’S M/S GENERATOR EQUIPMENT SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V) CABLE CONNECTOR MS3406DJ20B-27P

UNIT A TERM NO. WIRE NO. COLOR UNIT B TERM NO. FUNCTION CODE

J2 PIN L 1 BLACK ANALOG OUTPUT J2 PIN M 1 WHITE ANALOG RETURN J2 PIN N 1 RED MAGNETIC FAULT J2 PIN K 1 SHIELD SHIELD J2 PIN B 2 BLACK FORWARD PULSE J2 PIN C 2 WHITE REVERSE PULSE J2 PIN D 2 RED DIGITAL RETURN J2 PIN E 2 SHIELD SHIELD J2 PIN F 3 BLACK SPARE J2 PIN G 3 WHITE SPARE J2 PIN H 3 RED SPARE J2 PIN I 3 SHIELD SHIELD J2 PIN J SPARE NOT USED J2 PIN A SPARE NOT USED

7-16 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Table 7-9. Cable Run Sheet, Cable W2

CABLE TYPE AND SIZE LS2SWU-12 ACTIVE WIRES 22 CABLE DESIGNATION K-AM(1) W2 UNIT A UNIT B

UNIT NUMBER UNIT 1 UNIT 2

UNIT NAME AUTOMATIC CONTROL UNIT POWER CONVERTER SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V) CV-3846/SLQ-27(V) CABLE CONNECTOR MS3406DJ28D-21S MS3406DJ28D-21S

UNIT A TERM NO. WIRE NO. COLOR UNIT B TERM NO. FUNCTION CODE

J4 PIN V 1 BLK J2 PIN V PCU ON +

J4 PIN W 1 WHT J2 PIN W PCU ON - J4 PIN d 1 SHLD J2 PIN d SHIELD J4 PIN c 2 BLK J2 PIN c ANALOG OUTPUT J4 PIN U 2 WHT J2 PIN U ANALOG RETURN J4 PIN M 2 SHLD J2 PIN M SHIELD J4 PIN N 3 BLK J2 PIN N ARMATURE CURRENT J4 PIN P 3 WHT J2 PIN P RETURN J4 PIN X 3 SHLD J2 PIN X SHIELD J4 PIN e 4 BLK J2 PIN e RPM J4 PIN k 4 WHT J2 PIN k RPM RETURN J4 PIN i 4 SHLD J2 PIN i SHIELD J4 PIN h 5 BLK J2 PIN h PCU READY +

J4 PIN b 5 WHT J2 PIN b PCU READY - J4 PIN T 5 SHLD J2 PIN T SHIELD J4 PIN L 6 BLK J2 PIN L PCU FAULT +

J4 PIN F 6 WHT J2 PIN F PCU FAULT - J4 PIN G 6 SHLD J2 PIN G SHIELD J4 PIN H 7 BLK J2 PIN H TB-26 +

J4 PIN J 7 WHT J2 PIN J TB-26 - J4 PIN R 7 SHLD J2 PIN R SHIELD J4 PIN Z 8 BLK J2 PIN Z TB-27 +

J4 PIN f 8 WHT J2 PIN f TB-27 - J4 PIN m 8 SHLD J2 PIN m SHIELD

7-17 SW570-F0-MMO-A70 Table 7-9. Cable Run Sheet, Cable W2 (Continued)

CABLE TYPE AND SIZE LS2SWU-12 ACTIVE WIRES 22 CABLE DESIGNATION K-AM(1) W2 UNIT A UNIT B

UNIT NUMBER UNIT 1 UNIT 2

UNIT NAME AUTOMATIC CONTROL UNIT POWER CONVERTER SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V) CV-3846/SLQ-27(V) CABLE CONNECTOR MS3406DJ28D-21S MS3406DJ28D-21S

UNIT A TERM NO. WIRE NO. COLOR UNIT B TERM NO. FUNCTION CODE

J4 PIN s 9 BLK J2 PIN s FLOOD +

J4 PIN r 9 WHT J2 PIN r FLOOD -

7-18 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CHAPTER 8 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES

8-1 INTRODUCTION.

8-1.1 Alignments and adjustments needed for proper system operation are provided in the appropriate equipment manuals.

8-1/(8-2 blank)

SW570-F0-MMO-A70

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

9-1 UTILITIES LIST.

9-1.1 Utility and environmental requirements for influence minesweeping equipment is contained in individual equipment manuals. These technical manuals are listed in Table 9-1.

9-2 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAMS.

9-2.1 A diagram of the interconnection between equipment or components is illustrated in Figure 9-1.

9-3 SYSTEM CABLE INTERCONNECTION CHECK.

9-3.1 Cold wire check out procedures to verify installation of all systems cables are contained in Job Sheets for individual cables in Chapter 4 of this manual.

9-4 ACTIVE SYSTEM TESTS.

9-4.1 Technical manuals required to verify proper installation and operation of systems are listed in Table 9-1.

Table 9-1. Documents Utilized for Installation of Minesweeping Equipment

EQUIPMENT DOCUMENT

Power Converter Unit SW565-AB-MMM-040 Automatic Control Unit SW565-AB-MMM-020 DC Contactor Panel; DC Ship’s Service Switchboard; S9324-B5-MMO-010 Minesweeping Control Switchboard Dynamic Braking Unit SW565-AB-MMM-040 Surface MCM Operation and Maintenance SW570-F0-MMO-040 AN/SLQ-37(V)3 and AN/SLQ-38 Systems SW570-F0-MMO-A70

9-1 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

Figure 9-1. Influence Minesweeping Equipment

9-2 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

GLOSSARY

TERMS

Acoustic Device TB-26 or TB-27 Acoustic Field The zone of sonic, subsonic, or ultrasonic vibration set up in the water around a ship by its propellers, machinery, the passage of the hull through the water, and other sources. Acoustic Mine A mine that is equipped with hydrophone and is actuated by sound impulses. Actuation The response of a mine firing mechanism to an influence or a series of influences in such a manner that the mechanism’s requirement for firing or for registering a ship count is met. Alternating Current (ac) Current that reverses direction at a regular rate. Alternating voltage reverses in polarity. The rate of reversals is the frequency. Ampere (A) Basic unit of electric current. Value of one ampere flows when one volt of potential difference is applied across one ohm of resistance. AN/SLQ-37(V)3 Influence Minesweeping System to use on MCM ships. Arm (a) To arm a mine. To make or become ready for firing. (b) To arm a sweep wire. To fit the sweep wire with cutters. Armature Moving portion of a DC motor (known as rotor in AC motor) interacts with field to produce mechanical rotation. Reference FIELD. Athwartship Magnetization A ship component magnetization aligned with the athwartship axis. Automatic Controller A device which automatically controls the acoustic or magnetic output of the sweep gear in accordance with a predetermined program. Bottom Mine A sea mine designed for placement at the bottom of a waterway. Chip Miniature semiconductor containing the elements of the device. Circuit Breaker A protective device that opens when excessive current flows in circuit. Can be reset. Clock A device that provides timing pulses for digital circuits; it is usually a Multivibrator (MV) oscillator. Combination Mine An influence mine that responds to a magnetic field and also to the influence of one or more other ship environments. The other environments usually are either acoustic or pressure. Contact Mine A sea mine which is actuated by physical contact between the ship and an appendage of the mine. Common appendages are antennas or horns. Continuity Reading of zero ohms with an ohmmeter. Countermine To explode or render inoperative a mine by the detonation of a nearby mine or other explosive device. Glossary-1 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

GLOSSARY (Continued)

Counters A device used in an influence mine, including the magnetic influence, that mechanically advances with each response to a ship environment until a preset value is reached where detonation occurs. In effect, ship responses are counted before the set count is reached. Cutter A device attached to sweep wire to sever mine mooring wires or chains. Mechanical cutters sever mine moorings when the cable is wedged into the V-shaped steel blade in the cutter’s jaw. Explosive cutters operate when the pressure of the mooring cable entering the cutter actuates the trigger and fires and explosive charge. The charge may sever the mooring cable or may cause the cutter to sever the mooring cable. Another explosive cutter is used aboard ship to sever the sweep and depressor wires under emergency conditions. D/A Converter A device that converts digital input to analog output. Dan Buoy A temporary buoy used to mark a position, channel, or sea area. Direct Current (dc) Current that flows in only one direction. Dc voltage has a steady polarity that does not reverse. Double Pulsing The operation of magnetic sweep gear on a schedule of alternate forward and reverse pulses. Dynamic Braking Introduction of a shunt resistance across the armature to dynamically slow the motor speed. Eccentric Operating device similar to a CAM but instead of being oval-shaped, the eccentric is circular but mounted off center. Effective Scope Length of sweep wire between the ship and otter. Electrode A component of magnetic sweep gear which provides the connecting link between the insulated cable and the sea water. Electrode Field The magnetic field produced by the current distribution in the water and bottom in electrode field type magnetic sweep gear as opposed to the main field or fields set up by the current in the sweep cable. Electromagnet Magnet whose magnetic field is associated with electric current in a coil. Electromagnetic Field The magnetic field from electric current, generally applicable to electric current in the effective turns of a circuit formed into a loop. Electromagnetic Polarity The direction of field from electric current in a conductor or electric circuit loop. Field (a) Group of line of force. Can be a magnetic or an electric field. (b) Provides the magnetic field with which the armature interacts. The field winding of a motor is stationary.

Glossary-2 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

GLOSSARY (Continued)

Field Weakening By introducing a resistance in series with a shunt wound field of a motor to reduce the voltage and current which weakens the strength of the magnetic field and thereby increase the motor speed. Firing Mechanism (a) The mechanism or device used in mines to cause detonation of the mine. (b) Broadly, the entire subassembly (including search coils, pressure sensors, microphones, relays, timing mechanisms, and ship counters) which detects the presence of a target with predetermined actuation requirements and which, after a preset number of actuations, fires the mine. In a strict sense, the firing mechanism consists of the subassembly which receives signals from the detecting elements of the mine, compares those signals with those required for actuation, and relays the actuating signal to the detonator or ship counter. Fluctuating DC Varying voltage and current but no change in polarity. Flux (f) Magnetic lines of force. Flux Density Amount of flux per unit area. Frequency (f) Number of cycles per second for a waveform with periodic variations. The unit of frequency is hertz (Hz). Gate Logic circuit with two or more inputs but one HIGH or LOW output for specific combination of input pulses. Generator A device that produces voltage output. Ground Common return to earth for ac power lines. Chassis ground in electronic equipment is the common return to one side of the internal power supply. Hydrophone In acoustic mines and underwater sound-detecting equipment, the detecting element which converts the sound vibratory pressure into an electrical signal. Influence Mine A mine that is activated by certain environmental changes. These changes are influences that cause a mine sensor to trigger a mine firing mechanism. The most common mine sensors used in influence mines are magnetic, acoustic, and pressure. Influence Signature The pattern of increasing and decreasing magnetic, acoustic, or pressure variations produced at a given point by a vessel’s passage or by influence sweep gear. Influence Sweeping The mine clearance procedure which provides the appropriate influence field to cause the detonation of influence mines through the actuation of their firing mechanisms. Insulator A device that does not allow current to flow when voltage is applied, because of its high resistance.

Glossary-3 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

GLOSSARY (Continued)

Inverter Stage that changes signal input to opposite polarity 180 degrees out of phase. In digital circuits, an inverter changes logic 1 or 0 to the opposite state. Load Takes current from the voltage source, resulting in load current. Look The occurrence of a random acoustic, magnetic, or pressure influence which causes the corresponding component - the mine’s firing mechanism - to enter into a receptive mode for subsequent influences(s). The subsequent influence(s), look(s), may or may not be in the required sequence to cause an actuation. Magnetic Components The coordinate vectors of a total magnetic field or total magnetization. For earth’s field, only the horizontal and vertical magnetic components are used. For ship magnetization, the vertical, longitudinal, and athwartship magnetic components are used. Magnetic Flux The product of the magnetic induction and the area of a surface (or cross section) when the magnetic induction is uniformly distributed and normal to the plane of the surface. The concept that the magnetic field is flowing along the lines of force suggests that these lines are therefore flux lines, and they are called magnetic flux. Magnetic Mine An explosive type mine which incorporates a magnetically sensitive sensor that actuates a firing mechanism to detonate the mine. Magnetism Effects of attraction and repulsion by iron and similar materials without the need for an external force. Electromagnetism includes the effects of a magnetic field associated with an electric current. Magnetometer An instrument used in mines to measure a magnetic field. It is distinguished from a fluxmeter by its ability to measure static magnetic fields. Mechanical Sweeping The mine clearance procedure by which mines are cut or dragged from their moorings. In the process, the mines may be detonated or damaged through physical contact between the sweep gear and the mine or its attachments. Mine (Naval or Sea) The conventional naval or sea mine is defined as an explosive device designed to be planted in the water and actuated when a target enters its damage area. Mine Watching The procedure of detecting, locating, and identifying mines during the act of laying. Minehunting The mine countermeasures procedure which locates an individual mine and concentrates countermeasures on it, as opposed to other methods where techniques are used to cover the area to be cleared. Minehunting includes mine locating and mine watching.

Glossary-4 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

GLOSSARY (Continued)

Mine Locating The procedure which detects, accurately locates, and identifies mines after they have been laid. It includes all techniques which reveal the presence of mines without disturbing them. Mine Disposal The procedures under which mines are cleared individually by personnel approaching close to them. Methods used include rendering safe, recovery, removal, or destruction. Mine Countermeasures Includes all methods of removing or reducing the danger from mines. Mine Clearance A general term embracing all procedures intended to clear an area of mines, including mechanical and influence sweeping, mine disposal, and explosive clearance. Mineable Waters Any waters whose oceanographic and hydrographic characteristics lend themselves to the effective use of mines. Generally, bottom mines can be used up to a maximum of 30 fathoms, and moored mines up to 100 fathoms. Antisubmarine mines may be laid in water as deep as 300 fathoms. Minesweeping The mine clearance procedure which counters mines by means of mechanical or influence sweeping. Modulated Operation The mode of operation of the TB-27 or TB-26 in which the acoustic output is automatically varied between some minimum and maximum. Moored Mine A mine with the explosive charge and firing mechanism housed in a positive-buoyancy case (i.e., one that tends to float), a cable or chain attached to a negative-buoyancy anchor on the sea bottom, and designed to hold the case at a predetermined depth below the water surface. Motor A device that produces mechanical motion from electrical energy. Nonmagnetic (NM) Used in connection with any gear or material carried on board a minesweeper which is constructed of nonmagnetic substances to reduce to a minimum the magnetic field of the ship. Ohm (W) Unit of resistance. Value of one ohm allows current of one ampere with potential difference of one volt. Open Circuit One that has infinitely high resistance, resulting in zero current. Open Loop A term applicable to an arrangement of a magnetic minesweeping tail to indicate that the long and short legs of a diverted (deflected to one side of the ship) tail are unconnected. When a special cable is used to connect the two legs, the term closed loop is applied. Oropesa Sweep Gear (O-Type) Mechanical sweep gear designed to sever moored mine cables. It consists of a wire diverted by an otter and the necessary depressors, floats, and cutters. Permeability Ability to concentrate magnetic lines of force.

Glossary-5 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

GLOSSARY (Continued)

Pressure Mine An explosive mine which senses the change in hydrostatic pressure of sea water due to the passage of a ship in the proximity of the mine. When the sensor is triggered by the change in pressure, the firing mechanism is actuated and causes a detonation. Program Logical sequence of instruction located in permanent memory of a computer. Pulse A sharp rise and decay of voltage or current of a specific peak value for a brief period of time. Pulsed Operation That mode of operation of the TB-27 in which the acoustic output of the device varies automatically between zero and maximum. Zero acoustic output occurs at a motor speed of approximately 100 rpm. Pulsing A term used in magnetic minesweeping to refer to the current flow in the minesweeping tails. The common terms are forward pulse, reverse pulse, and pulse patterns such as square wave and sine wave current cycles. Minesweepers operating in groups of two or more must synchronize their pulsing. Measurements of magnetic fields from magnetic minesweeping generators are made by pulsing current from the generators. Rectifier A device that allows current in only one direction. Reverse Voltage Polarity that prevents forward current through a PN junction. Sawtooth Wave One in which amplitude values have a slow linear rise or fall and a sharp change back to the starting value. Same as a linear ramp. Sensing Device A device used in an influence mine which responds to changes in particular environments associated with ships. Sensor The sensing device of an influence mine. Also, the detector or probe used with a magnetic measurement system to respond to magnetic fields at the point of measurement. Ship Counter A device used in influence mines to require a preset number of actuations to detonate the mine. Short-Circuit Has zero resistance, resulting in excessive current. Signature The status of magnetic/electric effects existing at distances critical to ship or submarine safety. Silicon (Si) Semiconductor chemical element used for transistors, diodes, and integrated circuits. Sine Trigonometric function of an angle, equal to the ratio of the opposite side to the hypotenuse in a right triangle. Sine Wave One in which amplitudes vary in proportion to the sine function of an angle.

Glossary-6 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

GLOSSARY (Continued)

Square Wave An almost instantaneous rise and decay of voltage or current in a periodic pattern with time and with a constant peak value. A V or Ion at constant value and off for equal times. Sterilizer A device designed to render the mine inoperative after a preset time interval. Sweep Gear A term used aboard minesweepers to refer to the equipment and cable streamed from the ship in minesweeping operations. The term may apply either to the gear for streaming a sweep wire or to the gear for streaming a magnetic minesweeping tail. Sweep Tail Electrode The uninsulated section of electrical cable attached at outboard ends of the long and short leg of the magnetic minesweeping tail. These sections are about 46 meters (150 feet) long and serve as electrical contacts to the sea water for carrying current between the two legs. They are nonbuoyant and must be supported by special floats. Switch Device used to open or close connections of a voltage source to a load circuit. Three-Phase Power Ac voltage generated with three components differing in phase by 120 degrees. Triaxial Magnetometer A magnetometer system used in mines that measure magnetic fields from a detector with three sensing elements whose x, y, and z components axes are mutually perpendicular to each other. Each axis may be used for axial measurements or all three may be used for measurement of a total field. Volt (V) Practical unit of potential difference. One volt produces on ampere of current in a resistance of one ohm. Wavelength (l) Distance in space between two points with the same magnitude and direction in a propagated wave.

Glossary-7 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

GLOSSARY (Continued)

ABBREVIATIONS

A Amperes ac Alternating current ACU Automatic Control Unit SG-1224A/SLQ-37(V) CCA Circuit Card Assembly CCW Counterclockwise CPU Central Processor Unit cps Cycles per second. Formerly used as unit of frequency. D/A Digital-to-Analog dB Decibel. The logarithm of the ratio of two power levels. DBU Dynamic Braking Unit MX-10746 dc Direct current deg Degree/Degrees DVM Digital Voltmeter EMF Electromotive Force. Voltage to produce current in a circuit. EMI Electromagnetic Interference EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. Memory device in computer that, although considered as permanent storage of information within the systems, can be reprogrammed. GND Ground Hz Hertz IC Integrated Circuit IMA Intermediate Maintenance Activity LCD Liquid-crystal display LED Light-emitting diode MRC Maintenance Requirement Card PCU Power Converter Unit CV-3846/SLQ-37(V) PMS Planned Maintenance System RPM Revolution Per Minute SCR Silicon controlled rectifier. Has anode, cathode, and gate electrodes. SIMA Shore Intermediate Maintenance Activity

Glossary-8 SW570-F0-MMO-A70

GLOSSARY (Continued)

TB Towed Bodies Vac Volts Alternating Current Vdc Volts Direct Current

Glossary-9/(Glossary-10 blank)

SW570-F0-MMO-A70